Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAboutBig Red Barn - SpecificationsDIVISION 17 NOTICE For this project, selected MasterFormat 2004 specifications may be displayed in Division 17000. Applicable Divisions are outlined in the Table of Contents Division 17000-Other: May Contain one or more of the following MasterFormat 2004 Divisions: Division 21 Fire Suppression Division 22 Plumbing Division 23 Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Division 25 Integrated Automation Division 26 Electrical Division 27 Communications Division 28 Electronic Safety and Security Division 31 Earthwork Division 32 Exterior Improvements Division 33 Utilities Division 34 Transportation Division 35 Waterway and Marine Construction Division 40 Process Integration Division 41 Material Processing and Handling Equipment Division 42 Process Heating, Cooling, and Drying Equipment Division 43 Process Gas & Liquid Handling, Purification, & Storage Equipment Division 44 Pollution Control Equipment Division 45 Industry-Specific Manufacturing Equipment Division 48 Electrical Power Generation PLEASE CONTACT DODGE TECHSUPPORT@MCGRAW- HILL. COM IF YOU HAVE ANY QUESTIONS ABOUT CONTENT OR TECHNICAL MATTERS. THANK YOU FOR USING MCGRA W-HILL CONSTRUCTION Project Manual & Specifications January 17, 2014 Owner Cornell University Ithaca, NY 14850 Engineer CVM Engineers 1002 West 9th Avenue King of Prussia, PA 19406 BIG RED BARN STRUCTURAL IMPROVEMENTS TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 1 Instructions to Bidders Bid Form General Conditions and Exhibits Exhibit A Change Order Exhibit A-I Change Order Documentation Instructions Construction Contract Change Order Request Construction Contract Change Order Summary Exhibit B Schedule of Values for Contractor Payments Exhibit C Final Release Exhibit D Application and Certificate for Payment Exhibit E Guarantee Exhibit F -Form I Contractor's Affirmative Action Plan Use of MBE/WBE Vendors Exhibit F -Form II Contractor's Affirmative Action Plan Summary of Bid Activity with MBE and WBE Subcontractors and Vendors Exhibit F -Forn III Affirmative Action Workforce Report Exhibit F -Form IV Minority -Women Utilization Report Exhibit G Labor Rate Breakdown Exhibit H Stored Materials Invoicing Documentation Exhibit I Contractor Performance Evaluation DIVISION 1 -GENERAL REOUIREMENTS Section 01 11 00 Summary of the Work Section 01 22 00 Unit Pricing Section 01 23 00 Alternates Section 01 25 00 Substitutions and Product Options Section 01 31 19 Project Meetings Section 01 32 16 Construction Schedules Section 01 32 33 Photographic Documentation Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures Section 01 35 29 General Health & Safety Requirements Section 01 35 43 General Environmental Requirements Section 01 35 44 Spill Control Section 01 41 00 Regulatory Requirements Section 01 45 00 Quality Control Section 01 45 29 Testing Laboratory Services Section 01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls Section 01 51 00 Temporary Utilities Section 01 57 13 Soil Erosion and Sediment Control Section 01 66 00 Storage and Protection Section 01 73 29 Cutting, Patching and Repairing Section 01 77 00 Project Close Out Section 01 78 22 Inventories Section 01 78 23 Operating and Maintenance Data Section 01 78 36 Warranties and Bonds Section 01 78 39 Record Documents January 17, 2014 BIG RED BARN STRUCTURAL IMPROVEMENTS TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 2 DIVISION 2 -EXISTING CONDITIONS Section 02 41 19 Selective Demolition DIVISION 3 -CONCRETE Section 03 30 00 Cast-in-Place Concrete DIVISION 4 -MASONRY Section 04 21 13 Maintenance of Exterior Masonry DIVISION 5 -METALS Section 05 12 00 Structural Steel Framing DIVISION 6 -WOOD AND PLASTIC Section 06 10 00 Rough Carpentry Section 06 10 15 Roof Carpentry Section 06 16 00 Sheathing Section 06 46 00 Wood Trim DIVISION 7 -THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION Section 07 01 50 Preparation for Reroofing Section 07 21 00 Thermal Insulation Section 07 31 13 Asphalt Shingle Roof Section 07 60 00 Flashing and Sheet Metal DIVISION 8 -DOORS AND WINDOWS Section 08 03 52 Historic Treatment of Wood Windows DIVISION 9 -FINISHES Section 09 22 16 Non-Structural Metal Framing Section 09 90 00 Paintings and Coatings DIVISION 31 -EARTHWORK Section 31 20 20 Earth Moving Section 31 62 25 Micropiles January 17, 2014 BIG RED BARN STRUCTURAL IMPROVEMENTS TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 3 DRAWING LIST CS Cover Sheet Si Plans SIA Roof Plans and Keynote Legend S2 Elevations S3 Interior Elevations and Sections S4 General Notes S5 Sections and Details S6 Sections S7 Sections S8 Construction Sequencing Plans and Elevations S8A Construction Sequencing Details S8B Construction Sequencing Details S9 Details SlO Details Sil Wall Typical Details and Sections S12 Roof Typical Details and Sections S13 Sections and Details END OF DOCUMENT January 17, 2014 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Project: Big Red Barn Structural Improvements Owner: Cornell University Ithaca, New York 14853 Architect: CVM Engineers 1002 West 9"' Avenue King of Prussia, Pennsylvania 19406 1. PROPOSAL FORMS a. Proposals shall be made only on the fonus provided and all blank and underlined spaces in the forms shall be fully filled in, in ink or typed; amount shall be fully stated both in writing and in figures. Proposals shall be signed by Principals or Officers duly authorized to execute such documents on behalf of their respective firms or organizations, and the Certificate included in the Bid Form shall be completed accordingly. Bidder's legal name must be fully stated. Completed fonn shall be without interlineation, alterations, or erasures unless initialed and dated by the signer. 2. RECAPITULATION OR PROPOSAL a. Proposals shall not contain any recapitulation of the work to be done. No oral, telegraphic or telephonic proposals or modifications will be considered. 3. METHOD OF SUBMISSION a. Proposals shall be prepared and enclosed in a sealed envelope. Envelope shall be addressed to: Nancy A. Phelps, Director Facilities Contracts 121 Humphreys Service Building Cornell University Ithaca, New York 14853 Proposal for: Submitted by: (Bidder) b. Proposals shall be delivered to the Owner at the address listed above not later than 3:00 PM on February 13, 2014. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS INS-I 4. BID OPENING a. Proposals will be opened publicly by the Owner in Room 133, Humphreys Service Building, Cornell University Campus, Ithaca, New York, at the hour and date listed in 3b. The Owner reserves the right to postpone the date and time of opening of proposals at any time prior to the date and time announced in this Instruction to Bidders or amendments thereto. 5. BIDDING DOCUMENTS a. The Bidding Documents will consist of the following: (1) Instructions to Bidders. (2) Bid Form. (3) General Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 -"General Requirements". (4) Drawings and Specifications. (5) Addenda and/or bulletins issued prior to date of opening of Proposals. 6. DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS FURNISHED a. Contract Documents may be obtained from the Facilities Contracts website (http://finance.fs.comell.edu/contracts/pob/projects.cfm). For assistance call 607-255-5343. b. Additional sets will be available at $50.00 per set without refund. All subcontractors and suppliers requiring may order these at $50.00 per set without refund. No partial sets will be issued. The Contract Documents remain the property of the Owner. c. The successful bidder will be allowed ten (10) sets of drawings and specifications. 7. START OF WORK a. Work shall be started within ten (10) calendar days from the date of issuance of written authorization to proceed. Work onsite shall comnence May 15, 2014 and shall be completed no later than August 15, 2014. 8. BONDS a. Performance and Payment Bonds. The successful Bidder shall furnish the Owner with "Performance" and "Labor and Material Payment Bonds", each in the amount of 100% of the Contract Price. The cost of such bonds shall be included in the Bidders Proposal. Each of these Bonds are to be in a form with such sureties as the Owner may approve. b. Bid Bond. Each Bidder will be required to furnish a Bid Bond in the amount of 10% of the Bid Amount. Such Bid Bond shall guarantee that the Bidder will execute the Contract if it is awarded to him in conformity with his Proposal. Such Proposal Guarantee Bond shall include a statement that the Insurer shall, at the option of the Bidder, be willing to provide to the Bidder the Contract Bonds as described in 8a above. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS INS-2 9. AWARD OF CONTRACT a. It is the intent of the Owner to enter into a Contract with one General Contractor for the entire project. All labor and services and materials and supplies, etc. are to be provided in accordance with the Contract. b. The competence and responsibility of the Bidders' proposed principal subcontractors will be considered in making the Award. c. The Owner reserves the right to reject any or all Proposals, and to waive any informalities in Bidding. d. All Proposals shall remain in force and effect for a period of not less than sixty (60) calendar days following the bid opening date. e. The Owner reserves the right to accept any of the Alternate Proposals listed within sixty (60) calendar days following the award of a construction contract. 10. EXAMINATION OF SITE AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS a. Each Bidder shall visit the Site of the proposed work, fully acquaint and familiarize himself with the conditions as they exist and the character of the operations to be carried on under the proposed Contract, and make such investigation as he may see fit so that he shall fully understand the facilities, physical conditions and restrictions attending the work under the Contract. b. Each Bidder shall also thoroughly examine and become familiar with the Drawings, Specifications and associated Bid Documents. c. By submitting a Proposal, the Bidder convenants and affirms that he has carefully examined the Drawings, Specifications, associated Bid Documents, the Addenda and Bulletins, if any, and the Site, that he relies on no representation by the Owner, and that from his own investigation he has satisfied himself as to the nature and location of the work, the general and local conditions, and all matters which may in any way affect the work or its performance, and that as a result of such examination and investigation, he fully understands the conditions of bidding and that he will not make any claim for, and waives any right to damage because of misinterpretation or misunderstanding of the Bid Documents and the conditions of bidding. 11. DISCREPANCIES a. Should a Bidder find discrepancies in or omissions from the Drawings, Specifications and associated Bid Documents, or should he be in doubt as to their meaning, he shall at once notify the Architect, who will send written instructions to all bidders. Neither the Owner nor the Architect will be responsible for oral instructions. Every request for such interpretation should be in writing, addressed to the Architect. Inquiries received seven (7) or more days prior to date fixed for opening of Bids will be given consideration. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS INS-3 12. PRE-BID CONFERENCE a. A pre-bid conference has been scheduled for 1:00 PM, January 30, 2014, in Room 133 of the Humphreys Service Building. The purpose of the conference will be to clarify the intent of the Contract Documents if necessary. Results will be published in an Addendum. 13. TRADE SUBCONTRACTORS, MATERIAL SUPPLIERS a. Each portion of the work shall be performed by an organization equipped and experienced to do work in that particular field, and no portion of the work shall be reserved by the Bidder to himself unless he is so equipped and experienced. Subcontracts shall be awarded only to parties satisfactory to the Owner and the Architect. Each subcontractor and materials supplier shall be approved individually. b. In the spaces provided in the Bid Form, the Bidder shall list all portions of the work he proposes to perform directly with his own forces. c. A list of names from which the Bidder proposes to select subcontractors, materials suppliers, and/or manufacturers for the principal trades or subdivisions of the work is required as part of the Proposal. d. In the Bid Forn, there has been listed the principal trades or subdivisions of the work for which such a listing is required, together with the provisions which govern the listing, selection and approval of principal subcontractors. 14. ALTERNATE PROPOSALS a. Certain Alternate Proposals may be requested. They will be listed in the Bid Form and all Bidders are required to bid on all Alternates without exception, in the spaces provided. b. Alternate Proposals shall include all overhead, profit and other expenses in connection therewith. 15. UNIT PRICES a. Certain Unit Prices may be requested. They will be listed in the Bid Form and all Bidders are required to bid on all Unit Prices without exception, in the spaces provided. b. Unit Prices shall include all overhead, profit and other expenses in connection therewith. 16. SCHEDULE OF VALUES a. A partial "Schedule of Values" for certain trades and/or subdivisions of the work is required as part of the Bidder's Proposal in the Bid Form. b. The successful Bidder shall submit a complete "Schedule of Values" showing the amounts allocated to the various trades, suppliers, subcontractors, installers and General Contractor's work, aggregating the total sum of the Contract. If requested by the Owner or Architect, the complete "Schedule of Values" shall be submitted prior to award of Contract. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS INS-4 17. ADDENDA AND BULLETINS a. Addenda and/or bulletins issued during the bidding period shall be acknowledged in the space provided in the Bid Form. 18. SUBSTITUTIONS a. Proposals shall conform to the requirements of the Bid Documents. b. The Bidder may offer substitutions for any item of material or equipment, element of work, or method of construction set forth in the Bid Documents, with the exception of Form of Contract, General Conditions and General Requirements -Division 1, by listing the proposed substitutions and the amounts to be deducted from the Base Bid corresponding to each such proposed substitution in the spaces provided in the Bid Form. However, the Bidder is cautioned to make his base proposal on the materials and items specified by name or other particular reference. 19. SUB-SURFACE CONDITIONS a. Boring information, water levels, indications of sub-surface conditions and similar infonnation given on the Drawings or in the Specifications are furnished only for the convenience of the Bidders. The Owner, Architect and Consulting Engineer make no representation regarding the character and extent of the soil data or other sub-surface conditions to be encountered during the work and no guarantee as to the accuracy or validity of interpretation of such data or conditions is made or intended. b. Each Bidder shall, by careful examination, inforn himself as to the nature and location of the work, the confonnation of the ground, subsoil and ground water conditions, the character, quality and quantity of the materials to be encountered, the character of equipment and facilities needed preliminary to and during the prosecution of the work, the general and local conditions and all other matters which can in any way affect the work under this Contract. The Bidder may, at his option, conduct tests at his expense, including borings, by prior notification to the Owner. Each Bidder shall make his own deductions of sub-surface conditions which may affect methods or cost of construction of the work hereunder and he agrees that, if awarded the construction contract, he will make no claim for damages or other compensation, except such as are provided for in the Contract Documents, should he encounter conditions during the progress of the work different from those as calculated and/or anticipated by him. 20. SALES AND USE TAX EXEMPTION a. The Owner, Cornell University, a non-profit educational institution, is exempt from payment of certain Sales and Use Taxes. 21. FEDERAL EXCISE TAX a. The Owner, Cornell University, a non-profit educational institution, is exempt from payment of certain Federal Excise Taxes. 22. TAX EXEMPT STATUS a. Bidders shall inform all prospective subcontractors and suppliers from whom they expect to obtain proposals or quotations of the tax exempt status of the Owner as set forth above and request that they reflect anticipated tax credits in their proposals or quotations. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS INS-5 23. EXEMPTION CERTIFICATES a. At the Contractor's request, following the award of a Contract, Contractor exempt purchase certificates will be furnished by the Owner to the Contractor with respect to such tax exempt articles or transactions as may be applicable under the Contract. 24. REQUIRED SUBMISSIONS a. Provide with Bid Proposal: (1) Acknowledgement of Addenda and/or Bulletins issued prior to bid opening (2) Certificate as to Corporate Bidder (3) List of Proposed Subcontractors (4) Schedule of Values (5) Alternate Proposals and Unit Prices b. Within fourteen days after bid opening: (1) Use of Minority and Female Vendor Fonns (2) Summary of Bid Activity with Minority and Female Subcontractors/Vendors (3) Six-Month Workforce Projection c. Execution of Contract: (1) Insurance Certificate (2) Perfonnance Bond (3) Labor and Material Payment Bond (4) Schedule of Work (bar chart) (5) Federal Tax Identification Number END OF SECTION INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS INS-6 BIG RED BARN STRUCTURAL IMPROVEMENTS Cornell University, Ithaca, New York BID FORM Submitted by: Date To: Nancy A. Phelps, Director Facilities Contracts 121 Humphreys Service Building Cornell University Ithaca, New York 14853 Gentlemen: The undersigned, (Name of Bidder) a (Type of Finn, State of Incorporation, if applicable) of (Address) having carefully examined the Instructions to Bidders, the "Conditions of the Contract" (General, Division 1 -"General Requirements"), and the Drawings, Specifications and associated Bid Documents dated January 17, 2014 prepared by CVM Engineers, 1002 West 9th Avenue, King of Prussia, Pennsylvania, 19406 as well as the premises and conditions affecting the work, proposes to furnish all material, equipment, labor, plant, machinery, tools, supplies, services, applicable taxes and specified insurance necessary to perform the entire work, as set forth in, and in accordance with the said documents for the following considerations: 1. BASE BID a. All work complete, for the sum of for MATERIALS, SUPPLIES, LABOR, and SERVICES AND ALL OTHER COSTS. BID FORM BF-I 2. ALTERNATE PROPOSAL a. The undersigned, if awarded the Contract, proposes to perform work in addition to or in place of the scope of the work shown and specified herein as associated with the Base Bid in accordance with the following Alternate Proposals, which amounts are to be added or deducted to the amount of the Base Bid as indicated for the Alternates specified in Division I of the Specifications. b. If the Bidder desires to indicate that the acceptance of any Alternate or Alternates will result neither in an addition to nor a deduction fi-om the value of the work, he shall enter the phrase "No Change" in response to such Alternate or Alternates. c. It is understood that the Owner reserves the right to accept or reject any or all of the following Alternate Proposals within sixty (60) calendar days following the award of a construction contract. Alternate No. Description ADD ONE Snow Retention System $ TWO Additional Window Restoration BID FORM BF-2 3. START OF WORK AND TIME FOR COMPLETION a. Work shall be started within ten (10) calendar days from the date of issuance of written authorization to proceed. Work onsite shall commence May 15, 2014 and shall be completed no later than August 15, 2014. 4. LIST OF PROPOSED PRINCIPAL SUBCONTRACTORS a. The undersigned agrees, if awarded the Contract, to employ subcontractors from the following list for the Sections or Subdivisions of work stated below subject to the following provisions: (1) Prior to the award of the Contract, the Owner and Architect reserve the right to review the list of "Proposed Principal Subcontractors", and to delete from it the name or names of any to whom they may have a reasonable objection. The Contractor may make the final selection of principal subcontractors at his option from the resulting list after the award of the Contract. b. Bidder shall list the names of at least one subcontractor for each Section or Subdivision of the work listed below and shall limit the listing for each such Section or Subdivision to THREE (3) names. c. If Bidder does not propose to employ a Subcontractor for any Section or Subdivision of the work listed below, he shall enter the name of his finn for each such Section or Subdivision. ELECTRICAL MECHANICAL FIRE PROTECTION MICROPILE WORK BID FORM BF-3 5. PRINCIPAL SUBDIVISIONS OR ELEMENTS OF THE WORK TO BE PERFORMED BY GENERAL CONTRACTOR'S FORCES a. If awarded a Contract, we will perform the following portions of the Work with forces directly employed by the undersigned: 6. TIME PROGRESS SCHEDULE a. The undersigned agrees, if awarded the Contract, to furnish a "Time Progress Schedule" showing the starting and completion dates for all principal trades and subdivisions of the Work, together with such additional information related thereto as may reasonably be required. 7. BONDS a. Performance and Payment Bonds. The undersigned agrees, if awarded the Contract to execute and deliver to the Owner "Performance" and "Labor and Material Payment Bonds" in such form as acceptable to the Owner and in an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Sum. Such bonds will be furnished by (Name of Surety) b. Bond Premium Rate % c. Bid Bond. A Bid Bond in the amount of $ (10% of Bid Amount) is attached to this Bid. 8. SCHEDULE OF VALUES a. The undersigned agrees, prior to the award of a construction contract and upon the request of the Architect or Owner, to submit a complete, itemized and detailed "Schedule of Values" including Alternates elected, if any, showing the amount allocated to the various trades and subdivisions of the work, aggregating the total Contract Sum. b. To facilitate the evaluation of Bids, the undersigned has included in each part of his Bid the following values for the trades and/or subdivisions of the work as listed below. Values for work included under Alternate Proposals are excluded. Values relative to General Contractor's costs for General Conditions are excluded. BID FORM BF-4 Values Included Spec in Base Bid Section Trades and/or Subdivision Labor Material Division 1 General Requirements Division 2 Existing Conditions Division 3 Concrete Division 4 Masonry Division 5 Metals Division 6 Wood and Plastic Division 7 Thermal and Moisture Protection Division 8 Doors and Windows Division 9 Finishes Division 31 Earthwork Total Total Combined Bid $ BID FORM BF-5 9. SUBSTITUTIONS a. The Base Bid is predicated on compliance with the Drawings and Specifications without substitutions. b. The Bidder may offer substitutions for any item noted in the Specifications, with the exception of Form of Contract, General Conditions and General Requirements -Division 1, by listing in the space below the proposed substitution, together with the amount to be deducted from the Base Bid if the substitution is accepted. c. The Owner reserves the right to accept or reject any proposed substitution. d. The sum stated includes any modifications of work or additional work that may be required by reason of acceptance of substitution. Substitute materials must be approved and accepted by the Owner in writing before same may be used in lieu of those named in the Specifications. Item and Specification Description of Reference Deduction from Base Bid Substitution Section & Page No. Labor Material BID FORM BF-6 10. ACCEPTANCE a. The undersigned agrees that this Proposal shall remain in force and effect for a period of not less than sixty (60) calendar days following the bid due date. b. If written notice of acceptance of this Proposal is mailed, telegraphed or delivered to the undersigned within sixty (60) calendar days after the date of opening of Bids, or any time thereafter before this Proposal is withdrawn, the undersigned will within ten (10) calendar days after the date of such mailing, telegraphing or delivery of such notice, execute an Agreement between Contractor and Owner, amended and/or supplemented, if required, in accordance with the Proposal as accepted. c. The undersigned further agrees, if requested by the Owner, to furnish Perfonnance and Payment Bonds pursuant to Article 7 herein within ten (10) calendar days of issuance of such notice. d. It is understood and agreed that the Owner reserves the right to accept any of the Alternate Proposals listed within sixty (60) calendar days following the award of a construction contract. e. It is understood and agreed that the Owner reserves the right to reject any or all proposals, to waive any informalities in bidding, and to hold all proposals for the above noted period of time. BID FORM BF-7 11. UNIT PRICE SCHEDULE a. The undersigned agrees, if awarded the Contract, to perform work "In addition to" or "deducted from" the scope of the Contract Documents as directed by the Owner and/or Architect, computed in accordance with the unit prices hereinafter listed, which prices include all overhead, profit and other expense items in connection therewith, subject to the terms of the Contract Documents. b. All unit prices include the installation or omission, complete f6r each item, together with all work in connection therewith and shall include all shoring, bracing, dewatering and other incidental work. c. Unit prices shall be the total compensation for the item and includes all overhead, profit and any other charges of the Contractor and/or subcontractor in connection therewith. d. Adjustments will be computed on net variation of total quantities of like items. e. The Owner reserves the right to accept or reject any or all of the unit prices listed below prior to the execution of the Contract. UNIT PRICES Item Add Deduct Labor Materials Labor Materials Unit Price 1 Remove existing uncovered rotted structural (dimensional) wood framing and replace in kind with new dimensional framing materials. PER BOARD FOOT Unit Price 2 Micropile installation to account for a variance between the installed micropile length and the bid length specified on the contract drawings. PER FOOT BID FORM BF-8 12. ADDENDUM RECEIPT a. Receipt of the following addenda to the Terms and Conditions, Drawings or Specifications is acknowledged: Addendum No. Dated: Addendum No. Dated: Addendum No. Dated: Addendum No. Dated: Addendum No. Dated: (Bidder) By: Title: Business Address: Dated: BID FORM BF-9 CERTIFICATE OF NON-COLLUSION By submission of this bid, each bidder and each person signing on behalf of any bidder certifies, and in the case of a joint bid each party thereto certifies as to its own organization, under penalty of perjury, that to the best of his knowledge and belief: a. The prices in this bid have been arrived at independently without collusion, consultation, communication, or agreement, for the purpose of restricting competition, as to any matter relating to such prices with any other bidder or with any competitor. b. Unless required by law, the prices which have been quoted in this bid have not been knowingly disclosed by the bidder and will not knowingly be disclosed by the bidder prior to opening, directly or indirectly, to any other bidder or with any competitor. c. No attempt has been made or will be made by the bidder to induce any other persons, partnership, or corporation to submit or not submit a bid for the purpose of restricting competition. (Bidder) By: Title: Dated: BID FORM BF-10 CERTIFICATE AS TO CORPORATE BIDDER I, , certify that I am the of the Corporation named as Bidder within this Bid Form for General Contractors; that , who signed said Bid Form on behalf of the bidder was then of said Corporation; that I know his signature; that his signature thereto is genuine and that said Bid Form and attachments thereto were duly signed, sealed and executed for and in behalf of said Corporation by authority of its governing body. (Secretary-Clerk) (CORPORATE SEAL) Dated: BID FORM BF-1 1 GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR BIG RED BARN STRUCTURAL IMPROVEMENTS CORNELL UNIVERSITY ITHACA, NEW YORK Rev 08-2012 GENERAL CONDITIONS TABLE OF CONTENTS Page ARTICLE 1 INTERPRETATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Section 1.01 Owner 1 Section 1.02 Meaning and Intent of Specifications, Plans and Drawings 1 Section 1.03 Order of Precedence 1 ARTICLE 2 CONTRACTOR Section 2.01 Contractor's Obligations 2 Section 2.02 Contractor's Title to Materials 2 Section 2.03 "Or Equal" Clause 2 Section 2.04 Quality, Quantity and Labeling 3 Section 2.05 Superintendence by Contractor 3 Section 2.06 Subsurface or Site Conditions 4 Section 2.07 Representations of Contractor 4 Section 2.08 Verifying Dimensions and Site Conditions 4 Section 2.09 Copies of Contract Documents for Contractors 5 Section 2.10 Meetings 5 Section 2.11 Related Work 5 Section 2.12 Surveys and Layout 5 Section 2.13 Errors, Omissions or Discrepancies 5 Section 2.14 Project Labor Rates 6 Section 2.15 Daily Reports 6 ARTICLE 3 INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE Section 3.01 Access to the Work 6 Section 3.02 Notice for Testing 6 Section 3.03 Inspection of Work 7 Section 3.04 Inspection and Testing 7 Section 3.05 Defective or Damaged Work 7 Section 3.06 Acceptance 7 ARTICLE 4 CHANGES IN WORK Section 4.01 Changes 8 Section 4.02 Form of Change Orders 10 ARTICLE 5 TIME OF COMPLETION Section 5.01 Time of Completion 10 1 Rev 08-2012 TABLE OF CONTENTS Page ARTICLE 6 TERMINATION Section 6.01 Termination for Cause 11 Section 6.02 Termination for Convenience of Owner 11 Section 6.03 Owner's Right to do Work 12 ARTICLE 7 DISPUTES Section 7.01 Disputes Procedure 12 ARTICLE 8 SUBCONTRACTS Section 8.01 Subcontracting 13 ARTICLE 9 COORDINATION AND COOPERATION Section 9.01 Cooperation with Other Contractors 13 ARTICLE 10 PROTECTION OF RIGHTS, PERSONS AND PROPERTY Section 10.01 Accidents and Accident Prevention 15 Section 10.02 Adjoining Property 16 Section 10.03 Emergencies 16 Section 10.04 Bonds 16 Section 10.05 Risks Assumed by the Contractor 16 Section 10.06 Contractor's Compensation and Liability Insurance 17 Section 10.07 Liability Insurance of the Owner 18 Section 10.08 Owner's and Contractor's Responsibilities for Fire and Extended Coverage Insurance Hazards 18 Section 10.09 Effect of Procurement of Insurance 19 Section 10.10 No Third Party Rights 19 ARTICLE 11 USE OR OCCUPANCY PRIOR TO ACCEPTANCE BY OWNER Section 11.01 Substantial Completion 19 Section 11.02 Occupancy Prior to Acceptance 19 ARTICLE 12 PAYMENT Section 12.01 Provision of Payment 20 Section 12.02 Withholding Payments 22 Section 12.03 Documents and Conditions Precedent to Final Payment 22 Section 12.04 Final Payment and Release 23 ARTICLE 13 TAX EXEMPTION Section 13.01 Tax Exemption 24 11 Rev 08-2012 TABLE OF CONTENTS Page ARTICLE 14 GUARANTEE Section 14.01 Guarantee 24 ARTICLE 15 STANDARD PROVISIONS Section 15.01 Provisions Required by Law Deemed Inserted 25 Section 15.02 Laws Governing the Contract 25 Section 15.03 Assignments 25 Section 15.04 No Third Party Rights 25 Section 15.05 Waiver of Rights of Owner 25 Section 15.06 Nondiscrimination and Affirmative Action 25 Section 15.07 Limitation on Actions 26 Section 15.08 Owner's Representative 27 ARTICLE 16 ACCOUNTING, INSPECTION AND AUDIT 27 ARTICLE 17 CONTRACTOR PERFORMANCE EVALUATION 27 ARTICLE 18 ROYALTIES AND PATENTS 27 ARTICLE 19 CONFIDENTIALITY AND USE OF OWNER'S NAME Section 19.01 Release of Information 27 Section 19.02 Confidential Information 28 Section 19.03 Use of Owner's Name 28 ARTICLE 20 CORNELL UNIVERSITY STANDARDS OF ETHICAL CONDUCT 29 Rev 08-2012 EXHIBITS A Change Order A-1 Change Order Documentation Instructions Construction Contract Change Order Request Construction Contract Change Order Summary B Schedule of Values for Contract Payment C Final Release D Application and Certificate for Payment E Guarantee F Form I Contractor's Affinnative Action Plan Use of MBE and WBE Vendors Form II Contractor's Affirmative Action Plan Summary of Bid Activity with MBE and WBE Subcontractors and Vendors Form III Affinnative Action Workforce Report Forn IV Minority-Women Utilization Report G Labor Rate Breakdown H Stored Materials Invoicing Documentation I Contractor Performance Evaluation iV Rev 08-2012 ARTICLE 1 -- INTERPRETATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Section 1.01 -Owner A. The Owner is Cornell University as identified in the Agreement and referred to throughout the Contract Documents as the "Owner" or "Cornell University". B. Ownership of Documents: All drawings, specifications, computations, sketches, test data, survey results, photographs, renderings and other material relating to the Work, whether furnished to or prepared by the Contractor, are the property of Cornell University. The Contractor shall use such materials or information therefrom only in connection with the Work of this Contract. When requested, the Contractor shall deliver such materials to Cornell University. C. The Owner shall give all orders and directions contemplated under the Contract relative to the execution of the Work. The Owner shall determine the amount, quality, acceptability, and fitness of the Work and shall decide all questions which may arise in relation to said Work. The Owner's estimates and decisions shall be final except as otherwise expressly provided. D. Any differences or conflicts concerning perfornance which may arise between the Contractor and other Contractors performing Work for the Owner shall be adjusted and determined by the Owner. E. The table of contents, titles, captions, headings, running headlines, and marginal notes contained herein and in said documents is intended to facilitate reference to various provisions of the Contract Documents and in no way affect the interpretation of the provisions to which they refer. Section 1.02 -Meaning and Intent of Specifications, Plans and Drawings The meaning and intent of all specifications, plans and drawings shall be determined in a manner approved by the Owner. Section 1.03 -Order of Precedence A. Should a conflict occur in or between or among any parts of the Contract Documents that are entitled to equal preference, the more expensive way of doing the Work, the better quality or greater quantity of material shall govern, unless the Owner otherwise so directs in writing. B. Drawings and specifications are reciprocal. Anything shown on the plans and not mentioned in the specifications, or mentioned in the specifications and not shown on the plans, shall have the same effect as if shown or mentioned in both. C. Requirements of reference standards form a part of these specifications to the extent indicated by the reference thereto. When provisions of reference standards conflict with provisions in these specifications, the specifications shall govern. 1 Rev 08-2012 ARTICLE 2 -- CONTRACTOR Section 2.01 -Contractor's Obligations A. The Contractor shall, in good workmanlike manner, perform all the Work required by the Contract within the time specified in the Contract. The Contractor shall comply with all terms of the Contract, and shall do, carry on, and complete the entire Work to the satisfaction of the Owner. 1. All labor for this project which is normally under the jurisdiction of one of the local unions as covered in the contract between the Tompkins-Cortland Building Trades Council, Maintenance Division and Cornell University shall be performed by Union labor. B. The Contractor shall furnish, erect, maintain, and remove such construction plant and such temporary Work as may be required. C. The Contractor shall provide and pay for all labor, material, tools, equipment, machinery, as well as utility connections, transportation, and all other facilities and services necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work, except as otherwise specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents. D. Whenever a provision of the Specifications conflicts with agreements or regulations in force among members of trade associations, unions, or councils which regulate or distinguish what work shall or shall not be included in the work of a particular trade, the Contractor shall make all necessary arrangements to reconcile such conflict without delay, damage, or cost to the Owner and without recourse to the Architect or the Owner. In case progress of the Work is affected by undue delay in furnishing or installing items of material or equipment required under the Contract because of a conflict involving such agreement or regulations, the Owner or the Architect may require that other material or equipment of equal kind and quality be provided at no additional cost to the Owner. Section 2.02 -Contractor's Title to Materials A. The Contractor warrants that the Contractor has full, good and clear title to all materials and supplies used by the Contractor in the Work, free fiom all liens, claims or encumbrances. B. All materials, equipment and articles which become the property of the Owner shall be new unless specifically stated otherwise. Section 2.03 -"Or Equal" Clause A. Whenever a material, article or piece of equipment or method is identified on the plans or in the specifications by reference to manufacturers' or vendors' names, trade name, catalogue number, or make, no others may be substituted. Any and all other "Or Equal" considerations will be handled under this Section in accordance with General Requirements, Section 01 25 00. 2 Rev 08-2012 B. Where the Architect approves a product proposed by the Contractor and said proposed product requires a revision or redesign of any part of the Work covered by this Contract, or the Work covered by other contracts, all said revision or redesign, and all new drawings and details required therefor shall be provided by the Contractor and shall be approved by the Architect. All time spent by the Architect or its agents to evaluate the proposed substitution and or necessary engineering cost to accommodate the requested change shall be reimbursed to the Owner by the Contractor via the Change Order procedure. Section 2.04 -Quality, Quantity and Labeling A. The Contractor shall furnish materials and equipment of the quality and quantity specified in the Contract. Unless otherwise provided, all materials and articles incorporated into the work shall be new and of the most suitable grade of their respective kinds for the purpose. When required by the Contract Documents or when directed by the Owner, the Contractor shall supply the Owner's Representative, for their acceptance, full information concerning any material which the Contractor contemplates incorporating into the work. Materials and articles installed or used without such acceptance shall be at the risk of subsequent rejection. B. When materials are specified to conform to any standard, the Owner may require that the materials delivered to the Site shall bear manufacturer's labels stating that the materials meet said standards. C. The above requirements shall not restrict or affect the Owner's right to test materials as provided in the Contract. D. Whenever several alternative materials or items are specified by name or other particular reference for one use, the Owner's Representative may require the Contractor to submit in writing a list of the particular materials or items the Contractor intends to use before the Contract is executed. Section 2.05 -Superintendence by Contractor A. The Contractor shall employ a full-time competent construction superintendent and necessary staff; the construction superintendent shall devote full time to the Work and shall have full authority to act for the Contractor at all times. The Contractor shall provide the Owner with the names and authority of such personnel in writing. B. If at any time the superintendent is not satisfactory to the Owner, the Contractor shall, if requested by the Owner, replace said superintendent with another superintendent satisfactory to the Owner. There shall be no change in superintendent without the Owner's approval. C. The Contractor shall remove from the Work any employee of the Contractor or of any Subcontractor when so directed by the Owner. 3 Rev 08-2012 Section 2.06 -Subsurface or Site Conditions A. The Contractor acknowledges that it has assumed the risk and that the contract consideration includes such provision as the Contractor deems proper for all subsurface conditions as the Contractor could reasonably anticipate encountering from the provisions of the Contract Documents, borings, rock cores, topographical maps and such other information as the Owner made available to the Contractor or from their own inspection and examination of the site prior to the Owner's receipt of bids. B. In the event that the Contractor encounters subsurface physical conditions at the site differing substantially from those shown on or described or indicated in the Contract Documents and which could not have been reasonably anticipated from the aforesaid information made available by the Owner or from the Contractor's aforesaid inspection and examination of the site, the Contractor shall give immediate notice to the Owner of such conditions before they are disturbed. Such notice shall include probable cost and/or any impact to the schedule. The Owner will thereupon promptly investigate the conditions and if Owner finds that they do substantially differ from that which should have been reasonably anticipated by the Contractor, the Owner shall make such changes in the drawings and specifications as may be necessary and a change order shall be issued. Section 2.07 -Representations of Contractor The Contractor represents and warrants: A. That the Contractor is financially solvent and is experienced in and competent to perform the Work; B. That the Contractor is familiar with all Federal, State, or other laws, ordinances, orders, building codes, rules and regulations, which may in any way affect the Work; C. That any temporary and permanent Work required by the Contract can be safely and satisfactorily constructed. D. That the Contractor has carefully examined the Contract and the Site of the Work and that, from the Contractor's own investigations is satisfied as to the nature and location of the Work, the character, quality and quantity of surface and subsurface materials likely to be encountered, the character of equipment and other facilities needed for the performance of the Work, the general and local conditions, and all other materials or items which may affect the Work. The Contractor has correlated those observations with the requirements of the Contract Documents and has made all other investigations essential to a full understanding of the Work and the difficulties which may be encountered in performing the Work. Section 2.08 -Verifying Dimensions and Site Conditions A. The Contractor shall take all measurements at the Site and shall verify all dimensions and site conditions at the Site before proceeding with the Work. If said dimensions or conditions are found to be in conflict with the Contract, the Contractor immediately shall refer said conflict to the Owner. 4 Rev 08-2012 B. During the progress of Work, the Contractor shall verify all field measurements prior to fabrication of building components and equipment, and proceed with the fabrication to meet field conditions. C. The Contractor shall consult all Contract Documents to determine exact location of all Work and verify spatial relationships of all Work. Any question concerning said location or spatial relationships shall be submitted in a manner approved by the Owner. D. Specific locations for equipment, pipelines, ductwork and other such items of Work, where not dimensioned on plans, shall be determined in consultation with the Owner and other affected Contractors and Subcontractors. E. The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper fitting of the Work in place. F. Should failure of the Contractor to perform services under this section result in additional costs to the Owner, the Contractor shall be responsible for such additional costs. Section 2.09 -Copies of Contract Documents for Contractors A. The Owner shall furnish to the Contractor, without charge, up to ten (10) sets of Contracts Documents and one (1) set of reproducible sepias. B. Any sets in excess of the number mentioned above may be furnished to the Contractor at the cost of reproduction and mailing. C. All drawings, specifications, and copies thereof furnished by the Owner are the property of the Owner. They are not to be used on other work, and with the exception of the signed Contract Set, are to be returned to the Owner on request at the completion of the work. Section 2.10 -Meetings The Contractor and all subcontractors as requested shall attend all meetings as directed by the Owner or the Owner's Representative. Section 2.11 -Related Work The Contractor shall examine the Contract for related work to ascertain the relationship of said work to the Work under the Contract. Section 2.12 -Surveys and Layout Unless otherwise expressly provided in the Contract, the Owner shall furnish the Contractor all surveys of the property necessary for the Work, but the Contractor shall lay out the Work. Section 2.13 -Errors, Omissions or Discrepancies The Contractor shall examine the Contract thoroughly before commencing the Work and report in writing any errors or discrepancies to the Owner or the Owner's Representative. 5 Rev 08-2012 Section 2.14 -Project Labor Rates The Contractor shall submit to the Owner, for review and approval, within thirty (30) days after Contract is awarded all trade labor rates inclusive of fringe benefits, taxes, insurance for the duration of the individual craft agreement in accordance with Exhibit G. Revised rates shall be provided within thirty (30) days of signing any new agreements with the individual crafts during this project. Section 2.15 -Daily Reports The Contractor's Construction Superintendent shall submit a Daily Report to the Cornell University Project Manager or the Resident Field Engineer at the job site. Such reports shall, at a minimum, contain the following information: Name of Project Project Number Date of Report Weather Conditions Equipment on the site Contractors on site including name and number of employees on site for each contractor Work/area and activity for each contractor Overtime worked and planned work progress Environmental problems and corrections Other information, such as special events, occurrences, materials delivered, accidents or injuries, recommendations, suggestions, visitors, inspections, equipment start-up and check out, occupancy, etc. ARTICLE 3 -- INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE Section 3.01 -Access to the Work The Owner and Architect, or their duly authorized representatives, assistants, or inspectors shall at all times and for any purpose have access to the work and the premises used by the Contractor, and the Contractor shall provide safe and proper facilities therefor. In addition, the Contractor shall, whenever so requested, give the Owner and Architect or their duly authorized representatives access to the proper invoices, bills of lading, specifications, etc., which may be required in determining the adequacy and/or quantity of materials used in completion of the work. Section 3.02 -Notice for Testing If the Contract Documents, laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, or orders of any public authority having jurisdiction require any work to be inspected, tested, accepted, or approved, the Contractor shall give the Owner timely notice of its readiness and of the date arranged so the Owner may observe such inspection, testing, or approval. The Contractor shall bear all costs of such inspection, tests, and approvals unless otherwise provided. 6 R os-mo1 Section 3.03 -Inspection of Work A. The Contractor will cooperate in all ways to facilitate the inspection and examination of the work. The inspections and examinations will be carried out in such a manner that the work will not be delayed. B. All Work, all materials whether or not incorporated in the Work, all processes of manufacturer, and all methods of construction shall be, at all times and places, subject to the inspection of the Owner and the Owner shall be the final judge of the quality and suitability of the Work. Any Work not approved by the Owner shall immediately be reconstructed, made good, replaced or corrected by the Contractor including all Work of other Contractors destroyed or damaged by said removal or replacement. C. Required certificates of inspection, testing, acceptance, or approval shall be secured by the Contractor and promptly delivered to the Owner. Section 3.04 -Inspection and Testing All materials and equipment used in the Work shall be subject to inspection and testing in accordance with accepted standards to establish conformance with specifications and suitability for uses intended, unless otherwise specified in the Contract. If any Work shall be covered or concealed without the approval or consent of the Owner, said Work shall, if required by the Owner, be uncovered for examination. If any test results are below specified minimums, the Owner may order additional testing. The cost of said additional testing, any additional professional services required, and any other expenses incurred by the Owner as a result of said additional testing shall be paid by the Contractor. Reexamination of any part of the Work may be ordered by the Owner, and if so ordered the Work must be uncovered by the Contractor. If said Work is found to be in accordance with the Contract, the Owner shall pay the cost of reexamination and replacement. If said Work is found not to be in accordance with the Contract, the Contractor shall pay the cost of reexamination and replacement. Section 3.05 -Defective or Damaged Work If, in the opinion of the Owner, it is undesirable to replace any defective or damaged materials or to reconstruct or correct any portion of the Work injured or not performed in accordance with the Contract, the compensation to be paid to the Contractor shall be reduced by an amount which, in the judgment of the Owner, shall be deemed to be equitable. Section 3.06 -Acceptance No previous inspection shall relieve the Contractor of the obligation to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract. No payment, either partial or full, by the Owner to the Contractor shall excuse any failure by the Contractor to comply fully with the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall remedy all defects, paying the cost of any damage to other Work resulting therefrom. Rev 08-2012 ARTICLE 4 -- CHANGES IN WORK Section 4.01 -Changes A. The Owner, without invalidating the Contract, may order changes within the general scope of the Contract and the Contractor shall promptly comply with such change orders. B. A change order is a written direction to the Contractor signed by the Owner, issued after execution of the Contract, authorizing a change in the Work, extra work, or an adjustment in the Contract price or time of performance. C. No claims for changes, extra work or additional time to complete the Contract or an adjustment in the Contract price shall be allowed unless such change is ordered in writing by the Owner. D. The Owner shall determine the amount by which the Contract consideration is to be increased or decreased by a change order by one (1) or more of the following methods: 1. By agreement with the Contractor. 2. By applying the applicable price or prices previously bid and approved. This method shall be used if the Contract contains applicable unit prices. (i) To the extent that Unit Prices are applicable, as determined by the Owner, work shall be priced and paid for or credited in accordance with such Unit Prices; except that a Unit Price shall not apply to any portion of work which is either reduced or increased by more than 25%. Said Unit Prices shall be valid for the duration of the project as applicable, unless stipulated elsewhere in the Contract Documents. (ii) For Unit Price items, additions and deletion of like items shall be algebraically summed and then multiplied by the applicable Unit Prices. For Direct Labor and Material items, all additions and deletions shall be algebraically summed for each subcontractor and then multiplied by the applicable markup. (iii) Unit Prices are for work complete, measured in place and cover profit and all other costs and expenses. Unit Prices include, without limit, all conditions of the contract and all general requirements such as layout, reproduction of Drawings and Specifications, testing and inspection, shop drawing and sample coordination, supervision (field and home office), small tools and expendable items, insurance, taxes, temporary facilities and services, including access and safety, "as-built" drawings, and general and administrative overhead and profit. Rev 08-2012 3. By estimating the fair and reasonable cost of: (i) Labor, including all wages, required wage supplements and insurance required by law paid to employees below the rank of superintendent directly employed at the Site. (ii) Materials (iii) Equipment, excluding hand tools, which in the judgment of the Owner, would have been or will be employed exclusively and directly on the Work. 4. By determining the actual cost of the extra work in the same manner as in Subsection 3 except the actual costs of the Contractor shall be used in lieu of estimated costs. E. Mark-ups: 1. Work performed by the Contractor. Where the Work is performed directly by the Contractor by adding to the total of such estimated costs a sum equal to fifteen percent (15%) thereof. 2. Work perfonned by a Subcontractor. Where the change order work is performed by a Subcontractor under contract with the Contractor, by adding a sum equal to fifteen (15%) of said costs for the benefit of said Subcontractor, and by adding for the benefit of the Contractor an additional sum equal to ten percent (10%) of said costs. 3. Work performed by a Sub-Subcontractor. Where work is performed by a Sub-Subcontractor, by adding the sum equal to fifteen percent (15%) of said costs for the benefit of said Sub-Subcontractor, by adding for the benefit of the Subcontractor an additional sum equal to five percent (5%) of said cost and by adding for the benefit of the Contractor an additional sum equal to five percent (5%) of said cost. 4. No markup shall be paid on the premium portion of overtime pay. 5. No markup shall be paid on insurance, taxes, fringe benefits or bond cost. Where the Work involves both an increase and a reduction in similar or related Work, the above percentage override shall be applied only on the amount, if any, that the cost of the increase exceeds the cost of the reduction. F. Regardless of the method used by the Owner in determining the value of a change order, the Contractor, within thirty (30) calendar days after a request for the estimate of value shall submit to the Owner a detailed breakdown of the Contractor's estimate, including all subcontractors details, of the value of the Change Order Work, in the format detailed in Exhibit A-1. Each submission shall include a paper copy and an electronic .pdf format of all documentation. 9 Rev 08-2012 G. Unless otherwise specifically provided for in a change order, the compensation specified therein includes a full payment for both the Work covered by the order and for any damage or expense incurred by the Contractor by any delays, including any delays to other Work to be done under the Contract resulting from said change order. The Contractor waives all rights to any other compensation for said damage or expense. H. The Contractor shall furnish satisfactory bills, payrolls and vouchers covering all items of cost and when requested by the Owner shall give the Owner access to accounts and records relating thereto. Section 4.02 -Form of Change Orders All change orders shall be processed, executed and approved on the Owner's change order form, which is included herein as Exhibit "A" and made a part of the Contract Documents. No alteration to this form shall be acceptable to the Owner and no payment for change order Work shall be due the Contractor unless a change order has been issued and approved on said form. ARTICLE 5 -- TIME OF COMPLETION Section 5.01 -Time of Completion A. The Work shall be commenced at the time stated in the written order of the Owner and shall be completed no later than the date of completion specified in the Contract. All required overtime to maintain progress schedule is included in the Base Bid. B. The date of beginning and the time for completion of the Work, as specified in the Contract, are essential conditions of the Contract. C. The Work shall be prosecuted diligently at such rate of progress as shall insure full completion within the time specified. It is expressly understood and agreed, that the time for the completion of the Work described herein is a reasonable time, taking into consideration the average climatic range and usual business and labor conditions prevailing in the locality of the Site. D. Time is of the essence on each and every portion of the Work. In any instance in which additional time is allowed for the completion of any Work, the new time of completion established by said extension shall be of the essence. If in the Architect's or Owner's judgment, it becomes necessary at any time during construction to accelerate and/or complete certain areas of the project, the Contractor shall concentrate efforts and manpower on designated areas. E. Where Work occurs within occupied areas, perform same only on approved schedule, so as not to interfere with normal operation of occupied areas. F. The Contractor shall not be charged with damages or any excess cost if the Owner determines that the Contractor is without fault and the Contractor's reasons for the time extension are acceptable to the Owner. The Contractor shall not be charged with damages or any excess cost for delay in completion of the work if the Owner determines that the delay is due to: 10 Rev 08-2012 1. any preference, priority or allocation order duly issued by the Government of the United States or the State of New York; 2. unforeseeable cause beyond the control and without the fault or negligence of the Contractor, and approved by the Owner, including, but not limited to, acts of God or of public enemy, acts of the Owner, fires, epidemics, quarantine, restrictions, strikes, freight embargoes and unusually severe weather. G. The time for completion can only be extended by change order and may be extended for: 1. all of the Work, or 2. only that portion of the Work altered by the change order. H. Any claim for extension of time shall be made in writing to the Owner not more than ten (10) days after the commencement of the delay; otherwise it shall be waived. ARTICLE 6 -- TERMINATION Section 6.01 -Termination for Cause In the event that any provision of this Contract is violated by the Contractor or by any Subcontractor of the Contractor, the Owner may serve written notice upon the Contractor, and upon the Contractor's surety, if any, of the Owner's intention to terninate the Contract. The notice shall briefly state the reasons for the termination and shall specify a termination date. If arrangements satisfactory to the Owner are not made to remove and remedy the violation, the Contract shall terminate upon the date specified by the Owner in the notice. In the event of termination, the Owner may take over and complete the Work at the expense of the Contractor. The Contractor and Contractor's surety shall be liable to the Owner for all costs thereby incurred by the Owner. In the event of such ternination the Owner may take possession of and may utilize such materials, appliances, and plant as may be located on the Site and which may be necessary or useful in completing the Work. Section 6.02 -Termination for Convenience of Owner The Owner, at any time, may terminate the Contract in whole or in part. Any said termination shall be effected by delivering to the Contractor a notice of tennination specifying the extent to which performance of Work under the Contract is terminated and the date upon which said termination becomes effective. Upon receipt of the notice of termination, the Contractor shall act promptly to minimize the expenses resulting from said termination. The Owner shall pay the Contractor for costs actually incurred by the Contractor up to the effective date of said termination, but in no event shall the Contractor be entitled to compensation in excess of the total consideration of the Contract. In the event of said tennination the Owner may take over the Work and prosecute same to completion. Rev 08-2012 Section 6.03 -Owner's Right to do Work The Owner may, after notice to the Contractor, without terminating the Contract and without prejudice to any other right or remedy the Owner may have, perform or have performed by others all of the Work or any part thereof and may deduct the cost thereof from any monies due or to become due the Contractor. ARTICLE 7 -- DISPUTES Section 7.01 -Disputes Procedure A. If the Contractor claims that any Work which the Contractor has been ordered to perform will be Work which should have been authorized or directed by change order, or that any action or omission of the Owner is contrary to the terms of the Contract, the Contractor shall: 1. File a notice with the Owner which sets forth the basis of the Contractor's claim and requests a resolution of the dispute. Such notice shall be filed within fifteen (15) working days after being ordered to perform the disputed work or within fifteen (15) working days after commencing performance of the disputed work, whichever is earlier, or within fifteen (15) working days after the act or omission of the Owner which the Contractor claims is contrary to the terms of the Contract. 2. Proceed diligently with the performance of the work in accordance with the instructions of the Owner pending the resolution of the dispute by the Owner. 3. Promptly comply with the order of the Owner regarding the disputed matter. 4. Any such decision, or any other decision of the Owner in respect to a dispute, shall be final unless the Contractor, within ten (10) working days after such decision, shall deliver to the Owner a verified written statement which sets forth the Contractor's contention that the decision is contrary to a provision of the contract. Pending the decision of the Owner, the Contractor shall proceed in accordance with the original decision. The Owner shall determine the validity of the Contractor's claim and such determination shall be final. The Contractor may file a notice with the Owner reserving its rights in connection with the dispute but shall comply with the Owner's decision and complete the work as directed. B. No claim for additional costs regarding changed or extra work shall be allowed unless the work was done pursuant to a written order of the Owner. C. The value of claims for extra work, if allowed, shall be determined by the methods described in the Contract. Refer to Article 4 of these General Conditions. 12 R o02012 D. The Contractor's failure to comply with any or all parts of Article 7 shall be deemed to be: 1. a conclusive and binding determination on the part of the Contractor that the order, work, action or omission is not contrary to the tenns and provisions of the Contract; 2. a waiver by the Contractor of all claims for additional compensation, time extension, or damages as a result of said order, work, action or omission. ARTICLE 8 -- SUBCONTRACTS Section 8.01 -Subcontracting A. The Contractor may utilize the services of Subcontractors. B. The Contractor shall submit to the Owner, in writing, the name of each proposed Subcontractor and Sub-Subcontractor, as required by the Contract. The Contractor shall not award any Work to any Subcontractor or Sub-Subcontractor without the prior written approval of the Owner. C. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for the Work, acts and omissions of Subcontractors, and of persons either directly or indirectly employed by Subcontractors. D. The Contractor shall cause appropriate provisions to be inserted in all subcontracts relative to the Work to bind Subcontractors to the Contractor by the terms of the Contract insofar as applicable to the Work of Subcontractors, indemnification and to give the Contractor the same power to terminate any subcontract that the Owner may exercise over the Contractor. E. The Contractor's use of Subcontractors shall not diminish the Contractor's obligation to complete the Work in accordance with the Contract. The Contractor shall control and coordinate the Work of Subcontractors. F. Nothing contained in the Contract shall create any contractual relationship between Subcontractors and the Owner. ARTICLE 9 -- COORDINATION AND COOPERATION Section 9.01 -Cooperation with Other Contractors A. Normally, the Work will be performed by a single Contractor. However, the Owner reserves the right to perform work related to the Work with its own forces or award separate contracts. In that event, the Contractor shall coordinate its operations with the Owner's forces or separate Contractors. 13 Rev 08-2012 B. The Owner canot guarantee the responsibility, efficiency, unimpeded operations or performance of any contractor. The Contractor acknowledges these conditions and shall bear the risk of all delays including, but not limited to, delays caused by the presence or operations of other contractors. C. The Contractor shall keep informed of the progress and workmanship of other contractors and shall notify the Owner immediately of lack of progress or defective workmanship on the part of other contractors where said delay or defective workmanship may interfere with the Contractor's operations. D. Failure of a Contractor to keep so informed and failure to give notice of lack of progress or defective workmanship by others shall be construed as acceptance by the Contractor of said progress and workmanship as being satisfactory for proper coordination with the Work. E. If the Contractor notifies the Owner, in writing, that another contractor on the Site is failing to coordinate the work of said contractor with the Work, the Owner shall investigate the charge. If the Owner finds it to be true, the Owner shall promptly issue such directions to the other contractor with respect thereto as the situation may require. The Owner shall not be liable for any damages suffered by the Contractor by reason of the other contractor's failure to promptly comply with the directions so issued by the Owner, or by reason of another contractor's default in performance. F. If the Owner shall determine that the Contractor is failing to coordinate the Work with the work of other contractors as the Owner has directed: 1. the Owner shall have the right to withhold any payments due under the Contract until the Owner's directions are complied with by the Contractor; and 2. the Contractor shall indemnify and hold the Owner harmless from any and all claims or judgments for damages and from any costs or damages to which the Owner may be subjected or which the Owner may suffer or incur by reason of the Contractor's failure promptly to comply with the Owner's directions. G. Should the Contractor sustain any damage through any act or omission of any other contractor having a contract with the Owner or through any act or omission of any Subcontractor of said other contractor, the Contractor shall have no claim against the Owner for said damage. H. Should any other contractor having a Contract with the Owner sustain damage through any act or omission of the Contractor or its Subcontractor, the Contractor shall reimburse said other contractor for all said damages and shall indemnify and hold the Owner harmless from all said claims. 14 Rev 08-2012 ARTICLE 10 -- PROTECTION OF RIGHTS, PERSONS AND PROPERTY Section 10.01 -Accidents and Accident Prevention A. The Contractor shall at all times take reasonable precautions for the safety of persons engaged in the performance of the work. The Contractor shall comply fully with all applicable provisions of federal, state, and local law. The Contractor alone shall be responsible for the safety, efficiency and adequacy of the Contractor's Work, plant, appliances and methods, and for any damage which may result from the failure or the improper construction, maintenance, or operation of said Work, plant, appliances and methods. B. The Contractor shall maintain an accurate record of all cases of death, occupational disease, and injury requiring medical attention or causing loss of time from work, arising out of or in the course of employment on Work under the Contract, and shall inmediately notify the Owner in writing of any injury which results in hospitalization or death. The Contractor shall supply the Owner with all Contractor and Subcontractor written accident investigation forms and accident reports prepared. C. The Contractor shall provide to the Project Manager, Material Safety Data Sheets (OSHA Form 20 or the equivalent) for all chemicals to be used on site. All chemicals requiring any precautionary measures (eg. special storage or disposal requirements, personal protective equipment, or additional ventilation), shall be brought to the attention of Cornell University for review and approval, prior to their use on site. 1. All chemicals brought on site by the Contractor shall be clearly labeled. The label shall state the identity of the chemical, any associated hazards, and the Contractor's name. 2. All Contractor employees who are using chemicals shall be made aware of the hazards associated with their use. Safe chemical handling procedures in accordance with OSHA or other governmental agencies, and manufacturer's recommendations shall be used at all times. 3. The Contractor shall dispose of all chemicals in accordance with EPA and Cornell University requirements, regardless of the size of the container or the quantity of waste, and must receive prior approval of Cornell University. D. The Contractor shall be responsible for the initiation, maintenance and supervision of safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work. E. The Contractor shall, at all times, guard the Owner's property from injury or loss in connection with the Work. The Contractor shall, at all times, guard and protect the Contractor's Work. The Contractor shall replace or make good any said loss or injury unless said loss or injury is caused directly by the Owner. F. The Contractor shall have full responsibility to install, protect and maintain all materials and supplies in proper condition and forthwith repair, replace and make good any damage thereto until Final Acceptance. 15 Rev os-2012 Section 10.02 -Adjoining Property A. The Contractor shall be required to protect all the adjoining property and to repair or replace any such properties damaged or destroyed by the Contractor, its employees or subcontractors thereof, by reason of, or as a result of activities under, for or related to the Contract. Section 10.03 -Emergencies A. In case of an emergency which threatens loss or injury to persons or property, the Contractor will be allowed to act, without previous instructions from the Owner, in a diligent manner, to the extent required to avoid or limit such loss or injury, and the Contractor shall notify the Owner immediately thereafter of the action taken. Section 10.04 -Bonds A. Before commencing the performance of any work covered by the Contract, the Contractor shall furnish to the Owner any required Bonds. The failure of the Contractor to supply the required Bonds within ten (10) days after the Contract signing shall constitute a default. Section 10.05 -Risks Assumed by the Contractor A. Indemnification. To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner and its agents and employees from and against all claims, damages, losses, fines, and expenses, including attorneys' fees, arising out of or resulting from the perfornance of the work including, but not limited to, those arising out of bodily or personal injury, sickness, disease, death, or injury or destruction of tangible property, including the loss of use resulting therefrom, to which the Owner, its agents or employees may be subjected by reason of any negligent act or omission, willful misconduct, violation of law, or breach of this Contract by the Contractor, or any of its subcontractors, anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, regardless of whether or not it is caused in part by the Owner, except to the extent caused by Owner's own negligence. 1. In the event that any party is requested but refuses to honor the indemnity obligations hereunder, then the party indemnifying shall, in addition to all other obligations, pay the cost of bringing any such action, including attorneys' fees, to the party requesting indemnity. B. Neither the Owner's final acceptance of the work to be performed hereunder nor the making of any payment shall release the Contractor from its obligations under this Section. The enumeration elsewhere in the Contract of particular risks assumed by the Contractor or of particular claims for which the Contractor is responsible shall not be deemed to limit the effect of the provisions of this Section or to imply that the Contractor assumes or is only responsible for risk or claims of the type enumerated. 16 Rev o8-2012 Section 10.06 -Contractor's Compensation and Liability Insurance A. The Contractor shall procure and maintain, at its own cost and expense, until final acceptance by the Owner of all the work covered by this Contract, the following kinds of insurance: 1. Worker's Compensation Insurance. A policy complying with the requirements of the laws of the State of New York and any other laws that may be applicable thereto, including Coverage B -Employer's Liability with a limit of not less than $1,000,000. 2. Contractor's Comprehensive General Liability Insurance. A standard comprehensive general liability insurance policy, with contractual, completed operations, explosion, collapse and underground property damage coverage's issued to and covering the liability of the Contractor for all work and operations under this Contract, all obligations assumed by the Contractor under this Contract and all damage to work performed by subcontractors on your behalf. The Contractor shall provide Broad Form Comprehensive General Liability Insurance, and the Owner shall be an additional insured in the policy. The policy shall include cross liability coverage and shall be endorsed to indicate that it is primary coverage. The completed operations coverage's shall be maintained for not less than two years after acceptance of the work. The coverage under such policy shall be not less than a combined single limit for Bodily Injury and Property Damage as follows, or such limits carried by the Contractor, whichever is greater: BODILY INJURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE LIABILITY (BROAD FORM) $ 5,000,000 Each Occurrence $ 5,000,000 Aggregate 3. Automobile Liability Insurance. A policy covering the use in connection with the work covered by the Contract Documents of all owned, non-owned and hired vehicles bearing, or, under the circumstances under which they are being used, required by the Motor Vehicle Laws of the State of New York to bear license plates. The coverage under such policy shall be not less than a combined single limit for Bodily Injury and Property Damage of: BODILY INJURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE LIABILITY $ 1,000,000 Each Person $ 1,000,000 Each Accident B. In addition to maintaining all of the above insurances, the Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner and its agents and employees from and against liability, including additional premium due because of the Contractor's failure to maintain coverage limits as required under this section. 17 Rev 08-2012 C. Insurance similar to that required of the Contractor shall be provided by or on behalf of all subcontractors to cover their own operations performed under this Contract. The Contractor shall be held responsible for any modifications in these insurance requirements as they apply to subcontractors. D. Before commencing the perfonnance of any work covered by the Contract, the Contractor shall furnish to the Owner a current certificate or certificates, in duplicate, of the insurance required under the foregoing provisions including copies of subcontractor's certificates. Such certificates shall be on a form prescribed by the Owner, shall list the various coverage's and shall contain, in addition to any provisions hereinbefore required, a provision that the policy shall not be changed or cancelled and that it will be automatically renewed upon expiration and continued in force until final acceptance by the Owner of all the work covered by the Contract, unless the Owner is given thirty (30) days written notice to the contrary. Upon renewal of each of the Contractor's insurance coverage's, the Owner shall be provided with a new certificate of insurance showing such renewal. Certificates and written notices shall be directed to the Office of Facilities Contracts. The Contractor shall furnish the Owner with a certified copy of each policy including any and all exclusions to such policy. E. If at any time any of the above required insurance policies should be cancelled, tenminated or modified so that insurance is not in effect as above required, then, if the Owner shall so direct, the Contractor shall suspend performance of the work covered in the Contract. If the said work is so suspended, no extension of time shall be due on account thereof. The Owner may, at its option, obtain insurance affording coverage equal to that above required, at the Contractor's expense. Section 10.07 -Liability Insurance of the Owner A. The Owner, at its own cost and expense, shall procure and maintain such liability insurance as will, in its opinion, protect the Owner from its contingent liability to others for damages because of bodily injury, including death, and property damage which may arise from operations under this Contract. 18 Rev 08-2012 Section 10.08 -Owner's and Contractor's Responsibilities for Fire and Extended Coverage Insurance Hazards A. The Contractor shall purchase and maintain in force a builders risk insurance policy on the entire work. Such insurance shall be written on a completed value form and in an amount equal to the initial contract sum and modified by any subsequent modifications to the contract sum. The insurance shall name Cornell University and the State of New York, all subcontractors and sub- subcontractors. The insurance policy shall contain a provision that the insurance will not be cancelled or allowed to expire until the Contractor has given at least thirty (30) days prior written notice to Cornell University. The insurance shall cover the entire work at the site, including reasonable compensation for architects services and expenses made necessary by an insured loss. Insured property shall include portions of the work located away from the site and in transit to the site. The policy shall cover the cost of removing debris and demolition as may be legally necessary. The policy shall cover any boiler or machinery loss which may be suffered during installation and until final acceptance. The insurance required shall be written to cover "all risk" of physical loss including a loss due to collapse. Any deductible shall be the responsibility of the Contractor but in no case shall the deductible be more than $10,000 unless Cornell University has agreed to a higher deductible. The Contractor shall provide to Cornell University a certificate of insurance and a summary of coverage's including all endorsements and exclusions prior to commencement of the work. Once the policy is received, the Contractor shall provide a copy of such policy to Cornell University. There shall be a mutual waiver of recovery between Cornell University, the Contractor and all other parties to the extent such losses are covered by the builders risk policy. If Cornell University wishes to occupy the building prior to final acceptance and if the policy contains a provision which limits coverage for such partial occupancy, the parties agree work together to obtain consent of the insurance company for such partial occupancy or use under mutually acceptable terms. B. Losses, if any, under such insurance shall be payable to the Owner. C. The Contractor shall be responsible for any and all loss of materials connected with the construction due to unexplainable disappearance, theft or misappropriation of any kind or nature. D. The foregoing provisions shall not operate to relieve the Contractor and subcontractors of responsibility for any loss or damage to their own or rented property or property of their employees, of whatever kind or nature, or on account of labor performed under the Contract incident to the repair, replacement, salvage, or restoration of such items, including but not limited to tools, equipment, forms, scaffolding, and temporary structures, including their contents, regardless of ownership of such contents, except for such contents as are to be included in and remain a part of the permanent construction. The Owner shall in no event be liable for any loss or damage to any of the aforementioned items, or any other property of the Contractor, subcontractors and the Architect, or employees, agents, or servants of same, which is not to be included in and remain a part of the pernanent construction. The Contractor and subcontractors severally waive any rights of recovery they may have against the Owner and the Architect for damage or destruction of their own or rented property, or property of their employees of whatever kind or nature. 19 Rev 08-2012 Section 10.09 -Effect of Procurement of Insurance A. Neither the procurement nor the maintenance of any type of insurance by the Owner or the Contractor shall in any way be construed or be deemed to limit, discharge, waive or release the Contractor from any of the obligations and risks imposed upon the Contractor by the Contract or to be a limitation on the nature or extent of such obligations and risks. Section 10.10 -No Third Party Rights A. Nothing in the Contract shall create or give to third parties; any claim or right of action against the Contractor, the Architect, and the Owner beyond such as may legally exist irrespective of the Contract. ARTICLE 11 -- USE OR OCCUPANCY PRIOR TO ACCEPTANCE BY OWNER Section 11.01 -Substantial Completion A. The tern "substantial completion" means the completion of the Work to the extent that Cornell University may have uninterrupted occupancy or use of the facility or specified portion thereof for the purpose for which intended. The Contractor shall obtain all certificates of occupancy required prior to occupancy, and any electrical, mechanical and plumbing certificates, or other certificates or required approvals and acceptances by City, County, and State governments or other authority having jurisdiction. Section 11.02 -Occupancy Prior to Acceptance A. If, before Final Acceptance, the Owner desires Beneficial Occupancy of the Work, or any part thereof, which is completed or partly completed, or to place or install therein equipment and furnishings, the Owner shall have the right to do so, and the Contractor shall in no way interfere with or object to said Beneficial Occupancy by the Owner. B. Said Beneficial Occupancy (1) shall not constitute acceptance of space, systems, materials or elements of the Work, nor shall said Beneficial Occupancy affect the start of any guarantee period, and (2) shall not affect the obligations of the Contractor for Work which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract or other obligations of the Contractor under the Contract. C. The Contractor shall continue the performance of the Work in a manner which shall not unreasonably interfere with said use, occupancy and operation by the Owner. ARTICLE 12 -- PAYMENT Section 12.01 -Provision for Payment A. The Owner agrees to pay the Contract Price to the Contractor for the perfornance of this Contract and the fulfillment of all the Contractor's obligations. The Contract Price means all costs reimbursable under the Contract Documents. 20 IRev 08-2012 B. The final certificate of the Architect shall certify that the Contract has been completed within the stipulated time, and shall not be issued until all drawings and specifications have been returned to the Owner. The issuance of said certificates, however, or any payments made thereon shall not lessen the total responsibility of the Contractor to complete the work to the satisfaction of the Owner in accordance with the Contract. C. Payments on the Contract Price shall be made each month as the work progresses in accord with the following procedure: 1. The Contractor's schedule of values, including quantities, aggregating the total Contract Price, divided so as to facilitate payments to subcontractors as specified herein, shall be the basis for monthly progress payments. This schedule, attached hereto as Exhibit "B" and made a part of the Contract Documents, when approved by the Owner and Architect shall be used as a basis for progress payments. In applying for payments, the Contractor shall submit a statement based upon this approved schedule. 2. (a) On a date agreed upon by the Owner, Architect, and Contractor, a meeting shall be held by the Owner to review the work completed and materials on hand. This meeting shall review each item to be submitted by the Contractor in the requisition for payment. (b) On the first day of each month, or as soon thereafter as practicable, the Contractor shall submit a written statement, including Contract Number, full name of the project and the name of the Owner's Representative as set forth in Article 15, Section 15.08, in approved fornat to the Architect with five (5) copies, setting forth in detail the cost of the work done and materials delivered to the job site up to and including the last day of the previous month and shall make application for payment of ninety percent (90%) of the amount of said statement, less the aggregate of all previous payments made by the Owner against the Contract Price. (c) Each statement and application shall be accompanied by duplicate copies of an affidavit, executed by the Contractor, certifying that the statement is true and correct, and that all bills for labor, and materials incorporated in or delivered to the job, due and payable at the time of the preceding progress payment, have been paid. Before final payment is made, the Contractor shall submit evidence that all payrolls, material bills and other indebtedness incurred in connection with the Contract have been paid, including final waivers of any liens. (d) If, pursuant to a prior written agreement with the Owner, payments are requested on account of materials or equipment not incorporated in the work which have been delivered and suitably stored at the site, or at some other location, such payments shall be conditioned upon submission by the Contractor of bills of sale, insurance certificates, notice of bonded warehousing, in accordance with Exhibit "H". The Contractor shall bear the cost of transporting materials stored off-site to the site. 21 Rev os-2012 3. Each such application for payment shall be subject to the review and approval of the Architect. If the Architect finds that the affidavit and application for payment are acceptable and that all the above requirements in connection therewith have been complied with, the Architect shall, within seven (7) calendar days after receiving such application for payment, certify to the Owner that the payment applied for is due and payable to the Contractor. The Architect shall submit the approved applications for payment to: Facilities Contracts 121 Humphreys Service Building Cornell University Ithaca, New York 14853 4. The issuance of a Certificate for Payment constitutes a representation by the Architect to the Owner, based on the date of the Application for Payment, that the work has progressed to the point indicated, that, to the best of their knowledge, information, and belief, the quality of the work is in accordance with the Contract Documents and that the Contractor is entitled to payment in the amount certified. After the Architect has issued a Certificate for Payment, the Owner shall make payment in the manner provided in the Agreement within thirty (30) calendar days of receipt of the approved Certificate from the Architect. However, by issuing a Certificate for Payment, the Architect shall not hereby be deemed to represent that the Architect has made exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the work or that the Architect has reviewed the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, or proceedings or that the Architect has made any examination to ascertain how or for what purpose the Contractor has used the monies previously paid on account of the Contract Sum. 5. Any reduction with respect to retention shall be done in accordance with the Change Order provisions as outlined in Article 4 of these General Conditions. The Contractor shall submit to the Owner a written request for such reduction including a Consent of the Surety for such reduction. 6. The remaining ten percent (10%) of the value of the work done and materials furnished and installed under this Agreement shall be retained by the Owner as part security for the faithful performance of the Contractor's work within the time specified, and shall be paid as indicated in Section 12.04. D. "Schedule of Amounts for Contract Payments" and "Schedule Contractors Monthly Requisitions" (AIA Document G702; Application and Certificate for Payment) must be submitted, in the form as those contained herein as Exhibit "D", to comply with requirements for tax exemption. 22 Rev 08-2012 Section 12.02 -Withholding Payments A. The Owner may, on account of subsequently discovered evidence, withhold or nullify the whole or a part of any Certificate to such extent as may be necessary to protect the Owner from loss on account of: 1. Defective work not remedied. 2. To assure payment of just claims of any persons supplying labor or materials for the work and to discharge any lien filed against the Owner's property. 3. A reasonable doubt that the Contract can be completed for the balance of the Contract Price then unpaid. 4. Damage to another Contractor. 5. Unsatisfactory prosecution of the work by the Contractor. 6. Failure to provide and maintain an acceptable Critical Path Method Network Schedule. Section 12.03 -Documents and Conditions Precedent to Final Payment A. As-Built Documentation 1. Prior to acceptance by the Owner of all work covered by the Contract, the Contractor shall furnish to the Owner through the Architect one (1) set of current reproducible full-size Contract Drawings on which the Contractor has recorded in a neat and workmanlike manner all instances where actual field construction differs from work as indicated on the Contract Drawings. B. Final Documentation: 1 .Prior to final payment, and before the issuance of a final certificate for payment in accordance with the provisions of these General Conditions, file the following documents with the Owner. a. Warranties, Bonds, Service & Maintenance Contracts and any other extended guarantees stated in the technical sections of the Specifications. b. Release or Waiver of Lien for the Contractor and Sub-Contractors in accordance with Exhibit C, attached hereto. c. Project Record Documents as defined in General Requirements Section 01 78 39. d. Notification that Final Punch List work has been completed. e. Manufacturers Instruction and Maintenance Manuals as defined in General Requirements Section 01 78 23. 23 Rev 08-2012 f. Fixed Equipment Inventory as defined in General Requirements Section 01 78 22. 2. The Contractor shall also provide a CD containing scanned .pdf format and/or Word Documents of all documentation. Section 12.04 -Final Payment and Release A. When the Contractor determines that the work or a designated portion thereof is substantially complete, the Contractor shall prepare for submission to the Owner a list of items to be completed or corrected. This list, prepared by the Contractor, shall constitute a complete detailed list of defects and deficiencies which, when remedied, will complete all Contract requirements. The submittal shall be accompanied by a statement to that effect. B. The failure to include any items on such list does not alter the responsibility of the Contractor to complete all work in accordance with the Contract Documents. When the Architect, on the basis of an inspection, determines that the work is substantially complete, the Architect will then prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion. C. Upon receipt of written notice that the work is ready for final inspection and acceptance, the Architect will promptly make such inspection and, when the Architect finds the work acceptable under the provisions of the Contract Documents, and the Contract fully performed, and if bonds have been required, the written Consent of the Surety to the payment of the balance due, and a satisfactory Release of Lien, attached hereto as Exhibit "C" and made a part of the Contract Documents, has been submitted by the Contractor, each subcontractor and sub-subcontractor, the Contractor will promptly issue a final Certificate for Payment, stating that to the best of their knowledge, information, and belief, and on the basis of their observations and inspections the work has been completed in accordance with the tenns and conditions of the Contract Documents, and that the entire balance is due and payable. D. All prior certificates upon which progress payments may have been made, being estimates, shall be subject to correction to the final certificate. E. The acceptance by the Contractor of the final payment aforesaid shall constitute a general release of the Owner and its agents or representatives from all claims and liability to the Contractor. ARTICLE 13 -- TAX EXEMPTION Section 13.01 -Tax Exemption A. The Owner is exempt from payment of Federal, State and local taxes, including sales and compensating use taxes on all materials and supplies incorporated into the completed Work. These taxes are not to be included in bids. This exemption does not apply to tools, machinery, equipment or other property leased by or to the Contractor or a Subcontractor, or to supplies and materials which, even though they are consumed, are not incorporated into the completed Work, and the Contractor and Subcontractors shall be responsible for and pay any and all applicable taxes, including sales and compensating use taxes, on said leased tools, machinery, equipment or other property and upon all said unincorporated supplies and materials. 24 Rev 08-2012 B. The Contractor and Subcontractor shall obtain any and all necessary certificates or other documentation from the appropriate governmental agency or agencies, and use said certificates or other documentation as required by law, rule or regulation. ARTICLE 14 -- GUARANTEE Section 14.01 -Guarantee A. The Contractor, at the convenience of the Owner, shall remove, replace and/or repair at their own costs and expense any defects in workmanship, materials, ratings, capacities or characteristics occurring in or to the work covered by Contract for the period of one (1) year or within such longer period as may otherwise be provided in the Contract, the period of such guarantee to commence with the Owner's final acceptance of all work covered under the Contract, and the Contractor, upon demand, shall pay for all damage to all other work resulting from such defects and all expenses necessary to remove, replace and/or repair such work which may be damaged in removing, replacing or repairing the said defects. Acceptance means final acceptance of the entire work, early partial occupancy notwithstanding B. In some instances the nature of the work may require the Owner to accept various components, equipment, spaces or phase of the project. In such cases the Contractor shall submit a separate guarantee for the Owner's acceptance on the form attached hereto as Exhibit "E". Upon completion of the project, the Contractor shall submit to the Owner a guarantee for the project on the form attached hereto as Exhibit "E". ARTICLE 15 -- STANDARD PROVISIONS Section 15.01 -Provisions Required by Law Deemed Inserted Each and every provision of law or clause required by law to be inserted in the Contract shall be deemed to be inserted therein. Section 15.02 -Laws Governing the Contract The Contract shall be governed by the laws of the State of New York, without reference to conflict of law principles. Any and all proceedings relating to the subject matter hereof shall be maintained in New York State Supreme Court, Tompkins County or the federal district court for the Northern District of New York, which courts shall have exclusive jurisdiction for such purposes. Section 15.03 -Assignments The Contractor shall not assign the Contract in whole or in part without prior written consent of the Owner. Section 15.04 -No Third Party Rights Nothing in the Contract shall create or shall give to third parties any claim or right of action against the Owner, beyond such rights as may legally exist ilespective of the Contract. 25 Rev o8-2012 Section 15.05 -Waiver of Rights of Owner A. None of the provisions of the Contract will be considered waived by the Owner except when such waiver is given in writing. Section 15.06 -Nondiscrimination and Affirmative Action A. The Contractor shall submit copies of their Affirmative Action Program and the Affirnative Action Programs of its proposed subcontractors within thirty (30) days after execution of a contract. A meeting to review these forms will be scheduled by the Owner after receipt of the same. Such Affirmative Action Programs must be satisfactory to the Owner. The Contractor shall designate a Compliance Officer in their organization who shall be responsible for implementing the Affirmnative Action Program of the Contractor and its subcontractors. Said Compliance Officer shall make such periodic, but not less than monthly, reports on the Plans' progress and on the number of women and minority workers employed. These reports shall be submitted to the Owner Representative on the Affirmative Action Workforce Report and Minority -Women Utilization Report attached hereto as Exhibit "F". B. The Contractor agrees, in addition to any other nondiscrimination provisions of the Contract, that the Contractor shall comply fully with and shall cooperate in the implementation of any Affirmative Action Requirements for Equal Employment Opportunity and Minority Business Enterprises (MBE) participation required by the Owner, at no additional cost to the Owner. Any such requirements shall be incorporated in their entirety in all subcontracts of any tier. C. These provisions shall be deemed supplementary to the nondiscrimination provisions required by applicable federal and state law. D. The Contractor shall submit for Owner approval, a plan of affirmative action designed to assure minority group members an equal opportunity in employment and subcontract work within thirty (30) days of contract award. The Contractor's Affirmative Action Plan must be approved by the Owner. E. The following forms, attached hereto as Exhibit "F" and made a part of the Contract Documents, are to be used in submitting Affirmative Action Plans and hereby made a part of the Contract Documents. I. Use of MBE and WBE Vendors (Form I) 2. Summary of bid Activity with MBE and WBE Subcontractors and Vendors (Form II) 3. Affirmative Action Workforce Report (Form III) 4. Minority-Women Utilization Report (Form IV) This Plan is supplementary to all federal and state nondiscrimination requirements. Cornell University is an Equal Employment Opportunity Employer. 26 Rev 08-2012 F. The goals for participation (minority and female), expressed in percentage terms for the Contractor's aggregate work force in each trade on all construction work, are as follows: Carpenters 4.8% Electricians 14.1% Laborers 7.8% Masons 2.8% Painters 25.7% Plumbers 5.9% Sheetmetal Workers 4.0% G. The Contractor shall demonstrate compliance with these goals by submission of the Affirmative Action Workforce Report (Exhibit F -Form III) on a monthly basis. The Prime Contractor shall provide a single monthly report inclusive of all subcontractor information for the project labor. On-site office personnel should not be included in the "workforce" totals. Such forms shall be submitted to: Facilities Contracts 121 Humphreys Service Building Cornell University Ithaca, New York 14853 Section 15.07 -Limitation on Actions No action or proceeding shall be filed or shall be maintained by the Contractor against the Owner unless said action shall be commenced within six (6) months after receipt by the Owner of the Contractor's final requisition or, if the Contract is terminated by the Owner, unless said action is commenced within six (6) months after the date of said termination. Section 15.08 -Owner's Representative The Owner shall designate a representative authorized to act in its behalf with respect to the Project. The Owner or its representative shall examine documents and shall render approvals and decisions pertaining thereto promptly, to avoid unreasonable delay in the progress of the Contractor's work. Only directives from Cornell University's designated representative (BRIAN C. WATSON) shall be recognized by the Contractor. 27 Rev 08-2012 ARTICLE 16 -- ACCOUNTINGS, INSPECTION AND AUDIT The Contractor agrees to keep books and records showing the actual costs incurred for the Work. Such books and records (including, without limitation, any electronic data processing files used by the Contractor in analyzing and recording the Work) shall be open for inspection and audit by the Owner and its authorized representatives at reasonable hours at the Contractor's local office or at the Owner's office, if necessary, and shall be retained by the Contractor for a period of seven years after the Work has been completed, except that if any litigation, claim or audit is started before the expiration date of the seven year period, the records shall be retained until all litigation, claims or audit findings involving the records have been resolved.. Each Sub- Contractor shall be similarly obligated to maintain, for inspection and audit by the Owner, books and records respecting the Work. If requested by the Owner, the Contractor shall furnish copies of any and all subcontracts, purchase orders and/or requisitions of any nature associated with the project. ARTICLE 17 -CONTRACTOR PERFORMANCE EVALUATION The Owner shall schedule a meeting at fifty percent (50%) based on project invoicing and at project completion to review with the Contractor their performance for the project unless performance warrants additional reviews. The Owner shall present its review based on the attached "Contractor Performance Evaluation", Exhibit I. The Contractor shall be given the opportunity to provide input as to the findings of the evaluation after completion by the Owner. ARTICLE 18 -- ROYALTIES AND PATENTS The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees and shall defend all suits or claims for infringement of any patents, and shall save Cornell University harmless from loss on account thereof; except that Cornell University shall be responsible for all such loss when a particular process or product is specified by Cornell University unless the Contractor shall have reason to believe that the particular process or product infringes a patent, in which event it shall be responsible for loss on account thereof unless it promptly provides such information to Cornell University. ARTICLE 19 -- CONFIDENTIALITY AND USE OF OWNER'S NAME Section 19.01 -Release of Information The Contractor shall not divulge information concerning the Work (including news releases, internal house organs, applications for permits, etc.) to anyone without Cornell University's prior written approval, except to subcontractors and suppliers to the extent that they need such information to perform their work. The Contractor shall require a similar agreement from each such subcontractor and supplier, requiring their compliance with the foregoing. Cornell University reserves the right to release all information, as well as to time its release and specify its form and content. The Contractor may obtain Cornell University's approval to release information by submitting such request to the Cornell University Project Manager. 28 Rev 08-2012 Section 19.02 -Confidential Infonnation The term "Confidential Inforiation" means all unpublished information obtained or received from Cornell University during the term of this Contract which relates to Cornell University's research, development, manufacturing and business affairs. The Contractor shall not disclose confidential information to any person, except to its employees and subcontractors to the extent that they require it in the perfonnance of their Work, during the term of this Contract and until authorized by Cornell University in writing. The Contractor and its subcontractors shall hold all confidential information in trust and confidence for Cornell University, and shall use confidential information only for the purpose of this Contract. The Contractor and its subcontractors shall require all of their employees to whom confidential information is revealed to comply with these provisions. The Contractor shall have an agreement with each subcontractor, requiring their compliance with the foregoing. If it becomes necessary for the Contractor to defend in case of litigation related to its services rendered, pernission shall be sought from Cornell University, who shall not unreasonably withhold such permission, before any disclosures are made. This Section does not apply to infornation which (1) is or becomes known in public domain or (2) is learned by the Contractor from third parties. Section 19.03 -Use of Owner's Name The Contractor shall not use, in its external, advertising, marketing program, or other promotional efforts, any date, pictures, or other representation of the Owner except on the specific written authorization in advance of the Owner's Representative. ARTICLE 20 -- CORNELL UNIVERSITY STANDARDS OF ETHICAL CONDUCT Cornell University expects all executive officers, trustees, faculty, staff, student employees, and others, when acting on behalf of the university, to maintain the highest standard of ethical conduct as per Cornell University's Policy 4.6 -Standards of Ethical Conduct, a copy of which is available at http://finance.fs.cornell.edu/contracts/forns/contractors.cfin. This includes treating equally all persons and firms currently doing business with or seeking to do business with or for Cornell University, whether as contractors, subcontractors, or suppliers. Such persons and firms are respectfully reminded that Cornell University employees and their families may not personally benefit from Cornell University's business relationships by the acceptance of gifts or gratuities, defined as a gift in excess of $75.00 given to a Cornell employee for personal use. Items not considered gifts/gratuities include occasional business meals, items of an advertising nature, and items that are generally distributed to all potential customers. In addition, it is expected that the Contractor's officers and employees shall conduct all business related to this Contract within the highest ethical standards, observing applicable policies, practices, regulations, law, and professional standards. All parties are expected to report violations of this policy to appropriate university personnel. You may file a report to on the web https://secure.ethicspoint.con/domnain/en/report custom.asp?clientid=6357 or contact Cornell University through EthicsPoint by dialing toll-free 1-866-293-3077. 29 Rev 08-2012 EXHIBIT "A" Cornell University Facilities Services Distribution to: OWNER n ARCHITECT 0 CONTRACTOR n CHANGE ORDER FIELD n OTHER 0 Cornell University Facilities Contracts 121 Humphreys Service Building Ithaca, New York 14853 PROJECT: CHANGE ORDER NUMBER: TO (Contractor): INITIATION DATE: OWNER'S CONTRACT NO: CONTRACT DATE: You are directed to make the following changes in this Contract: Item No. Description Reference Amount Not valid until signed by both the Owner and Contractor. Signature of the Contractor indicates the Contractor's agreement herewith, including any adjustments in the Contract Price or Contract Time. The original (Contract Price) was------------------------------------------------------$ Net change by previously authorized Change Orders----------------------------------------$ The (Contract Price) prior to this Change Order was $ The (Contract Price) will be (increased) (decreased) (unchanged) by this Change Order ----------------$ The new (Contract Price) including this Change Order will be-$ The Contract Time will be (increased) (decreased) (unchanged) by Days. The Date of Substantial Completion as of the date of this Change Order therefore is AUTHORIZED SIGNATURES: _____________________________CORNELL UNIVERSITY CONTRACTOR OWNER BY BY TITLE TITLE DATE DATE EXHIBIT "A-i" CORNELL UNIVERSITY Division of Facilities Services Construction Contract Change Order Forms Instructions to Change Order Documentation Facilities Services ("FS") has created this Standard Change Contract Change Order Request and Change Order Summary Forms to facilitate preparation of contract change orders in conformity with construction contract requirements. The forms have been prepared to comply with contract requirements presented in the General Conditions, dated August 2012. The Change Order Request form shall be used by the Contractor and by all Subcontractors in preparing their cost estimates for services associated with the Changed Work. The Contractor shall submit to the Owner the Change Order Summary Form with all associated back-up documentation. Direct Cost of the Work: 1. Direct Labor -Include the "wages paid" hourly direct labor and/or foreman necessary to perform the required change. "Wages paid" is the burdened labor rate documented in accordance with Section 2.14 -Project Labor Rates of the General Conditions. "Assigned Personnel or Work Crews" should be stated by trade or type of work performed not by name of person or company title. For example carpenter, mason, backhoe operator, etc. Supervisory personnel in district or home office shall not be included. Supervisory personnel on the job-site, but with broad supervisory responsibility and paid as salaried personnel, shall not be included as Direct Labor 2. Direct Material -Include the acquisition cost of all materials directly required to perform the required change. Examples of "Unit of Measure" include square feet, cubic yards, linear feet, days, gallons, etc. 3. Equipment -Include the rental cost of equipment items necessary to perform the change. For company-owned equipment items, include documentation of internal rental rates. Charges for small tools, and craft specific tools are not allowed. Bond Premiums The Contractor's actual documented bond premium rate shall be added to all direct and indirect costs of the proposed change. Overhead & Profit The Contractor's overhead & profit rate shall be added to all direct and indirect costs of the proposed change in accordance with the Contract. EXHIBIT "A-I" CORNELL UNIVERSITY CONSTRUcION CONTRACT CHANGE ORDER REQUEST FACILITIES SERVICES COR # PROJECT TITLE: CONTRACT NO. O Name of Contractor/Subcontractor performing Work: DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A- DIRECT COST OF WORK: I LABOR (Atach SupmoingDocumentation) HOURLY WAGE HOURS TOTAL ASSIGNED PERSONNEL OR WORK CREW RATEPAID WORKED COST LABOR TOTAL 2 MATERIAL (Attach Sup Domentat) UNFIT UNIT OF REQUIRE TOTAL MATERIAL REQUIRED FOR CHANGE PRICE 1E AStTJU UITS COST MATERIAL TOTAL 3 EQUIPMENT (Attach Supponing Documentation) UNIT UNIT OF REQUIRED TOTAL EQUIP1MENT REQUIRED FOR CHANGE MEASURE COST EQUIPMENT TOTAL DIRECT COST (SUM 1. 2,3) 4 OVERHEAD AND PROFIT OH&P Rate 5 BOND PREMIU Bond Premium Rate TOTAL COST TOTAL CONTRACT DAYS ADDED/DELETED FROM PROJECT SCHEDULE EXHIBIT "A-1" CORNELL UNIVERSITY CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT CIANGE ORDER SUMLARY FACILITIES SERVICES COR # PROJECT TITLE: CONTRACT NO. DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. DIRECT COST OF WORK: I NAME OF CONTRACTORISL'BCONTRACTOR TOTAL PERFORMINGIWORK COST DIRECT COST (SUM 1. 2.3) 4 PRIME CONTRACTOR OVERHEAD AND PROFIT OH&P Rate 5 PRIME CONTRACTOR BOND PREMIUI Bond Premium Rate TOTAL COST OF PROPOSED CHANGE ORDER ITEM TOTAL CONTRACT DAYS ADDEDIDELETED FROM PROJECT SCHEDULE SCHEDULE OF VALUES FOR CONTRACT PAYMENTS EXHIBIT "B" (Based on Original Estimate) Name of Contractor Project Title Total Cost Item Description Unit of Labor Material Other Cost of Per No. of Item Quantity Measure Cost Cost Costs Item Unit (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) TOTALS $ $ $ $ $ NOTE: Each Allowance must be listed as a Separate Item. Approved: Contractor Date Architect Date Owner Date FINAL RELEASE EXHIBIT "C" FINAL WAIVER OF CLAIMS AND LIENS AND RELEASE OF RIGHTS Date Contract Date Project Contract Price Address Net Extras and Deductions City Adjusted Contract Price County Amount Previously Paid State Balance Due -Final Payment The undersigned hereby acknowledges that the above Balance Due when paid represents payment in full for all labor, materials, etc., furnished by the below named Contractor or Supplier in connection with its work on the above Project in accordance with the Contract. hi consideration of the amounts and sums previously received, and the payment of $ being the full and Final Payment amount due, the below named Contractor or Supplier does hereby waive and release the Owner from any and all claims and liens and rights of liens upon the premises described above, and upon improvements now or hereafter thereon, and upon the monies or other considerations due or to become due from the Owner or friom any other person, firm or corporation, said claims, liens and rights of liens being on account of labor, services, materials, fixtures or apparatus heretofore furnished by the below named Contractor or Supplier to the Project. The premises as to which said claims and liens are hereby released are identified as follows: The undersigned further represents and warrants that he/she is duly authorized and empowered to sign and execute this waiver on his/her own behalf and on behalf of the company or business for which he/she is signing; that it has properly performed all work and furnished all materials of the specified quality per plans and specifications and in a good and workmanlike manner, fully and completely; that it has paid for all the labor, materials, equipment and services that it has used or supplied, that it has no other outstanding and unpaid applications, invoices, retentions, holdbacks, expenses employed in the prosecution of work, chargebacks or unbilled work or materials against the Owner as of the date of the aforementioned last and final payment application; and that any materials which have been supplied or incorporated into the above premises were either taken from its fully-paid or open stock or were fully paid for and supplied on the last and final payment application or invoice. The undersigned further agrees to defend, indemnify and hold harmless the Owner for any losses or expenses (including without limitation reasonable attorneys' fees) should any such claim, lien or right of lien be asserted by the below named Contractor or Supplier or by any of its or their laborers, material persons or subcontractors. In addition, for and in consideration of the amounts and sums received, the below named Contractor or Supplier hereby waives, releases and relinquishes any and all claims, rights or causes of action in equity or law whatsoever arising out of through or under the above mentioned Contract and the performance of work pursuant thereto. The below named Contractor or Supplier further guarantees that all portions of the work furnished and installed are in accordance with the Contract and that the terms of the Contract with respect to this guarantee will remain in effect for the period specified in said Contract. Sworn to before ine this Corporation or Business Name Day of 20 By: Title: A-r-LICATION AND CERTIFICATE FOR PAYME.U .AIA DOCUMENT G702 (Instructions on reverse side) PAGE ONE OF TO OWNER: PROJECT: APPLICATION NO.: Distribution to: PERIOD TO: O OWNER PROJECT NOS.: 0 ARCHITECT O CONTRACTOR FROM CONTRACTOR: VIA ARCHITECT CONTRACT DATE: 0 O CONTRACT FOR: The undersigned Contractor certifies that to the bestof the Contractor's knowledge, infor-CONTRACTOR'S APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT mation and belief the Work covered by this Application for Payment has been completed Application is made for payment, as shown below, in. connection with the Contract, in accordance with the Contract Documents, that all amounts have been paid by the Continuation Sheet, AIA Document G703, is attached. Contractor for Work for which previous Certificates for Payment were issued and pay- ments received from the Owner, and that current payment shown herein is now due. I. ORIGINAL CONTRACT SUM.................$s CONTRACTOR:2. Net change by Change Orders ........ ...S 3. CONTRACT SUM TO DATE (Line I ± 2) ........ By: Date: 4. TOTAL COMPLETED & STORED TO DATE ...... S State of: (Column G on G703) County of: 5. RETAINAGE: Subscribed and sworn to before a. % of Completed Work $ me this day of (Columns D + E on G703) b. _ % of Stored Material 3 . (Column F on G703) Notary Public: Total Retainage (Line 5a + 5b or Total in Column I of G703) .My .C..misoepi. $ 6. TOTAL EARNED LESS RETAINAGE ... ........__ ARCHITECT'S CERTIFICATE FOR PAYMENT (Line 4 less Line 5 Total) 7. LESS PREVIOUS CERTIFICATES FOR PAYMENT In accordance with the Contract Documents based on on-site observations and the data (Line6 frn) piorertiicate_.............._ comprising this application, the Architect certifies to the Owner that to thle best of the(LineArchiect's knowledge, inforation and belief the work has progressed as indicated, the 8. CURRENT PAYMENT DUE ..quality of the Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents, anI te Contractor is entitle.d to paymnent of the AMOUNT CERTIFIED. 9. BALANCE TO FINISH, INCLUDING RETAINAGE (Line 3 less Line 6) $ _ _ _ AMOUNT CERTIFIED .......... ........ ......$ _____________________________________________ ('Attacb explanation if amnount certified differs fr-om ihe amount applied for initial CHANGE ORDER SUMMARY ADDITIONS DEDUCTIONS allfigures on tbis Application and on the Continuation Sheet that are changed to Total changes approved in Conform to the amount certified.) previous months by Owner ARCHITECT Total approved this Month By: Dae: TOTALS This Certificate ls not negotiable. The AMOUNT CeRTIFIED is payable only to thle Con- NET CHANGES by Chan tractor named herein. Issuance, payment and acceptance of payment are withoet ___ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ prejudice to any rights of the owner or Contractor undr this Contract. AlA DOCUMENT GM0 -APPLICATION AND CERIItCATE. FOR PAYMENT -1992 EDITION -A1A0 (01992 -THE AMERICAN INSrTITE OP ARCHiTECt'S, t735 NEWS YOERK AVENUE, NW, WASIiNGTON. DC. 2065292 WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and wic subpect the violator to tegat fcteo y G7w2-1e92 metLeevdfo h weadta cretpyetsonhri snwde CONTINUATION SHEET AIA DOCUMENT G703 (Instructions on reverse side) PAGE OF PAGES AIA Document G702, APPLICATION AND CERTIFICATE FOR PAYMENT, APPLICATION NO.: containing Contractor's signed Certification, is attached. APPLICATION DATE: In tabulations below, amounts are stated to the nearest dollar. PERIOD TO: Use Column I on Contracts where variable retainage for line items may apply ARCHITECT'S PROJECT NO.: A B C D E F G H I WORK COMPLETED MATERIALS TOTAL PRESENTLY COMPLETED BALANCE RETAINAGEITEM DESCRIPTION OF WORK SCHEDULED FROM PREVIOUS STORED AND STORED % TO (IF VARIABLE)NO VALUE APPLICATION THIS PERIOD (NOT IN TO DATE (G -C) FINISH RATE) (D + E) D OR E) (D+E+F) (C -G) AtA DOCUMENT G703 * CONTINUATION SHEET FOR G702 * 1992 EDITION * AIA 5 * @M92 * THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, NW., WASHINGTON, DC A065292 * WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecutlon. G703-1992 EXHIBIT "E" GUARANTEE Date: In accordance with plans and specifications and the terms and conditions of our contract with Cornell University dated , we hereby guarantee the as found in the specifications for , Ithaca, New York to be free (Project Title) from defects in materials and workmanship for the period of _ year(s) from , the date of acceptance by the Owner. (Date) (COMPANY) By: Title: EXHIBIT "F" FORM I COBNELLH UNH VERSI25TY CONTRACTOR'S AFFIRMATIVE ACTION PLAN Use of MBE and WBE Vendors Please print or type all information, except where a signature is required. PROJECT: Amount of Contract: $ Name of Prime Contract Bidder: Address (Street, City, State and Zip Code): Telephone Number (Including Area Code): Trade: 1. List previous Cornell University work done by your firm: 2. Do you intend to subcontract any work on this project? Yes No A. What is the total dollar value of work you intend to subcontract? Amount $ AND Range: From $ to $ 3. Do you intend to purchase supplies and/or use vendor services? A. What is the total dollar value of your intended purchase and/or vendor? Amount $ AND Range: From $ to $ 4. List the work you plan to subcontract in area A. below and list the items you propose to purchase and/or vendor services you propose to use in area B. Use additional sheet(s) if required. A. Trade Amount of Work to be B. Supplies and/or Vendor Services Subcontracted Trade Amount Item Amount $ $ $ $ $ $ 1 EXHIBIT "F" FORM I 5. Indicate by dollar value and percentage of contract, the total of your goal for minority and female vendors and subcontractor participation including your goal for purchases and services. (The percentage given should be a percentage of your total contract amount. MBE Amount $ AND Percentage % WBE Amount $ AND Percentage % 6. Indicate your goal for minority participation in the labor force by dollar value and percentage of total monthly manpower per trade. MBE Amount $ AND Percentage % WBE Amount $ AND Percentage % 7. List MBE and WBE vendors utilized by your firm over the past five (5) years: MBE or WBE Vendor CONTRACT (Indicate which) ADDRESS PROJECT TRADE AMOUNT This space provided for any conments your organization may have regarding the utilization of MBE and WBE vendors: OFFICER OF PRIME CONTRACT BIDDER: Name and Title: Date: Signature: 2 EXHIBIT "F" FORM II CONTRACTOR'S AFFIRMATIVE ACTION PLAN Summary of Bid Activity with MBE and WBE Subcontractors and Vendors Please print or type all information, except where a signature is required. PROJECT: Name of Prime Contract Bidder: Address (Street, City, State and Zip Code): Contact Person (Name, Title and Telephone Number): MBE and WBE Subcontractor/Vendor Item/ Bid Submitted: Award Status Date of (Indicate which) Trade Date Amount Date Amount Elimination EXPLANATION OF ELMINATION: Include meetings held for negotiation, etc. (Use additional sheet if necessary) OFFICER OF FIRM: Name and Title: Date: Signature: EXHIBIT "F" FORM III CORNELL NT.ITNERSET Pk prrnt ope ri 3100. PROJECT PRIE CONTRACTGR AFFIRATIE ACTION WORHFORCE REPOR T C: No. ___or ofend of T-1 j- cf: Aij o To i:F CT : cnL. HOU3 17- 1 om Eon (eeale M :e Il Mrle -em:- -M:ue tWo . Lcal H) Ey .ToY n : an'~ct Uni e Hon Ho-r HofH:ir HotrF EnEonrsH EasHor Eml M Fale Fer I11 R[ILJ11J1T[ZI NOTE: Tire Prime Cocautcror htdl povi: an :iD le monfIv rep:-t incloue of oll ntle:ouwc:o::infcnn: or for tire pro;ect. EXHIBIT "F" FORM IV CORNELL UNIVERSITY Please print or type all information. PROJECT PRIME CONTRACTOR MINORITY -WOMEN UTILITZATION REPORT DATE Dollar Dollar % of Dollar % of Prime Contractor, Craft Amount Amount Prime Amount Prime Subcontractor and and/or of Minority Firm of Total Women Firm of Total Sub-Subcontractor's Name Trade Subcontract Name -Awards Trade MBE Contract Contract Name -Awards Trade WBE Contract Contract TOTALS$$ EXHIBIT "G" PROJECT fTTh C TONTEACT NO. COQNTRACTOR: 8lE EFFECTIVE DATE: EIRjATION DATE: Bae HouRy ae: S Payroll Taxes and lnsurance % per Hour FIC.A. ____ Federal Unemplocennt ____ Stare Unemployment __________ * Workeat Copeeation *Bodity In ury & Property Damage Disability- TOTAL% PaHuoll Laae ad lsnce Rates: Base Rate a Total F = S Rates are net Contraca cot aferpremium rcoonts and erieene mod atiou have been applied agamsta manua rat Supplemental Benefi $ per Hour Vacation Healkh & Welfre PenPion AmmTit Education! Training Total Hourly Frinre Benefora S Homur Lab: Rate: Bare Late. Tarxe:Ga-u:ence aFrinaue Benefit: S CONTRACTORTS CERTIFICATION actual anltue co inuard Signaur of Auhrzd Rpreettiv'e: Print Name: ________________________ Print Title:______________________ EXHIBIT "H" STORED MATERIALS INVOICING Cornell UniversityDOMNTTN Facilities Services PROJECT TITLE: CONTRACT NO. CONTRACTOR: SUBCONTRACTOR: REASON FOR REQUEST: APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT NO. DATE: 1 Material Identification Description: Quantity: Provide Specific Location ofMaterials Stored: 2 Material Value S Attach an Invoice or Quantified Statement of Value. 3 Certificate of Insurance Attach a Certificate of Insurance for the above specified materials. Certificate shall name "Cornell University" as a loss payee with respect to the specified materials. 4 Transfer of Title The Contractor hereby agrees to transfer complete ownership of all listed materials to Cornell University at the time payment is made to Contractor for the above referenced Application for Payment. The Contractor remains responsible for all contractual requirements for the above listed materials including complete installation and providing of all warranties. Signed: Date: EXHIBIT "I" E-2h1 1 S5 211CES Contractor Performance Evauation Prooect Snmato Pa~t Team: ___________ ____ _____________________ cj T[ CL N/A Osigina P A mt or .a ca Type of Contract 0 0 0 -N P~eec CrmectF-, Performance Evakuation Fieaae glre on~ a at Add :: :-pe- c: rments as reudto jstif yur r-ating Uncepal Peoor Asis e Von, 00o E caIoi 1 cuS:IIeWOrtrashtp 1 2 3 4 5 b W/orkrr3 p C a to 23:-:V S To: >-qu::r .0 -q0: 4.E qLlya.:2 C -sdcpan i~ 00 2 Shdunr redIl\t 1 2 3 4 5 4 14 :c 00r :~ pa0 m1e 021re-3o 4c 5o~ tl Rat afontanorvtestnac f rep0 rd to pr ctsfe a. T rney tomeists ~lor sesectely prora f Knwng wor sH tes 3 .Pro0ItfCImbo anlcetcl 2f af3tawrees e Dary and metra ooy eC lousekeeping 1 1501 2 00.1 Response o af concerns) 4 knarWeess f pu 01 sa2fety camet 1 ero~ao 14W30005451? ro 090110 It 6 n :10 otrof: 1 2 3 4 5 rageen rscalce:Idtr a -hr ct a:a:r ng II.2-CFF 1:e:1 .-~:re E 7 Woin RE::1 l! 1 2 3 4 5 -eg Lroerca ra titirty eI: 8 Supvisoy PersnneRan1 2 3 4 5 Scontraccom-out 1 2 3 4 5 a. Triyc4ripl:. iof3.par:1 :t IL TCy ?Zc~u Ill? O' Jt2.t1 1 ge~ldier 3 Summary Sheet Project: Contractor: Ratingpe Perfcrmance Categories Categ V.Weight % ScorinU 1 uallyoc"Wahmaahip 151.1 3 3 oon -coi' M.an geent C0 0.00 4 LEBEYE Faricpation 10 0.00 5 S 0 0.C0 6 C On act.Admnisiration C 0.00 7 o. ing Re atonanep -0.CC 8 Or-Si e puerisco; Personnel Ratng B C.0 9 Contract Cose-Out C 00 0.00 Comments: Rating Reference l-a~ to cnleu'e xpe4 Conel/Contractor Evaluation Review Input (Page 5 to be filled out by the Contractor before the discussion meeting) ContractorProject Date Contractor Comments GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR BIG RED BARN STRUCTURAL IMPROVEMENTS CORNELL UNIVERSITY ITHACA, NEW YORK 14853 January 17, 2014 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR BIG RED BARN STRUCTURAL IMPROVEMENTS TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION PAGE 0111 00 SUMMARY OF THE WORK Subsection 1.1 Work Under Contract 0111 00-1 01 2200 UNIT PRICING Subsection 1.1 Related Documents 01 22 00-1 1.2 Description of Requirements 01 22 00-1 1.3 Schedule of Unit Prices 01 22 00-1 01 2300 ALTERNATES Subsection 1.1 Related Documents 01 23 00-1 1.2 Description of Requirements 01 23 00-1 1.3 Schedule of Alternates 01 23 00-1 01 25 00 SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS Subsection 1.1 General 01 25 00-1 1.2 Products List 01 2500-1 1.3 Contractor's Options 01 2500-1 1.4 Substitutions 01 25 00-1 1.5 Contractor's Representation 01 25 00-3 1.6 Architect's Duties 01 25 00-3 01 3119 PROJECT MEETINGS Subsection 1.1 Description 01 31 19-1 1.2 Pre-Construction Meeting 01 31 19-1 1.3 Progress Meetings 01 31 19-3 01 32 16 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES Subsection 1.1 General 01 32 16-1 1.2 Form of Schedules 01 32 16-1 1.3 Content of Schedules 01 32 16-1 1.4 Progress Revisions 01 32 16-2 1.5 Submissions 01 32 16-3 1.6 Distribution 01 32 16-3 1.7 Stand Down and Restricted Work Dates 01 32 16-3 01 32 33 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION Subsection 1.1 Description 01 32 33-1 3.1 Progress Photographs 01 32 33-1 January 17, 2014 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR BIG RED BARN STRUCTURAL IMPROVEMENTS TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 2 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES Subsection 1.1 General 01 3300-1 1.2 Shop Drawings 01 3300-1 1.3 Product Data 01 3300-2 1.4 Samples 01 33 00-2 1.5 Quality Assurance and Quality Control Submittals 01 33 00-3 1.6 Coordination Drawings 01 33 00-4 1.7 Contractor Responsibilities 01 33 00-4 1.8 Submittal Procedures 01 33 00-5 1.9 Resubmission Requirements 01 33 00-7 1.10 Architect's Duties 01 33 00-7 1.11 Distribution 01 3300-8 01 3529 GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY REQUIREMENTS Subsection 1.1 General 01 3529-1 1.2 Contractor's Safety Plan 01 35 29-1 1.3 Asbestos & Lead 01 3529-1 1.4 Site Visits 01 3529-1 Job Specific Safety Manual Checklist Pre-Renovation Asbestos Survey Report Limited Interior Lead-Based Paint Survey Report 01 3543 GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS Subsection 1.1 General 01 3543-1 1.2 Related Sections 01 3543-1 1.3 Submittals 01 3543-1 1.4 Job Site Administration 01 35 43-1 1.5 Clearing, Site Preparation and Site Use 01 35 43-2 1.7 Noise and Vibration 01 35 43-2 1.8 Dust Control 01 3543-2 1.9 Protection of the Environment 01 35 43-2 1.10 Temporary Re-Routing of Piping and Ductwork 01 35 43-3 1.11 Hazardous or Toxic Materials 01 35 43-4 1.12 Disposal of Waste Material and Title 01 35 43-4 Contractor Waste Material Disposal Plan Definitions for Use with Contractor Waste Material Disposal Plan 01 35 44 SPILL CONTROL Subsection 1.1 Spill Prevention 01 3544-1 1.2 Spill Control Procedures 01 3544-1 1.3 Spill Reporting and Documentation 01 35 44-3 January 17, 2014 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR BIG RED BARN STRUCTURAL IMPROVEMENTS TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 3 0141 00 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS Subsection 1.1 Permits and Licenses 01 41 00-1 1.2 Inspections 01 41 00-1 1.3 Compliance 01 41 00-1 1.4 Owner's Requirements 01 41 00-1 01 45 00 QUALITY CONTROL Subsection 1.1 Description 01 45 00-1 1.2 Control of On-Site Construction 01 45 00-1 1.3 Control of Off-Site Operations 01 45 00-2 1.4 Testing 01 45 00-2 1.5 Owner's Representative 01 45 00-2 01 45 29 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES Subsection 1.1 General 01 45 29-1 1.2 Qualifications of Laboratory 01 45 29-1 1.3 Laboratory Duties 01 45 29-2 1.4 Limitations of Authority of Testing Laboratory 01 45 29-3 1.5 Contractor's Responsibilities 01 45 29-3 01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS Subsection 1.1 Description 01 50 00-1 1.2 Requirements of Regulatory Agencies 01 50 00-1 2.1 Materials, General 01 50 00-1 2.2 Temporary First Aid Facilities 01 50 00-1 2.3 Temporary Fire Protection 01 50 00-1 2.4 Construction Aids 01 50 00-3 2.5 Temporary Enclosures 01 50 00-3 2.6 Tree and Plant Protection 01 5000-3 2.7 Guardrails and Barricades 01 50 00-4 2.8 Project Identification and Signs 01 50 00-4 2.9 Security 01 50 00-4 2.10 Field Offices 01 5000-4 3.1 Preparation 01 50 00-4 3.2 General 01 50 00-5 3.3 Removal 01 50 00-5 01 51 00 TEMPORARY UTILITIES Subsection 1.1 Description 01 51 00-1 1.2 Requirements of Regulatory Agencies 01 51 00-1 2.1 Materials, General 01 51 00-1 2.2 Temporary Electricity, Lighting and Water 01 51 00-1 2.3 Temporary Heat and Ventilation 01 51 00-2 2.4 Temporary Sanitary Facilities 01 51 00-3 3.1 Removal 01 51 00-3 January 17, 2014 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR BIG RED BARN STRUCTURAL IMPROVEMENTS TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 4 01 57 13 SOIL EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL Subsection 1.1 General 01 57 13-1 1.2 Submittals 01 57 13-1 1.3 Plan and Implementation General Requirements 01 57 13-1 1.4 Performance Standards 01 57 13-1 1.5 Erosion and Sediment Control Plan Components 01 57 13-2 1.6 Inspections 01 57 13-3 01 66 00 STORAGE AND PROTECTION Subsection 1.1 General 01 66 00-1 1.2 Transportation and Handling 01 66 00-1 1.3 Storage 01 66 00-1 1.4 Protection 01 66 00-2 1.5 Protection After Installation 01 66 00-3 0173 29 CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING Subsection 1.1 Description 01 73 29-1 1.2 Submittals 01 73 29-2 1.3 Quality Assurances 01 73 29-2 1.4 Warranties 01 73 29-3 2.1 Materials 01 73 29-3 3.1 Inspection 01 73 29-3 3.2 Preparation 01 73 29-4 3.3 Performance 01 73 29-4 3.4 Cleaning 01 73 29-6 01 7700 PROJECT CLOSE OUT Subsection 1.1 Inspections 01 77 00-1 1.2 Final Clean-Up 0177 00-1 1.3 Maintenance Stock 01 77 00-3 01 78 22 INVENTORIES Subsection 1.1 Fixed Equipment Inventory 01 78 22-1 1.2 Roof System Inventory 01 78 22-3 0178 23 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA Subsection 1.1 General 01 78 23-1 1.2 Form of Submittals 01 78 23-1 1.3 Content of Manual 01 78 23-2 1.4 Manual for Materials and Finishes 01 78 23-3 1.5 Manual for Equipment and Systems 01 78 23-4 1.6 Submittal Schedule 01 7823-6 1.7 Instructions of Owner's Personnel 01 78 23-6 1.8 Operating Instructions 01 78 23-7 January 17, 2014 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR BIG RED BARN STRUCTURAL IMPROVEMENTS TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 5 01 78 36 WARRANTIES AND BONDS Subsection 1.1 General 01 78 36-1 1.2 Submittal Requirements 01 78 36-1 1.3 Form of Submittals 01 78 36-1 1.4 Time of Submittals 01 78 36-2 1.5 Submittals Required 01 78 36-2 01 78 39 RECORD DOCUMENTS Subsection 1.1 General 01 7839-1 1.2 Maintenance of Documents and Samples 01 78 39-1 1.3 Recording 01 7839-1 1.4 Submittal 01 7839-3 January 17, 2014 CORNELL SECTION 31 20 20 Ithaca, New York EARTH MOVING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Preparing subgrades for slabs-on-grade. 2. Excavating and backfilling for buildings and structures. 3. Drainage course for concrete slabs-on-grade. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary controls, utilities, and support facilities; also for temporary site fencing if not in another Section. 2. Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for granular course if placed over vapor retarder and beneath the slab-on-grade. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Backfill: Soil material used to fill an excavation. B. Borrow Soil: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill. C. Drainage Course: Aggregate layer supporting the slab-on-grade that also minimizes upward capillary flow of pore water. D. Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations and to lines and dimensions indicated. I. Authorized Additional Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated lines and dimensions as directed by Design Professional. Authorized additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for changes in the Work. 2. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated lines and dimensions without direction by Design Professional. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by Design Professional, shall be without additional compensation. E. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical and electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below the ground surface. F. Subgrade: Uppermost surface of an excavation or the top surface of a fill or backfill immediately below subbase, drainage fill, drainage course, or topsoil materials. BIG RED BARN STRUCTURAL EARTH MOVING 31 20 20-1 IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 CORNELL SECTION 31 20 20 Ithaca, New York EARTH MOVING G. Utilities: On-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground services within buildings. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency. B. Material Test Reports: For each on-site and borrow soil material proposed for backfill as follows: 1. Classification according to ASTM D 2487. 2. Laboratory compaction curve according to ASTM D 698 and ASTM D 1557. C. Preexcavation Photographs or Videotape: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements, including finish surfaces that might be misconstrued as damage caused by earth moving operations. Submit before earth moving begins. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Geotechnical Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 329 and ASTM D 3740 for testing indicated. B. Preexcavation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities during earth moving operations. 1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by Owner or authorities having jurisdiction. B. Utility Locator Service: Notify utility locator service for area where Project is located before beginning earth moving operations. C. The following practices are prohibited within protection zones: 1. Storage of construction materials, debris, or excavated material. 2. Parking vehicles or equipment. 3. Foot traffic. 4. Erection of sheds or structures. 5. Impoundment of water. 6. Excavation or other digging unless otherwise indicated. 7. Attachment of signs to or wrapping materials around trees or plants unless otherwise indicated. BIG RED BARN STRUCTURAL EARTH MOVING 312020-2 IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 CORNELL SECTION 31 20 20 Ithaca, New York EARTH MOVING D. Do not direct vehicle or equipment exhaust towards protection zones. E. Prohibit heat sources, flames, ignition sources, and smoking within or near protection zones. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 SOIL MATERIALS A. General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not available from excavations. B. Satisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Groups GW, GP, GM, SW, SP, and SM according to ASTM D 2487, or a combination of these groups; free of rock or gravel larger than 3 inches (75 mm) in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation, and other deleterious matter. I. Liquid Limit: Per Geotechnical Engineer. 2. Plasticity Index: Per Geotechnical Engineer. C. Unsatisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Groups GC, SC, CL, ML, OL, CH, MH, OH, and PT according to ASTM D 2487, or a combination of these groups. 1. Unsatisfactory soils also include satisfactory soils not maintained within 2 percent of optimum moisture content at time of compaction. D. Drainage Course: Narrowly graded mixture of washed crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 57; with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch (37.5-mm) sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 8 (2.36-mm) sieve. E. Sand: ASTM C 33; fine aggregate. F. lmpervious Fill: Clayey gravel and sand mixture capable of compacting to a dense state. 2.2 GEOTEXTILES 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant, polyethylene film warning tape manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, 6 inches (150 rmn) wide and 4 mils (0.1 mn) thick, continuously inscribed with a description of the utility; colored as follows: 1. Red: Electric. 2. Yellow: Gas, oil, steam, and dangerous materials. 3. Orange: Telephone and other communications. 4. Blue: Water systems. 5. Green: Sewer systems. B. Detectable Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant, polyethylene film warning tape manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, a minimum of 6 inches (150 BIG RED BARN STRUCTURAL EARTH MOVING 3120 20-3 IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 CORNELL SECTION 31 20 20 Ithaca, New York EARTH MOVING mm) wide and 4 mils (0.1 mm) thick, continuously inscribed with a description of the utility, with metallic core encased in a protective jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is buried up to 30 inches (750 mm) deep; colored as follows: 1. Red: Electric. 2. Yellow: Gas, oil, steam, and dangerous materials. 3. Orange: Telephone and other communications. 4. Blue: Water systems. 5. Green: Sewer systems. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Protect structures, utilities, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earth moving operations. B. Protect subgrades and foundation soils from freezing temperatures and frost. Remove temporary protection before placing subsequent materials. 3.2 DEWATERING A. Prevent surface water and ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on prepared subgrades, and from flooding Project site and surrounding area. 3.3 EXPLOSIVES A. Explosives: Do not use explosives. 3.4 EXCAVATION, GENERAL A. Unclassified Excavation: Excavate to subgrade elevations regardless of the character of surface and subsurface conditions encountered. Unclassified excavated materials may include rock, soil materials, and obstructions. No changes in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time will be authorized for rock excavation or removal of obstructions. I. If excavated materials intended for fill and backfill include unsatisfactory soil materials and rock, replace with satisfactory soil materials. 2. Remove rock to lines and grades indicated to permit installation of permanent construction without exceeding the following dimensions: a. 24 inches (600 mm) outside of concrete forms for pile cap. BIG RED BARN STRUCTURAL EARTH MOVING 31 2020-4 IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 CORNELL SECTION 31 20 20 Ithaca, New York EARTH MOVING 3.5 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES A. Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm). If applicable, extend excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and removing concrete formwork, for installing services and other construction, and for inspections. 1. Pile Foundations: Stop excavations 6 to 12 inches (150 to 300 un) above bottom of pile cap before piles are placed. After piles have been driven, remove loose and displaced material. Excavate to final grade, leaving solid base to receive concrete pile caps. 3.6 SUBGRADE INSPECTION A. Notify Geotechnical Engineer when excavations have reached required subgrade. B. If Geotechnical Engineer determines that unsatisfactory soil is present, continue excavation and replace with compacted backfill or fill material as directed. C. Authorized additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for unit prices. 3.7 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS A. Stockpile borrow soil materials and excavated satisfactory soil materials without intermixing. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust. I. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees. 3.8 BACKFILL A. Place and compact backfill in excavations promptly, but not before completing the following: I. Construction below finish grade including, where applicable, subdrainage, dampproofing, and waterproofing. 2. Surveying locations of underground utilities for Record Documents. 3. Testing and inspecting underground utilities. 4. Removing concrete forrnwork. 5. Removing trash and debris. 6. Removing temporary shoring and bracing, and sheeting. 7. Installing permanent or temporary horizontal bracing on horizontally supported walls. B. Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice. 3.9 SOIL MOISTURE CONTROL A. Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill soil layer before compaction to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content. BIG RED BARN STRUCTURAL EARTH MOVING 31 20 20-5 IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 CORNELL SECTION 31 20 20 Ithaca, New York EARTH MOVING 1. Do not place backfill or fill soil material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice. 2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, otherwise satisfactory soil material that exceeds optimum moisture content by 2 percent and is too wet to compact to specified dry unit weight. 3.10 COMPACTION OF SOIL BACKFILLS AND FILLS A. Place backfill and fill soil materials in layers not more than 4 inches (100 mm) in loose depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers. B. Place backfill and fill soil materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations, and unifornly along the full length of each structure. C. Compact soil materials to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698 or ASTM D 1557: 1. Under building slabs, scarify and recompact top 12 inches (300 mm) of existing subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 95 percent. 3.11 DRAINAGE COURSE UNDER CONCRETE SLABS-ON-GRADE A. Place drainage course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice. B. On prepared subgrade, place and compact drainage course under cast-in-place concrete slabs- on-grade as follows: I. Install subdrainage geotextile on prepared subgrade according to manufacturer's written instructions, overlapping sides and ends. 2. Place drainage course 6 inches (150 mm) or less in compacted thickness in a single layer. 3. Compact each layer of drainage course to required cross sections and thicknesses to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698. 3.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following special inspections: 1. Determine prior to placement of fill that site has been prepared in compliance with requirements. 2. Determine that fill material and maximum lift thickness comply with requirements. 3. Determine, at the required frequency, that in-place density of compacted fill complies with requirements. B. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified geotechnical engineering testing agency to perform tests and inspections. BIG RED BARN STRUCTURAL EARTH MOVING 31 2020-6 IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 CORNELL SECTION 31 20 20 Ithaca, New York EARTH MOVING C. Allow testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with subsequent earth moving only after test results for previously completed work comply with requirements. D. Testing agency will test compaction of soils in place according to ASTM D 1556, ASTM D 2167, ASTM D 2922, and ASTM D 2937, as applicable. Tests will be performed at the following locations and frequencies: 1. Building Slab Areas: At subgrade and at each compacted fill and backfill layer, at least one test for every 2000 sq. ft. (186 sq. m) or less of building slab, but in no case fewer than three tests. E. When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved degree of compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil materials to depth required; recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained. 3.13 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS A. Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste materials, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property. END OF SECTION 312000 BIG RED BARN STRUCTURAL EARTH MOVING 31 20 20-7 IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 CORNELL SECTION 3162 25 Ithaca, New York MICROPILES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This work consists of designing, furnishing, installing and testing drilled and grouted micropiles at the locations specified herein and in the contract plans. B. Furnish all design, materials, products, accessories, tools, equipment, services, transportation, labor and supervision, and manufacturing technique required for installing and testing (if required) micropiles and micropile top attachments for this project. C. Select the micropile type, size, pile top attachment, installation means and methods, ground- grout bond value and determine the required bond length and final micropile diameter to meet the requirements of the plans and these specifications. Design and install micropiles that will develop the factored resistances necessary to support the applied factored design loads as specified herein or shown on the contract plans. D. The micropiles specified on this project are lightly loaded, and are not required to be tested per the New York State Building Code. However, if the contractor's design documentation cannot adequately demonstrate capacity of similarly designed and installed micropiles in similar ground conditions at other previous installations, verification or proof loading testing will be required. The micropile contractor shall determine this during the bid phase, and include verification or proof load testing in his bid if appropriate. Ultimately, the contractor is responsible for and warrants the design capacity of the pile type selected and installed. 1.3 SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS A. Subsurface conditions at the site are described on the Test Boring Report attached at the end of this specification section. 1.4 DEFINITIONS A. Admixture: Substance added to the grout to control bleed and/or shrinkage, improve flowability, reduce water content, or retard setting time. B. Alignment Load (AL): A minimum initial load (no greater than 5 percent of the Factored Design Load) applied to the micropile during testing to keep the testing equipment correctly positioned. C. Bond Length: The length of the micropile that is bonded to the ground and used to transfer the applied axial loads to the surrounding soil or rock. BIG RED BARN STRUCTURAL MICROPILES 31 6225-1 IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 CORNELL SECTION 31 62 25 Ithaca, New York MICROPILES D. Bond-breaker: A sleeve placed over the steel reinforcement to prevent load transfer. E. Casing: Steel tube introduced during the drilling process in overburden soil to temporarily stabilize the drill hole. This is usually withdrawn as the micropile is grouted, although in certain types of micropiles, some casing is permanently left in place to provide added micropile reinforcement. F. Centralizer: A device to support and position the reinforcing steel in the center of the drill hole and/or casing so that a minimum grout cover is provided. G. Contractor: The person/finn responsible for performing the micropile work. H. Coupler: The means by which load capacity can be transmitted from one partial length of reinforcement to another. I. Creep Movement: The movement that occurs during the creep test of a micropile under a constant load. J. Design Professional: The Owner or Owner's authorized agent. K. Double Corrosion Protection: This system consists of two levels of corrosion protection usually consisting of either grout filled encapsulation or epoxy coating and grout. L. Encapsulation: A corrugated or deformed tube protecting the reinforcing steel against corTos1on. M. Factored Design Load (FDL): The maximum load expected to be applied to the micropile during its design life. N. Free (unbonded) length: The designed length of the micropile that is not bonded to the surrounding ground or grout. 0. Micropile: A small-diameter, bored, cast-in-place composite pile, in which the applied load is resisted by steel reinforcement, cement grout and frictional grout/ground bond. P. Overburden: Material, natural or placed, that may require cased drilling methods to provide an open borehole to underlying strata. Q. Post-grouting: The injection of additional grout into the load transfer length of a micropile after the primary grout has set. Also known as regrouting or secondary grouting. R. Primary Grout: Portland-cement-based grout injected into the micropile hole prior to or after the installation of the reinforcement to direct the load transfer to the surrounding ground along the micropile. S. Proof Load Test: Incremental loading of a production micropile, recording the total movement at each increment. T. Reinforcement: The steel component of the micropile that accepts and/or resists applied loadings. BIG RED BARN STRUCTURAL MICROPILES 31 62 25-2 IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 CORNELL SECTION 31 62 25 Ithaca, New York MICROPILES U. Sheathing: Smooth or corrugated piping or tubing that protects the reinforcing steel against corrosion. V. Spacer: A device to separate individual elements of a multiple-element reinforcement. W. Verification Load Test: Pile load test of a sacrificial micropile performed to verify the design of the micropile system and the construction methods proposed, prior to installation of production micropiles. 1.5 STANDARDS A. The following publications form a part of this specification to the extent indicated by the references. The latest publication as of the issue date of this specification shall govern, unless indicated otherwise. 1. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) 2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) ASTM AASHTO SPECIFICATION/TEST A36, M183, Structural Steel A572 M223 A82 M55 Cold-Drawn Steel Wire for Concrete Reinforcement A252 Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe Piles A615 M31 Deformed and Plain Billet Steel Bars for Concrete Rein- A615forceent A722 M275 Uncoated High-Strength Steel Bar for Prestressing Con-A722 M25:crete A775 Epoxy-Coated Reinforcing Steel Bars A934 Epoxy-Coated Prefabricated Steel Reinforcing Bars C 33 M80 Concrete Aggregates Cl 109 Ti106 Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortar C188 Ti33 Density of Hydraulic Cement C 144 M45 Aggregate for Masony Mortar C 150 M85 Portland Cement C 494 Ml94 Chemical Admixtures for Concrete D 1143 -Method of Testing Piles Under Static Axial Compressive Load D 1784 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe (Class 13464-B) D 3350 M 252 Polyethylene Corrugated Tubing D 3689 -Method of Testing Individual Piles Under Static Axial Tensile Load D 3966 Standard Test Method for Piles Under Lateral Load M5T 26 Quality of Water to be Used in Concrete 3. American Welding Society (AWS) BIG RED BARN STRUCTURAL MICROPILES 31 6225-3 IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 CORNELL SECTION 31 62 25 Ithaca, New York MICROPILES a. D1.1 Structural Welding Code-Steel b. D1.4 Structural Welding Code-Reinforcing Steel 4. American Petroleum Institute (API) a. 5CT (N-80) Specification for casing and tubing b. RP 13B- 1 Recommended Practice -Standard Procedure for Field Testing Water Based Drilling Fluids 1.6 ACTION SUBM1TTALS A. The micropiles supplied and installed under this item are to be a contractor design. The piles must be installed at the locations and orientations (batter) shown on the Drawings. Piles must be designed and satisfactorily demonstrated to provide allowable capacities of 40 kips in compression and 20 kips in tension with a factor of safety not less than 2.0 between allowable and ultimate capacities. B. Micropiles installed at the site must be designed to extend a minimum of 30 ft. below the bottom of pile cap unless a satisfactory allowable capacity with a shorter pile is demonstrated through load test. The first 10 ft. of pile below pile cap shall be encased in permanent steel casing, as shown on the Drawings. The remaining pile length is to be comprised of the bond length. C. The Contractor shall recommend a pile top to footing connection using procedures accepted and standard procedures, subject to the Design Professional's review and acceptance. D. The pile design shall make provision for corrosion protection of the internal steel reinforcing bars or allow for reduction of pile capacity throughout the working life of the pile. Provide double corrosion protection of the reinforcing bars for all reinforcing bars not contained within permanent casing. Where permanent casing is used for a portion of the inicropile, extend the double corrosion system at least 5.0 feet into the casing. If positive double corrosion protection is not incorporated, design the pile for a minimum 15% loss of sacrificial steel from the load- bearing core. E. Submit complete stamped working drawings (including micropile design calculations) and unstamped working drawings to the Design Professional for review and approval prior to the start of micropile construction. Stamped working drawings and calculations shall be signed and sealed by a registered Professional Engineer licensed to practice in the State of New York. F. Make any necessary revisions or corrections to the working drawing submittals and resubmit revised drawings or submittals. Do not begin micropile construction or incorporate materials into the work until all submittal requirements are satisfied and approved by the Design Professional. Resubmit changes or deviations from the approved submittals for approval. No adjustments or extensions in contract time or delay or impact claims will be allowed due to incomplete submittals. G. Include all details, dimensions, quantities, ground profiles, and cross-sections necessary to construct the micropile structure. Verify the limits of the micropile structure and ground survey data before preparing the detailed working drawings. Verify physical conditions at the micropile sites including head clearance and other physical limitations or restrictions. BIG RED BARN STRUCTURAL MICROPILES 31 6225-4 IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 CORNELL SECTION 31 62 25 Ithaca, New York MICROPILES H. Stamped Working Drawings -Prior to beginning work, submit the following stamped working drawings and documents including, but not limited to: 1. Design Calculations -Design calculations shall include, but not be limited to, the following items: a. A written summary report which describes the overall micropile design, including the type and diameter of micropile(s) selected, including a discussion of the temporary casing (if used) and permanent steel casing to be left in place. b. Applicable code requirements and design references, c. Micropile structure critical design cross-section(s) geometry including soil/rock strata and piezometric levels and location, magnitude and direction of applied factored loadings, including slope or external surcharge loads, d. Design criteria, including soil/rock shear strengths (friction angle and cohesion), unit weights, and ground-grout bond values, e. Factored design loads and nominal and factored resistances used in the design of the ground-grout bond values, surcharges, steel, grout, and concrete materials, f. Minimum grout unconfined compressive strength at 28-days and at the time of verification and proof load testing g. Pile to pile cap/footing connection calculations and design details, h. Design calculation sheets for both static and seismic design of the micropiles. In- clude analysis performed to determine drillhole diameters, estimated bond lengths, total micropile lengths required to obtain the required factored re- sistance(s) and type and size of steel core. Include pile top deflection estimates and group effects (if applicable) and structural design of the micropile system (if applicable). i. Design notes including an explanation of any symbols and computer programs used in the design. 2. Plan View showing: a. Reference baseline and elevation datum. b. Overall plan layout of inicropiles showing numbering sequence, pile diameters, position and horizontal spacing, 3. Elevation View showing: a. Micropile locations and elevations, lengths, minimum hole diameters, batter and alignment, casing dimensions and lengths, reinforcement type, sizes and details, splice types and locations, centralizers and spacers, minimum grout bond zone, casing plunge lengths (if used), and corrosion protection details, b. Micropile structure connection details to substructure footing, c. Micropile Design Loads, d. Summary of estimated quantities for each substructure unit. 4. Micropile Load Testing and Reporting: a. Provide detailed plans for the proposed micropile load testing method. b. Include all drawings, details, and structural design calculations necessary to BIG RED BARN STRUCTURAL MICROPILES 31 62 25-5 IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 CORNELL SECTION 31 62 25 Ithaca, New York MICROPILES clearly describe the proposed test method, reaction load system capacity and equipment setup, types and accuracy of apparatus to be used for applying and measuring the test loads and pile top movements. c. Submit a Micropile Load Test Data Report at the completion of the test. 5. As-Built Drawings -Revise the working drawings when plan dimensions are changed due to field conditions or for other reasons. Within 30 days after completion of the work, submit as-built drawings to the Design Professional. Provide revised design calculations stamped by the approved Registered Professional Engineer for all design changes made during the construction of the micropile structure. I. Unstamped Working Drawings -Prior to beginning work, submit the following unstamped working drawings and documents according: 1. Detailed step-by-step description of the proposed micropile construction procedure, in- cluding construction sequencing (i.e. drilling, grouting and testing procedures) and any other special construction requirements to assure quality control. This step-by-step pro- cedure shall be in sufficient detail to allow the Design Professional to monitor the con- struction and quality of the micropiles. 2. Manufacturer's information on the equipment to be used for installing micropiles, includ- ing the model, size and type of equipment, with appropriate manufacturer's literature for review. Provide infonmation on the drilling methods and tools to be used and the pro- posed method for flushing and removal of spoils. Include infonnation on headroom and space requirements for installation equipment that verify the proposed equipment is ap- propriate for the site conditions and constraints, 3. Proposed start date(s) and micropile installation schedule, 4. Plan describing how surface water, drill flush, and excess waste grout will be contained, controlled and disposed of in accordance with all applicable permits and regulations, 5. Details for constructing micropile structures around drainage or other facilities (if appli- cable), 6. Permanent casing threading connection details. If welding of casing is proposed, submit the proposed welding procedure, certified by a qualified welding specialist, 7. Certified mill test reports for the reinforcing steel and penranent casing (if used). Coupon test results for pennanent casing without mill certification may be submitted in lieu of mill certification. Supply two coupon tests per truckload delivered to the fabricator, but not less than two coupon tests per project. The ultimate strength, yield strength, elonga- tion, material properties and chemical composition shall be included. 8. Grouting Plan. The grouting plan shall include complete descriptions, details, and sup- porting calculations for the following: a. Grout mix design and type of materials to be used in the grout including certified test data and trial batch reports. Mix designs shall include certified test results verifying the mix designs provide the required grout strength for both 28-day and BIG RED BARN STRUCTURAL MICROPILES 31 6225-6 IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 CORNELL SECTION 3162 25 Ithaca, New York MICROPILES at the time of verification and proof load testing. b. Equipment and procedures used to mix and place the grout, including the grout pressures to be used and descriptions of any postgrouting methods (if applicable), c. Methods and equipment for accurately monitoring and recording the grout depth, grout volume and grout pressure as the grout is being placed. d. Grouting rate calculations. The calculations shall be based on the initial pump pressures or static head on the grout and losses throughout the placing system, including anticipated head of drilling fluid (if applicable) to be displaced. e. Estimated curing time for grout to achieve specified strength. Previous test re- sults for the proposed grout mix completed within one year of the start of grout- ing may be submitted for initial verification and acceptance and start of produc- tion work. Verify grout strength during installation with grout cube testing. f. Procedure and equipment for contractor monitoring of grout quality. 9. Calibration reports and data for each test jack, pressure gauge and master pressure gauge and load cell to be used. The calibration tests shall have been performed by an independ- ent testing laboratory, and tests shall have been performed within 60 calendar days of the date submitted. Testing shall not commence until the Design Professional has reviewed and accepted the jack, pressure gauge, master pressure gauge and electronic load cell cal- ibration data. Do not begin work until the appropriate submittals have been received, reviewed, and accepted in writing by the Design Professional. Allow 7 calendar days for review of the working drawing submittals after a complete set has been received. Additional time required due to incomplete or unacceptable submittals shall not be cause for delay or impact claims. All costs associated with incomplete or unacceptable submittals shall be the responsibility of the contractor. J. Personnel Qualifications -Use personnel experienced in micropile construction to perform the work. Experience shall be relevant to anticipated subsurface materials, groundwater conditions, micropile size, loads and special construction techniques required. 1. At least 14 calendar days prior to the planned start of micropile construction, provide the following information to verify the firm's experience and the qualifications of personnel scheduled to perform the micropile construction: a. Evidence of the firm's experience in the construction and load testing of micro- piles and the successful construction of at least 5 projects in the last 5 years in- volving construction totaling at least 25 micropiles of similar capacity to those required in these plans and specifications. b. Evidence of contractor experience in micropile drilling and grouting in soil/rock materials similar to project conditions. Provide a project reference list for each of the 5 projects which includes: 1. Brief project description with the owner's name and current phone num- BIG RED BARN STRUCTURAL MICROPILES 31 62 25-7 IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 CORNELL SECTION 31 62 25 Ithaca, New York MICROPILES ber. 2. Date of project. 3. Number, size and capacity of micropiles successfully installed and tested. 4. Types of soil/rock materials and groundwater conditions encountered in the project. 5. Names and detailed experience of the on-site supervisors and drill opera- tors for the Project. On-site supervisors and drill rig operators shall have experience on at least 3 projects over the past 5 years installing micropiles of equal or greater capacity than required in these plans and specifications. c. Name(s) and detailed experience of the micropile design engineer. The micro- piles shall be designed by a Professional Engineer registered in the State of New York, with experience in the design of at least 3 micropile projects of similar scope to this project, successfully completed over the past 5 years. The micropile design engineer shall also have experience designing micropiles of similar (or greater) capacity to those required in these plans and specifications. The micro- pile design engineer may be either an employee of the contractor or an independ- ent consultant design engineer meeting the stated experience requirements. d. Provide a personnel list identifying the following personnel: 1. On-site supervisor to be assigned to the project, 2. Drill rig operators, 3. Micropile design engineer The personnel list shall contain a summary of each individual's experience and be complete enough for the Design Professional to determine whether each individual satisfies the required qualifications. The Design Professional will approve or reject the contractor's qualifications within 7 calendar days after receipt of a complete submittal. Do not begin work or order materials until the Design Professional's writ- ten approval of the contractor's experience qualifications is provided. Additional time required due to in- complete or unacceptable submittals will not be cause for adjustment in contract time. All costs associated with incomplete or unacceptable submittals shall be borne by the Contractor. The Design Professional may suspend the Work if the contractor uses non-approved personnel. Submit requests for substitution of field personnel to the Design Professional, who will have an additional 7 cal- endar days to respond. If work is suspended due to use of unauthorized personnel, the contractor shall be fully liable for all resulting costs and no adjustment in contract time will result from the suspension. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 Use materials meeting the following requirements: A. Admixtures -Admixtures shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C 494/AASHTO M194. Admixtures that control bleed, improve flowability, reduce water content, and retard set may be used in the grout, subject to the review and acceptance by the Design Professional. Expansive admixtures shall only be added to the grout used for filling sealed encapsulations and anchorage covers. Accelerators are not permitted. Admixtures shall be compatible with the grout and mixed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations BIG RED BARN STRUCTURAL MICROPILES 31 62 25-8 IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 CORNELL SECTION 31 62 25 Ithaca, New York MICROPILES B. Cement -All cement shall be Portland cement conforming to ASTM C 150/AASHTO M85, Type I or Type II. C. Grout -Neat cement or sand/cement mixture with a minimum 28-day compressive strength as specified in the contractor's design submittal provided in 00515.16 (a-1) and confined pursuant to AASHTO T106/ASTM C109. The minimum required compressive strength prior to verifica- tion and proof load testing shall also be confirmed pursuant to AASHTO T106/ASTM C109. D. Water -Water used in the grout mix shall conform to AASHTO T 26 and shall be potable, clean, and free from substances that may be injurious to cement and steel. E. Core: Core steel shall be deformed bars in accordance with ASTM A 615/AASHTO M3 1, Grade 60 or Grade 75 or ASTM A 722/AASHTO M275, Grade 150. When a bearing plate and nut are required to be threaded onto the top end of reinforcing bars for the pile top to footing anchorage, the threading may be continuous spiral deformed ribbing provided by the bar deformations (e.g., Dywidag or Williams continuous threadbars) or may be cut into a reinforcing bar. If threads are cut into a reinforcing bar, the next larger bar number designation from that shown on the Plans shall be provided, at no additional cost. 1. Core steel may be either solid bars (external grouting) or hollow (internal grouting) de- pending on the Contractor's design and installation method. 2. Bar tendon couplers, if required, shall develop the ultimate tensile strength of the bars without evidence of any failure. F. Permanent Casing Pipe: Provide permanent steel casing/pipe with the diameter and the mini- mum wall thickness shown on the approved Working Drawings and meeting the following re- quirements: 1. Tensile requirements of ASTM A252, the minimum yield strength shall be as used in the design submittal, 2. Minimum elongation shall be 15% 3. For permanent casing/pipe that will be welded, the following material conditions apply: 4. The carbon equivalency (CE) for ASTM A252 Grade 3 material as defined in AWS Dl .1, Annex I, Section I 5.1, shall not exceed 0.45, as demonstrated by mill certifications, 5. The sulfur content shall not exceed 0.05%, as demonstrated by mill certifications. 6. For permanent casing/pipe that will be shop or field welded all welded seams and splices shall be complete penetration welds. 7. Threaded casing joints shall develop at least the required compressive, tensile, and/or bending strength used in the design of the micropile. G. Plates and Shapes -Structural steel plates and shapes for micropile top attachments shall con- form to ASTM A 36 or ASTM A572 Grade 50 and as required to meet the design loads (axial and BIG RED BARN STRUCTURAL MICROPILES 31 62 25-9 IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 CORNELL SECTION 31 62 25 Ithaca, New York MICROPILES moment). H. Centralizers -Fabricate centralizers from plastic, steel, or material nondetrimental to the rein- forcing steel. Wood shall not be used. I. Corrosion Protection -Provide corrosion protection of the internal steel core bars as follows: 1. Encapsulation: Shop fabricate the encapsulation from high-density, corrugated polyeth- ylene tubing conforming to the requirements of ASTM D3350/AASHTO M252 with a minimum wall thickness of 0.03 inches. The annulus between the reinforcement and the encapsulating tube shall be a minimum of 0.25 inches. 2. Epoxy Coating: The minimum thickness of coating applied electrostatically to the rein- forcing steel must be 0.007 to 0.012 inches thick. Epoxy coating shall be in accordance with ASTM A775/AASHTO M284. Bend test requirements shall be waived. Bearing plates and nuts encased in the pile concrete footing need not be epoxy coated. Mechanical couplers for splicing epoxy coated rebar shall be either epoxy coated with the same thickness as the rebar or, for bare-steel couplers, coated with heat-shrink wrap, selected from Section 2510.11 of the QPL. Apply heat-shrink wrap extending at least 6 inches past the ends of the couplers and 6 inches past any damaged areas. 3. Grout Protection: For bare steel reinforcement provide a minimum 3 inches of grout cov- er surrounding the reinforcing steel. For epoxy or galvanized reinforcement provide a minimum of 2 inches of grout cover. If the Contractor's design does not incorporate positive corrosion protection all steel components shall be designed to allow a 15% reduction in steel area due to corrosion over the life of the mi- cropile. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 Quality Control -Maintain and be responsible for quality control of the micropile work throughout the construction operation. The Design Professional will inspect all drilling operations and verify the suitability of micropile construction procedures. 3.2 Site Drainage Control -Control and properly dispose of all construction related waste in accord- ance with the standard specifications and all applicable local codes and regulations. As part of the pollution control plan, submit the process and techniques to be used to contain, process and dispose of all discharged materials. Contain and properly dispose of all materials displaced from the drill hole or casing such as water, cuttings and excess grout during drilling or grouting operations. Pump waste materials to a tank or basin. Allow no remnants from the grouting process to enter adjacent water ways or other environ- mentally sensitive areas. Immediately cease drilling or grouting operations and notify the Design Professional if such events occur. Provide positive control and discharge of all surface water that will affect construction of the micro- pile installation. Maintain all pipes or conduits used to control surface water during construction. Repair damage caused by surface water at no additional cost to the Owner. BIG RED BARN STRUCTURAL MICROPILES 316225-10 IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 CORNELL SECTION 31 62 25 Ithaca, New York MICROPILES Immediately contact the Design Professional if unanticipated existing subsurface drainage structures are discovered during excavation or drilling. Suspend work in these areas until remedial measures meeting the Design Professional's approval are implemented. Cost of remedial measures or repair work resulting from encountering unanticipated subsurface drainage structures, will be paid for as Extra Work. 3.3 Excavation -Coordinate the work and the excavation so the micropile structures are safely con- structed. Perform the micropile construction and related excavation in accordance with the Drawings and approved submittals. Make no excavations steeper than those specified or shown on the ap- proved working drawing submittals above or below the micropile structure locations without written approval of the Design Professional. 3.4 Allowable Tolerances -Install micropile to within the following tolerances. A. Centerline of piling shall not be more than 3 inches from indicated horizontal alignment. B. Micropile shall be plumb within 2 percent of total-length plan alignment. C. Top elevation of micropile shall be within plus 1.0 inch or minus 2.0 inches maximum from ver- tical elevation indicated. D. Centerline of reinforcing steel shall not be more than 0.75 inches from centerline of final pile lo- cation. 3.5 Micropile Installation -Select the drilling method, grouting procedure and grouting pressure used for the installation of the micropiles. Determine the micropile casing size, final drillhole diameter, bond length, and central reinforcement steel sizing necessary to support the specified factored loads and satisfy load testing requirements. Estimate the quantity of grout takes. A. Drilling -Provide drilling equipment and methods suitable for drilling through the conditions to be encountered, without causing damage to any overlying or adjacent known structures or ser- vices. The drillhole must be open along its full length to at least the design minimum drillhole di- ameter prior to placing grout and reinforcement. Temporary casing or other approved method of micropile drillhole support will be required in caving or unstable ground to permit the micropile shaft to be formed to the minimum design drillhole diameter. The contractor's proposed method(s) to provide drillhole support and to pre- vent detrimental ground movements shall be reviewed by the Design Professional. Detrimental ground movement is defined as movement which requires remedial repair measures. Use of drill- ing fluid containing bentonite is not allowed. B. Ground Heave or Subsidence -During construction, observe the conditions in the vicinity of the micropile construction site on a daily basis for signs of ground heave or subsidence. Immediately notify the Design Professional if signs of movements are observed. Immediately suspend or mod- ify drilling or grouting operations if ground heave or subsidence is observed, if the micropile structure is adversely affected, or if adjacent structures are damaged from the drilling or grouting. If the Design Professional determines that the movements require corrective action, take correc- tive actions necessary to stop the movement or perform repairs. When due to the Contractor's methods or operations or failure to follow the specified/approved construction sequence, as de- termined by the Design Professional, the costs of providing corrective actions will be borne by BIG RED BARN STRUCTURAL MICROPILES 31 6225-11 IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 CORNELL SECTION 31 62 25 Ithaca, New York MICROPILES the contractor. When due to differing site conditions, as determined by the Design Professional, the costs of providing corrective actions will be paid as Extra Work. C. Core Steel Placement -Place core steel either prior to grouting or into the grout-filled drillhole before temporary casing (if used) is withdrawn. Reinforcement surfaces shall be free of deleteri- ous substances such as soil, mud, grease or oil that might contaminate the grout or coat the rein- forcement and impair bond. Pile cages and reinforcement groups (if used) shall be sufficiently ro- bust to withstand the installation and grouting process and the withdrawal of the drill casings without damage or disturbance. Provide centralizers and spacers equally spaced along the length of the micropile with a 10-foot maximum center-to-center spacing. Locate the upper and lower most centralizers a maximum of 5.0 feet from the top and bottom of the micropile respectively. Provide at least two centralizers per micropile. For micropiles less than or equal to 20 feet in length, place centralizers at the top and bottom quarter points of the micropile. Centralizers and spacers shall permit the free flow of grout without misalignment of the reinforcing bar(s) and permanent casing. Lower the central re- inforcement bars with centralizers into the stabilized drillhole and set. Insert the reinforcing steel into the drillhole to the desired depth without difficulty. Do not force or drive partially inserted reinforcing bars into the hole. Redrill and reinsert reinforcing steel when necessary to facilitate insertion. D. Grouting -Measure the grout quantity and pumping pressure during the grouting operations. Provide the Design Professional with records showing the quantities, test data, and grout pres- sures. After drilling, flush the hole with water and/or air to remove drill cuttings. Use a stable neat ce- ment grout or a sand cement grout with a minimum 28-day unconfined compressive strength as required in the contractor's submitted design. The cement shall not contain lumps or other evi- dence of poor mixing. Admixtures, if used, shall be mixed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Use grouting equipment that produces a grout free of lumps and undispersed cement. Equip the pump with a pressure gauge to monitor grout pressures. Place a second pres- sure gauge at the point of injection. The pressure gauges shall be capable of measuring pressures of at least 150 psi or twice the actual grout pressures used by the contractor, whichever is greater. Size the grouting equipment to enable the grout to be pumped in one continuous operation. Inject the grout from the lowest point of the drillhole. The grout may be pumped through grout tubes, casing, hollow-stem augers, or drill rods. Control the grout pressures and grout takes to prevent excess grout take, excessive ground heave and fracturing of rock formations. Fill the en- tire micropile length with grout containing no voids or inclusions. Upon completion of grouting, the grout tube may remain in the hole, and shall be filled with grout. If a postgrouting system is to be used, submit working drawings and details to the Design Profes- sional for review. E. Grout Testing -Grout within the micropile verification and proof test piles shall attain the mini- mum required compressive strength as identified in the contractor's design submittal prior to load testing. Previous test results for the proposed grout mix, completed within one year of the start of work, may be submitted for initial verification of the required compressive strengths for installa- tion of pre-production verification test piles and initial production piles. During production, mi- cropile grout shall be tested by the contractor for compressive strength in accordance with AASHTO T106/ASTM C109 at a frequency of no less than one set of three 2-inch grout cubes BIG RED BARN STRUCTURAL MICROPILES 31 6225-12 IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 CORNELL SECTION 31 62 25 Ithaca, New York MICROPILES from each grout plant each day of operation or per every 10 micropiles, whichever occurs more frequently. The compressive strength shall be the average of the 3 cubes tested. Grout consistency as measured by grout density shall be determined by the contractor per ASTM C 188/AASHTO T 133 or API RP-13B-1 at a frequency of at least one test per verification or proof test micropile, conducted just prior to start of grouting. For production micropiles, perform grout density testing at a frequency at least once per each period of continuous grouting operation or once per day, whichever is more frequent. The Baroid Mud Balance used in accordance with API RP-13B-1 is an approved device for determining the grout density of neat cement grout. The measured grout density shall be consistent with the contractor's approved working drawing con- struction submittals. Grout samples shall be taken directly from the grout plant. Provide grout cube compressive strength and grout density test results to the Design Professional within 24 hours of testing. F. Micropile Splices -Secure lengths of casing and reinforcing bars to be spliced in proper align- ment and in a manner to avoid eccentricity or angle between the axes of the two lengths to be spliced. Locate threaded pipe casing joints at least two casing diameters (OD) from a splice in any reinforcing bar. When multiple bars are used, stagger bar splices at least 1.0 foot. Construct micropile casing and reinforcing bar splices so as to develop the required nominal de- sign strength of the micropile section. G. Pile Load Tests -If required, perform verification and proof testing of piles at the locations specified herein or designated by the Design Professional. Perform compression load testing in accordance with ASTM Dl 143, tension load testing in accordance with ASTM D3689, and lat- eral load testing in accordance with ASTM D3966, except as modified herein. When both com- pression and tension load testing is to be performed on the same pile, test the pile under compres- sion loads prior to testing under tension loads. The maximum verification and proof test loads applied to the micropile shall not exceed 80 per- cent of the structural capacity of the micropile structural elements, to include steel yield in ten- sion, steel yield or buckling in compression, or grout crushing in compression. Any required in- crease in strength of the verification test pile elements above the strength required for the produc- tion piles shall be provided for in the contractor's bid price. 1. Testing Equipment and Data Recording -Provide dial gauges, dial gauge support, jack and pressure gauges, load cells, and a reaction frame for use in testing the micropiles. The load cell is required only for the creep test portion of the verification test. Provide a description of test setup and jack, pressure gauge and load cell calibration curves. Design the testing reaction frame to be sufficiently rigid and of adequate dimen- sions such that excessive deformation of the testing equipment does not occur. Align the jack, bearing plates, and stressing anchorage such that unloading and repositioning of the equipment will not be required during the test. Apply and measure the test load with a hydraulic jack and pressure gauge. The pressure gauge shall be graduated in 100 psi increments or less. The jack and pressure gauge shall have a pressure range not exceeding twice the anticipated maximum test pressure. Jack BIG RED BARN STRUCTURAL MICROPILES 31 6225-13 IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 CORNELL SECTION 31 62 25 Ithaca, New York MICROP1LES ram travel shall be sufficient to allow the test to be done without resetting the equipment. Position the jack at the beginning of the test such that unloading and repositioning during the test will not be required. Monitor the creep test load hold during verification tests with both the pressure gauge and the load cell. Use the load cell to accurately maintain a constant load hold during the creep test load hold increment of the verification test. Measure the pile top movement with a dial gauge capable of measuring to 0.001 inch. The dial gauge shall have a travel sufficient to allow the test to be done without having to reset the gauge. Visually align the gauge to be parallel with the axis of the micropile and support the gauge independently from the jack, pile or reaction frame. Use a minimum of two dial gauges when the test setup requires reaction against the ground or single reaction piles on each side of the test pile. The required load test data shall be recorded by the contractor and verified by the Design Professional. 2. Test Loading Schedule -Test piles designated for compression or tension load testing to a maximum test load of 2.0 times the micropile allowable design loads in equal incre- ments and decrements not exceeding 0.5 times the design load. Incrementally load the micropile in accordance with the following cyclic load schedule for both compression and tension loading: 3. Verification Test Pile Acceptance Criteria -The acceptance criteria for micropile verifi- cation load tests are: a. The pile shall sustain the first compression or tension 75% test load with no more than 0.5 inch total vertical movement at the top of the pile, relative to the position of the top of the pile prior to testing. b. At the end of the 100% creep test load increment, test piles shall have a creep rate not exceeding 0.04 inch/log cycle time (I to 10 minutes) or 0.08 inch/log cy- cle time (6 to 60 minutes or the last log cycle if held longer). The creep rate shall be linear or decreasing throughout the creep load hold period. 4. Verification Test Pile Rejection -If a verification-tested micropile fails to meet the ac- ceptance criteria, modify the design, the construction procedure, or both. These modifica- tions may include modifying the installation methods, increasing the bond length, or changing the micropile type. Any modification that necessitates changes to the structure shall require the Design Professional's prior review and acceptance. Any modifications of design or construction procedures or cost of additional verification test piles and load testing shall be at the contractor's expense. At the completion of verification testing, re- move test piles down to 2 feet below roadway subgrade or to the elevation specified by the Design Professional. H. Installation Records -Prepare and submit to the Design Professional full-length Micropile Installation Logs for each micropile installed within 24 hours of micropile installation.. The records shall include the following information as a minimum: 1. Micropile drilling duration 2. Final tip elevation BIG RED BARN STRUCTURAL MICROP1LES 31 6225-14 IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 CORNELL SECTION 31 62 25 Ithaca, New York MICROPILES 3. Cutoff elevations for the top and bottom of the casing 4. Rated load capacities 5. Description of unusual installation behavior or conditions 6. Grout pressures attained during grouting 7. Grout quantities pumped into micropiles 8. Micropile material and dimensional properties I. Mircopile Load Test Data Reports -The Contractor shall report the micropile load test da- ta to the Design Professional in the form of a summary report which includes, at a minimum, all of the following items: 1. Project description. 2. Description of site and subsurface conditions including information on the subsurface conditions encountered at the load test location. 3. A listing of key personnel involved with the testing and production of the micropile including the grout plant operator, drill rig operator, on-site supervisor and micropile design engineer. 4. Micropile Installation Log. 5. Results of the load test, including completed testing field data records for load incre- ments and time periods stipulated and appropriate presentation figures, charts and graphs. The required load test data shall be recorded by the contractor and verified by the Design Professional. 6. Summary statement of load test results, including whether the load test met the crite- ria or failed to meet it. 7. Hydraulic jack pressure gauge and load cell calibration report. 8. Material certifications for permanent casing (if used), reinforcement and grout com- pressive strength testing. At a minimum, 3 day test results shall be provided for the grout. END OF SECTION 061600 BIG RED BARN STRUCTURAL MICROPILES 31 6225-15 IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 TEST BORING LOG 5879 Fisher Road-L IM East Syracuse, NY 13057 PROJECT Cornell Big Red Barn HOLE NO. B-1 LOCATION Ithaca, New York JOB NUMBER: 13161A SURF. EL. GROUNDWATER DEPTH DATE STARTED: 11/14/13 WHILE DRILLING 14.0' DATE COMPLETED: 11/14/13 BEFORE CASING N -NO. OF BLOWS TO DRIVE SAMPLER 12" W/140# HAMMER REMOVED None FALLING 30" -ASTM D-1586 STANDARD PENETRATION TEST AFTER CASING C -NO. OF BLOWS TO DRIVE CASING 12" W/ # HAMMER REMOVED FALLING "I OR PERCENT CORE RECOVERY CASING TYPE HOLLOW STEM AUGER SHEET 1 OF 1 SAMPLE DRIVE STRATA SAMPLE SAMPLE RECORD DESCRIPTION OF MATERIAL CHANGE DEPTH DEPTH NO. Rec PER 6" N DEPTH 2.0'- 1 0.5' 3 2 Brown moist loose SILT, little fine sand, 4.0' 3 2 5 little organics 4.0' 5.0 4.0- 2 1.0' 2 3 Brown moist loose fine to coarse SAND, 6.0' 3 5 6 little fine to medium gravel, little silt, 6.0- 3 1.3' 3 2 trace clay 8.0' 3 3 5 8.0- 4 1.4' 52 10.0 10.0' 3 3 5 10.0' 10.0'- 5 1.8' 3 3 Brown moist loose fine SAND, little silt 12.0' 3 4 6 12.0- 6 2.0' 6 5 WL V 14.0' 3 2 8 14.0' 15.0 14.0- 7 1.9 4 2 Brown wet stiff to very stiff SILT, trace 16.0' 10 11 12 to little fine sand 16.0- 8 2.0' 7 15 18.0' 12 9 27 18.0' 18.0- 9 2.0' 6 7 Brown-gray wet stiff SILT, little fine 20.0 20.0' 7 8 14 sand, little clay 20.0- 10 2.0' 5 5 22.0' 9 10 14 22.0'- 11 2.0' 4 3 22.5' 24.0' 4 5 7 Gray moist medium stiff to stiff CLAY, 25.0 24.0- 12 2.0' 5 5 trace silt 26.0' 7 8 12 26.0'- 13 2.0' 2 2 28.0' 5 6 7 28.0'- 14 2.0' 6 5 30.0 30.0' 6 7 11 30.0'- 15 2.0' WH 2 32.0' 4 4 6 32.0' 32.0'- 16 2.0' 3 3 Gray moist stiff SILT, little clay 34.0' 5 6 8 35.0 34.0'- 17 2.0' 3 5 36.0' 7 10 12 36.0'- 18 2.0' WH 2 37.5' 38.0' 8 18 10 Gray-green moist medium dense medium 38.0- 19 1.9' 8 11 GRAVEL, little silt, trace clay 40.0 40.0' 12 14 23 Bottom of Boring 40.0' PW LbrorenC. 654 Frmon Ro d as Sracuse, Ne Yok135 OfTic 31R7,12 Fa 15.37.1752 -Iwabinihtml to December 6, 2013 Mr. Sean Pepling Parratt-Wolff, Inc. 5879 Fisher Road East Syracuse, New York 13057 Re: L-13012 Laboratory Testing Cornell Big Red Barn Project #SP13161A Dear Mr. Pepling {SPepling@pwinc.com}: Enclosed are the results of laboratory testing performed at your request on two each jar soil samples delivered to our laboratory on December 5, 2013 for the above referenced project. Results include: 1. Atterberg Limits (ASTM D4318) Laboratory I.D. #29213 & 29214 2 Each All requested tests have been completed on the previously received sample(s) for the above project. All sample remains are scheduled to be disposed of onJanuary 6, 2014. Please notify PW Laboratories, Inc. by letter or telephone prior to January 6, 2014 if you would prefer to pick up the sample(s) or that the sample(s) be retained by PW Laboratories, Inc. for an additional period of time. Thank you for this opportunity to work with you. PW LABORATORIES, INC VirginiaJ. Thoma Manager -Laboratory Services VJT/bll Cc: Mr. James D. Smith, P.E. JSmithPE @rochester.rr.com PW Laboratories, Inc. 6544 Fremont Road -East Syracuse, New York 13057 Office 315.437.1420 -Fax 315.437.1752 -pwlabsinc@hotmail.com December 6, 2013 L-13012 Laboratory Testing Cornell Big Red Barn Project #SP13161A Atterberg Limits ASTM D4318 Depth Plastic Liquid Plasticity Lab I.D. # Boring # Sample # (Feet) Limit Limit Index 29213 B-1 S-12 24.0-26.0 18 29 11 29214 B-1 S-14 28.0-30.0 17 26 9 CORNELL SECTION 09 22 16 Ithaca, New York NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Non-load-bearing steel framing systems for interior gypsum board assemblies. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Evaluation Reports: Submit evaluation reports certified under an independent third party inspection program administered by an agency accredited by IAS to ICC-ES AC98, IAS Accreditation Criteria for Inspection Agencies. B. Manufacturer's Certification: Submit manufacturer's certification of product compliance with codes and standards along with product literature and data sheets for specified products. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Contractor shall provide effective, full time quality control over all fabrication and erection complying with the pertinent codes and regulations of government agencies having jurisdiction. Conduct pre-installation meeting to verify project requirements, substrate conditions, and manufacturer's installation instructions. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Notify manufacturer of damaged materials received prior to installation. B. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact. C. Protect cold-formed metal framing from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling as required by AISI's "Code of Standard Practice". BIG RED BARN STRUCTURAL NON-STRUCTURAL 0922 16-1 IMPROVEMENTS METAL FRAMING January 17, 2014 CORNELL SECTION 09 22 16 Ithaca, New York NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE / DESIGN CRITERIA A. Design framing systems in accordance with American Iron and Steel Institute Publication "North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Framing -NonStructural Members", except as otherwise shown or specified. B. Design loads: Provide 5 PSF minimum as required by the International Building Code. C. Design framing systems to accommodate deflection of primary building structure and construction tolerances. 2.2 FRAMING SYSTEMS A. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 645 for conditions indicated. 1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal unless otherwise indicated. 2. Protective Coating: Comply with ASTM C 645; roll-formed from hot-dipped galvanized steel; complying with ASTM A 1003/A 1003M and ASTM A 653/A 653M G40 (Z120) or having a coating that provides equivalent corrosion resistance. A40 galvannealed products are not acceptable. B. Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. Use either steel studs or runners or dimpled steel studs and runners of equivalent minimum base-metal thickness. 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.018 inch (0.45 mm). 2. Depth: As indicated on Drawings or as determined by applications indicated. C. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide one of the following in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs: 1. Single Long-Leg Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runner with 2-inch- (51-mm-) deep flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs, installed with studs friction fit into top runner and with continuous bridging located within 12 inches (305 mm) of the top of studs to provide lateral bracing. 2. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes applied to interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure above; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs. D. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated. a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.018 inch (0.45 mm). E. Channel Bridging and Bracing: Steel, 0.053 inch (1.37-mm) minimum base-metal thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide flanges. BIG RED BARN STRUCTURAL NON-STRUCTURAL 0922 16-2 IMPROVEMENTS METAL FRAMING January 17, 2014 CORNELL SECTION 09 22 16 Ithaca, New York NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING a. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. b. Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches (38 by 38 mm), 0.068-inch (1.72 mm) thick, galvanized steel. 2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards. 1. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754. 1. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to framing installation. B. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction. C. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies. 3.2 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES A. Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types. 1. Single-Layer Application: 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. unless otherwise indicated. 2. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction. B. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling. 1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished assemblies. 2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. a. Install two studs at each jamb unless otherwise indicated. b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-inch (13-mm) clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished assembly. BIG RED BARN STRUCTURAL NON-STRUCTURAL 0922 16-3 IMPROVEMENTS METAL FRAMING January 17. 2014 CORNELL SECTION 09 22 16 Ithaca, New York NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING c. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead structure. END OF SECTION 092216 BIG RED BARN STRUCTURAL NON-STRUCTURAL 0922 16-4 IMPROVEMENTS METAL FRAMING January 17, 2014 Big Red Barn Structural Improvements PAINTING AND COATING 099000 -1 SECTION 099000 -PAINTING AND COATING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Surface preparation and the application of paint systems on exterior and interior substrates. 2. Surface preparation and repainting at areas of renovation, including: a. Exterior copper sheet metal flashing and trim. b. Exposed metal surfaces of interior stairs. c. Exterior woodwork. d. Other items and surfaces as indicated. B. Paint exposed exterior and interior substrates, except where schedules indicate that a surface or material is not to be painted or is to remain natural. If schedules do not specifically mention an item or a surface, paint the item or surface the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces whether or not schedules indicate colors. If schedules do not indicate color or finish, the Design Professional will select from standard colors and finishes available. 1. Do not paint prefinished items, integrally finished systems, finished metal surfaces, operating parts, and labels, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Prefinished items include the following shop- or factory-finished components: a. Architectural woodwork and casework. b. Elevator entrance doors and frames. c. Finished mechanical and electrical equipment. d. Lighting fixtures. 3. Finished metal surfaces include the following: a. Anodized aluminum. b. Stainless steel. c. Chromium plate. d. Copper. e. Bronze and brass. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Gloss Level 1 (Flat): Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. January 17, 2014 Big Red Barn Structural Improvements PAINTING AND COATING 099000 -2 B. Gloss Level 3 (Eggshell): 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. C. Gloss Level 5 (Semi-Gloss): 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. D. Gloss Level 6 (Gloss): 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions. B. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and each color and gloss of topcoat; cured not less than 7 days. 1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 12 inches (300 mm) square. 2. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system. 3. Label each coat of each Sample. 4. Label each Sample for location and application area. C. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following: 1. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 2. Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified, with the proposed product highlighted. 3. VOC content. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Design Professional will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each paint system specified in Part 3. a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft. (9 sq. in). b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required. 2. Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups. a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner. 3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 4. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. January 17, 2014 Big Red Barn Structural Improvements PAINTING AND COATING 099000-3 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F (7 deg C). 1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F (10 and 35 deg C). B. Do not apply paints in snow, rain, fog, or mist; when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Benjamin Moore & Co. 2. Duron, Inc. 3. Fine Paints of Europe. 4. Glidden Professional. 5. M.A.B. Paints. 6. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc. 7. Pratt & Lambert. 8. Rust-Oleum Corporation. 9. Sherwin-Williams Company (The). 10. Tnemec Company, Inc. B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product listed in other Part 2 and Part 3 articles for the paint category indicated. 2.2 PAINT, GENERAL A. MPI Standards: Provide products that comply with MPI standards indicated and that are listed in its "MPI Approved Products List." Refer to Schedule in Part 3 for additional information. B. Material Quality: Unless otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's best-quality paint material for each coating type. C. Material Compatibility: I. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. January 17, 2014 Big Red Barn Structural Improvements PAINTING AND COATING 099000 -4 2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated. D. VOC Content: Products shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction and, for interior paints and coatings applied at Project site, the following VOC limits, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 1. Flat Paints, Coatings, and Primers: 50 g/L. 2. Nonflat Paints, Coatings, and Primers: 150 g/L. 3. Sealers and Undercoaters: 200 g/L. 4. Anticorrosive and Antirust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: 250 g/L. 5. Floor Coatings: 100 g/L. E. Colors: Custom colors to match Architect's samples. 2.3 PRIMERS/SEALERS A. Primer Sealer, Latex, Interior: MPI #50. B. Primer Sealer, Interior, Institutional Low Odor/VOC: MPI #149. C. Primer, Latex, for Interior Wood: MPI #39. 2.4 METAL PRIMERS A. Primer, Galvanized, Water Based: As recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer. B. Primer, Rust-Inhibitive, Water Based: MPI #107. 2.5 EXTERIOR WATER-BASED PAINTS A. Light Industrial Coating, Exterior, Water Based, Gloss (Gloss Level 6): MPI #164. 2.6 INTERIOR WATER-BASED PAINTS A. Latex, Interior, Institutional Low Odor/VOC, Flat (Gloss Level 1): MPI #143. B. Latex, Interior, Institutional Low Odor/VOC (Gloss Level 3): MPI #145. C. Latex, Interior, Institutional Low Odor/VOC, Semi-Gloss (Gloss Level 5): MPI #147. 2.7 MATERIALS FOR PREPARING EXISTING SUBSTRATES A. Detergent Solution: Solution prepared by mixing 2 cups (0.5 L) of tetrasodiurn polyphosphate, 1/2 cup (125 mL) of laundry detergent that contains no ammonia, 5 quarts (5 L) of 5 percent sodium hypochlorite bleach, and 15 quarts (15 L) of warm water for each 5 gal. (20 L) of solution required. January 17, 2014 Big Red Barn Structural Improvements PAINTING AND COATING 099000 -5 B. Mildewcide: Commercial proprietary mildewcide or a job-mixed solution prepared by mixing 1/3 cup (80 mL) of household detergent that contains no ammonia, 1 quart (1 L) of 5 percent sodium hypochlorite bleach, and 3 quarts (3 L) of warm water. C. Abrasives for Ferrous Metal Cleaning: Aluminum oxide paper, ernery paper, fine steel wool, steel scrapers, and steel-wire brushes of various sizes. D. Paint Remover: Manufacturer's standard water-rinsable formulation for removing paint and coatings from substrates indicated; and containing no methylene chloride. E. Wood Patching Compound: Two-part, epoxy-resin patching system; formulation as recommended by manufacturer for type of wood repair indicated; for filling voids in damaged wood materials that have deteriorated due to weathering and decay; capable of filling deep holes and spreading to feather edge. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Abatron, Inc.; LiquidWood with WoodEpox. F. Metal Patching Compound: Two-part, polyester-resin metal patching compound; formulation as recommended by manufacturer for type of metal repair indicated, for filling metal that has deteriorated due to corrosion; capable of filling deep holes and spreading to feather edge. G. Gypsum-Plaster Patching Compound: Finish coat plaster and bonding compound according to ASTM C 842 and manufacturer's written instructions. 2.8 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure: 1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials. Contractor will be notified in advance and may be present when samples are taken. If paint materials have already been delivered to Project site, samples may be taken at Project site. Samples will be identified, sealed, and certified by testing agency. 2. Testing agency will perforn tests for compliance with product requirements. 3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying paints if test results show materials being used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces painted with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two paints are incompatible. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows: January 17, 2014 Big Red Barn Structural Improvements PAINTING AND COATING 099000 -6 1. Concrete: 12 percent. 2. Wood: 15 percent. 3. Gypsum Board: 12 percent. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated. B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection. C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. I. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated. D. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. E. Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer if any. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer but not less than the following: 1. Interior Steel Substrates: SSPC-SP 11, "Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal." 2. Exterior Steel Substrates: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3 "Commercial Blast Cleaning." F. Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply with SSPC-PA I for touching up shop-primed surfaces. G. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints. H. New Copper Sheet-Metal Substrates: Remove residual materials including grease films and clean copper. Abrade surfaces by mechanical method using Scotch Brite pads or similar materials to produce surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints. I. Wood Substrates: 1. Scrape and clean knots. Before applying primer, apply coat of knot sealer recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer for exterior use in paint system indicated. 2. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off. 3. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood. January 17, 2014 Big Red Barn Structural Improvements PAINTING AND COATING 099000-7 4. For exterior wood cladding at clock tower, apply primer and one finish coat to surfaces that will be concealed in the completed Work. 5. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried. 3.3 PREPARING EXISTING SUBSTRATES A. Paint Removal, General: Remove paint where indicated. In areas where paint removal is not indicated but where cleaning methods have been attempted and further removal of the paint is required because of incompatible or unsatisfactory surfaces for repainting, remove paint to extent required by conditions. 1. Paint Removal with Paint Remover: a. Remove loose and peeling paint using water, scrapers, stiff brushes, or a combination of these. Let surface dry thoroughly. b. Apply thick coating of paint remover to dry, painted surface with natural-fiber cleaning brush, deep-nap roller, or large paintbrush. c. Allow paint remover to remain on surface for period recommended by manufacturer. Agitate periodically with stiff-fiber brush. d. If recommended by paint remover manufacturer, rinse with water applied by medium-pressure spray to remove chemicals and paint residue. 1) Do not rinse cast iron or gypsum substrates with water. e. Use mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer to remove chemicals and paint residue. f. Repeat process if necessary to remove all paint. B. Detergent Cleaning: Wash surfaces by hand using clean rags, sponges, and bristle brushes. Scrub surface with detergent solution and bristle brush until soil is thoroughly dislodged and can be removed by rinsing. Use small brushes to remove soil fror joints and crevices. Dip brush in solution often to ensure that adequate fresh detergent is used and that surface remains wet. Rinse with water applied by clean rags or sponges. C. Mildew: Clean off existing mildew, algae, moss, plant material, loose paint, grease, dirt, and other debris by scrubbing with bristle brush or sponge and detergent solution. Scrub mildewed areas with mildewcide. Rinse with water applied by clean rags or sponges. D. Rust Removal: 1. Remove rust with approved abrasives for ferrous metal cleaning. Clean to bright metal. 2. Wipe off residue with mineral spirits and either steel wool or soft rags. 3. Dry immediately with clean, soft cloths. Follow direction of grain in metal. 4. Prime immediately to prevent rust. Do not touch cleaned metal surface until primed. E. Substrate Repair, General: Repair substrate surface defects that are inconsistent with the surface appearance of adjacent materials and finishes. 1. Wood Substrate: January 17, 2014 Big Red Barn Structural Improvements PAINTING AND COATING 099000 -8 a. Repair wood defects including dents and gouges more than 1/4 inch (6 mm) in size and all holes and cracks by filling with wood patching compound and sanding smooth. Reset or remove protruding fasteners. b. Where existing paint is allowed to remain, sand irregular buildup of paint, runs, and sags to achieve a uniformly smooth surface. 2. Metal Substrate: a. General: Repair defects including dents and gouges more than 1/8 inch (3 mm) deep or 1/2 inch (13 mm) across and all holes and cracks by filling with metal patching compound and sanding smooth. Remove burrs and protruding fasteners. b. Prepare repair locations by wire-brushing and solvent cleaning. Use mechanical rust removal method to clean off rust, unless otherwise indicated or acceptable to Architect. c. Prime iron and steel surfaces immediately after repair to prevent flash rusting. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges. Apply two coats to surfaces that will be inaccessible after completion of the Work. 3.4 APPLICATION A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual." 1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable items same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed items with prime coat only. 3. Paint both sides and edges of exterior doors and entire exposed surface of exterior door frames. 4. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces. 5. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. 6. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers. B. Tint undercoats same color as topcoat, but tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance. D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks. E. Painting Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, Communication, and Electronic Safety and Security Work: 1. Paint the following work where exposed to view on exterior: January 17, 2014 Big Red Barn Structural Improvements PAINTING AND COATING 099000 -9 a. Equipment, including panelboards and switch gear. b. Uninsulated metal piping. c. Uninsulated plastic piping. d. Pipe hangers and supports. e. Metal conduit. f. Plastic conduit. g. Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness. I. Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing. 2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with paint manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with paint manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site. B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. 3.7 EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE A. Exposed Steel Substrates: Including stairs.. 1. Thermoset Fluoropolymer Coating System: a. Coating System: Tnemec; Fluoronar Series 1071. b. Prime Coat: Tnemec; Series 90-97 Tneme-Zinc. c. Intermediate Coat: Tnemec; Series N69 Hi Build Epoxoline. d. Topcoat: Tnemec; Series 1071; exterior gloss (Gloss Level 6). B. Concealed or Embedded Steel Substrates: Including gutter brackets, balustrade framing, and other miscellaneous steel fabrications adjacent to roof and other upper building applications: I. High-Build Polyamidoamine Epoxy System: a. Prime Coat: Primer, epoxy, anti-corrosive, for metal, matching topcoat. January 17, 2014 Big Red Barn Structural Improvements PAINTING AND COATING 099000-10 b. Topcoat: Tnemec Company, Inc.; Hi-Build Epoxoline II, Series N69, satin gloss. C. Copper Sheet Metal Substrates: For new, unpainted copper. 1. Water-Based Light Industrial Coating System: a. Prime Coat: Primer, quick dry, for aluminum, MPI #95. b. Intermediate Coat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based, gloss (Gloss Level 6), MPI #164. d. ). D. Wood Cladding Substrates: Including wood cladding at clock tower. 1. Latex over Alkyd Primer System: Apply primer and intermediate coat to surfaces that will be concealed in the completed Work; and primer plus two topcoats to exposed surfaces. a. Prime Coat: Sherwin-Williams; Exterior Oil-Based Wood Primer, Y24W8020. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, exterior, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Sherwin-Williams; SuperPaint Exterior Acrylic Latex Flat, A80-1 100 Series. 3.8 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE A. Previously Painted Wood Substrates: Including wood trim, architectural woodwork, interior doors, and windows. 1. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System: a. Prime Coat: Primer, latex, for interior wood, MPI #39. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5), MPI #147. B. Previously Un-painted Wood Substrates: Including wood trim, architectural woodwork, interior doors, windows, and T&G Wall Covering. 1. Subject to mock-up, use one of the following: a. Finish Coat: Natural rubbed linseed oil finish. b. Finish Coat: 2 coats Minwax Wood Stain of color to be chosen in field by Design Professional END OF SECTION January 17, 2014 Big Red Barn Structural Improvements HISTORIC TREATMENT OF WOOD WINDOWS 080352 -1 SECTION 080352 -HISTORIC TREATMENT OF WOOD WINDOWS PART I -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes historic treatment of wood windows in the form of the following (Contractor Note -the majority of the work specified herein is part of an Add Alternate to the base scope): 1. Repairing wood windows and trim. 2. Repairing, refinishing, and replacing hardware. 3. Repairing storm windows and insect screens. 4. Replacing storm-window and insect-screen units. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Window: Includes window frame, sash, hardware, storm window, and exterior and interior shutters unless otherwise indicated by context. B. Wood Window Component Terminology: Wood window components for historic treatment work include the following classifications: I. Frame Components: Head, jambs, and sill. 2. Sash Components: Stiles and rails, parting bead, stop, and muntins. 3. Exterior Trim: Exterior casing, brick mold, and cornice or drip cap. 4. Interior Trim: Casing, stool, and apron. 1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project Site. I. Review minutes of Preliminary Historic Treatment Conference that pertain to historic treatment of wood windows. 2. Review methods and procedures related to historic treatment of wood windows including, but not limited to, the following: a. Historic treatment specialist's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. b. Materials, material application, sequencing, tolerances, and required clearances. c. Fire-protection plan. d. Wood window historic treatment program. January 17, 2014 Big Red Barn Structural Improvements HISTORIC TREATMENT OF WOOD WINDOWS 080352-2 e. Coordination with building occupants. 1.5 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Perform historic treatment of wood windows in the following sequence, which includes work specified in this and other Sections: 1. Label each window frame with permanent opening-identification number in inconspicuous location. 2. Tag existing window sash, storm windows, and shutters with opening-identification numbers and remove for on-site or off-site repair. Indicate on tags the locations on window of each component, such as "top sash," "bottom sash," "left shutter," and "right shutter." 3. Remove window, dismantle hardware, and tag hardware with opening-identification numbers. 4. Install temporary protection and security at window openings. 5. In the shop, label each sash, storm window, shutter, and louvered blind unit with permanent opening-identification number in inconspicuous location and remove site- applied tags. 6. Sort units by condition, separating those that need extensive repair. 7. Clean surfaces. 8. General Wood-Repair Sequence: a. Remove paint to bare wood. b. Rack frames slightly to inject adhesive into mortise and tenon joints; square frames to proper fit before adhesive sets. c. If thicker than original glass is required, rout existing muntins to required rebate size. d. Repair wood by consolidation, member replacement, partial member replacement, and patching. e. Sand, prime, fill, sand again, and prime surfaces again for refinishing. 9. Repair, refinish, and replace hardware if required. Reinstall operating hardware. 10. Install glazing. 11. Remove temporary protection and security at window openings. 12. Reinstall units. 13. Apply finish coats. 14. Install remaining hardware and weather stripping. 1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include recommendations for product application and use. Include test data substantiating that products comply with requirements. B. Shop Drawings: January 17, 2014 Big Red Barn Structural Improvements HISTORIC TREATMENT OF WOOD WINDOWS 080352-3 1. Include plans, elevations, and sections showing locations and extent of repair and replacement work, with enlarged details of replacement parts indicating materials, profiles, joinery, reinforcing, method of splicing into or attaching to existing wood window, accessory items, and finishes. 2. Include field-verified dimensions and the following: a. Full-size shapes and profiles with complete dimensions for replacement components and their jointing, showing relation of existing to new components. b. Templates and directions for installing hardware and anchorages. c. Identification of each new unit and its corresponding window locations in the building on annotated plans and elevations. d. Provisions for sealant joints and flashing as required for location. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of exposed wood and finish. 1. Identify wood species, cut, and other features. 2. Include Samples of hardware and accessories involving color selection. D. Samples for Verification: For the following products in manufacturer's standard sizes unless otherwise indicated, finished as required for use in the Work: 1. Replacement Members: 12 inches (300 mm) long for each replacement member, including parts of frame, sash, exterior trim, and interior trim. a. Additional Samples of replacement members that show fabrication techniques, materials, and finishes as requested by Architect. 2. Repaired Wood Window Members: Prepare Samples using existing wood window members removed from site, repaired, and prepared for refinishing. 3. Refinished Wood Window Members: Prepare Samples using existing wood window members removed from site, repaired, and refinished. 4. Hardware: Full-size units with each factory-applied or restored finish. 5. Weather Stripping: 12-inch- (300-mm-) long sections. 1.7 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For historic treatment specialist including workers and wood-repair-material manufacturer. B. Wood Window Historic Treatment Program: Submit before work begins. C. Preconstruction Test Reports: For historic treatment of wood windows. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Historic Treatment Specialist Qualifications: A qualified historic wood window specialist, experienced in repairing, refinishing, and replacing wood windows in whole and in part. Experience only in fabricating and installing new wood windows is insufficient experience for wood-window historic treatment work. January 17, 2014 Big Red Barn Structural Improvements HISTORIC TREATMENT OF WOOD WINDOWS 080352-4 B. Wood-Repair-Material Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm regularly engaged in producing wood consolidant and wood-patching compound that have been used for similar historic wood- treatment applications with successful results, and with factory-authorized service representatives who are available for consultation and Project-site inspection and on-site assistance. C. Wood Window Historic Treatment Program: Prepare a written, detailed description of materials, methods, equipment, and sequence of operations to be used for historic treatment work, including protection of surrounding materials and Project site. 1. If materials and methods other than those indicated are proposed for any phase of historic treatment work, add a written description of such materials and methods, including evidence of successful use on comparable projects, and demonstrations to show their effectiveness for this Project. D. Mockups: Prepare mockups of historic treatment repair processes to demonstrate aesthetic effects and to set quality standards for materials and execution and for fabrication and installation. Prepare mockups so they are as inconspicuous as practicable. 1. Locate mockups on existing windows where directed by Design Professional in locations that enable viewing under same conditions as the completed Work. 2. Wood Window Repair: Prepare one entire window unit to serve as mockup to demonstrate samples of each type of repair of wood window members including fi-ame, sash, glazing, and hardware. 3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Pack, deliver, and store products in suitable packs, heavy-duty cartons, or wooden crates; surround with sufficient packing material to ensure that products are not deformed, broken, or otherwise damaged. B. Store products inside a well-ventilated area and protect from weather, moisture, soiling, abrasion, extreme temperatures, and humidity, and where environmental conditions comply with manufacturer's requirements. 1.10 FIELD COND1TIONS A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with historic treatment of wood windows only when existing and forecasted weather conditions are within the environmental limits set by each manufacturer's written instructions and specified requirements. January 17, 2014 Big Red Barn Structural Improvements HISTORIC TREATMENT OF WOOD WINDOWS 080352 -5 PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 HISTORIC TREATMENT OF WOOD WINDOWS, GENERAL A. Quality Standard: Comply with applicable requirements in Section 12, "Historic Restoration Work," and related requirements in AWI/AWMAC/WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards" for construction, finishes, grades of wood windows, and other requirements unless otherwise indicated. 1. Exception: Industry practices cited in Section 12, Article 1.5, Industry Practices, of the Architectural Woodwork Standards do not apply to the work of this Section. 2.2 REPLICATED WOOD WINDOW UNITS A. Replicated Wood Window Frames, Sashes and Storms: Custom-fabricated replacement wood units and trim, with operating and latching hardware. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Adams Architectural Millwork Co.; Subsidiary of Dubuque Sash & Door Mfg. b. Allegheny Restoration & Builders Inc. c. Architectural Components, Inc. d. Bear Wood Windows, Inc. e. Cleary and Son, Inc. f. Custom Wood Reproductions Inc. g. Grabill Windows & Doors. h. H. Hirschrnann LTD. i. Kingsland Architectural Millwork. j. Olek Lejbzon & Co. k. Parrett Manufacturing, Inc. 1. Replica Windows. n. Smith Restoration Sash. n. Weston Millwork Company. o. Wewoka Window Works. p. Woodstone Company (The). q. Wood Window Workshop. 2. Joint Construction: Joints matching existing 3. Wood Species: African Mahogany 4. Wood Window Members and Trim: Match profiles and detail of existing window members and trim. 5. Glazing Stops: Provide replacement glazing stops coordinated with glazing system indicated. 6. Exposed Hardware: Match existing exposed window hardware. 7. Weather Stripping: Full-perimeter weather stripping for each operable sash. January 17, 2014 Big Red Barn Structural Improvements HISTORIC TREATMENT OF WOOD WINDOWS 080352 -6 8. Date Identification: Emboss on a concealed surface of each replaced window frame and sash, in easily read characters, "WINDOW MADE 2014" or "SASH MADE 2014." Manufacturer's name may also be embossed. 2.3 STORM WINDOWS A. General: Custom fabricated, tight fitting, replicating appearance of existing storn windows,] and with operating and latching hardware. 1. Fabricate storm windows for installation on inside of primary window. Generally retain subparagraph below for exterior wooden storm windows that fit into window frames. This is less common for aluminum storm windows that fit into aluminum frames. 2. Make storm windows removable for cleaning and storage. B. Interior Aluminum Storm Windows: Fabricated from extruded aluminum to fit inside the wood window frame; finish as indicated; storm window frames concealed from exterior view. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Allied Window Inc. b. edi Window Systems, Inc. c. Mon-Ray, Inc. 2. Aluminum Finish: Manufacturer's standard anodized color matching Design Professional's choice following review. 3. Hardware: Extruded-aluminum track slides at head and sill. 4. Glazing Material: Uncoated clear float glass. 2.4 WOOD-REPLACEMENT MATERIALS A. Wood, General: Clear fine-grained lumber; kiln dried to a moisture content of 6 to 12 percent at time of fabrication; free of visible finger joints, blue stain, knots, pitch pockets, and surface checks larger than 1/32 inch (0.8 mm) deep by 2 inches (51 mm) wide. 1. Species: African Mahogany unless otherwise indicated. B. All Exterior Trim and Sills: Western Red Cedar. 2.5 WOOD-REPAIR MATERIALS A. Source Limitations: Obtain wood consolidant and wood-patching compound from single source from single manufacturer. B. Wood Consolidant: Ready-to-use product designed to penetrate, consolidate, and strengthen soft fibers of wood materials that have deteriorated due to weathering and decay and designed specifically to enhance the bond of wood-patching compound to existing wood. January 17, 2014 Big Red Barn Structural Improvements HISTORIC TREATMENT OF WOOD WINDOWS 080352 -7 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Abatron, Inc.; LiquidWood. b. ConServ Epoxy LLC; Flexible Epoxy Consolidant 100. c. Gougeon Brothers, Inc.; West System. d. Protective Coating Company; [PC-Petrifier] [or] [PC-Rot Terminator]. e. System Three Resins, Inc.; RotFix. C. Wood-Patching Compound: Two-part epoxy-resin wood-patching compound; knife-grade formulation as recommended in writing by manufacturer for type of wood repair indicated, tooling time required for the detail of work, and site conditions. Compound shall be designed for filling voids in damaged wood materials that have deteriorated due to weathering and decay. Compound shall be capable of filling deep holes and spreading to feather edge. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Abatron, Inc.; LiquidWood with WoodEpox. b. Advanced Repair Technology, Inc.; Primatrate with Flex-Tec HV. c. ConServ Epoxy LLC; Flexible Epoxy Consolidant 100 with Flexible Epoxy Patch 200. d. Gougeon Brothers, Inc.; West System thickened with filler. e. Polymeric Systems, Inc.; QuickWood. f. Protective Coating Company; PC-Woody. g. System Three Resins, Inc.; Sculpwood. 2.6 HARDWARE, FINISHES, WEATHER STRIPPING AND ACCESSORIES A. All furnished and installed to match existing. All materials subject to review and approval by Design Professional. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 HISTORIC TREATMENT SPECIALIST A. Historic Treatment Specialist Firms: Subject to compliance with requirements. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Protect adjacent materials from damage by historic treatment of wood windows. B. Clean wood windows of mildew, algae, moss, plant material, loose paint, grease, dirt, and other debris by scrubbing with bristle brush or sponge and detergent solution. Scrub mildewed areas with mildewcide. After cleaning, rinse thoroughly with fresh water. Allow to dry before repairing or painting. C. Condition replacement wood members and replacement units to prevailing conditions at installation areas before installing. January 17, 2014 Big Red Barn Structural Improvements HISTORIC TREATMENT OF WOOD WINDOWS 080352 -8 3.3 HISTORIC TREATMENT OF WOOD WINDOWS, GENERAL A. Historic Treatment Appearance Standard: Completed work is to have a uniform appearance as viewed by Architect from the window interior at 10 feet away and from the window exterior at 20 feet away. B. General: In treating historic items, disturb them as minimally as possible and as follows: 1. Stabilize and repair wood windows to reestablish structural integrity and weather resistance while maintaining the existing form of each item. 2. Remove coatings and apply borate preservative treatment before repair. Remove coatings according to Section 090391 "Historic Treatment of Plain Painting" unless otherwise indicated. 3. Repair items in place where possible. 4. Install temporary protective measures to protect wood window work that is indicated to be completed later. 5. Refinish historic wood windows according to Section 090391 "Historic Treatment of Plain Painting" unless otherwise indicated. C. Mechanical Abrasion: Where mechanical abrasion is needed for the work, use only the gentlest mechanical methods, such as scraping and natural-fiber bristle brushing, that will not abrade wood substrate, reducing clarity of detail. Do not use abrasive methods such as sanding, wire brushing, or power tools except as indicated as part of the historic treatment program and as approved by Architect. D. Repair and Refinish Existing Hardware: Dismantle window hardware; strip paint, repair, and refinish it to match finish samples; and lubricate moving parts just enough to function smoothly. E. Repair Wood Windows: Match existing materials and features, retaining as much original material as possible to perform repairs. 1. Unless otherwise indicated, repair wood windows by consolidating, patching, splicing, or otherwise reinforcing wood with new wood matching existing wood or with salvaged, sound, original wood. 2. Where indicated, repair wood windows by limited replacement matching existing material. 3. Sash Balance: Repair sash balances to function according to type as specified in "Hardware" Article" above. Provide missing sash balances. F. Replace Wood Units: Where indicated, duplicate and replace units with units made from salvaged, sound, original wood or with new wood matching existing wood. Use surviving prototypes to create patterns for duplicate replacements. 1. Do not use substitute materials unless otherwise indicated. 2. Compatible substitute materials may be used. G. Protection of Openings: Where sash or windows are indicated for removal, cover resultant openings with temporary enclosures so that openings are weathertight during repair period. H. Identify removed windows, frames, sash, and members with numbering system corresponding to window locations to ensure reinstallation in same location. Key windows, sash, and members January 17, 2014 Big Red Barn Structural Improvements HISTORIC TREATMENT OF WOOD WINDOWS 080352 -9 to Drawings showing location of each removed unit. Permanently label units in a location that will be concealed after reinstallation. 3.4 WOOD WINDOW PATCH-TYPE REPAIR A. General: Patch wood members that exhibit depressions, holes, or similar voids, and that have limited amounts of rotted or decayed wood. 1. Remove [sash] [storm windows] [and] [screens] from windows before performing patch-type repairs at meeting or sliding surfaces unless otherwise indicated. Reglaze units before reinstallation. 2. Verify that surfaces are sufficiently clean and free of paint residue before patching. 3. Treat wood members with wood consolidant before applying patching compound. Coat wood surfaces by brushing, applying multiple coats until wood is saturated and unable to absorb more. Allow treatment to harden before filling void with patching compound. 4. Remove rotted or decayed wood down to sound wood. B. Apply borate preservative treatment to accessible surfaces either before applying wood consolidant or after removing rotted or decayed wood. Apply treatment liberally by brush to joints, edges, and ends; top, sides, and bottom. Allow treatment to dry. C. Apply wood-patching compound to fill depressions, nicks, cracks, and other voids created by removed or missing wood. 1. Prime patch area with application of wood consolidant or manufacturer's recommended primer. 2. Mix only as much patching compound as can be applied according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3. Apply patching compound in layers as recommended in writing by manufacturer until the void is completely filled. 4. Sand patch surface smooth and flush with adjacent wood, without voids in patch material, and matching contour of wood member. 5. Clean spilled compound from adjacent materials immediately. 3.5 WOOD WINDOW MEMBER-REPLACEMENT REPAIR A. General: Replace parts of or entire wood window members at locations where damage is too extensive to patch. 1 .Remove window components from windows before performing member-replacement repairs unless otherwise indicated. 2. Verify that surfaces are sufficiently clean and free of paint residue before repair. 3. Remove broken, rotted, and decayed wood down to sound wood. 4. Custom fabricate new wood to replace missing wood; either replace entire wood member or splice new wood part into existing member. 5. Secure new wood using finger joints, multiple dowels, or splines with adhesive and nailing to ensure maximum structural integrity at each splice. Use only concealed fasteners. Fill nail holes and patch surface to match surrounding sound wood. January 17, 2014 Big Red Barn Structural Improvements HISTORIC TREATMENT OF WOOD WINDOWS 080352 -10 B. Apply borate preservative treatment to accessible surfaces after replacements are made. Apply treatment liberally by brush to joints, edges, and ends; top, sides, and bottom. C. Repair remaining depressions, holes, or similar voids with patch-type repairs. D. Clean spilled materials from adjacent surfaces immediately. E. Glazing: Reglaze units before reinstallation. 1. Mill new and rout existing glazed members to accommodate new glass thickness. 2. Provide replacement glazing stops coordinated with glazing system indicated. 3. Provide glazing stops to match contour of sash frames. F. Reinstall units removed for repair into original openings. G. Weather Stripping: Replace nonfunctioning and install missing weather stripping to ensure full- perimeter weather stripping for each operable sash. 3.6 GLAZING A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, glazing systems, and glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. B. Remove cracked and damaged glass and glazing materials from openings and prepare surfaces for reglazing. C. Remove existing glass and glazing where indicated on Drawings, and prepare surfaces for reglazing. D. Remove glass and glazing from openings and prepare surfaces for reglazing. E. Size glass as required by Project conditions to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, with reasonable tolerances. F. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of glazing system, as determined by preconstruction testing. G. Install setting bead, side beads, and back bead against stop in glazing rabbets before setting glass. H. Install glass with proper orientation so that coatings, if any, face exterior or interior as required. I. Install glazing points. 3.7 WOOD WINDOW UNIT REPLACEMENT A. General: Replace existing wood window frame, sash and storm window units with new custom- fabricated units to match existing at locations where damage is too extensive to repair. January 17, 2014 Big Red Barn Structural Improvements HISTORIC TREATMENT OF WOOD WINDOWS 080352- 11 B. Apply borate preservative treatment to accessible surfaces before finishing. Apply treatment liberally by brush to joints, edges, and ends; top, sides, and bottom. C. Mill glazed members to accommodate glass thickness. Glaze units before installation. D. Install units, hardware, weather stripping, accessories, and other components. E. Install units level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion or impeding movement; anchored securely in place to structural support; and in proper relation to wall flashing, trim, and other adjacent construction. F. Set sill members in bed of sealant for weathertight construction unless otherwise indicated. G. Install window units with new anchors into existing openings. H. Weather Stripping: Install full-perimeter weather stripping for each operable sash. I. Metal Protection: Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials. 3.8 STORM WINDOW INSTALLATION A. Install wood storm windows at each window jamb. B. Install interior aluminum stonn windows at each window. C. Install units by mounting to window frames according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.9 WEATHER STRIPPING INSTALLATION A. Install weather stripping for tight seal of joints as determined by preconstruction testing and demonstrated in mockup. 3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturers Field Service: Engage wood-repair-material manufacturers' factory-authorized service representatives for consultation and Project-site inspection and to provide on-site assistance when requested by Architect. 3.11 ADJUSTING A. Adjust existing and replacement operating sash, screens, hardware, weather stripping, and accessories for a tight fit at contact points and weather stripping for smooth operation and weathertight closure. Lubricate hardware and moving parts. January 17, 2014 Big Red Barn Structural Improvements HISTORIC TREATMENT OF WOOD WINDOWS 080352 -12 3.12 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Protect window surfaces from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. Monitor window surfaces adjacent to and below exterior concrete and masonry during construction for presence of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, stains, or other contaminants. If contaminating substances contact window surfaces, remove contaminants immediately. B. Clean exposed surfaces immediately after historic treatment of wood windows. Avoid damage to coatings and finishes. Remove excess sealants, glazing and patching materials, dirt, and other substances. C. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during construction. END OF SECTION 080352 January 17, 2014 Big Red Barn Structural Improvements PREPARATION FOR REROOFING 070150 -1 SECTION 070150.19 -PREPARATION FOR REROOFING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Full tear-off of roof areas indicated. 2. Re-cover preparation of roof areas indicated. 3. Removal of base flashings. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. I. Include certificate that Installer is approved by warrantor of existing roofing system. B. Fastener pull-out test report. C. Photographs or Videotape: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements, including exterior and interior finish surfaces, that might be misconstrued as having been damaged by reroofing operations. Submit before Work begins. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Approved by warrantor of existing roofing system to work on existing roofing. B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning roofing removal. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. C. Reroofing Conference: Conduct conference at Project Site. 1. Meet with Owner; Design Professional; testing and inspecting agency representative; roofing system manufacturer's representative; roofing Installer, including project manager, superintendent, and foreman; and installers whose work interfaces with or affects reroofing, including installers of roof deck. 2. Review methods and procedures related to roofing system tear-off and replacement, including, but not limited to, the following: January 17, 2014 Big Red Barn Structural Improvements PREPARATION FOR REROOFING 070150 -2 a. Reroofing preparation, including roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. b. Temporary protection requirements for existing roofing system components that are to remain. c. Existing roof drains and roof drainage during each stage of reroofing, and roof- drain plugging and plug removal. d. Construction schedule and availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to avoid delays. e. Existing roof deck conditions requiring notification of Design Professional. f. Existing roof deck removal procedures and Owner notifications. g. Condition and acceptance of existing roof deck and base flashing substrate for reuse. h. Structural loading limitations of roof deck during reroofing. i. Base flashings, special roofing details, drainage, penetrations, equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that affect reroofing. j. HVAC shutdown and sealing of air intakes. k. Shutdown of fire-suppression, -protection, and -alarm and -detection systems. 1. Asbestos removal and discovery of asbestos-containing materials. n. Governing regulations and requirements for insurance and certificates if applicable. n. Existing conditions that may require notification of Design Professional before proceeding. 1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Existing Roofing System: Asphalt shingle roofing. B. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately below reroofing area. Conduct reroofing so Owner's operations are not disrupted. Provide Owner with not less than 72 hours' notice of activities that may affect Owner's operations. 1. Coordinate work activities daily with Owner so Owner can place protective dust and water-leakage covers over sensitive equipment and furnishings, shut down HVAC and fire-alarm or -detection equipment if needed, and evacuate occupants from below work area. 2. Before working over structurally impaired areas of deck, notify Owner to evacuate occupants from below affected area. Verify that occupants below work area have been evacuated before proceeding with work over impaired deck area. C. Protect building to be reroofed, adjacent buildings, walkways, site improvements, exterior plantings, and landscaping from damage or soiling from reroofing operations. D. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. E. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding are maintained by Owner as far as practical. 1. A roof moisture survey of existing roofing system is available for Contractor's reference.. 2. Construction Drawings for existing roofing system are provided for Contractor's convenience and information, but are not a warranty of existing conditions. They are January 17, 2014 Big Red Barn Structural Improvements PREPARATION FOR REROOFING 070150-3 intended to supplement rather than serve in lieu of Contractor's own investigations. Contractor is responsible for conclusions derived from existing documents. F. Weather Limitations: Proceed with reroofing preparation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit Work to proceed without water entering existing roofing system or building. 1. Remove only as much roofing in one day as can be made watertight in the same day. G. Hazardous Materials: A report on the presence of hazardous materials is on file for review and use. Examine report to become aware of locations where hazardous materials are present. 1. Hazardous material remediation is specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 2. Do not disturb hazardous materials or items suspected of containing hazardous materials except according to procedures specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 3. Coordinate reroofing preparation with hazardous material renediation to prevent water from entering existing roofing system or building. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during reroofing, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing roofing system warranty. Notify warrantor before proceeding. 1. Notify warrantor of existing roofing systern on completion of reroofing, and obtain documentation verifying that existing roofing system has been inspected and warranty remains in effect. Submit documentation at Project closeout. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 TEMPORARY PROTECTION MATERIALS A. Expanded Polystyrene (EPS) Insulation: ASTM C 578. B. Plywood: DOC PS1, Grade CD Exposure 1. C. OSB: DOC PS2, Exposure 1. 2.2 TEMPORARY ROOFING MATERIALS A. Design and selection of materials for temporary roofing are Contractor's responsibilities. B. Sheathing Paper: Red-rosin type, minimum 3 lb/100 sq. ft. (0.16 kg/sq. m). C. Base Sheet: ASTM D 4601, Type 11, nonperforated, asphalt-impregnated and -coated, glass- fiber sheet. D. Glass-Fiber Felts: ASTM D 2178, Type IV, asphalt-impregnated, glass-fiber felt. January 17, 2014 Big Red Barn Structural Improvements PREPARATION FOR REROOFING 070150 -4 E. Asphalt Primer: ASTM D 41/D 41M. F. Roofing Asphalt: ASTM D 312, Type III or IV. G. Base Sheet Fasteners: Capped head, factory-coated steel fasteners, listed in FM Global's "Approval Guide." 2.3 AUXILIARY REROOFING MATERIALS A. General: Use auxiliary reroofing preparation materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use and compatible with components of existing and new roofing system. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Shut off rooftop utilities and service piping before beginning the Work. B. Test existing roof drains to verify that they are not blocked or restricted. Immediately notify Architect of any blockages or restrictions. C. Protect existing roofing system that is not to be reroofed. 1. Loosely lay 1-inch- (25-mm-) minimum thick, expanded polystyrene (EPS) insulation over existing roofing in areas indicated. Loosely lay 15/32-inch (12-mm) plywood or OSB panels over EPS. Extend EPS past edges of plywood or OSB panels a minimum of 1 inch (25 mm). 2. Limit traffic and material storage to areas of existing roofing that have been protected. 3. Maintain temporary protection and leave in place until replacement roofing has been completed. Remove temporaly protection on completion of reroofing. D. Coordinate with Owner to shut down air-intake equipment in the vicinity of the Work. Cover air-intake louvers before proceeding with reroofing work that could affect indoor air quality or activate smoke detectors in the ductwork. E. During removal operations, have sufficient and suitable materials on-site to facilitate rapid installation of temporary protection in the event of unexpected rain. F. Maintain roof drains in functioning condition to ensure roof drainage at end of each workday. Prevent debris from entering or blocking roof drains and conductors. Use roof-drain plugs specifically designed for this purpose. Remove roof-drain plugs at end of each workday, when no work is taking place, or when rain is forecast. 1. If roof drains are temporarily blocked or unserviceable due to roofing system removal or partial installation of new roofing system, provide alternative drainage method to remove water and eliminate ponding. Do not permit water to enter into or under existing roofing system components that are to remain. January 17, 2014 Big Red Barn Structural Improvements PREPARATION FOR REROOFING 070150 -5 3.2 ROOF TEAR-OFF A. General: Notify Owner each day of extent of roof tear-off proposed for that day and obtain authorization to proceed. B. Full Roof Tear-Off: Where indicated, remove existing roofing and other roofing system components down to the rafters. I. Remove substrate board, roof insulation and miscellaneous wood blocking and fillers. 2. Remove wood blocking, curbs, and nailers. 3. Remove fasteners from deck or cut fasteners off slightly above deck surface. 3.3 TEMPORARY ROOFING A. Install approved temporary roofing over area to be reroofed. B. Install temporary roofing over area to be reroofed. Install two glass-fiber, lapping each sheet 19 inches (483 mm) over preceding sheet. Embed glass-fiber felt in a solid mopping of hot roofing asphalt applied within equiviscous temperature range. Glaze-coat completed surface with hot roofing asphalt. C. Remove temporary roofing before installing new roofing. D. Prepare temporary roof to receive new roofing according to approved temporary roofing proposal. Restore temporary roofing to watertight condition. Obtain approval for temporaiy roof substrate from roofing manufacturer and Architect before installing new roof 3.4 ROOF RE-COVER PREPARATION A. Remove blisters, ridges, buckles, and other substrate irregularities from existing roofing that inhibit new re-cover boards from conforming to substrate. I. Remove loose aggregate from aggregate-surfaced built-up bituminous roofing with a power broom. 2. Scarify surface of sprayed polyurethane foam as necessary to achieve a sufficiently uniform plane to receive new re-cover boards. 3. Broom clean existing substrate. 4. Coordinate with Owner's inspector to schedule times for tests and inspections before proceeding with installation of re-cover boards. 5. Verify that existing substrate is dry before proceeding with installation of re-cover boards. Spot check substrates with an electrical capacitance moisture-detection meter. 6. Remove materials that are wet or damp. Removal will be paid for by adjusting the Contract Sum according to unit prices included in the Contract Documents. B. Remove blisters and areas of roofing not fully adhered. January 17, 2014 Big Red Barn Structural Improvements PREPARATION FOR REROOFING 070150 -6 3.5 FASTENER PULL-OUT TESTING A. Perform fastener pull-out tests according to SPRI FX- 1, and submit test report to Design Professional before installing new roofing system. 1. Obtain roofing manufacturer's approval to proceed with specified fastening pattern. Design Professional may furnish revised fastening pattern commensurate with pull-out test results. 3.6 DISPOSAL A. Collect demolished materials and place in containers. Promptly dispose of demolished materials. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. 1. Storage or sale of demolished items or materials on-site is not permitted. B. Transport and legally dispose of demolished materials off Owner's property. END OF SECTION 070150.19 January 17, 2014 Big Red Barn Structural Improvements THERMAL INSULATION 072100-1 SECTION 072100 -THERMAL INSULATION PART I -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Fiberglass batt insulation 2. Paper-faced-glass insulation. 3. Spray polyurethane foam insulation. 4. Vapor retarders (for use if needed to patch existing vapor barriers). 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for each product. B. Research/Evaluation Reports: For foam-plastic insulation, from ICC-ES. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration due to moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation. B. Protect foam-plastic board insulation as follows: January 17, 2014 Big Red Barn Structural Improvements THERMAL INSULATION 072100 -2 1. Do not expose to sunlight except to necessary extent for period of installation and concealment. 2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver foam-plastic board materials to Project site before installation time. 3. Quickly complete installation and concealment of foam-plastic board insulation in each area of construction. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 GLASS-FIBER BLANKET INSULATION A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following : 1. CertainTeed Corporation. 2. Guardian Building Products, Inc. 3. Johns Manville. 4. Knauf Insulation. 5. Owens Corning. B. Unfaced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type 1; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, per ASTM E 84; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. C. Kraft-Faced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type 11 (non-reflective faced), Class C (faced surface not rated for flame propagation); Category 1 (membrane is a vapor barrier). D. Sustainability Requirements: Provide glass-fiber blanket insulation as follows: 1. Free of Formaldehyde: Insulation manufactured with 100 percent acrylic binders and no formaldehyde. 2. Low Emitting: Insulation tested according to ASTM D 5116 and shown to emit less than 0.05-ppm formaldehyde. 2.2 SPRAY POLYURETHANE FOAM INSULATION A. Closed-Cell Polyurethane Foam Insulation: ASTM C 1029, Type II, with maximum flame- spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E 84. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. BASF Corporation. b. BaySystems NorthAmerica, LLC. c. Dow Chemical Company (The). d. ERSystems, Inc. e. Gaco Western Inc. January 17, 2014 Big Red Barn Structural Improvements THERMAL INSULATION 072100-3 f. Henry Company. g. NCFI; Division of Barnhardt Mfg. Co. h. SWD Urethane Company. i. Volatile Free, Inc. 2. Minimum density of 1.5 lb/cu. ft. (24 kg/cu. in), thermal resistivity of 6.2 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu x in. at 75 deg F (43 K x m/W at 24 deg C). 2.3 VAPOR RETARDERS A. Polyethylene Vapor Retarders: ASTM D 4397, 10 mils (0.25 mm) thick, with maximum permeance rating of 0.13 perm (7.5 ng/Pa x s x sq. in). B. Vapor-Retarder Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder. C. Vapor-Retarder Fasteners: Pancake-head, self-tapping steel drill screws; with fender washers. D. Single-Component Nonsag Urethane Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type 1, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT related to exposure, and Use 0 related to vapor-barrier-related substrates. E. Adhesive for Vapor Retarders: Product recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer and has demonstrated capability to bond vapor retarders securely to substrates indicated. 2.4 INSULATION FASTENERS A. Adhesively Attached, Spindle-Type Anchors: Plate welded to projecting spindle; capable of holding insulation of specified thickness securely in position indicated with self-locking washer in place. I. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. AGM Industries, Inc.; Series T TACTOO Insul-Hangers. b. Gemco; Spindle Type. 2. Plate: Perforated, galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch (0.762 mn) thick by 2 inches (50 mm) square. 3. Spindle: Copper-coated, low-carbon steel; fully annealed; 0.105 inch (2.67 mm) in diameter; length to suit depth of insulation indicated. B. Anchor Adhesive: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation anchors securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation, fasteners, and substrates. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. AGM Industries, Inc.; TACTOO Adhesive. b. Gemco; Tuff Bond Hanger Adhesive. January 17, 2014 Big Red Barn Structural Improvements THERMAL INSULATION 072100-4 PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of substances that are harmful to insulation or vapor retarders, including removing projections capable of puncturing vapor retarders, or that interfere with insulation attachment. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and applications indicated. B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed to ice, rain, or snow at any time. C. Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement. D. Provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units to produce thickness indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION FOR FRAMED CONSTRUCTION A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide pernanent placement and support of units. B. Foam-Plastic Board Insulation: Seal joints between units by applying adhesive, mastic, or sealant to edges of each unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved into place. Fill voids in completed installation with adhesive, mastic, or sealant as recommended by insulation manufacturer. C. Glass-Fiber or Mineral-Wool Blanket Insulation: Install in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements: 1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more than one length is required to fill the cavities, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends. 2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members. 3. Maintain 3-inch (76-mm) clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures not rated for or protected from contact with insulation. 4. Install eave ventilation troughs between roof framing members in insulated attic spaces at vented eaves. January 17, 2014 Big Red Barn Structural Improvements THERMAL INSULATION 072100 -5 5. For metal-framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches (2438 mm), support unfaced blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping flanges of insulation to flanges of metal studs. 6. For wood-framed construction, install blankets according to ASTM C 1320 and as follows: a. With faced blankets having stapling flanges, secure insulation by inset, stapling flanges to sides of framing members. b. With faced blankets having stapling flanges, lap blanket flange over flange of adjacent blanket to maintain continuity of vapor retarder once finish material is installed over it. 7. Vapor-Retarder-Faced Blankets: Tape joints and ruptures in vapor-retarder facings, and seal each continuous area of insulation to ensure airtight installation. a. Exterior Walls: Set units with facing placed toward interior of construction. b. Interior Walls: Set units with facing placed toward areas of high humidity. D. Spray-Applied Insulation: Apply spray-applied insulation according to manufacturer's written instructions. Do not apply insulation until installation of pipes, ducts, conduits, wiring, and electrical outlets in walls is completed and windows, electrical boxes, and other items not indicated to receive insulation are masked. After insulation is applied, make flush with face of studs by using method recommended by insulation manufacturer. 1. Prior to sheathing walls and roofs, install spray-applied insulation to seal miscellaneous voids (this is to create a continuous air barrier) at interior wall and ceiling coverings including behind voids at trim, around electrical and lighting penetrations, or any otherwise notable void that might allow air transmission between the framed wall and interior space. 2. Install spray-applied insulation at complicated framing transitions including soffits, gambrels, mezzanine lines and roofing ridge as indicated on drawings. E. Miscellaneous Voids: Install insulation in miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where required to prevent gaps in insulation using the following materials: I. Spray Polyurethane Insulation: Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDERS A. Place vapor retarders on side of construction indicated on Drawings. Extend vapor retarders to extremities of areas to protect from vapor transmission. Secure vapor retarders in place with adhesives or other anchorage system as indicated. Extend vapor retarders to cover miscellaneous voids in insulated substrates, including those filled with loose-fiber insulation. B. Seal vertical joints in vapor retarders over fi-aming by lapping no fewer than two studs. I. Fasten vapor retarders to wood framing at top, end, and bottom edges; at perimeter of wall openings; and at lap joints. Space fasteners 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. 2. Before installing vapor retarders, apply urethane sealant to flanges of metal framing including runner tracks, metal studs, and framing around door and window openings. January 17, 2014 Big Red Barn Structural Improvements THERMAL INSULATION 072100-6 Seal overlapping joints in vapor retarders with vapor-retarder tape according to vapor- retarder manufacturer's written instructions. Seal butt joints with vapor-retarder tape. Locate all joints over framing members or other solid substrates. 3. Firmly attach vapor retarders to metal framing and solid substrates with vapor-retarder fasteners as recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer. C. Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating vapor retarders with vapor-retarder tape to create an airtight seal between penetrating objects and vapor retarders. D. Repair tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment by other work. Cover with vapor-retarder tape or another layer of vapor retarders. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect installed insulation and vapor retarders from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation. 3.6 INSULATION SCHEDULE A. As noted in Contract Documents. END OF SECTION 072100 January 17, 2014 Big Red Barn Structural Improvements ASPHALT SHINGLES 073113 -1 SECTION 073113 -ASPHALT SHINGLES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Asphalt shingles. 2. Underlayment. 3. Ridge vents. 4. Snow rails and snow pads. 1.3 DEFINITION A. Roofing Terminology: See ASTM D 1079 and glossary of NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" for definitions of terms related to roofing work in this Section. 1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project Site. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified. I. Asphalt Shingles: Full size. 2. Ridge and Hip Cap Shingles: Full size. 3. Ridge Vent: 12-inch- (300-mm-) long Sample. 4. Exposed Valley Lining: 12 inches (300 mm) square. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of asphalt shingle indicated. 1. Include similar Samples of accessories involving color selection. D. Samples for Verification: For the following products, of sizes indicated: 1. Asphalt Shingles: Full size. January 17, 2014 Big Red Barn Structural Improvements ASPHALT SHINGLES 073113 -2 2. Ridge and Hip Cap Shingles: Full size. 3. Ridge Vent: 12-inch- (300-mm-) long Sample. 4. Exposed Valley Lining: 12 inches (300 mm) square. 5. Submit wrapper from a min. 3 bundles of roof shingles. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. B. Product Test Reports: For each type of asphalt shingle and underlayment product indicated, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. C. Evaluation Reports: For synthetic underlayment and high-temperature, self-adhering sheet underlayment, from ICC-ES or other testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, indicating that product is suitable for intended use under applicable building codes. D. Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's warranty. 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For asphalt shingles to include in maintenance manuals. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative who is trained and approved by manufacturer. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store roofing materials in a dry, well-ventilated location protected from weather, sunlight, and moisture according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Store underlayment rolls on end on pallets or other raised surfaces. Do not double stack rolls. C. Protect unused roofing materials from weather, sunlight, and moisture when left overnight or when roofing work is not in progress. D. Handle, store, and place roofing materials in a manner to prevent damage to roof deck or structural supporting members. 1.10 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Install self-adhering sheet underlayment within the range of ambient and substrate temperatures recommended in writing by manufacturer. January 17, 2014 Big Red Barn Structural Improvements ASPHALT SHINGLES 073113-3 1.11 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace asphalt shingles that fail within specified warranty period. I. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Manufacturing defects. 2. Material Warranty Period: 25 years from date of Substantial Completion, prorated, with first five years nonprorated. 3. Wind-Speed Warranty Period: Asphalt shingles will resist blow-off or damage caused by wind speeds of up to 80 mph (36 m/s) for five years from date of Substantial Completion. 4. Algae-Resistance Warranty Period: Asphalt shingles will not discolor for 15 years fr-om date of Substantial Completion. 5. Workmanship Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Roofing Installer's Warranty: On warranty form at end of this Section, signed by Installer, in which Installer agrees to repair or replace components of asphalt-shingle roofing that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Five years fi-om date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: Provide asphalt shingles and related roofing materials identical to those of assemblies tested for Class A fire resistance according to ASTM E 108 or UL 790 by Underwriters Laboratories or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 2.2 GLASS-FIBER-REINFORCED ASPHALT SHINGLES A. Three-Tab-Strip Asphalt Shingles: ASTM D 3462/D 3462M, glass-fiber reinforced, mineral- granule surfaced, and self-sealing; with tabs regularly spaced. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements: a. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Heavy Duty 3-Tab Asphalt Shingles -XT30 IR (as indicated on the drawings) by CertainTeed Gray/black color to match existing or comparable product by one of the following: 1) Atlas Roofing Corporation. 2) Building Products of Canada Corp. 3) CertainTeed Corporation. 4) GAF Materials Corporation. January 17, 2014 Big Red Barn Structural Improvements ASPHALT SHINGLES 073113-4 5) IKO. 6) Malarkey Roofing Products Co. 7) Owens Corning. 8) PABCO Roofing Products. 9) TAMKO Building Products, Inc. 2. Butt Edge: Straight cut. 3. Strip Size: 36" to match existing. 4. Algae Resistance: Granules resist algae discoloration. 5. Impact Resistance: UL 2218, Class 4. 6. Color and Blends: To match existing as submitted and approved by Design Professional and Owner from manufacturer's full range. B. Hip and Ridge Shingles: Manufacturer's standard units to match asphalt shingles (site-fabricated units cut from asphalt-shingle strips will not be pennitted). 2.3 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS A. Felt: ASTM D 226, ASTM D 4869 asphalt-saturated organic felts, nonperforated. 1. Type: Type II. 2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Type 30 Roofers Select or comparable product by one of the following: a. Atlas Roofing Corporation. b. Owens Corning. B. Membrane underlayment for ice dam protection shall be 40 mils cold applied self-adhering membrane (high temperature type specified in Section 076000), consisting of 0.004 inch polyethylene film coated on I side with adhesive consistency rubberized asphalt, and with a silicone coated release sheet, complying with ASTM D 1970 such as Ice and Water Shield, by W.R. Grace & Co., Cambridge, MA 02140, StormGuard by GAF-Elk, or Design Professional approved alternate by one of the following: a. Atlas Roofing Corporation. b. Fiberweb, Inc. c. GAF Materials Corporation. d. Grace, W. R. & Co. -Conn. e. Owens Corning. f. RKW US Inc. g. SDP Advanced Polymer Products Inc. h. System Components Corporation. i. TAMKO Building Products, Inc. 2. Thermal Stability: Stable after testing at 240 deg F (116 deg C) according to ASTM D 1970/D 1970M. 3. Low-Temperature Flexibility: Passes after testing at minus 20 deg F (29 deg C) according to ASTM D 1970/D 1970M. January 17, 2014 Big Red Barn Structural Improvements ASPHALT SHINGLES 073113 -5 2.4 RIDGE VENTS A. Rigid Ridge Vent: Manufacturer's standard, rigid section high-density polypropylene or other UV-stabilized plastic ridge vent for use under ridge shingles. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, and compatible with asphalt shingle manufacturer. 2. Basis-of-Design Product: CertainTeed Ridge Vent -9" Ridge Vent, Filtered, Class A fire resistant, or approved qualified alternate: a. Air Vent, Inc.; a Gibraltar Industries company. b. Cor-A-Vent, Inc. c. GAF Materials Corporation. d. Lomanco, Inc. e. Obdyke, Benjamin Incorporated. f. Owens Corning. g. The Tapco Group; Mid-America Siding Components. 3. Minimum Net Free Area: 20 sq. in. per linear ft. 4. Features: a. Nonwoven geotextile filter strips. b. External deflector baffles. 2.5 SNOW RETENTION SYSTEMS A. Snow Rails: pipe style with base plate that takes the place of a slate shingle, #125 Aluminum Two- Pipe Snow Rail, all other components aluminum, by Alpine Snow Guards, a Division of Vermont Slate and Copper Services, Inc., Morrisville, Vermont 05661 (888-766-4273 or 802-888-8573). Base plate is 1/8 inch thick, supply with mill finished aluminum tubing, pipe couplings, pipe end collars, and ice flags (2 ice flags, minimum, between each pair of base plates), and compatible endcaps. 2. Use specified stainless steel fasteners for securing base plates to wood sheathing and blocking. Refer to Contract Documents. 2.6 Pad style snow guards: half-round, pad-style, model #40 Snowguard with .032 aluninum strap with 2 nails holes at top end for nailing to roof deck, by Alpine Snow Guards, a Division of Vermont Slate and Copper Services, Inc., Morrisville, Vermont 05661 (888-766-4273 or 802-888- 8573). Overall snow guard length shall be standard 9". Finish shall be mill Secure with two 11 gauge or heavier, 1-1/2 inch long type 304 stainless steel roofing nails per each snow guard. 2.7 ACCESSORIES A. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, Type II, asbestos free. B. Felt-Underlayment Nails: double hot-dip galvanized-steel wire with low-profile capped heads or disc caps, I-inch (25-mm) minimum diameter. January 17, 2014 Big Red Barn Structural Improvements ASPHALT SHINGLES 073113 -6 C. Synthetic-Underlayment Fasteners: As recommended in writing by synthetic-underlayment manufacturer for application indicated. D. Nails for fastening asphalt shingles shall be double hot-dip galvanized, 11 gauge, smooth shank, 3/8-7/16 inch diameter head, of length to penetrate at least % inch into wood decks (1-1/4 inches long, minimum), Stonnguard Asphalt & Fiberglass Shingle Nails by Maze Nails, Division of W.H. Maze Company, Peru, IL 61354, 800-435-5949, www.mazenails.com. 1. Provide longer nails to secure hip and ridge shingles. 2. Note: specified nails cannot be run through a nail gun. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Examine roof sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing and blocking or metal clips and that installation is within flatness tolerances. 2. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and completely anchored; and that provisions have been made for flashings and penetrations through asphalt shingles. B. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with underlayment manufacturer's written installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated unless more stringent requirements apply. B. Single-Layer Felt Underlayment: Install on roof deck parallel with and starting at the eaves. Lap sides a minimum of 2 inches (50 mm) over underlying course. Lap ends a minimum of 4 inches (100 mm). Stagger end laps between succeeding courses at least 72 inches (1830 mm). Fasten with felt-underlayment nails. 1. Install felt underlayment on roof deck not covered by self-adhering sheet underlayment. Lap sides of felt over self-adhering sheet underlayment not less than 3 inches (75 mm) in direction that sheds water. Lap ends of felt not less than 6 inches (150 mm) over self- adhering sheet underlayment. 2. Install fasteners at no more than 36 inches (914 mm) o.c. C. Double-Layer Felt Underlayment: Install on roof deck parallel with and starting at the eaves. Install a 19-inch- (485-mm-) wide starter course at eaves and completely cover with full-width second course. Install succeeding courses lapping previous courses 19 inches (485 mm) in January 17, 2014 Big Red Barn Structural Improvements ASPHALT SHINGLES 073113-7 shingle fashion. Lap ends a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm). Stagger end laps between succeeding courses at least 72 inches (1830 mm). Fasten with felt-underlayment nails. 1 .Apply a continuous layer of asphalt roofing cement over starter course and on felt- underlayment surface to be concealed by succeeding courses as each felt course is installed. Apply at locations indicated on Drawings. 2. Install felt underlayment on roof sheathing not covered by self-adhering sheet underlayment. Lap edges over self-adhering sheet underlayment not less than 3 inches (75 mm) in direction that sheds water. 3. Terminate felt underlayment extended up not less than 4 inches (100 mm) against sidewalls, curbs, chimneys, and other roof projections. 4. Install fasteners at no more than 36 inch (914 mm) o.c. D. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install, wrinkle free, on roof deck. Comply with low- temperature installation restrictions of underlayment manufacturer if applicable. Install lapped in direction that sheds water. Lap sides not less than 3-1/2 inches (89 mm). Lap ends not less than 6 inches (150 nn) staggered 24 inches (600 nun) between courses. Roll laps with roller. Cover underlayment within seven days. 1. Eaves: Extend from edges of eaves 36 inches (914 mm) beyond interior face of exterior wall. 2. Rakes: Extend from edges of rake 36 inches (914 mm) beyond interior face of exterior wall. 3. Valleys: Extend from lowest to highest point 18 inches (450 mm) on each side. 4. Hips: Extend 18 inches (450 mm) on each side. 5. Ridges: Extend 36 inches (914 mm) on each side without obstructing continuous ridge vent slot. 6. Dormers, Chimneys, Skylights, and Other Roof-Penetrating Elements: Extend beyond penetrating element 18 inches (450 mm) and return vertically against penetrating element not less than 4 inches (100 mm). 7. Roof Slope Transitions: Extend 18 inches (450 mm) on each roof slope. E. Metal-Flashed, Open-Valley Underlayment: Install two layers of minimum 36-inch- (914-mm-) wide underlayment centered in valley. Stagger end laps between layers at least 72 inches (1830 mm). Lap ends of each layer at least 12 inches (300 mm) in direction to shed water, and seal with asphalt roofing cement. Fasten each layer to roof deck. I. Lap roof-deck underlayment over first layer of valley underlayment at least 6 inches (150 mm). 3.3 ASPHALT-SHINGLE INSTALLATION A. General: Install asphalt shingles according to manufacturer's written instructions, recommendations in ARMA's "Residential Asphalt Roofing Manual," and recommendations in NRCA's "NRCA Guidelines for Asphalt Shingle Roof Systems." B. Install starter strip along lowest roof edge, consisting of an asphalt-shingle strip with tabs removed at least 7 inches (175 mm) wide with self-sealing strip face up at roof edge. I. Extend asphalt shingles 1/2 inch (13 mm)over fasciae at eaves and rakes. 2. Install starter strip along rake edge. January 17, 2014 Big Red Barn Structural Improvements ASPHALT SHINGLES 073113 -8 C. Install first and remaining courses of asphalt shingles stair-stepping diagonally across roof deck with manufacturer's recommended offset pattern at succeeding courses, maintaining uniform exposure. D. Install first and remaining courses of asphalt shingles stair-stepping diagonally across roof deck with 6-inch (150-mm) in half-tab offset pattern at succeeding courses, maintaining uniform exposure as shown in Contract Document details. E. Install asphalt shingles by single-strip column or racking method, maintaining uniform exposure. Install full-length first course followed by cut second course, repeating alternating pattern in succeeding courses. F. Fasten asphalt-shingle strips with a minimum of six roofing nails located according to manufacturer's written instructions. I. Where noted on drawings or where roof slope exceeds 21:12, seal asphalt shingles with asphalt roofing cement spots after fastening with additional roofing nails. 2. Where noted on drawings or where roof slope is less than 4:12, seal asphalt shingles with asphalt roofing cement spots. 3. When ambient temperature during installation is below 50 deg F (10 deg C) seal asphalt shingles with asphalt roofing cement spots. G. Woven Valleys: Extend succeeding asphalt-shingle courses from both sides of valley 12 inches (300 mm) beyond center of valley, weaving intersecting shingle-strip courses over each other. Use one-piece shingle strips without joints in valley. 1. Do not nail asphalt shingles within 6 inches (150 mm) of valley center or through copper flashings. H. Open Valleys: Cut and fit asphalt shingles at open valleys, trimming upper concealed corners of shingle strips. Widen exposed portion of open valley 1/8 inch in 12 inches (1:96) from highest to lowest point. I. Set valley edge of asphalt shingles in a 3-inch- (75-mm-) wide bed of asphalt roofing cement. 2. Do not nail asphalt shingles to metal open-valley flashings. I. Ridge Vents: Install continuous ridge vents over asphalt shingles according to manufacturer's written instructions. Fasten with roofing nails of sufficient length to penetrate sheathing. J. Hip and Ridge Shingles: Maintain same exposure of cap shingles as roofing shingle exposure. Lap cap shingles at ridges to shed water away from direction of prevailing winds. Fasten with roofing nails of sufficient length to penetrate sheathing. I. Fasten ridge cap asphalt shingles to cover ridge vent without obstructing airflow. 3.4 ROOFING INSTALLER'S WARRANTY A. WHEREAS <Insert name> of <Insert address>, herein called the "Roofing Installer," has performed roofing and associated work ("the work") on the following project: January 17, 2014 Big Red Barn Structural Improvements ASPHALT SHINGLES 073113 -9 1. Owner: <Insert name of Owner>. 2. Address: <Insert address>. 3. Building Name/Type: <Insert information>. 4. Address: <Insert address>. 5. Area of the Work: <Insert information>. 6. Acceptance Date: <Insert date>. 7. Warranty Period: <Insert time>. 8. Expiration Date: <Insert date>. B. AND WHEREAS Roofing Installer has contracted (either directly with Owner or indirectly as a subcontractor) to warrant the work against leaks and faulty or defective materials and workmanship for designated Warranty Period, C. NOW THEREFORE Roofing Installer hereby warrants, subject to terms and conditions herein set forth, that during Warranty Period he will, at his own cost and expense, make or cause to be made such repairs to or replacements of the work as are necessary to correct faulty and defective work and as are necessary to maintain the work in a watertight condition. D. This Warranty is made subject to the following terms and conditions: I. Specifically excluded from this Warranty are damages to the work and other parts of the building, and to building contents, caused by: a. Lightning; b. Peak gust wind speed exceeding <Insert wind speed> mph (m/sec); c. Fire; d. Failure of roofing system substrate, including cracking, settlement, excessive deflection, deterioration, and decomposition; e. Faulty construction of parapet walls, copings, chimneys, skylights, vents, equipment supports, and other edge conditions and penetrations of the work; f. Vapor condensation on bottom of roofing; and g. Activity on roofing by others, including construction contractors, maintenance personnel, other persons, and animals, whether authorized or unauthorized by Owner. 2. When the work has been damaged by any of foregoing causes, Warranty shall be null and void until such damage has been repaired by Roofing Installer and until cost and expense thereof have been paid by Owner or by another responsible party so designated. 3. Roofing Installer is responsible for damage to the work covered by this Warranty but is not liable for consequential damages to building or building contents resulting from leaks or faults or defects of the work. 4. During Warranty Period, if Owner allows alteration of the work by anyone other than Roofing Installer, including cutting, patching, and maintenance in connection with penetrations, attachment of other work, and positioning of anything on roof, this Warranty shall become null and void on date of the alterations, but only to the extent the alterations affect the work covered by this Warranty. If Owner engages Roofing Installer to perform the alterations, Warranty shall not become null and void unless Roofing Installer, before starting the alterations, notified Owner in writing, showing reasonable cause for claim, that the alterations would likely damage or deteriorate the work, thereby reasonably justifying a limitation or termination of this Warranty. January 17, 2014 Big Red Barn Structural Improvements ASPHALT SHINGLES 073113 -10 5. During Warranty Period, if original use of roof is changed and it becomes used for, but was not originally specified for, a use or service more severe than originally specified, this Warranty shall become null and void on date of the change, but only to the extent the change affects the work covered by this Warranty. 6. Owner shall promptly notify Roofing Installer of observed, known, or suspected leaks, defects, or deterioration and shall afford reasonable opportunity for Roofing Installer to inspect the work and to examine evidence of such leaks, defects, or deterioration. 7. This Warranty is recognized to be the only warranty of Roofing Installer on the work and shall not operate to restrict or cut off Owner from other remedies and resources lawfully available to Owner in cases of roofing failure. Specifically, this Warranty shall not operate to relieve Roofing Installer of responsibility for performance of the work according to requirements of the Contract Documents, regardless of whether Contract was a contract directly with Owner or a subcontract with Owner's General Contractor. E. IN WITNESS THEREOF, this instrument has been duly executed this <Insert day> day of <Insert month>, <Insert year>. 1. Authorized Signature: <Insert signature>. 2. Name: <Insert name>. 3. Title: <Insert title>. END OF SECTION 073113 January 17, 2014 Big Red Barn Structural Improvements FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 076000 -1 SECTION 076000 -FLASHING AND SHEET METAL PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Provide all labor, equipment, materials and services required to perform the work of this Section as indicated on the Drawings and specified herein. B. This section includes, but is not limited to, the following: 1. Copper rake and eave drip edges 2. Copper open valley flashings 3. Copper chimney flashings 4. Copper cricket flashings 5. Copper roofing base flashings 6. Copper flat seam roofing 7. Copper scupper box, and downspout 8. Copper apron and sill flashings 9. Self-adhered membrane flashing 10. Draining weather resistant barrier for walls 11. Flashing tapes for wall WRBs 12. Fluid-applied watelproofing at concrete sills 13. Compatible waterproofing joint sealants at concrete sills 14. Such other flashing, waterproofing and sheet metal work as shown on the Contract Drawings and specified herein. 1.2 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS A. Work and detailing is referenced to Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc.'s (SMACNA's), Architectural Sheet Metal Manual, Sixth Edition, 2003, and Revere Copper Products, Inc.'s manual, Copper and Common Sense, Eight Edition, 2005. B. Publications listed below shall be the most recent issue and will be a part of this Specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referred to in text by designation only. C. ASTM International (ASTM): I. A167 Specification for Stainless Steel 2. B 32 Specifications for Solder Metal 3. B209 Specification for Aluminum Alloy Sheet and Plate 4. B 370 Specification for Copper Sheet and Strip for Building Construction 5. B 749 Specification for Lead Alloy Strip, Sheet and Plate Products 6. D 1970 Specification for Self-Adhering Polymer Modified Bituminous Sheet Materials Used as Steep Roofing Underlayment for Ice Dam Protection D. Definition: "Design Professional" within the contract documents typically refers to the "Building Envelope Consultant". In instances where it is used for work scope that involves aesthetic January 17, 2014 Big Red Barn Structural Improvements FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 076000 -2 requirements, "Design Professional" includes both the "Architect" and the "Building Envelope Consultant". 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be made in accordance with Division 0 Specification Sections prior to commencing work. Submit a minimum of 3 copies of each of the following for review by the Design Professional. B. Submit product data noting compliance with requirements listed herein for each of the specified proprietary products listed. C. Submit 9" x 9" samples of each type and weight of metal specified, each type of underlayment, and solder. D. Submit three 12-inch long samples of locked and soldered seams, and lapped, riveted, and soldered seams from each roofing mechanic anticipated to be involved in soldering. Contractor to ensure proper rivet lengths so as to minimize projection of popped end of rivet beyond bottom surface of metal pans being joined. Approved samples shall be the standard for joints to be used in the completion of the Work. Work shall not begin until sample seams are approved. Sample seams must be submitted for each mechanic proposed to undertake work on this Project and must be signed by the mechanic using an indelible ink marker. Mechanic's whose seams are rejected will not be permitted to undertake sheet metal work on this Project. 3. Submit locked and soldered seams using 20 oz. copper. E. Submit samples of new hanger assembly for securing downspouts. F. Submit product data from manufacturer of sheet copper products specified. G. Submit samples of each type of fastener specified, or if not specified, proposed for use, including rivets, nails, screws, bolts, cleats, sleeve anchors, and nylon nail-in anchors. I. Submit samples of new copper outlet tube for gutters with rear seam lapped, riveted, and soldered J. Submit samples of new flat seam copper pans, with edges pre-tinned. K. Submit samples of new strainer for gutters. N. Submit product data and MSDS from manufacturer of flux and solder products specified. 0. Submit 12-inch long samples of new drip edge for eaves and rakes. S. Submit shop drawings of flashing details. T. Submit two copies of warranties to the Owner. U. Submit such other submittals as reasonably requested by the Design Professional or Owner. January 17, 2014 Big Red Barn Structural Improvements FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 076000 -3 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Work of this section shall comply with applicable standards indicated. B. Provide products or materials from single source or manufacturer for each product or material during course of the work. C. Contractor perfonning the Work shall have at least 10 years successful experience in the replacement and installation of copper roofing, flashings, gutters, and associated work, and shall have successfully completed at least three projects in the past five of similar scope and scale to that of Dunster House. Mechanics perfonning work of this Section shall have at least 5 years successful experience in the replacement and installation of flat seam copper roofing, flashings, gutters, and associated work. 1. Installer's personnel shall be experienced mechanics thoroughly trained in the art and craft of sheet metal work and copper roofing. 2. All of the installer's personnel shall have read this specification in its entirety prior to the commencement of work and be familiar with the requirements herein contained. 3. Full-time, on site, working foreman is required for this Project. Foreman must have at least 10 years successful experience in the repair, replacement, and installation of copper roofing, flashings, and gutters, and must have successfully completed at least three project of similar scope and scale to that of Old Quincy in the past four years. Foreman must speak English. D. Preconstruction Conference: Review all proposed materials and procedures with the Owner prior to starting work. All work will be inspected and complete approval must be obtained before final acceptance by the Owner. E. Comply with all applicable codes and regulations and all pertinent recommendations contained in "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual", latest edition, published by the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors Association. F. Comply with all pertinent recommendations of the National Roofing Contractors Association as contained in the Association Manual of Roofing Practice. G. Comply with all applicable recommendations of Revere Copper & Brass, Inc., as contained in "Copper and Common Sense," latest edition. H. High performance roof edge system shall be CERTIFIED by the manufacturer to comply with ANSI/SPRI Standard ES-1. Roof edge shall meet performance design criteria according to the following test standards: I. ANSI/SPRI ES-I Test Method RE-1 Test for Roof Edge Termination of Single-Ply Roofing Membranes: The fascia system shall be tested to secure the membrane to minimum of 100 lbs/ft in accord with the ANSI/SPRI ES- 1. Fascia to be Anchor-Tite standard fascia size as per the Drawings, or by other acceptable manufacturers. 1.5 TEST PANELS A. Contractor shall prepare test panels for each of the following for review by the Design Professional: January 17, 2014 Big Red Barn Structural Improvements FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 076000-4 1. Installation of new base flashings at dormer cheek walls, 1 cheek wall. 2. Installation of new sill flashing at donner window, 1 dormer 3. Installation of new flashing at outside corner of dormer, I dormer. 4. Installation of new copper drip edge at eave and rake of main roof, 8 to 10 linear feet. 5. Installation of new copper open valley flashings at gable, 10 linear feet. 6. Installation of new copper hip flashings at a hipped dormer, I hip. 7. Installation of new cricket flashing at a chimney, I chimney. 8. Installation of chimney root flashings (i.e., base flashings, through-wall flashing, counterflashings, and apron flashing) at a chimney, 1 chimney. 9. Installation of copper downspout, I downspout. 10. Installation of flat-seam copper roofing for atop chimney, 3-4 pans. 11. Installation of flashing integrations and terminations at foundation wall after CIP sill is installed, 6 linear feet. 12. Flashing integrations at window and door perimeters, 1 window, 1 door. 13. Flashing tennination at awnings, 1 each. 14. Installation of new wall sandwich and apron components at North Elevation where new wall interfaces with existing roof terminations, 6 linear feet 15. Roofing and wall assembly integrations at rake and eave soffits, 2 locations, first install of each. 16. Such other test panels as reasonably requested by the Design Professional or Owner. B. Test panels will be reviewed by the Design Professional on site and approved test panels shall become a part of the Work and serve as the standard for all similar type work on this Project. Contractor shall remove test panels rejected by the Design Professional or Owner and prepare up to 3 test panels of each type listed above for approval at no additional cost to the Owner. C. If separate crews of roofing mechanics will be peiforning the same work at different locations on the roof, each crew shall prepare the test panels listed above for review by the Design Professional. D. Coordinate test panels specified above as required with those specified elsewhere. E. Note that there are many unique flashing details included in the Project, too many to include in the list of test panels, above. Contractor is encouraged to review detailing on site with Design Professional prior to commencing work on a particular detail. 1.6 PROJECT AND SITE CONDITIONS A. Contractor and installer of roofing work shall be responsible for providing protection of the interior of the building from damage by weather. Contractor and installer shall be responsible for repairs or replacement of damaged interior materials and finishes, and building contents, at no additional cost to, and to the satisfaction of, the Owner. B. Roofing work shall not be performed in inclement weather, or when inclement weather is forecast. If there is threat of inclement weather, provide temporary flashing for areas of new metal flashing that cannot be installed. D. Required fire protection measures: January 17, 2014 Big Red Barn Structural Improvements FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 076000 -5 1. Where soldering work is done above or within 10 feet of combustible material, shields of incombustible materials shall be used to protect against fire damage or injury due to sparks and hot metal. 2. Tanks supplying gases for soldering shall be placed at no greater distance from work than is necessary for safety, securely fastened and maintained in an upright position where practicable. Such tanks, when stored for use, shall be remote from any combustible material and fiee from exposure to the rays of the sun or high temperatures. 3. Suitable fire extinguishing equipment of types and sizes recommended by NFPA shall be maintained near all soldering operations. 4. A workman equipped with suitable fire extinguishing equipment shall be stationed near soldering operations to see that sparks do not lodge in cracks or pass through roof openings or lodge in any combustible materials. The workman shall be kept at the source of special work hazards for 2 hours after the job is completed each day, to make sure that smoldering fires have not been started. Contractor has the option of ceasing soldering work 2 hours before nonnal end of day, or workman with extinguisher shall remain 2 hours after nornal working day. 5. Smoking is prohibited when working on the building. 6. See Division 1 Specification Sections for additional requirements. E. Use of torches will not be permitted on this Project for soldering of sheet metal. Appropriately sized irons heated in a fire pot (preferred) or irons continuously heated with gas must be used. F. Access to all areas of work is the responsibility of the Contractor. No access will be permitted through the inside of the building. G. Contractor is responsible for complying with the Occupational Safety and Health Administration's (OSHA's) regulations. 1. Repair, removal, and handling of existing lead and lead coated copper flashings, as well as new lead wedges and solder, shall be in compliance with OSHA's lead standard. 1.7 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate work of this Section with interfacing and adjoining and related roofing work for proper sequencing of each installation. B. Generally perform masonry work located above roof, cricket, and gutter areas prior to undertaking work of this Section. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Contractor shall warranty the work of this Section, covering both materials and labor for defects that occur, including leaks, for a period of ten (10) years. Repairs, or replacement, of roofing, gutters, gussets, flashings, downspouts, etc. shall be at no cost to the Owner. B. Upon substantial completion, Contractor shall submit a notarized letter indicating his/her conveyance of warranty terms indicated above. January 17, 2014 Big Red Barn Structural Improvements FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 076000 -6 PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. All copper sheets to be manufactured by Revere Copper Products, Inc., Rome, New York, 13440, 800-950-1776, or Design Professional approved alternate domestic manufacturer. 1. "Copper" referred to herein can be referred to as "red copper" in which this project is located. B. Stainless steel, silicon bronze, and brass wood screws and machine screws, nuts, and washers specified herein are available at Jamestown Distributors, Jamestown, RI 02835, 800-423-0030, www.jamestowndistributors.com. 2.2 COPPER FLASHING MATERIALS A. Crickets, base flashings, continuous cleats for apron flashings, cleats for salvaged or new ridge flashings, built-in gutter expansion joint caps, chimney thru-wall flashings, low-slope roofing counterflashing, and other items indicated on the Drawings shall be copper, ASTM B 370, Grade HOO (cold rolled), 20 ounce (0.0270 inch). B. Steep Slope Counterflashings, ridge flashings, drip edges at rakes and eaves, copper for repair, dormer window sill flashing, chimney and skylight apron flashings, flat seam roofing, and other items indicated on the Drawings shall be copper, ASTM B 370, Grade HOO (cold rolled), 16 ounce (0.0216 inch). C. Reglet wedges: Fabricate from 4 pounds per square foot copper bearing lead sheet, ASTM B 749, Type L51121. Fabricate reglet wedge by rolling I inch wide strip as many times as required to fill space between flashing and reglet. D. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 167-63 Type 302, 304 shet. E. Downspouts (rain leaders), round to rectangular downspout transitions, decorative downspout straps: copper sheet, ASTM B 370, cold-rolled copper sheet, HOO temper. 1. Downspout hangers shall be solid copper or bronze rack, drive for masony, and pin assembly by Berger Building Products, Feasterville, PA 19053 (215) 355-1200 or (800) 523-8852. 2. Lead wall insert for use with drives shall be 4 pounds per square foot lead sheet complying with ASTM B749 rolled into a wedge of appropriate size. F. Solder shall comply with ASTM B32: 1. For copper: 50/50; 50 percent tin, 50 percent pig lead. 2. For Z-T alloy copper: 100 percent tin, with maximum lead content of 0.2 percent. January 17, 2014 Big Red Barn Structural Improvements FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 076000 -7 a. Basis of design: Number 497 by Johnson Manufacturing, Princeton, Iowa (563-289- 5123). G. Flux 1. For copper: Muriatic acid neutralized with zinc (killed acid), such as Blitz by American Solder & Flux Co., Paoli, PA 19301, 610-647-3575; LA-CO Brite Regular Soldering Flux, LA-CO Industries, Inc./Markal Company, Chicago, IL 60612, or Design Professional approved alternate commercial brand of flux. Thoroughly wash and wipe off all acid flux after soldering. a. Neutralizing solution: a weak solution of ammonia and water, or soap-and-water solution. b. Ruby flux will not be permitted for soldering copper. 2. For Z-T alloy copper: A tin-bearing flux, neutralized by rinsing with clean water. a. Basis of design: "Flux-N-Solder E127 with pure tin," by Johnson Manufacturing. 3. For stainless steel: stainless acid. H. Ice dam protection membrane for below new sheet metal work (e.g., bottom end of valleys, gutters liners, and flat seam roofing), where indicated: 30 mils cold applied, high heat, self-adhering membrane, consisting of a high density, cross laminated polyethylene film coated on one side with a butyl rubber based adhesive, and with silicone coated release sheet, complying with ASTM D 1970 such as "Vycor Ultra" by W.R. Grace & Co., Cambridge, MA 02140, or Design Professional approved alternate. 1. Note: For ice dam protection membrane to be in used other areas, see Section 073126. I. Felt underlayment: see Section 073113. J. Slip sheet: Rosin-surfaced building paper, minimum 5 pounds per 100 square feet. K. Cleats for flashings and gutters shall be copper and same weight as metal being cleated, unless otherwise indicated in the Detail Drawings. Cleats shall be 1-1/2 inches wide by 3 inches long or as noted on drawings. L. Nails for fastening copper straps, cleats, pans or other copper terminations, shall be solid copper, 10 gauge minimum, large head, smooth shank, and of sufficient length to penetrate into roof deck not less than 1-1/4". M. Rivets: "Pop" type, copper with solid brass mandrel, 1/8 inch diameter by 1/4 inch long, available from J. Byler Rivet Supply, Irving, TX (800-325-3147) and ExTech Industries, Inc., Long Island City, NY. 1. Rivets for 24 ounce copper built-in gutters: "Pop" type, Type 304 stainless steel with stainless steel mandrel, 1/8 inch diameter by 1/4 inch long, available from J. Byler Rivet Supply, Irving, TX (800-325-3147), and ExTech Industries, Inc., Long Island City, NY. January 17, 2014 Big Red Barn Structural Improvements FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 076000 -8 2. Contractor to verify length of rivet such that projection of popped rivet beyond pans being joined is minimized (see Paragraph 1.3, Submittals). N. Fasteners for securing counterflashing clips to masonry walls shall be Nylon Nailin anchor, mushroom head, 1/4 inch diameter x 1-1/2 inch long, with reversible stainless steel drive pin, available from Powers Fasteners, Inc., New Rochelle, NY 10802, (914-235-6300), or American Tool & Fastener, Philadelphia, PA 19124 (215-289-2212). 0. Strainers for outlet tubes of gutters: solid copper, heavy duty, Americraft Copper Gutter Sieve, 3 or 4 inch diameter (verify), available from B&B Sheet Metal, Long Island City, NY 11101, 718- 433-2501, www.bbsheetmetal.com. P. Exposed fastener for securing leader heads to masory walls shall be Fischer sleeve anchor, 1/4" diameter x 2-1/2" long solid bronze lag bolt with 3/8" diameter nylon wall insert anchor available from American Tool & Fastener, Philadelphia, PA 19124 (215-289-2212). Q. Sealant for filling loose lock seams, where indicated: non-drying, non-bleeding, non-hardening, non-skinning, non-migrating, gun grade, single-component sealing compound formulated from virgin butyl rubber, complying with Federal Specification TT-S-001657, Type 1, "BC-158 Butyl Rubber Sealant" by Pecora Corporation, Harleysville, PA 19438 (610) 723-6051, or Design Professional approved alternate. R. Fasteners for securing flanges of new copper flashings at outside corners of dormers to underlying wood substrate (where copper roofing nails would be too large) shall be 3D (14 gauge, .083 diam.) x 1-1/4 inches long, small copper common nails available from Jamestown Distributors. S. Supplemental diverters at gutters opposite valleys shall be copper coated stainless steel, CopperPlus, 0.027 inch, manufactured by Engineered Materials Solutions, www.cladit.com, and distributed by Heyco Metals, Inc., Reading, PA 19605, 610-926-4131, www.heyco-metals.com. 1. See Paragraph S., above, for braces associated with diverters. 2. Stiffening bar for outside edge of diverters: per Item 2.2.T. 3. Fasteners for diverters shall be silicon bronze machine screws, washers, and double nuts of appropriate size. Machine screws shall be 5/16" diameter. T. 1/2" Mesh stainless steel hardware cloth, Type 302,304 0.050" welded wire. 2.3 WEATHER RESISTANT BARRIER A. Vapor permeable weather resistant barrier with grooves to improve drainage. I. Basis of design: spun-bonded polyolefin, non-woven, non-perforated, weather barrier is based upon DuPontm Tyvek@ CommercialWrap® D and related assembly components. 2. Performance Characteristics: a. Air Penetration: 0.001 cfrn/ft2 at 75 Pa when tested in accordance with ASTME2178. Type I when tested in accordance with ASTM E 1677. <0.04 cfrn/ft @ 75 Pa when tested in accoradance with ASTM E2357. January 17, 2014 Big Red Barn Structural Improvements FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 076000 -9 b. Water Vapor Transmission: 30 penms, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 96, Method B. c. Water Penetration Resistance: 235 cm when tested in accordance with AATCC Test Method 127. d. Basis Weight: 2.4 oz/yd , when tested in accordance with TAPPI Test Method T-4 10. e. Air Infiltration Resistance: Air infiltration at >750 seconds, when tested in accordance with TAPPI Test Method T-460. f. Tensile Strength: 33/41 lbs/in., when tested in accordance with ASTM D 822 , Method A. g. Surface Burning Characteristics: Class A, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. Flame Spread: 15, Smoke Developed: 25. B. Weather resistant barrier accessories and tenmination materials: 1. Mechanical fasteners: DuPontm Tyvek@ Wrap Caps: #4 nails with large 1-inch plastic cap fasteners with 1-inch minimum plastic cap staple with leg length sufficient to achieve a minimum penetration of 5/8-inch into the wood stud. 2. Adhesive fasteners: Basis of design shall be compatible with weather resistant barrier. a. Liquid Nails® LN-109 b. Denso Butyl Liquid c. 3M High Strength 90 d. (Specifier Note: SIA product meets California VOC requirements.) e. SIA 655 f. Adhesives recommend by the weather barrier manufacturer 2.4 SELF-ADHERED FLASHINGS AND TAPES A. Seam tape compatible and for use integrations with weather resistant barrier: 1. Basis of design: Seam Tape: 3" DuPonth Tyvek@ Tape as distributed by DuPont. B. Self-adhered flashing tapes for building walls, including vertical tenminations and flashing around doors and windows: I. For corners where flashing is not fully possible with less than 3 layers of SAF, as a basis of design use DuPontm FlexWrapTM NF: Flexible membrane flashing materials for window openings and penetrations. 2. For lineal terminations in plane, as a basis of design use DuPontTM StraightFlashM: Straight flashing membrane materials for flashing windows and doors and sealing penetrations such as masonry ties, etc. C. For flashing membrane at concrete sill, use flashing tape that can integrate with adjacent damp- proofing and sealant materials. Install cross-laminated polyethylene sheet with self-adhesive rubberized asphalt waterproofing membrane of min. theckness .060". 1. Basis of design: Bituthene 3000 Low Temperature as manufactured by Grace Construction Products. January 17, 2014 Big Red Barn Structural Improvements FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 076000 -10 2.5 FLUID-APPLIED DAMP-PROOFING B. For damp-roofing of concrete sill and flashing integrations, use fully-bonded synthetic rubber fluid applied waterproofing system that is compatible with adjacent flashing tape and sealant joint assemblies. 1. Basis of design: Bituthene 3000 Low Temperature as manufactured by Grace Construction Products. 2.6 ON-GRADE WATERPROOFING SEALANT C. For sealing on grade joints in the concrete sill, use a trowel or gun grade flexible cold applied polymer cement sealant specifically designed to handle small movement in CIP or precast concrete construction. The product must be compatible with adjacent waterproofing termination products. 1. Basis of design: Servigard DW as manufactured by Grace Construction Products. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Sheet metal work of every description shall be performed by expert tradesmen thoroughly familiar with and normally engaged in this type of roofing. B. After removal of existing work as designated, inspect substrate surfaces for deterioration, rot, high moisture content, and unsatisfactory conditions, and report such deficiencies to the Design Professional and Owner. Do not proceed until corrective measures have been completed to provide satisfactory surface. 1. Inspect wood deck surfaces for smoothness to ensure that there are no projections to puncture underlayments, flashings, crickets, or roofing, or lippage to create unevenness. 2. Remove nails employed to secure existing roofing materials scheduled for removal. Do not pound in. 3.2 FABRICATION A. Shop fabricate work as much as is practical for handling and installation. Fabricate as per details on the Drawings. For details not indicated, refer to SMACNA's Architectural Sheet Metal Manual, or Revere Copper Products, Inc.'s Copper and Common Sense and consult with Design Professional. B. See Paragraph 3.1, below, for soldering requirements. C. Pans for built-in gutter liners, ridge flashings, and flat seam roofing, shall be brake formed in the shop (field breaking will not be permitted) prior to delivery to the site. Verify profile with site conditions. D. Shop fabricate gutter straps -test fit prototypes first. January 17, 2014 Big Red Barn Structural Improvements FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 076000 -11 E. Inside and outside corners of base flashings, through-wall flashings, counterflashings, aprons, and crickets shall be mitered, riveted, and soldered. Add small gusset plates as required to complete comers of all flanges. Solder top (reglet) flange (including hook dam) of counterflashings at all inside and outside comers. 1. There shall be no vertical seams at inside and outside corners. Slit non-vertical flanges of the flashing to turn the comer and either rivet and solder the flange(s) or rivet and solder small gusset plates into place to complete the corners in the flange(s). F. Soldering: I. All joints to be soldered shall be prepared by cleaning to bright, un-oxidized metal before joining. Cleaned area shall extend beyond actual joint dimension. Clean using stainless steel wire brushes, emery cloth, or "Scotch Brite" pads. Do not use steel wool or steel wire wheels. a. Clean edges of seams to be locked and soldered of all oxides, dirt, and residual oils left over from the manufacturing process prior to folding locks over/under to form seam. 2. Pre-tin the edges of all copper pans to be soldered using solders specified in Part 2 of this Section. a. Pre-tin edges of seams to be locked and soldered prior to folding over/under to form seam. 3. All joints to be soldered shall be soldered same day as joint is formed on the roof to prevent intrusion of moisture and dirt into joint. If joint cannot be soldered on the same day it is formed on the roof, cover joint to prevent intrusion of contaminants. 4. All soldering shall be done slowly with well heated irons. Place heated iron on top of prepared seam to be soldered. Heat all layers of copper within seam thoroughly to above temperature of molten solder. Sweat solder completely through all layers and full width of seam. Wherever possible, all soldering shall be done in flat position. Seams on slopes greater than 450 shall be soldered a second time. a. Soldering coppers shall weigh 6 to 10 pounds per pair. If a continuously heated iron is used, the soldering tip must weigh a minimum of 14 oz. 5. To aid in soldering seams in flat position, form pans, remove for soldering, solder, and reinstall whenever possible. 6. Upon completion of soldering, immediately neutralize and remove all flux, vapor, and flux residue using specified neutralizing solutions. Rinse areas contacted with neutralizing solution with clean water using clean, soft, cotton rags. Wash and rub vigorously to removal all flux and neutralizing residues. 7. If flux is spilled during the course of the work, clean it immediately and thoroughly. 8. Flux rivets heads very well to help ensure that solder completely fills the popped rivet. 9. Seams in new copper gutters and flashings, where indicated, shall be lapped, riveted, and soldered seams. See Detail Drawings for rivet pattern. Pre-tin copper 1-1/2 inches. Flux January 17, 2014 Big Red Barn Structural Improvements FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 076000 -12 rivet heads very well to help ensure that solder completely fills the popped rivet. When soldering transverse seams of gutters, insert rivets from below so that they are "popped" within the gutter trough to the maximum extent possible. 10. Soldering will not be permitted on site when ambient temperatures are 25 degrees F, or below; 30 degrees F, or below, when winds exceed IO mph. 11. See Paragraph 1.3, above, for required soldering submittals. These must be reviewed and approved by the Design Professional before soldering for this project may commence. G. Install new downspouts as soon as corresponding length of gutter is completed to prevent damage to exterior masonry walls and interior finishes. 1. If masonry restoration work in area of downspout is not complete or scaffolding is in the way, install temporary downspout, turn out at bottom with an elbow, and provide a temporary splash block. H. Rosin paper shall be installed over felt underlay at all crickets, built-in gutters, and flat seam roofing'so that copper does not come in contact with felt underlay. I. Cleats shall be secured with 2 nails each and top end of cleat bent over top of nails unless otherwise indicated in the Detail Drawings. J. Installation of ice dam protection membrane is required in the locations shown in the Detail Drawings. 1. See Detail Drawings for method of stripping-in top edge of crickets, gutters, etc. Neatly form ice darn protection membrane around cleats. 2. Do not install ice dam protection membrane at ridges, hips, or other locations without permission from the Design Professional. Ice dam protection membrane will not be permitted for use as temporary protection. 3. Note that ice dam protection membrane for use below sheet metal, where indicated on the Detail Drawings and where specified herein (e.g., valleys, cornice cap, and gutters), shall be high heat type specified in Part 2 of this Section. 4. Vacuum roof deck clean of all dust, dirt, and debris prior to installation of ice dam protection membrane to ensure good bond between membrane and roof deck. Prime all gypsum roof decks scheduled to receive ice dam protection membrane. Prime plywood decks in cold weather and as recommended by membrane manufacturer. Primer shall be manufacturer's water bourn primer. 5. Cover all ice dam protection membrane with felt and rosin paper. Do not install flashing and sheet metal work directly atop ice dam protection membrane. K. Anchor units of work securely in place by methods indicated, providing for thermal expansion of metal units; conceal all fasteners, and set units true to line and levels as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weatherproof. L. Rivets shall be installed from below whenever possible, such that popped end of rivet is exposed to view, or if installed from above, pounded flat prior to soldering and installation. (This is to help ensure that thermal movement can take place freely.) M. Protect existing roofs and flashings scheduled to remain from damage during the course of the work. If damaged, these items will either be repaired or replaced at no cost to, and to the January 17, 2014 Big Red Barn Structural Improvements FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 076000 -13 satisfaction of the Owner. Repair or replacement will depend on the degree of damage and will be decided upon at the sole discretion of the Design Professional. N. Overlap seams in roofing, crickets, and other flashings in the direction of water flow so as not to buck water. 0. When lapping adjacent lengths of ridge flashing, drip edge flashing, apron flashing, etc., do not cut out or snip locking flanges in area of lap. A slight bulge where the adjacent lengths overlap is acceptable. P. Coordinate roof, cricket, gutter, and flashing work with installation of new slate roofing (refer to Section 073126), replacement of deteriorated roof decking (see Detail Drawings), and masonry restoration work (Section 040120). 3.3 RECYCLING A. All existing metal flashings, gutters, roofs, downspouts, etc. indicated on the Drawings to be removed shall be stored in separate containers from other trash and debris and be recycled at a proper recycling center. 3.4 INSTALLATION, BASE FLASHINGS AND COUNTERFLASHINGS A. Remove existing metal base flashings and counterflashings where indicated on the Drawings. For chimneys, localized removal of masonry may be required to install through-wall flashings, and refer to Item 3.9. If reglet specified, cut out existing/new reglet to a depth of 2-1/2" and clean of dirt, mortar, mastic, sealant, flashing tapes, and other foreign material. This work shall be accomplished by masonry contractor or personnel well versed in masonry construction to not damage the edges of the reglet, or spall the masomiy in the removal process. I. Verify location of all reglets with the Design Professional prior to cutting out. 2. Note that in certain areas, some of which are indicated on the Drawings, base flashing heights are being raised and/or counterflashings are being extended horizontally. 3. Where counterflashings are stepped, rake out reglet for underlying counterflashing to ensure a 3 inch, minimum, lap by the overlying counterflashing. B. Refer to the Drawings and Section 040120 for raking out and repointing of masony mortar joints located behind existing base and counterflashings. This must occur prior to installation of new flashings and, preferably, prior to the installation of new roofing. C. Install new metal base flashings at roof areas as indicated on the Drawings, interweaving base flashings with each course of slate as they are installed. Base flashings for slate shingles shall be 4 inches wide x 4-1/2 inches high x a length equal to the exposure of the slate, plus the headlap, plus 2 inches (minimum, 13-1/2" typically), unless otherwise shown in the Detail Drawings. Secure base flashings to roof deck with one nail at upper, outside corner (i.e., away from joint or interface being flashed). 1. At ridges, straddle ridge with new base flashing. Solder small gusset plate in vertical flange of new base flashing after forming to ensure watertight installation. January 17, 2014 Big Red Barn Structural Improvements FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 076000 -14 2. At outside and inside corners in the masonry walls, base flashings shall wrap the comers 2 inches, minimum, or as shown in the Detail Drawings, and have the resulting seam in the reglet flange and hook dam soldered or the resulting open comer filled with a new copper gusset plate soldered into position to complete the comer, including the hook dam. 3. Where vertical walls interface with a soffit or comice, extend base flashings up, below soffit/comice as far as possible (3" min.). D. Install new metal counterflashing in existing/new reglet and secure with lead wedges at 12 inches on center, maximum. Verify size, spacing, and configuration of new counterflashings with Design Professional. Fill joint with mortar, backer rod and sealant, or combination of mortar and sealant as indicated on the Drawings. Joints in counterflashings shall overlap 3 inches, minimum. 1. Counterflashings shall lap base flashings 4 inches minimum, and, in all cases, extend to within inch of the roof surface, unless otherwise indicated in the Detail Drawings. 2. Lead wedges shall be spaced in reglet such that counterflashing cannot be moved when hand pressure is applied to top flange, 12 inches on center, maximum. If counterflashing moves when pressure is applied, install more lead wedges. 3. Keep lead wedges back fi-om the face of the joint 1 inch minimum. 4. Do not dislodge masonry units when installing lead wedges. Masonry units dislodged shall be reset in a full bed of mortar by the masonry subcontractor at no additional cost to the Owner. 5. That portion of each counterflashing reglet covered by the overlying counterflashing shall be completely filled with mortar prior to the installation of the overlying counterflashing. 6. Over-break counterflashings for snug fit again base flashing. 7. Vertical edge and bottom edge of each counterflashing shall be hemmed /" for neat appearance and to provide stiffness. Using hem, hook bottom edge of overlying counterflashings together. E. Bevel top edge of counterflashing as shown in the Detail Drawings so as not to create a ledge. If masonry is projecting below the reglet, grind slightly to avoid creating ledge in counterflashings. F. Where vertical walls are oriented at roughly 90 degrees to each other, forming a comer, and the counterflashings on one side of the corner are lower than those on the opposite side of the comer, wrap the comer with the higher counterflashings 4" unless a different dimension is shown in the Drawings. In effect, the higher counterflashing will be lapping atop the lower counterflashing in a similar fashion to stepped counterflashings. G. Where new counterflashings contain long vertical edges at masonry walls and where indicated in the Detail Drawings, peen vertical edge of counterflashing tight to wall and install specified sleeve anchors or copper clips, as indicated, to secure counterflashings to masonry wall. Install sleeve anchors/anchors associated with copper clips in mortar joints to the maximum extent possible. H. At inside and outside comers, reglet flange and hook dam of counterflashing must be soldered watertight. Solder small copper gusset plate in place where necessary to complete comer. This work must be undertaken prior to final insertion of counterflashing in reglet. I. Where vertical leg of stepped counterflashings are longer than 8 inches, and where indicated in the Detail Drawings, install new 1-1/4" wide copper clips to help keep counterflashing tight to masonry wall. January 17, 2014 Big Red Barn Structural Improvements FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 076000 -15 1. In some instances, new clip will be soldered to underlying counterflashing and folded around vertical edge of overlying counterflashing. 2. In some instances, new clip will be secured to masonry wall with specified nylon nail-in anchors and folded around edge of overlying counterflashing. J. See Detail Drawings and Item 3.9 for new partial thru-wall flashings/counterflashings at chimneys. 3.5 NEW FLAT SEAM COPPER ROOFING A. Install ice dam protection membrane underlayment over entire surface to be covered with metal roofing as shown in the Detail Drawings. Lap head joints minimum of 2 inches and ends 4 inches. B. Install rosin-sized building paper over ice dam protection membrane prior to installation of metal roofing. Lap head joints minimum of 2 inches and ends 4 inches. C. Discuss detailing of new flat seam roofs with Design Professional in the field prior to proceeding with the work. D. Install flat lock seam metal roofing in accordance with the Drawings, approved shop drawings, approved test panels, and standard details and practice with reference to Copper and Common Sense or Architectural Sheet Metal Manual. Long dimension of pans shall be laid parallel to the roof eave, as shown in the approved shop drawings, and a laid out in the approved test panel, and cross (end) joints staggered. Fasten pans with 2 cleats on long side and I cleat on cross joint side as shown in the Drawings. Lock cleat into edge seam. Nail cleat with 2 nails, and fold cleat over nail heads. I. Pan size shall be 18" x 24", maximum. 2. At changes in direction of flat seam pans, as where pans turn up a vertical wall, the over- and under-folds of the flat seam pans must be nearly continuous. If a small "V" must be snipped out of the over- and under-folds, minimize the "V" to the maximum extent possible. 3. Notch corners of pans such that, at outside corners, space (butt crack) between over-folds and between under-folds is 3/16 inch, maximum. See Detail Drawings. E. Flatten seams with wood mallet and sweat seam with solder thoroughly to provide watertight joint. 1. Wash surface of metal of all excess flux, using clean water and cotton rags, soon after seam has cooled. F. Install new base flashings, counterflashings, and drip edges as shown in the Detail Drawings and approved shop drawings. G. Upon completion, check for pin holes in the soldered seams and re-solder all that are found. H. Install new expansion joints in new flat seam roofing where shown on the Roof Plan in conformance with the Detail Drawings and approved test panel. 3.6 NEW GUTTER OUTLET TUBES January 17, 2014 Big Red Barn Structural Improvements FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 076000 -16 A. Install new copper gutter outlet tubes where shown on the Drawings, as shown in the Detail drawings, and in accordance with approved test panels. New tubes shall be size indicated in the Detail Drawings. 1. Form a continuous 2-inch flange at top end of new tube for riveting and soldering to the new copper gutter liner. B. Miter, rivet, and solder outlet tube at all changes in direction. Longitudinal seam shall be riveted and soldered full length prior to installation and placed "up." C. Outlet tube shall penetrate new downspouts 2 inches minimum. D. Enlarge/repair hole in soffit of copper cornice as required to accommodate new outlet tubes. E. Install specified new strainers in gutter outlet tubes. 3.7 DOWNSPOUT INSTALLATION, LEADER HEADS A. Coordinate installation of downspouts with installation of gutter liners. 1. If masonry restoration work in the area of the downspout(s) is not complete, install temporary downspouts to prevent the masony walls from becoming saturated with water. B. Carefully remove all existing downspout hangers prior to installation of new downspouts. I. If existing hanger cannot be removed, cut off flush with masonry wall and paint end of remaining hanger black (see Section 090190 for paint). C. Install downspouts in same location as existing, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. Where no downspout currently exists, downspout is to be moved, or changes in direction occur in the downspout, Contractor and Design Professional shall together determine precise location of new downspout. D. Secure new downspouts to building with hanger assemblies at approximately the third points of each 10 foot length of new downspout (i.e., 2 per downspout length). Install drives in mortar joints only. Pre-drill substrate for drive and fill hole with rolled lead wedge prior to inserting drive. 1. Set drives for best fit to back side of downspout. 2. Downspouts should not be set flush against masonry walls, but rather 3/4" to 1" off of wall. This distance should be consistent at all points along downspout length. 3. If a given length of downspout is between 5 and 10 feet long, 2 hanger assemblies are required, as described above. If a given downspout length is 5 feet or less in length, I hanger assembly may be used. Note: use full, 10 foot long, lengths of downspout to the maximum extent possible. 4. Installed drives must be absolutely rigid. E. Most downspouts will be straight, with no changes in direction. If a change is direction is required, neatly miter new downspouts as required. Solder all seams in miters to make watertight. January 17, 2014 Big Red Barn Structural Improvements FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 076000 -17 F. Insert upper sections of downspout into lower sections 1 inch, minimum. Insert lower section of downspout into functional downspout boot 2 inches minimum. G. Rivet and solder all longitudinal seams (i.e., vertical seam on back side of downspout) prior to hanging copper downspouts. 1. Do not solder transverse seams, except as indicated in Paragraph H., below. H. Rivet and solder all transverse seams (i.e., seams between adjacent lengths of downspout) where downspout is oriented in other than a vertical position. J. Fabricate new decorative downspouts to match the existing and accommodate gap between back side of downspout and masonry wall. Coordinate transverse seams in downspouts with location of decorative downspout straps. 1. Secure straps with new, custom fabricated cap fasteners and wood plugs. L. Install new leader head in original locations with back sides tight to masonry wall to help prevent birds from nesting behind the downspouts. Install in accordance with approved test panel. 1. Verify mounting height on masonry wall. 2. Note that leader head mounting location could impact length of gutter outlet tube. 3. Leader heads must be slid into position from below after connection between outlet tube and downspout is made. a. Do not cut out back side of leader head. b. Do not fasten leader head to downspout or outlet tube. 4. Solder 2, 1-1/4" wide, 24 oz. copper tabs to back side of leader head such that tabs project above cap of leader head. Secure tabs to masonry wall with specified bronze lag anchors. Set anchors in mortar joints to the extent possible. Adjust location of tabs as necessary to permit placing of anchors in mortar joints. 3.8 NEW CHIMNEY CAP FLASHINGS, ROOT FLASHINGS, AND CRICKETS A. Install new chimney flashings and crickets as shown in the Detail Drawings and approved test panels. B. See Section 061015 for new wood blocking and sheathing at crickets. C. New crickets shall be one piece to the extent possible. Solder small gusset plate to back side of cricket flashing at all inside and outside comers and where cricket is slit and bent. 1. Where crickets are larger than 2' x 2', they shall be constructed of flat seam copper roofing pans in accordance with the Detail Drawings and Paragraph 3.4, above. D. Note that the cricket's counterflashing wraps the outside comers of the chimney distance shown in the Detail Drawings and laps atop the counterflashings coming up the sides of the chimneys. January 17, 2014 Big Red Barn Structural Improvements FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 076000 -18 E. Review detailing of new crickets with Design Professional in the field prior to commencing work. 3.9 NEW DRIP EDGE FLASHING AT EAVES AND RAKES A. Install new copper drip edge full length of dormer eaves, and rakes at main roof slopes as shown in the Detail Drawings. B. Coordinate drip edge installation with roof installation. C. Custom fabricate drip edge at dormer eaves to the profiles shown in the Detail Drawings, including integral inverted V for cant of starter course. D. Miter seams at all changes in direction in drip edge at eaves and rakes and solder seams for watertightness. E. Verify nail length to ensure that the nails used to secure the drip edge do not penetrate the cornice and become exposed to view. Use shorter nails if necessary. I. If nails do, mistakenly, penetrate the cornice, remove the nails, fill the nails holes on the exposed side of the soffit, and re-secure drip edge using shorter nails. 3.10 CLEAN-UP A. Contractor shall maintain work area in a reasonably clean condition and remove waste and scrap material from the site daily during construction period. B. Clean new metal surfaces of oil, grease, flux or other materials that could stain roofing, flashing, gutters, or masonry by water run-off. Remove hand prints, smudges and other superficial stains caused during fabrication and installation. C. Do not allow unused, waste, and scrap materials to remain on the finished roof. D. Contractor shall clean all gutters, gussets, crickets, and roof surfaces of all debris and dirt at the end of each work day and at the completion of the project. E. Do not permit unnecessary walking on completed roofs or roof areas. END OF SECTION 076000 January 17, 2014 CORNELL SECTION 06 10 00 Ithaca, New York ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Framing with dimension lumber and engineered wood products. 2. Wood blocking and nailers. 3. Wood furring. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 061600 "Sheathing." 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal (38 mm actual) or greater but less than 5 inches nominal (114 mm actual) in least dimension. B. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following: 1. NeLMA: Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association. 2. NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority. 3. RIS: Redwood Inspection Service. 4. SPIB: The Southern Pine Inspection Bureau. 5. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. 6. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Preconstruction Conference: Conduct conference at project site. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Material Certificates: For preservative-treated wood products. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained. B. Material Certificates: For dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values approved by the ALSC Board of Review. BIG RED BARN STRUCTURAL ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 1000-1 IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 CORNELL SECTION 06 10 00 Ithaca, New York ROUGH CARPENTRY C. Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES: 1. Metal framing connectors. 2. For preservative-treated wood products. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack lumber flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect lumber from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated. I. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed sizes for dry lumber. 3. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. B. Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 19 percent for dimensional lumber and 15 percent for engineered wood products. C. Engineered Wood Products: Provide engineered wood products acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and for which current model code research or evaluation reports exist that show compliance with building code in effect for Project. 1. Allowable Design Stresses: Provide engineered wood products with allowable design stresses, as published by manufacturer that meet or exceed those indicated. Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency. 2.2 DIMENSION LUMBER FRAMING A. All structural dimensional lumber, unless noted otherwise on the drawings: No. 2 grade or greater with the following minimum properties: 1. Species: a. Spruce-pine-fir; NLGA. BIG RED BARN STRUCTURAL ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 1000-2 IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 CORNELL SECTION 06 10 00 Ithaca, New York ROUGH CARPENTRY A. All structural dimensional lumber exterior exposed or in contact with concrete, unless noted otherwise on the drawings: No. 2 grade or greater with the following minimum properties: 1. Species: a. Southern Pine; NLGA. 2.3 ENGINEERED WOOD PRODUCTS A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of engineered wood product from single source from a single manufacturer. B. Laminated-Veneer Lumber: Structural composite lumber made from wood veneers with grain primarily parallel to member lengths, evaluated and monitored according to ASTM D 5456 and manufactured with an exterior-type adhesive complying with ASTM D 2559. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Boise Cascade Corporation. b. Finnforest USA. c. Georgia-Pacific. d. Jager Building Systems Inc. e. Louisiana-Pacific Corporation. f. Pacific Woodtech Corporation. g. Roseburg Forest Products Co. h. Standard Structures Inc. i. Stark Truss Company, Inc. j. West Fraser Timber Co., Ltd. k. Weyerhaeuser Company. 2. Extreme Fiber Stress in Bending, Edgewise: 3100 psi (21.3 MPa) for 12-inch nominal- (286-mm actual-) depth members. 3. Modulus of Elasticity, Edgewise: 2,000,000 psi (13 700 MPa). 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following: 1. Blocking. 2. Nailers. 3. Furring. B. For blocking not used for attachment of other construction, No. 2 grade lumber of any species may be used provided that it is cut and selected to eliminate defects that will interfere with its attachment and purpose. C. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work. BIG RED BARN STRUCTURAL ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 1000-3 IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 CORNELL SECTION 06 10 00 Ithaca, New York ROUGH CARPENTRY D. For furring strips for installing plywood, select boards with no knots capable of producing bent- over nails and damage to paneling. 2.5 PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT A. Pressure treat dimension lumber with waterborne preservative according to AWPA Ul; Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in contact with the ground, and Use Category UC4a for items in contact with the ground. B. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. I. Do not use chemicals containing arsenic or chromium. C. After treatment, redry dimension lumber to 19 percent maximum moisture content. D. Mark treated wood with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by ALSC's Board of Review. E. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings. 2.6 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture. 1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners. B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667. C. Wood Screws: ASME B 18.6.1. D. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1 (ASME B18.2.3.8M). E. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6); with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers. 2.7 METAL FRAMING CONNECTORS A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings by Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc., or approved equal by Design Professional. B. Allowable Design Loads: Provide products with allowable design loads, as published by manufacturer that meet or exceed those of basis-of-design product. Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency. BIG RED BARN STRUCTURAL ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 00-4 IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 CORNELL SECTION 06 10 00 Ithaca, New York ROUGH CARPENTRY C. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (ZI80) coating designation at connection to non-preservative treated lumber. 1. Use for interior locations unless otherwise indicated. D. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G 185 (Z550) coating designation at connection to preservative treated lumber. E. Hold-Downs: Brackets for bolting to wall studs and securing to foundation walls with screw anchors. 1. Bolt Diameter: 1/2 inch. 2. Width: 3 inches. 3. Body Thickness: 0.080 inch. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate furring, nailers, blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction. B. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's WCD 1, "Details for Conventional Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated. C. Framing with Engineered Wood Products: Install engineered wood products to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. D. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim. E. Provide fire blocking in furred spaces, stud spaces, and other concealed cavities as indicated and as follows: 1. Fire block furred spaces of walls, at each floor level, at ceiling, and at not more than 96 inches (2438 mm) o.c. with solid wood blocking or noncombustible materials accurately fitted to close furred spaces. 2. Fire block concealed spaces of wood-framed walls and partitions at each floor level, at ceiling line of top story, and at not more than 96 inches (2438 mm) o.c. Where fire blocking is not inherent in framing system used, provide closely fitted solid wood blocks of same width as framing members and 2-inch nominal- (38-mm actual-) thickness. 3. Fire block concealed spaces between floor sleepers with same material as sleepers to limit concealed spaces to not more than 100 sq. ft. (9.3 sq. m) and to solidly fill space below partitions. BIG RED BARN STRUCTURAL ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 1000-5 IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 CORNELL SECTION 06 10 00 Ithaca, New York ROUGH CARPENTRY 4. Fire block concealed spaces behind combustible cornices and exterior trim at not more than 20 feet (6 n) o.c.. F. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics will not interfere with installation or with fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. G. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber. 1. Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected from liquid water. 2. Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water. H. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners. 2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in the Building Code of New York State. I. Use steel common nails unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood. Drive nails snug but do not countersink nail heads unless otherwise indicated. 3.2 WOOD FURRING INSTALLATION A. Install level and plumb with closure strips at edges and openings. Shim with wood as required for tolerance of finish work. B. Furring to Receive Board and Batten: See details on drawings. 3.3 WALL FRAMING INSTALLATION A. General: Provide single bottom plate using members of 2-inch nominal (38-mm actual) thickness whose widths equal that of studs. Fasten plates to supporting construction unless otherwise indicated. 1. For exterior walls, provide 2-by-6-inch true size wood studs spaced per the contract documents. 2. Provide continuous horizontal blocking at midheight of partitions more than 96 inches (2438 mm) high, using members of 2-inch nominal (38-mm actual) thickness and of same width as wall. END OF SECTION 061000 BIG RED BARN STRUCTURAL ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 1000-6 IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 Big Red Barn Structural Improvements ROOF CARPENTRY 061015 -1 SECTION 061015 -ROOF CARPENTRY PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Provide all labor, equipment, materials and services required to perform the work of this Section as indicated on the Drawings and specified herein. B. This Section includes, but is not limited to, the following: 1. All items required for installation of rough carpentry for roofing wood blocking, nailing strips, and furring. 2. Pre-fabricated vented roof sheathing. 3. Installation of new plywood crickets, including associated framing and blocking, at head of chimneys. 4. Such other carpentry items as shown in the Drawings and specified herein. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 024119 -Selective Structure Demolition 2. Section 076000 -Flashing and Sheet Metal 3. Section 099000 -Painting and Coating 1.2 REFERENCES A. Definition: "Design Professional" within the contract documents typically refers to the "Building Envelope Consultant". In instances where it is used for work scope that involves aesthetic requirements, "Design Professional" includes both the "Architect" and the "Building Envelope Consultant". 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be made in accordance with Division 0 specification sections prior to commencing work. C. Submit samples of new wood blocking. E. Submit official grade stamp for specified plywood -Design Professional will review stamp on whole sheets of plywood on site. F. Submit certification of pressure treatment and kiln drying. G. Submit certification of fastener corrosion resistance. H. Such other submittals as reasonably requested by Design Professional or Owner. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE January 17, 2014 Big Red Barn Structural Improvements ROOF CARPENTRY 061015 -2 A. Installer of carpentry items shall have at least 5 years of experience in the installation of the type of items indicated in this Section, and shall be familiar with restoration type installations. B. Quality standard for the Work, except as otherwise shown or specified, shall comply with Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI), Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards, Custom Grade, minimum. C. Items required by this Section shall be obtained from single source for each type of item to maintain continuity of quality. E. Contractor shall ensure that only the most true, most straight, and highest quality lumber and plywood shall be used. All lumber, must be dried to the moisture contents specified. To avoid warping and possible damage to installed roofing systems, do not use wet, damp, or frost covered lumber, boards, or plywood. F. Factory-mark each piece of lumber and plywood with type, grade, mill, and grading agency identification and submit mill certificate that material has been inspected and graded in accordance with requirements. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Lumber, boards, and plywood delivered to the site shall be stored off ground in such a manner to insure proper ventilation and drainage and shall be protected fi-om the weather by covering with tarpaulins or polyethylene sheeting. 1.7 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Prior to comnencing any work called for in this Section, carefilly examine the substrate and conditions under which the work is to be performed and notify the Design Professional in writing of any unsatisfactory conditions. B. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Start of work shall indicate acceptance of conditions C. Coordinate the work of this Section with demolition work such that sound materials can be salvaged for reuse elsewhere on the roof. D. Proceed with work only when prevailing and forecast weather conditions will permit work to be installed in compliance with this specification and substrate is completely dry. E. Roof areas exposed to the weather during repair work shall be protected during inclement weather, and at times when no work is being performed. F. Do not proceed with the work of this Section during inclement weather, or the threat of inclement weather, that would expose the roof to unnecessary moisture penetration. January 17, 2014 Big Red Barn Structural Improvements ROOF CARPENTRY 061015-3 G. Damage to interior of building caused by infiltration of moisture due to open areas of work shall be repaired by personnel experienced in the respective work to the satisfaction of the Design Professional and Owner and at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.8 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate the work of this Section with that of other Sections so work proceeds in nonnal sequence and work does not interfere with work of other trades. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Contractor shall warranty his work, covering both material and labor for defects that occur, for a period of five (5) years from the date of substantial completion. Repairs or replacement of the work of this Section shall be at no cost to the Owner. B. Upon substantial completion, submit a notarized letter indicating Contractor's conveyance of warranty terms indicated above. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 DIMENSION LUMBER A. New wood fi-aming and blocking for new cricket at chimneys shall be 2x fi-aming lumber, air or kiln dried (KD 15 or MCI5), S4S, well-seasoned "No. 2 Grade", Southern Pine, Western Pine or Douglas Fir with a minimum Fb (Bending Fiber Stress) of 1200 psi, and "E" (Modulus of Elasticity) of 1,600,000 psi. 1. Wood shall not be pressure treated for rot resistance. B. New plywood sheathing for flat seam roofiing and chimney crickets shall be APA rated sheathing, with a span rating of 24/16 or 32/16, an exposure durability rating of Exterior, Grade C-C or better, Group 1, minimum 4-ply, 3/4 inch thickness. 1. Do not use pressure treated plywood. 2. The above specified plywood is not marine grade plywood, nor CDX plywood (Exposure 1). Neither of these plywoods will be penmitted. 3. New wood blocking required to fill air space between sheathing layers at roofing eaves and rakes. 2.2 PRE-FABRICATED VENTED ROOF SHEATHING A. Pre-fabricated 7/16" plywood sheathing with 1" deep wood spacers secured at the undersided of each 4'x8' panel such that spacers are not more than 12" apart and unobstructed air space is greater than or equal to 92% of the total panel area. I. Basis of Design: CVRS Vented Roof Sheathing by Cornell Corporation Perfonnance Building Products. January 17, 2014 Big Red Barn Structural Improvements ROOF CARPENTRY 061015-4 2.3 OTHER MATERIALS A. Shim and wedge materials shall be fabricated of western red cedar roofing shingles. B. Fasteners -general: Unless otherwise specified herein, nails and screws used to fasten carpentry items to each other or to a substrate shall be non-corrosive material such as double hot-dipped galvanized, solid brass, or type 304/type 316 stainless steel. Use finish type nails where exposed to view. Countersink and fill holes with wood putty if element is to eventually be finish painted. See Section 090190 for putty. I. Use only stainless steel fasteners where shown in the Detail Drawings and in association with new preservative treated lumber (if any). 2. Electrogalvanized fasteners and steel fasteners with proprietary corrosion resistive coatings will not be permitted for use. 3. Double hot-dipped galvanized nails are available from Maze Nails, Division of W.H. Maze Company, Peru, IL 61354, 800-435-5949. 4. Stainless steel nails and screws are available from: a. Manasquan Premium Fasteners, Allenwood, NJ 08720, 800-542-1979 or 908-528- 6809, www.nanasquanfasteners.com b. Swan Secure Products, Inc., Baltimore, MD 21226, 410-360-9100, 800-966-2801, www.swansecure.com, now a part of Simpson Strong-Tie, Pleasanton, CA 94588, 925-560-9000, 800-999-5099, www.strongtie.com. c. Jamestown Distributors, Jamestown, RI 02835, 800-423-0030, www.jamestowndistributors.com. E. Fasteners for securing new plywood cricket sheathing and new plywood/wood gutter sheathing to existing/new wood framing/blocking shall be Type 316 stainless steel, flat head, torx drive, Woodpecker Screws, with countersinking nibs, available from Swan Secure Products. Length shall be as 10 x 2-1/2", minimum, or as required to penetrate into substrate at least 1-1/2 inches. Available sizes include 8 x 1-5/8", 8 x 2", 10 x 2-1/2", 10 x 3", 10 x 3-1/2", and 12 x 4". 1. Do not use standard deck screws. F. Fasteners for securing wood framing and blocking members to each other shall be 1 Od double hot- dipped galvanized common nails of appropriate length, such as 2-1/2", 11 gauge, PTL nails by Maze Nails, Stock Number T-447 or T-447-S. 1. Option: Fasteners for securing wood framing and blocking members to each other shall be Type 316 stainless steel, flat head, torx drive, Woodpecker Screws as specified in Paragraph G., above. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Install work accurately to required lines and levels, plumb and true, accurately cut, fitted and fastened. January 17, 2014 Big Red Barn Structural Improvements ROOF CARPENTRY 061015-5 1. Fastening shall be as recommended by State Building Code Anchor and Nail schedule. B. Crooked, warped, bowed, or cracked materials shall not be employed. Where found they shall be replaced. C. Attach carpentry members securely to each other or to substrates with fasteners of size as indicated or as required by recognized standard practice. Fasteners shall be installed without splitting wood; pre-drill if necessary. D. Notify Design Professional prior to proceeding with work where carpentry items cannot be set flush with adjacent members to remain or provide proper substrate for new roofing materials, or which cannot be set plum or level, due to existing field conditions. E. Do not remove existing gutter or cornice sheathing until proper time in sequence of work. Protect interior finishes and adjacent materials from water damage when these members are removed. Do not remove members until all temporary protection materials and new materials are on site and available for installation. Do not remove members if rain or inclement weather is forecast. F. Installation of new wood/plywood sheathing at gutters, cornices, and crickets is not rough carpentry work, but rather requires the tolerances and attention to detail associated with finish carpentry and cabinetry work. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove existing wood gutter sheathing and wood cornice sheathing after removal of existing gutter liners, cornice roofing, and flashings. When sheathing has been removed, allow Design Professional, along with Contractor, to observe condition of existing framing members. Bring to the attention of the Design Professional any deteriorated framing members. B. Verify configuration of existing gutter and cornice sheathing, blocking, and framing with Design Professional after removal of existing metal gutter liners/cornice cap. Verify spacing of existing framing members. C. Existing gutters of East & West wings and Master's House are believed to be dead flat. Verify with Design Professional in the field after removal of existing EPDM gutter liners. 3.3 REPLACEMENT OF GUTTER SHEATHING A. Remove all existing wood sheathing after removal of existing gutter liners to permit installation of new steel support brackets and replacement of deteriorated brackets. 1. After removal of existing gutter sheathing, permit observation of existing framing members by Design professional. Bring any deterioration of framing members to the attention of the Design Professional. 2. Coordinate removal and replacement of gutter sheathing with installation of new gutter liner. B. Replace deteriorated gutter sheathing with new members that match the thickness of the existing as closely as possible. Shim or plane new sheathing as required to bring flush and level with adjacent existing sheathing to remain (if any). January 17, 2014 Big Red Barn Structural Improvements ROOF CARPENTRY 061015 -6 1. Secure boards to structural members with at least 2 fasteners per board at each member. All joints shall be over structural framing. Leave 1/16-inch gap between ends of adjacent boards (i.e., gap all transverse joints). Pre-drill as required to prevent splitting of new wood. Countersink heads of new fasteners flush with top surface of new sheathing. a. Note that testing of installation of fastener and pullout testing of fastener may be required, especially if framing consists of steel brackets. See Paragraph 1.4.A. 7, above. 2. New sheathing must span a minimum of 3 fiarning members. Use the longest boards possible, spanning as many framing members as possible. 3. Note that substrate to which gutter sheathing is secured is assumed to be 1/4" thick steel brackets, but this must be verified prior to commencing work. 4. Should existing sheathing be very sound, notify Design Professional and consideration will be given to salvaging and reinstalling it, rather than replacing it. C. New sheathing in gutter trough shall be full width of trough, with no longitudinal joints. D. Finished gutter sheathing shall be smooth and planar with no sagging, troughs, or lippage along edges or at ends of boards and no projecting fasteners. Finished gutter sheathing shall be absolutely rigid, such that no movement occurs when, for example, Design Professional walks on the sheathing. E. To protect from the weather, cover new gutter sheathing as soon as practical after installation with new underlayments. 3.4 NEW PLYWOOD CRICKETS AT SKYLIGHTS & CHIMNEYS A. Coordinate installation of new plywood crickets with re-positioning of skylight openings in roof deck and installation of new skylight curbs. B. Discuss layout of new crickets with Design Professional prior to commencing work. C. Remove all existing wood blocking and wood sheathing forming existing crickets after removal of existing metal flashings. D. Install new wood sleepers at 16 inches on center. Vary size of sleepers as required to create slope. Secure sleepers to roof deck and wood curb of skylight with specified fasteners. E. Install new plywood sheathing at crickets in manner similar to that outlined in Paragraph 3.5, above. Secure plywood to sleepers using specified stainless steel woodpecker screws. 3.5 WOOD BLOCKING A. Install new wood blocking between existing/new framing members as required to properly support the work of this Section and other Sections. B. All necessary nailing strips, cant strips, and blocking shall be installed to fulfill the purposes for which they are to be used and as detailed. Top of blocking shall finish flush with top of insulation. January 17, 2014 Big Red Barn Structural Improvements ROOF CARPENTRY 061015 -7 C. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loading. Countersink bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise shown. 3.6 CLEAN-UP A. Contractor shall keep work site in a neat and safe condition by disposing of scrap and cuttings daily to an off-site legal dump. B. No burning of trash or waste materials will be allowed on site. C. Protect and maintain conditions necessary to ensure that Work will be without damage or deterioration prior to roofing and flashing. I. Do not install self-adhering ice dam protection membrane, or similar products, atop new gutter or cornice sheathing as temporary protection unless shown otherwise in the Detail Drawings. D. Repair damaged and defective woodwork to eliminate defects; where not possible to repair properly, replace carpentry items. Poorly fitted joinery filled with filler or caulking is not acceptable, and will require replacement. END OF SECTION 061015 January 17, 2014 CORNELL SECTION 06 16 00 Ithaca, New York SHEATHING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: I. Wall sheathing. 2. Roof sheathing. 3. Underside of Mezzanine sheathing. B. Related Requirements: I. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry". 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack panels flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect sheathing from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD PANEL PRODUCTS A. Plywood: DOC PS 1. B. Thickness: As needed to comply with requirements specified, but not less than thickness indicated. C. Factory mark panels to indicate compliance with applicable standard. D. Kiln-dry material after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 15 percent. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material. 2.2 WALL SHEATHING A. Plywood Wall Sheathing: Exposure 1, Structural 1 sheathing. 1. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 3/4 inch. BIG RED BARN STRUCTURAL SHEATHING 06 16 00-1 IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 CORNELL SECTION 06 16 00 Ithaca, New York SHEATHING 2.3 ROOF SHEATHING A. Plywood Roof Sheathing: Exterior sheathing. 1. Span Rating: Not less than 40/20. 2. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 19/32 inch. 2.4 UNDERSIDE OF MEZZANINE SHEATHING A. Plywood Wall Sheathing: Exposure 1, Structural I sheathing. 1. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 15/32 inch. 2.5 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture. 1. For roof and wall sheathing, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M. B. Nails: ASTM F 1667. C. Wood Screws: ASME B 18.6.1. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Adhesives for Field Gluing Panels to Framing: Formulation complying with APA AFG-01 and ASTM D 3498 that is approved for use with type of construction panel indicated by manufacturers of both adhesives and panels. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of sheathing or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. Arrange joints so that pieces do not span between fewer than three support members. B. Cut panels at penetrations, edges, and other obstructions of work; fit tightly against abutting construction unless otherwise indicated. C. Securely attach to substrate by fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in State of New York Building Code. BIG RED BARN STRUCTURAL SHEATHING 06 1600-2 IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 CORNELL SECTION 06 16 00 Ithaca, New York SHEATHING D. Use comon nails unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections. Install fasteners without splitting wood. E. Coordinate wall and roof sheathing installation with flashing and joint-sealant installation so these materials are installed in sequence and manner that prevent exterior moisture from passing through completed assembly. F. Sheathing shall not be less than 4'-0" x 8'-0". except at boundaries and changes in framing for wall and roof sheathing. The minimum panel width for roof sheathing is 24". For underside of mezzanine sheathing, at contractor's option sheathing may be field cut to match spacing of existing floor joists. G. Coordinate sheathing installation with installation of materials installed over sheathing so sheathing is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at end of the workday when rain is forecast. 3.2 WOOD STRUCTURAL PANEL INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with applicable recommendations in APA Form No. E30, "Engineered Wood Construction Guide," for types of structural-use panels and applications indicated. B. Fastening Methods: Fasten panels as indicated below: 1. Wall and Roof Sheathing: a. Space panels 1/8 inch (3 mn) apart at edges and ends. END OF SECTION 061600 BIG RED BARN STRUCTURAL SHEATHING 06 16 00-3 IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 Big Red Barn Structural Improvements WOOD TRIM 064600 -1 SECTION 064600 -WOOD TRIM PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes architectural woodwork as follows: I. Exterior board and batten siding. 2. Exterior wood frames for doors and windows. 3. Exterior fascia boards. 4. Interior tongue and groove bead board. 5. Exterior wood awning brackets. 6. Exterior tongue and groove clapboard siding. 7. Exterior tongue and groove decking. 8. Exterior shake shingles. 1.3 DEFINITION A. The tern "wood trim" as used in this Section refers to trim and other forms of architectural woodwork specified in this Section. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components. 1. Show details full size. 2. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections. 3. Apply AWI Quality Certification Program label to Shop Drawings. B. Samples for Verification: 1. Wood boards for transparent finish, not less than 5 inches (125 mm) wide by 24 inches (600 mm) long, for each species and cut, finished on one side and one edge. 2. Wood handrail with transparent finish, full size and not less than 24 inches (600 mm) long, for species, cut, and finish required. January 17, 2014 Big Red Barn Structural Improvements WOOD TRIM 064600 -2 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer and fabricator. B. Product Certificates: For the following: 1. Composite wood and agrifiber products. 2. Adhesives. C. Woodwork Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program certificates. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in- service performance. Shop is a certified participant in AWl's Quality Certification Program. B. Installer Qualifications: Certified participant in AWL's Quality Certification Program. C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Build mockups of typical wood trim as shown on Drawings. 2. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. A. Do not deliver wood trim until operations that could damage wood trim have been completed in installation areas. If wood trim must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Field Conditions" Article. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations for Exterior Work: Proceed with installation of exterior wood trim only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit work to be performed and at least one coat of specified finish to be applied without exposure to rain, snow, or dampness. B. Environmental Limitations for Interior Work: Do not deliver or install interior wood trim until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. C. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop January 17, 2014 Big Red Barn Structural Improvements WOOD TRIM 064600 -3 D. Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by field measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. E. Established Dimensions: Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, establish dimensions for areas where woodwork is to fit. Coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. 1.9 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of work specified in other Sections to ensure that wood trim can be supported and installed as indicated. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD TRIM, GENERAL A. A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork Standards" for grades of wood trim indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements. 1. Provide labels and certificates from AWI certification program indicating that woodwork, including installation, complies with requirements of grades specified. 2. The Contract Documents contain selections chosen from options in the quality standard and additional requirements beyond those of the quality standard. Comply with those selections and requirements in addition to the quality standard. B. Regional Materials: Woodwork specified in this Section shall be manufactured within 500 miles (800 kn) of Project site from materials that have been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as manufactured, within 500 miles (800 km) of Project site. C. Certified Wood: Woodwork specified in this Section shall be certified as "FSC Pure" or "FSC Mixed Credit" according to FSC STD-01-001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship," and FSC STD-40-004, "FSC Standard for Chain of Custody Certification." 2.2 EXTERIOR BOARD AND BATTEN SIDING A. Dimensions: To match existing 1" X 10" boards and 2-1/4" X 3/4" battens (U.N.O.) B. Grade: Select and Better (FAS, FlF, and Select Boards) C. Wood Species: Western Red Cedar D. Notes: Back prime and back paint 1s' coat. Finish coat on outside exposed side only. January 17, 2014 Big Red Barn Structural Improvements WOOD TRIM 064600 -4 2.3 EXTERIOR WOOD FRAMES FOR DOORS AND WINDOWS A. Dimensions: To match existing. B. Grade: Select and Better (FAS, FIF, and Select Boards) C. Wood Species: Western Red Cedar D. Notes: Back prime and back paint Ist coat. Finish coat on outside exposed side only. 2.4 EXTERIOR WOOD FASCIA BOARDS AND HORIZONTAL BATTEN PLANKS A. Dimensions: To match existing appox. 2-1/4" x 10" (V.I.F.) B. Grade: Select and Better (FAS, FIF, and Select Boards) C. Wood Species: Western Red Cedar D. Notes: Back prime and back paint Ist coat. Finish coat on outside exposed side only. 2.5 INTERIOR TONGUE AND GROOVE BEAD BOARD A. Dimensions: To match existing (varies) B. Grade: First and Seconds (FAS) C. Wood Species: Poderosa Pine (V.1.F.) D. Notes: Finish to match existing (stain or oil) 2.6 EXTERIOR WOOD AWNING BRACKETS A. Dimensions: To match existing. B. Grade: First and Seconds (FAS) C. Wood Species: Western Red Cedar D. Notes: Back prime and back paint Is" coat. Finish coat on outside exposed side only. 2.7 EXTERIOR TONGUE AND GROOVE CLAPBOARD SIDING A. Dimensions: To match existing appox. 4" x 1" B. Grade: Select and Better (FAS, FIF, and Select Boards) C. Wood Species: Western Red Cedar January 17, 2014 Big Red Barn Structural Improvements WOOD TRIM 064600-5 D. Notes: Back prime and back paint sI" coat. Finish coat on outside exposed side only. 2.8 EXTERIOR TONGUE AND GROOVE DECKING A. Dimensions: To match existing appox. 4"x 1" B. Grade: Select and Better (FAS, FlF, and Select Boards) C. Wood Species: Western Red Cedar D. Notes: Back prime and back paint 1st coat. Finish coat on outside exposed side only. 2.9 EXTERIOR SHAKE SHINGLES A. Dimensions: 16" length with 5" exposure (V.1.F.) to match existing width (variable) of shake shingles B. Grade: Number 1, Blue Label C. Wood Species: Western Red Cedar D. Notes: Prime and paint outside only before installation. 2.10 MISCELLANEOUS A. Nails for Exterior Use: Stainless steel. B. Screws for Exterior Use: Bronze or stainless steel. C. Provide self-drilling screws for metal-framing supports, as recommended by metal-framing manufacturer. D. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide metal expansion sleeves or expansion bolts for post-installed anchors. Use nonferrous- metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts at inside face of exterior walls and at floors. E. Adhesives: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde. F. VOC Limits for Installation Adhesives and Sealants: Use products that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): 1. Wood Glues: 30 g/L. 2. Multipurpose Construction Adhesives: 70 g/L. 3. Structural Wood Member Adhesive: 140 g/L. 4. Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L. January 17, 2014 Big Red Barn Structural Improvements WOOD TRIM 064600 -6 2.11 FABRICATION A. A. Fabricate wood trim to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius indicated for the following: 1. Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) unless otherwise indicated. B. Complete fabrication, including assembly and hardware application, to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. 1. Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled. Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be removed after trial fitting. Verify that various parts fit as intended and check measurements of assemblies against field measurements before disassembling for shipment. C. Backout or groove backs of flat trim members and kerf backs of other wide, flat members except for members with ends exposed in finished work. 2.12 SHOP PRIMING A. Exterior Wood Trim and Frames for Opaque Finish: Shop prime with one coat of wood primer specified in Section 099000 "Painting and Coating." B. Interior Wood Trim for Opaque Finish: Shop prime with one coat of wood primer specified in Section 099000 "Painting and Coating." C. Preparations for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing wood trim, as applicable to each unit of work. 1. Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to concealed surfaces of wood trim. Apply two coats to surfaces installed in contact with concrete or masonry and to end-grain surfaces. 2.13 SHOP FINISHING A. General: Finish wood railings at fabrication shop as specified in this Section. Defer only final touchup, cleaning, and polishing until after installation. B. Preparation for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing wood railings, as applicable. January 17, 2014 Big Red Barn Structural Improvements WOOD TRIM 064600 -7 PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Before installation, condition wood trim to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas. B. Before installing architectural wood trim, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Grade: Install wood trim to comply with same grade as item to be installed. B. Assemble wood trim and complete fabrication at Project site to the extent that it was not completed in the shop. C. Install wood trim level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm). D. Scribe and cut wood trim to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts. E. Anchor wood trim to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing. Use fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork. 1. For shop-finished items, use filler matching finish of items being installed. F. Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full-length pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to greatest extent possible. Do not use pieces less than 96 inches (2400 mm) long except where shorter single-length pieces are necessary. Scarf running joints and stagger in adjacent and related members. 1. Fill gaps, if any, between top of base and wall with latex sealant, painted to match wall. 2. Install standing and running trim with no more variation from a straight line than 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm). G. Touch up finishing work specified in this Section after installation of wood trim. Fill nail holes with matching filler where exposed. 1. Apply specified finish coats, including stains and paste fillers if any, to exposed surfaces where only sealer/prime coats are applied in shop. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Repair damaged and defective wood trim, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace wood trim. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. January 17, 2014 Big Red Barn Structural Improvements WOOD TRIM 064600 -8 B. Clean wood trim on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. END OF SECTION January 17, 2014 CORNELL SECTION 05 12 00 Ithaca, New York STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING PART I -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Structural steel. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 099000 "Painting and Coatings" for surface-preparation and priming requirements. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Structural Steel: Elements of the structural frame indicated on Drawings and as described in AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate selection of shop priners with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural-steel components. 1. Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent data. 2. Include embedment Drawings. 3. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field welds, and show size, length, and type of each weld. Show backing bars that are to be removed and supplemental fillet welds where backing bars are to remain. C. Welding Procedure Specifications (WPSs) and Procedure Qualification Records (PQRs): Provide according to AWS Dl. 1/D1. 1M, "Structural Welding Code -Steel," for each welded joint [whether prequalified or qualified by testing] [qualified by testing], including the following: 1. Power source (constant current or constant voltage). BIG RED BARN STRUCTURAL STRUCTURAL STEEL 05 12 00-1 IMPROVEMENTS FRAMING January 17, 2014 CORNELL SECTION 05 12 00 Ithaca, New York STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 2. Electrode manufacturer and trade name, for demand critical welds. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer, fabricator, testing agency. B. Welding certificates. C. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers, certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats. D. Mill test reports for structural steel, including chemical and physical properties. E. Product Test Reports: For the following: 1. Shop primers. F. Survey of existing conditions. G. Source quality-control reports. H. Field quality-control and special inspection reports. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified fabricator that participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Plant, Category STD or in lieu of this certification, a written Quality Control/Quality Assurance policy may be submitted to the design team for review. B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/DI.1M, "Structural Welding Code -Steel." 1. Welders and welding operators performing work on bottom-flange, demand-critical welds shall pass the supplemental welder qualification testing, as required by AWS DI.8/DI.8M. FCAW-S and FCAW-G shall be considered separate processes for welding personnel qualification. C. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents: 1. AISC 303. 2. AISC 341 and AISC 341s1. 3. AISC 360. 4. RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." BIG RED BARN STRUCTURAL STRUCTURAL STEEL 05 1200-2 IMPROVEMENTS FRAMING January 17, 2014 CORNELL SECTION 05 12 00 Ithaca, New York STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off ground and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and spacers. Protect steel members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration. 1. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion, damage, or overload to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 STRUCTURAL-STEEL MATERIALS A. Channels, Angles Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M. B. Plate and Bar: ASTM A 36/A 36M. C. Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 500/A 500M, Grade B, structural tubing. D. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements. 2.2 BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS A. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1, heavy-hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563, Grade C, (ASTM A 563M, Class 8S) heavy-hex carbon- steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M), Type 1, hardened carbon-steel washers; all with plain finish. 2.3 PRIMER A. Primer: Comply with Section 09900 "Painting and Coating" 2.4 FABRICATION A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate according to AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges," and to AISC 360. 1. Mark and match-mark materials for field assembly. 2. Complete structural-steel assemblies, including welding of units, before starting shop- priming operations. B. Thermal Cutting: Perform thermal cutting by machine to greatest extent possible. 1. Plane thermally cut edges to be welded to comply with requirements in AWS D1.1/Dl.1M. BIG RED BARN STRUCTURAL STRUCTURAL STEEL 05 1200-3 IMPROVEMENTS FRAMING January 17, 2014 CORNELL SECTION 05 12 00 Ithaca, New York STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING C. Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch standard holes perpendicular to metal surfaces. D. Finishing: Accurately finish ends of columns and other members transmitting bearing loads. E. Cleaning: Clean and prepare steel surfaces that are to remain unpainted according to SSPC- SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning." 2.5 SHOP CONNECTIONS A. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/Di.1M for tolerances, appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work. 1. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that maintain true alignment of axes without exceeding tolerances in AISC 303 for mill material. 2.6 SHOP PRIMING A. Shop prime steel surfaces except the following: 1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded members to a depth of 2 inches (50 mm). 2. Surfaces to be field welded. 3. Surfaces enclosed in interior construction. B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to the following specifications and standards: 1. SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning." 2. SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." 3. SSPC-SP 7/NACE No. 4, "Brush-off Blast Cleaning." 4. SSPC-SP 11, "Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal." 5. SSPC-SP 14/NACE No. 8, "Industrial Blast Cleaning." 6. SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." 7. SSPC-SP 1O/NACE No. 2, "Near-White Blast Cleaning." 8. SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1, "White Metal Blast Cleaning." 9. SSPC-SP 8, "Pickling." C. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer's written instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces. 1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges. 2. Apply two coats of shop paint to surfaces that are inaccessible after assembly or erection. Change color of second coat to distinguish it from first. BIG RED BARN STRUCTURAL STRUCTURAL STEEL 05 12 00-4 IMPROVEMENTS FRAMING January 17, 2014 CORNELL SECTION 05 12 00 Ithaca, New York STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING D. Painting: Prepare steel and apply a one-coat, nonasphaltic primer complying with SSPC- PS Guide 7.00, "Painting System Guide 7.00: Guide for Selecting One-Coat Shop Painting Systems," to provide a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). 2.7 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform shop tests and inspections. 1. Provide testing agency with access to places where structural-steel work is being fabricated or produced to perform tests and inspections. B. Welded Connections: Visually inspect shop-welded connections according to AWS DI.1/DL IM and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option: 1. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. 2. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; perforned on root pass and on finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration are not accepted. 3. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164. 4. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94. C. In addition to visual inspection, test and inspect shop-welded shear connectors according to requirements in AWS D1. l/DLIM for stud welding and as follows: 1. Perform bend tests if visual inspections reveal either a less-than-continuous 360-degree flash or welding repairs to any shear connector. 2. Conduct tests according to requirements in AWS DI.1/DI.1M on additional shear connectors if weld fracture occurs on shear connectors already tested. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify, with certified steel erector present, elevations of concrete-bearing surfaces and locations of embedments for compliance with requirements. 1. Prepare a certified survey of existing conditions. Include embedments showing dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 ERECTION A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC 303 and AISC 360. BIG RED BARN STRUCTURAL STRUCTURAL STEEL 05 12 00-5 IMPROVEMENTS FRAMING January 17, 2014 CORNELL SECTION 05 12 00 Ithaca, New York STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING B. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." C. Align and adjust various members that form part of complete frame or structure before permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that are in permanent contact with members. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment. 1. Level and plumb individual members of structure. 2. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean temperature when structure is completed and in service. D. Splice members only where indicated. E. Do not use thermal cutting during erection unless approved by Design Professional. Finish thermally cut sections within smoothness limits in AWS D1. 1 /D 1 .1 M. F. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or using drift pins. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts. G. Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear connectors. Use automatic end welding of headed-stud shear connectors according to AWS D1.1/DI.1M and manufacturer's written instructions. 3.3 FIELD CONNECTIONS A. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M for tolerances, appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work. I. Comply with AISC 303 and AISC 360 for bearing, alignment, adequacy of temporary connections, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds. 2. Remove backing bars or runoff tabs, back gouge, and grind steel smooth. 3. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that maintain true alignment of axes without exceeding tolerances in AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges," for mill material. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following special inspections: 1. Verify structural-steel materials and inspect steel frame joint details. 2. Verify weld materials and inspect welds. B. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. C. Welded Connections: Visually inspect field welds according to AWS DI. 1/D1. IM. BIG RED BARN STRUCTURAL STRUCTURAL STEEL 05 1200-6 IMPROVEMENTS FRAMING January 17, 2014 CORNELL SECTION 05 12 00 Ithaca, New York STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING I. In addition to visual inspection, test and inspect field welds according to AWS D1.1/DI .1M and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option: a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. b. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration are not accepted. c. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164. d. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94. D. In addition to visual inspection, test and inspect field-welded shear connectors according to requirements in AWS DI.1/D1.IM for stud welding and as follows: 1. Perform bend tests if visual inspections reveal either a less-than-continuous 360-degree flash or welding repairs to any shear connector. 2. Conduct tests according to requirements in AWS Dl.I/DI.1M on additional shear connectors if weld fracture occurs on shear connectors already tested. 3.5 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean exposed areas where primer is damaged or missing and paint with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces. I. Clean and prepare surfaces by SSPC-SP 2 hand-tool cleaning or SSPC-SP 3 power-tool cleaning. B. Touchup Priming: Cleaning and touchup priming are specified in Section 099000 "Painting and Coatings." END OF SECTION 051200 BIG RED BARN STRUCTURAL STRUCTURAL STEEL 05 12 00-7 IMPROVEMENTS FRAMING January 17, 2014 Big Red Barn Structural Improvements MAINTENANCE OF EXTERIOR MASONRY 042113 -1 SECTION 042113 -BRICK MASONRY PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: I. Face brick 2. Mortar 3. Refractory mortar 4. Terra cotta (only if contractor cannot salvage terra cotta units during chimney reconstruction) 5. Ties and anchors. 6. Miscellaneous masonry accessories. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 076000 "Flashing and Sheet Metal" for exposed sheet metal flashing and for furnishing manufactured reglets installed in masonry joints. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For the following: 1. Masonry Units: Show sizes, profiles, coursing, and locations of special shapes. 2. Stone Trim Units: Show sizes, profiles, and locations of each stone trim unit required. 3. Fabricated Flashing: Detail corner units, end-dam units, and other special applications. C. Samples for Initial Selection: 1. Face brick, in the form of straps or boards of five or more bricks. 2. Colored mortar. D. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of the following: 1. Face brick, in the form of straps of five or more bricks. 2. Stone trim. 3. Pigmented mortar. Make Samples using same sand and mortar ingredients to be used on Project. January 17, 2014 Big Red Barn Structural Improvements MAINTENANCE OF EXTERIOR MASONRY 042113 -2 4. Accessories embedded in masonry. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. List of Materials Used in Constructing Mockups: List generic product names together with manufacturers, manufacturers' product names, model numbers, lot numbers, batch numbers, source of supply, and other information as required to identify materials used. Include mix proportions for mortar and grout and source of aggregates. 1. Submittal is for information only. Neither receipt of list nor approval of mockup constitutes approval of deviations from the Contract Documents unless such deviations are specifically brought to the attention of Architect and approved in writing. B. Material Certificates: For each type and size of the following: I. Masonry units. a. Include data on material properties. b. For brick, include size-variation data verifying that actual range of sizes falls within specified tolerances. c. For exposed brick, include test report for efflorescence according to ASTM C 67. d. For surface-coated brick, include test report for durability of surface appearance after 50-cycles of freezing and thawing per ASTM C 67or a list of addresses of buildings in Project's area where proposed brick has been used successfully and with a history of durability. 2. Cementitious materials. Include brand, type, and name of manufacturer. 3. Preblended, dry mortar mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. 4. Grout mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. 5. Anchors, ties, and metal accessories. C. Cold-Weather and Hot-Weather Procedures: Detailed description of methods, materials, and equipment to be used to comply with requirements. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, from single source from single manufacturer for each product required. B. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, including color for exposed masonry, from single manufacturer for each cementitious component and from single source or producer for each aggregate. C. Masonry Standard: Comply with ACI 530. 1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents. January 17, 2014 Big Red Barn Structural Improvements MAINTENANCE OF EXTERIOR MASONRY 042113-3 D. Sample Panels: Build sample panels to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects. Comply with requirements in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements" for mockups. 1. Build sample panels for each type of exposed unit masonry construction in sizes approximately 48 inches (1200 mm) long by 36 inches (900 mm). 2. Where masonry is to match existing, erect panels adjacent and parallel to existing surface. 3. Clean exposed faces of panels with masonry cleaner indicated. 4. Protect approved sample panels from the elements with weather-resistant membrane. 5. Approval of sample panels is for color, texture, and blending of masonry units; relationship of mortar and sealant colors to masonry unit colors; tooling of joints; aesthetic qualities of workmanship; and other material and construction qualities specifically approved by Architect in writing. a. Approval of sample panels does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in sample panels unless such deviations are specifically approved by Architect in writing. E. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Build mockup of typical masonry replacement in wall area to be determined in field by Engineer and Owner. 2. Build mockup of typical masonry joint repointing in wall area to be determined in field by Engineer and Owner. 3. Approval of mockups is for color, texture, and blending of masonry units; relationship of mortar and sealant colors to masonry unit colors; tooling of joints; and aesthetic qualities of workmanship. a. Approval of mockups is also for other material and construction qualities specifically approved by Architect in writing. b. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations fi-om the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless such deviations are specifically approved by Architect in writing. 4. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If units become wet, do not install until they are dry. B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp. C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided. January 17, 2014 Big Red Barn Structural Improvements MAINTENANCE OF EXTERIOR MASONRY 042113 -4 D. Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers designed for use with dispensing silos. Store preblended, dry mortar mix in delivery containers on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location or in covered weatherproof dispensing silos. E. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when construction is not in progress. 1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches (600 mm) down both sides of walls and hold cover securely in place. 2. Where one wythe of multiwythe masonry walls is completed in advance of other wythes, secure cover a minimum of 24 inches (600 mm) down face next to unconstructed wythe and hold cover in place. B. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such masonry. 1 .Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter by spreading coverings on ground and over wall surface. 2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings. 3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and integral finishes, from mortar droppings. 4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from splashing mortar and dirt onto completed masonry. C. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. 1. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40 deg F (4 deg C) and higher and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than seven days after completing cleaning. D. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530. 1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. January 17, 2014 Big Red Barn Structural Improvements MAINTENANCE OF EXTERIOR MASONRY 042113 -5 PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MASONRY UNITS, GENERAL A. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated in the standard. Do not use units where such defects will be exposed in the completed Work. 2.2 BRICK A. General: Provide shapes indicated and as follows to match dimensions, exposed surfaces matching finish and color of exposed faces of adjacent units. B. Face Brick: Facing brick complying with ASTM C 216. 1. Grade: SW. 2. Type: FBX. 3. Initial Rate of Absorption: Less than 30 g/30 sq. in. (30 g/194 sq. cm) per minute when tested per ASTM C 67. 4. Efflorescence: Provide brick that has been tested according to ASTM C 67 and is rated "not effloresced." 5. Color and Texture: To match existing. 2.3 MORTAR MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type 1 or 11, except Type 111 may be used for cold-weather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color indicated. B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. C. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement and hydrated lime containing no other ingredients. D. Mortar Cement: ASTM C 1329. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Lafarge North America Inc; Lafarge Mortar Cement E. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for use in mortar mixes and complying with ASTM C 979. Use only pigments with a record of satisfactory performance in masonry mortar. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Davis Colors; True Tone Mortar Colors. January 17, 2014 Big Red Barn Structural Improvements MAINTENANCE OF EXTERIOR MASONRY 042113 -6 b. Lanxess Corporation; Bayferrox Iron Oxide Pigments. c. Solomon Colors, Inc; SGS Mortar Colors. F. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144. 1. For mortar that is exposed to view, use washed aggregate consisting of natural sand or crushed stone. 2. For joints less than 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve. 3. White-Mortar Aggregates: Natural white sand or crushed white stone. 4. Colored-Mortar Aggregates: Natural sand or crushed stone of color necessary to produce required mortar color. 2.4 REFRACTORY MORTAR MATERIALS A. Premixed medium duty, medium-duty, non-water-soluable calcium alurminate refractory mortar manufactured in accordance with and meeting requirements of ASTM F1097. I. Basis of Design: Rutland Dry Mix 211 by Rutland Products, or qualified alternate. 2.5 FLUE CLAY LINER A. Terra cotta flue liner manufactured in accordance with and meeting requirements of ASTM C 315 with a minimum dimension of 5/8" thick. I. Flue liner dimension shall be as required to match existing terra cotta flue liner inside dimension (.D.) 2. Basis of Design: Clay flue liners as manufactured by the Kopp Clay Company or qualified alternate. B. Liners shall be bedded one on the other in a medium-duty, non-water-soluble calcium aluminate refractory cement mixture, or its equivalent. 2.6 REINFORCEMENT A. Masonry Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A 951/A 951M. B. Masonry Joint Reinforcement for Veneers Anchored with Seismic Masonry-Veneer Anchors: Single 0.1 87-inch- (4.76-mm-) diameter, stainless-steel continuous wire. 2.7 TIES AND ANCHORS A. Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in this article that are made from materials that comply with the following unless otherwise indicated: 1. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304. 2. Stainless-Steel Bars: ASTM A 276 or ASTM A 666, Type 304. January 17, 2014 Big Red Barn Structural Improvements MAINTENANCE OF EXTERIOR MASONRY 042113 -7 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES A. Compressible Filler: Prernolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1; compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from neoprene. B. Reglet wedges: Fabricate from 4 pounds per square foot copper bearing lead sheet, ASTM B 749, Type L51121. Fabricate reglet wedge by rolling 1 inch wide strip as many times as required to fill space between flashing and reglet. 2.9 MASONRY CLEANERS A. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for removing mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new masonry without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces, Use product expressly approved for intended use by cleaner manufacturer and manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements. a. Diedrich Technologies, Inc. b. EaCo Chem, Inc. c. PROSOCO, Inc. 2.10 MORTAR MIXES A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures unless otherwise indicated. 1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar. 2. Use portland cement-lime mortar unless otherwise indicated. 3. Add cold-weather admixture (if used) at same rate for all mortar that will be exposed to view, regardless of weather conditions, to ensure that mortar color is consistent. B. Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in form of a preblended mix. Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients before delivering to Project site. C. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification. Provide Type N unless another type is indicated. D. Pigmented Mortar: Use colored cement product or select and proportion pigments with other ingredients to produce color required. 1. Pigments shall not exceed 10 percent of portland cement by weight. E. Colored-Aggregate Mortar: Produce required mortar color by using colored aggregates and natural color or white cement as necessary to produce required mortar color. 1. Mix to match Architect's sample. January 17, 2014 Big Red Barn Structural Improvements MAINTENANCE OF EXTERIOR MASONRY 042113 -8 2. Application: Use colored aggregate mortar for exposed mortar joints if required. 2.11 SEALANTS A. Elastomeric Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid-applied chemically curing sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates. B. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where elastomeric sealants are specified to be nonstaining to porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project. C. Exterior sealant for filling reglets shall be non-sag, gun grade, single component urethane sealant complying with ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use Group NT, M,A, and 0. Color shall be Dark Bronze. Provide one of the following, or Design Professional approved alternate: 1. Products: a. "Dymonic"; Tremco, Inc. Beachwood, OH 44122. b. "Sikaflex-la"; Sika Corp., Lyndhurst, NJ 07071. D. Exterior sealant for building joint at chimney, and other misc. building expansion joints shall be non-sag, gun grade, single-component, neutral curing Silicone Sealant complying with ASTM C920, Type S, grade NS, Class 50. Use group NT. Color shall be seleceted by the Design Professional as part of a mock-up. Provide one of the following or Design Professional approved alternate: 2. Products: a. "Dow 790", Dow Corning Corp., Midland, MI 48686 2.12 JOINT SEALANT BACKING A. General: Provide sealant backings of material that are non-staining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealers, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. B. Backer Rod: Closed-Cell Type, polyethylene or polyurethane foam rod, nonabsorbent to water and gas, of diameter recommended by sealant manufacturer for opening width, complying with ASTM D1623 and ASTM C1083. Veirify compatibility of backer rod and sealant before installation. Provide one of the following, or Design Professional approved alternate: 3. Products: a. "Sof Rod"; Namaco, Inc., Zebulon, NC 27597, 800-345-7279 or 919-269-6500 b. "Expand-O-Foam"; Williams Products, Inc., Troy, MI 48084. January 17, 2014 Big Red Barn Structural Improvements MAINTENANCE OF EXTERIOR MASONRY 042113 -9 PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After installing equipment, complete masonry to match the construction immediately adjacent to opening. B. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed. C. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and textures. 1. Mix units from several pallets or cubes as they are placed. D. Matching Existing Masonry: Match coursing, bonding, color, and texture of existing masonry. E. Wetting of Brick: Wet brick before laying if initial rate of absorption exceeds 30 g/30 sq. in. (30 g/194 sq. cm) per minute when tested per ASTM C 67. Allow units to absorb water so they are damp but not wet at time of laying. 3.3 TOLERANCES A. Dimensions and Locations of Elements: I. For dimensions in cross section or elevation do not vary by more than plus 1/2 inch (12 mm) or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm). 2. For location of elements in plan do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/2 inch (12 mm). 3. For location of elements in elevation do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm) in a story height or 1/2 inch (12 mm) total. B. Lines and Levels: I. For bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls do not vary from level by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 in), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum. 2. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 in), 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum. January 17, 2014 Big Red Barn Structural Improvements MAINTENANCE OF EXTERIOR MASONRY 042113 -10 3. For vertical lines and surfaces do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 in), 3/8 inch in 20 feet (9 mm in 6 in), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum. 4. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jainbs, reveals, and expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 in), 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum. 5. For lines and surfaces do not vary from straight by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), 3/8 inch in 20 feet (9 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum. 6. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 in), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum. 7. For faces of adjacent exposed masonry units, do not vary from flush alignment by more than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) except due to warpage of masonry units within tolerances specified for warpage of units. C. Joints: 1. For bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm), with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch (12 mm); do not vary from bed- joint thickness of adjacent courses by more than 1/8 inch (3 mm). 2. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm). Do not vary from adjacent bed-joint and head-joint thicknesses by more than 1/8 inch (3 mm). 3. For exposed bed joints and head joints of stacked bond, do not vary from a straight line by more than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) from one masonry unit to the next. 3.4 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING A. Lay hollow brick as follows: 1. With face shells fully bedded in mortar and with head joints of depth equal to bed joints. 2. With entire units, including areas under cells, fully bedded in mortar at starting course on footings. B. Lay solid masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush head joints. C. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness unless otherwise indicated. 3.5 REBUILDING OF FLUE LINERS A. General: Liners shall be bedded one on the other in a medium-duty, non-water-soluable calcium aluminate refractory mortar. Do not use Portland cement bonded mixtures. B. Joints shall be left smooth on inside face of flue liner. C. Where a chimney contains more than one flue, a separation of 4" of approved masonry construction shall be used between the flues. January 17, 2014 Big Red Barn Structural Improvements MAINTENANCE OF EXTERIOR MASONRY 042113 -11 D. Masonry shall be laid with full, push-filled head and bed mortar joints. E. Fireclay flue liners shall be separated from the chimney wall by a maximum of 4" air space. The air space shall not be fileld and only enough mortar used to make a good joint and hold the flue liner in place. 3.6 LINTELS A. Salvage, refurbish and reinstall steel lintels where indicated. B. Provide minimum bearing of 8 inches (200 mm) at each jamb unless otherwise indicated. 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage special inspectors to perform tests and inspections and prepare reports. Allow inspectors access to scaffolding and work areas, as needed to perform tests and inspections. Retesting of materials that fail to meet specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense. B. Inspections: Level I special inspections according to the "International Building Code." 1. Begin masonry construction only after inspectors have verified proportions of site- prepared mortar. C. Mortar Aggregate Ratio Test (Proportion Specification): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 780. 3.8 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement. B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and completely fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for sealant application, where indicated. C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints. D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows: 1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels. 2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of masonry. January 17, 2014 Big Red Barn Structural Improvements MAINTENANCE OF EXTERIOR MASONRY 042113-12 3. Protect adjacent stone and nonmasonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof masking tape. 4. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing surfaces thoroughly with clear water. 5. Clean brick by bucket-and-brush hand-cleaning method described in "BIA Technical Notes 20." 6. Clean masony with a proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's written instructions. 7. Clean concrete masony by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2A applicable to type of stain on exposed surfaces. 8. Clean stone trim to comply with stone supplier's written instructions. 9. Clean limestone units to comply with recommendations in ILI's "Indiana Limestone Handbook." 3.9 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL A. Salvageable Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials are Contractor's property. At completion of unit masonry work, remove from Project site. B. Waste Disposal as Fill Material: Dispose of clean masonry waste, including excess or soil- contaminated sand, waste mortar, and broken masony units, by crushing and mixing with fill material as fill is placed. 1. Crush masony waste to less than 4 inches (100 mm) in each dimension. 2. Mix masony waste with at least two parts of specified fill material for each part of masonry waste. Fill material is specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving." 3. Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within 18 inches (450 mm) of finished grade. C. Excess Masony Waste: Remove excess clean masory waste that cannot be used as fill, as described above, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property. END OF SECTION 042113 January 17, 2014 CORNELL SECTION 03 30 00 Ithaca, New York CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes cast-in-place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes, for the following: 1. Sills. 2. Pile Cap 3. Slab-on-Grade 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of the following: blended hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, ground granulated blast- furnace slag, and silica fume; subject to compliance with requirements. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments. 1. Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site. C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and placement. Include bar sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, bar arrangement, splices and laps, mechanical connections, tie spacing, hoop spacing, and supports for concrete reinforcement. D. Construction Joint Layout: Indicate proposed construction joints required to construct the structure. I. Location of construction joints is subject to approval of the Design Professional. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For manufacturer, and testing agency. BIG RED BARN STRUCTURAL CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-1 IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 CORNELL SECTION 03 30 00 Ithaca, New York CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE B. Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers: 1. Cementitious materials. 2. Admixtures. 3. Form materials and form-release agents. 4. Steel reinforcement and accessories. 5. Curing compounds. 6. Bonding agents. 7. Repair materials. C. Material Test Reports: For the following, from a qualified testing agency, indicating compliance with requirements: 1. Aggregates. Include service record data indicating absence of deleterious expansion of concrete due to alkali aggregate reactivity. D. Field quality-control reports. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment. I. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities." B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated. 1. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-1 or an equivalent certification program. 2. Personnel performing laboratory tests shall be ACI-certified Concrete Strength Testing Technician and Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician -Grade I. Testing Agency laboratory supervisor shall be an ACI-certified Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician - Grade II. C. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from single source, and obtain admixtures from single source from single manufacturer. D. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents: 1. ACI 301, "Specifications for Structural Concrete," Sections I through 5. 2. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials." E. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixtures. BIG RED BARN STRUCTURAL CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000-2 IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 CORNELL SECTION 03 30 00 Ithaca, New York CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE F. Mockups: Cast concrete sill formed-surface to demonstrate typical joints, surface finish, texture, tolerances, and standard of workmanship. 1. Build sill mockup approximately 6 linear ft. for formed surface in the location indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Design Professional. G. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Before submitting design mixtures, review concrete design mixture and examine procedures for ensuring quality of concrete materials. Require representatives of each entity directly concerned with cast-in-place concrete to attend, including the following: a. Contractor's superintendent. b. Independent testing agency responsible for concrete design mixtures. c. Ready-mix concrete manufacturer. d. Concrete subcontractor. e. Engineer-of-Record. f. Civil Section of Facilities Engineering g. University Project Management Team 2. Review special inspection and testing and inspecting agency procedures for field quality control, concrete finishes and finishing, cold- and hot-weather concreting procedures, curing procedures, forms and form removal limitations, shoring procedures, steel reinforcement installation, concrete repair procedures, and concrete protection. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Steel Reinforcement: Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and damage. Avoid damaging coatings on steel reinforcement. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 FORM-FACING MATERIALS A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints. 1. Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials. 2. Exterior-grade plywood panels, suitable for concrete forms, complying with DOC PS 1, and as follows: a. High-density overlay, Class I or better. b. Medium-density overlay, Class I or better; mill-release agent treated and edge sealed. c. Structural 1, B-B or better; mill oiled and edge sealed. d. B-B (Concrete Form), Class 1 or better; mill oiled and edge sealed. BIG RED BARN STRUCTURAL CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-3 IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 CORNELL SECTION 03 30 00 Ithaca, New York CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE B. Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch (19 by 19 mm), minimum. C. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces. 1. Formulate forn-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials. 2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed. B. Epoxy-Coated Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, epoxy coated, with less than 2 percent damaged coating in each 12-inch (300-mm) bar length. C. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185/A 185M, plain, fabricated from as- drawn steel wire into flat sheets. 2.3 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES A. Epoxy Repair Coating: Liquid, two-part, epoxy repair coating; compatible with epoxy coating on reinforcement and complying with ASTM A 775/A 775M. B. Dowel Bar Inserts: Two-piece system consisting of a dowel-bar and dowel-in manufactured from standard deformed rebar, free of external welding and machining. The splicer shall have an integral nailing flange and threaded with UNC or UN thread to a depth, at minimum, equal to the nominal thread diameter. The completed splice shall meet Type 2 tensile requirements of ACI 318 and shall develop 125% of the yield strength of the bar. Dowel Bar Inserts shall be the DBDI Splice System manufactured by Dayton Superior or approved equal. C. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice," of greater compressive strength than concrete and as follows: 1. For epoxy-coated reinforcement, use epoxy-coated or other dielectric-polymer-coated wire bar supports. 2.4 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and source, throughout Project: 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I, Supplement with the following: a. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618,Class F. BIG RED BARN STRUCTURAL CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000-4 IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 CORNELL SECTION 03 30 00 Ithaca, New York CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, Class 3S coarse aggregate or better, graded. Provide aggregates from a single source with documented service record data of at least 10 years' satisfactory service in similar applications and service conditions using similar aggregates and cementitious materials. 1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 1 inch (25 mm) nominal. 2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement. C. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M and potable. 2.5 ADMIXTURES A. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. B. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride. 1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A. 2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B. 3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D. 4. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F. 5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type G. 6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type 11. 2.6 CURING MATERIALS A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application to fresh concrete. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Axim Italcementi Group, Inc.; CATEXOL CimFilm. b. BASF Construction Chemicals -Building Systems; Confilm. c. ChemMasters; SprayFilm. d. Conspec by Dayton Superior; Aquafilm. e. Dayton Superior Corporation; Sure Film (J-74). f. Edoco by Dayton Superior; BurkeFilm. g. Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Eucobar. h. Kaufman Products, Inc.; Vapor-Aid. i. Lambert Corporation; LAMBCO Skin. j. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; E-CON. k. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; EVAPRE. 1. Metalcrete Industries; Waterhold. n. Nox-Crete Products Group; MONOFILM. n. Sika Corporation; SikaFilm. o. SpecChem, LLC; Spec Film. BIG RED BARN STRUCTURAL CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000-5 IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 CORNELL SECTION 03 30 00 Ithaca, New York CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE p. Symons by Dayton Superior; Finishing Aid. q. TK Products, Division of Sierra Corporation; TK-2120 TR1-FILM. r. Unitex; PRO-FILM. s. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Certi-Vex Envio Set. B. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. (305 g/sq. n) when dry. C. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet. D. Water: Potable. E. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C 1315, Type 1, Class A. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. BASF Construction Chemicals -Building Systems; Kure 1315. b. ChemMasters; Polyseal WB. c. Conspec by Dayton Superior; Sealcure 1315 WB. d. Edoco by Dayton Superior; Cureseal 1315 WB. e. Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Super Diamond Clear VOX; LusterSeal WB 300. f. Kaufman Products, Inc.; Sure Cure 25 Emulsion. g. Lambert Corporation; UV Safe Seal. h. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; Lumiseal WB Plus. i. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; Voconp-30. j. Metalcrete Industries; Metcure 30. k. Right Pointe; Right Sheen WB30. 1. Symons by Dayton Superior; Cure & Seal 31 Percent E. n. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Vexcon Starseal 1315. 2.7 RELATED MATERIALS A. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059/C 1059M, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene butadiene. B. Epoxy Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two-component epoxy resin, capable of humid curing and bonding to damp surfaces, of class suitable for application temperature and of grade to suit requirements, and as follows: 1. Types I and II, non-load bearing, for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to hardened concrete. 2.8 VAPOR RETARDERS A. Sheet Vapor Retarder: ASTM E 1745, Class A. Include manufacturer's recommended adhesive or pressure-sensitive tape. BIG RED BARN STRUCTURAL CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-6 IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 CORNELL SECTION 03 30 00 Ithaca, New York CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing, Inc.; Blackline 400. b. Fortifiber Building Systems Group; Moistop Ultra 10. c. Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co.; Florprufe 120. d. Insulation Solutions, Inc.; Viper VaporCheck 10. e. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; Perminator 10 mil. f. Raven Industries Inc.; Vapor Block 10. g. Reef Industries, Inc.; Griffolyn 10 mil Green. h. Stego Industries, LLC; Stego Wrap 10 mil Class A. B. Granular Fill: Clean mixture of crushed stone or crushed or uncrushed gravel; ASTM D 448, Size 57, with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch (37.5-mm) sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 8 (2.36-mm) sieve. 2.9 REPAIR MATERIALS A. Repair Underlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor elevations. 1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined in ASTM C 219. 2. Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and application. 3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch (3.2 to 6 mm) or coarse sand as reconunended by underlayment manufacturer. 4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 4000 psi at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109/C 109M. B. Repair Overlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) and that can be filled in over a scarified surface to match adjacent floor elevations. 1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined in ASTM C 219. 2. Primer: Product of topping manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and application. 3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch (3.2 to 6 mm) or coarse sand as recommended by topping manufacturer. 4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 4000 psi at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109/C 109M. 2.10 CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301. BIG RED BARN STRUCTURAL CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000-7 IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 CORNELL SECTION 03 30 00 Ithaca, New York CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mixture designs based on laboratory trial mixtures. B. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland cement in concrete as follows: 1. Fly Ash: 20 percent. C. Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.15 percent by weight of cement. D. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Use water-reducing, high-range water-reducing or plasticizing admixture in concrete, as required, for placement and workability. 2. Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions. 3. Use water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete and concrete with a water- cementitious materials ratio below 0.50. 4. Use corrosion-inhibiting admixture in concrete mixtures where indicated. 2.11 CONCRETE MIXTURES FOR BUILDING ELEMENTS A. Sills: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows: 1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 5000 psi (34.5 MPa) at 28 days. 2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.40. 3. Slump Limit: 4 inches (100 mm) for concrete with verified slump of 2 to 4 inches (50 to 100 mn) before adding high-range water-reducing admixture or plasticizing admixture, plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm). 4. Air Content: 6 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 1-inch (25-mm) nominal maximum aggregate size. B. Pile Caps: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows: 1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 5000 psi (34.5 MPa) at 28 days. 2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.48. 3. Slump Limit: 4 inches (100 mm) for concrete with verified slump of 2 to 4 inches (50 to 100 mm) before adding high-range water-reducing admixture or plasticizing admixture, plus or minus 1 inch (25 nun). 4. Air Content: Do not allow air content to exceed 3 percent. C. Slab-on-Grade: 1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 5000 psi (34.5 MPa) at 28 days. 2. Minimum Cementitious Materials Content: 470 lb/cu. yd. (279 kg/cu. in). 3. Slump Limit: 4 inches (100 mm), plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm). 4. Air Content: Do not allow air content of trowel-finished floors to exceed 3 percent. BIG RED BARN STRUCTURAL CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000-8 IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 CORNELL SECTION 03 30 00 Ithaca, New York CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 2.12 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice." 2.13 CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M, and furnish batch ticket information. 1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F (30 and 32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 FORMWORK A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 30 1, to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure can support such loads. B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 11 7. C. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347 as abrupt or gradual, as follows: 1. Class A, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) for smooth-formed finished surfaces. D. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar. E. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top fons for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical. 1. Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material. F. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds. G. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations. H. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete. I. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items. BIG RED BARN STRUCTURAL CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000-9 IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 CORNELL SECTION 03 30 00 Ithaca, New York CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE J. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and other debris just before placing concrete. K. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment. L. Coat contact surfaces of forms with forn-release agent, according to manufacturer's written instructions, before placing reinforcement. 3.2 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS A. General: Formwork for sills may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) for 24 hours after placing concrete. Concrete has to be hard enough to not be damaged by form-removal operations and curing and protection operations need to be maintained. B. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new form-release agent. C. When fonms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces unless approved by Design Professional. 3.3 VAPOR RETARDERS A. Sheet Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair sheet vapor retarder according to ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Lap joints 6 inches (150 mm) and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape. 3.4 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. General: Comply with CRS's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement. 1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete. B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that would reduce bond to concrete. C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars. 1. Weld reinforcing bars according to AWS DI .4/D 1 .4M, where indicated. D. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. BIG RED BARN STRUCTURAL CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00-10 IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 CORNELL SECTION 03 30 00 Ithaca, New York CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE E. Epoxy-Coated Reinforcement: Repair cut and damaged epoxy coatings with epoxy repair coating according to ASTM D 3963/D 3963M. Use epoxy-coated steel wire ties to fasten epoxy-coated steel reinforcement. 3.5 JOINTS A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Design Professional. 1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construction joints unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip placements of floors and slabs. 2. Form keyed joints as indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) into concrete. 3. Space vertical joints in walls as indicated. 4. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces. 3.6 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of fornnwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required inspections have been performed. B. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement unless approved by Design Professional. C. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation. 1. Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth to not exceed formwork design pressures and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. 2. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301. 3. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at unifonuly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches (150 mm) into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mixture constituents to segregate. D. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete. 1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners. 2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement. BIG RED BARN STRUCTURAL CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-11 IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 CORNELL SECTION 03 30 00 Ithaca, New York CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations. 4. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. 5. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured surface plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations. E. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures. 1. When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) for three successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the temperature range required by ACI 301. 2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials. 3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifr-eeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs. F. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows: I. Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F (32 deg C) at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option. 2. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas. 3.7 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES A. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by forn-facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities. 1. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view. 3.8 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures after work of other trades is in place unless otherwise indicated. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with in- place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to complete the Work. BIG RED BARN STRUCTURAL CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000-12 IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 CORNELL SECTION 03 30 00 Ithaca, New York CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 3.9 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 301 for hot-weather protection during curing. B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h (1 kg/sq. m x h) before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing. C. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing for the remainder of the curing period. D. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces. E. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods: 1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials: a. Water. b. Continuous water-fog spray. c. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete surfaces and edges with 12-inch (300-mm) lap over adjacent absorptive covers. 2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches (300 mm), and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape. a. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings. b. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive penetrating liquid floor treatments. c. Cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings with either a moisture-retaining cover or a curing compound that the manufacturer certifies will not interfere with bonding of floor covering used on Project. 3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. a. Removal: After curing period has elapsed, remove curing compound without damaging concrete surfaces by method recommended by curing compound BIG RED BARN STRUCTURAL CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000-13 IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 CORNELL SECTION 03 30 00 Ithaca, New York CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE manufacturer[ unless manufacturer certifies curing compound will not interfere with bonding of floor covering used on Project]. 4. Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. 3.10 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Design Professional. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Design Professional's approval. B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of one part portland cement to two and one-half parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve, using only enough water for handling and placing. C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. 1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than 1/2 inch (13 mm) in any dimension to solid concrete. Limit cut depth to 3/4 inch (19 mm). Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat holes and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent. 2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface. 3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and structural performance as determined by Design Professional. D. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Design Professionals approval. 3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage a special inspector and qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. B. Inspections: 1. Steel reinforcement placement. BIG RED BARN STRUCTURAL CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000-14 IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 CORNELL SECTION 03 30 00 Ithaca, New York CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 2. Verification of use of required design mixture. 3. Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing. 4. Curing procedures and maintenance of curing temperature. 5. Verification of concrete strength. C. Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements: 1. Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. 2. Testing Frequency: Obtain at least one composite sample for each 100 cu. yd. (76 cu. m) or fraction thereof of each concrete mixture placed each day. a. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive-strength tests for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or fi-om each batch if fewer than five are used. 3. Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change. 4. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method, for nornal-weight concrete; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. 5. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064/C 1064M; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) and below and when 80 deg F (27 deg C) and above, and one test for each composite sample. 6. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 3 1M. a. Cast and laboratory cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample. b. Cast and field cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample. 7. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; test one set of two laboratory-cured specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days. a. Test one set of two field-cured specimens at 7 days, one set of two specimens at 28 days, and one set of two specimens at 56 days. b. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from a set of two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age indicated. 8. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory- cured cylinders, Contractor shall evaluate operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing in-place concrete. 9. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any three consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi (3.4 MPa). 10. Test results shall be reported in writing to Design Professional, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall BIG RED BARN STRUCTURAL CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000-15 IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 CORNELL SECTION 03 30 00 Ithaca, New York CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests. 11. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Design Professional but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete. 12. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Design Professional. Testing and inspecting agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42/C 42M or by other methods as directed by Design Professional. 13. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. 14. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate do not comply with the Contract Documents. END OF SECTION 033000 BIG RED BARN STRUCTURAL CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000-16 IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 CORNELL SECTION 01 11 00 Ithaca, New York SUMMARY OF WORK 1.1 WORK UNDER THIS CONTRACT GENERAL A. Work to be Done 1. Timber Sill Replacement: Remove existing rotted timber sill at base of two story barn structure (on west, south, and east elevations) and replace with a new reinforced concrete sill. This work shall be done in accordance with the suggested shoring/sequencing on the construction drawings, unless an alternative approach is submitted, reviewed, and approved. 2. Shear Wall Construction: Remove existing board and batten cladding, wood furring and insulation on two-story barn structure walls. Provide new blocking, connection hardware, and wall studs as required for new shear walls. Existing electrical conduit and wiring shall be removed and reinstalled as required for new stud installation. Provide new insulation, structural plywood sheathing, and light gage metal strapping for shear walls. Provide new building wrap, wood furring, and flashings. Provide new board and batten cladding and wood trim that is back primed, painted, and laid out in a matching pattern to the existing cladding. Interior wall finishes are to remain during construction, and shall be protected. 3. Mezzanine Diaphragm Construction (at underside of Mezzanine): Carefully remove/lower the existing sprinkler system to allow for the installation of the new work. Carefully remove and salvage the existing wood board ceiling finish in the area exposed to view. Remove ceiling finishes in the bathroom. Provide new wood blocking and connection hardware required for new structural diaphragm. Provide new structural plywood sheathing and light gauge metal strapping for new structural diaphragm. Reinstall salvaged wood board ceiling -repair as needed -contractor to replace any damaged boards and provide finish to match existing. Provide new ceiling finishes in bathroom to match existing. Reinstall existing sprinkler system. 4. Roof Construction: Remove existing asphalt roof shingles, plywood sheathing, fiber board, and roof deck boards. Remove existing insulation and prefabricated vent baffles between rafters. Existing roof framing, polyethylene sheet and finished ceiling to remain -protect these items and interior space during construction. Provide new blocking and connection hardware as required for the new structural roof diaphragm. Notch the tops of the existing rafters as required for existing electrical conduit. Set existing electrical conduit in notches such that it does not interfere with the new plywood installation. Patch and seal the existing polyethylene sheet to create a continuous vapor barrier and install new insulation. Provide new structural plywood sheathing, blocking, and light age metal strapping for roof diaphragm. Provide vented plywood sheathing and asphalt shingle roof. 5. North Braced Frame Construction: Shore existing 2 nd story timber truss. Remove existing posts, partition walls, and floor construction as required to facilitate new foundation construction. Provide new micropiles and pile cap foundation. Protect interior finishes during foundation construction. Provide new steel braced frame and connect to existing 2 nd story timber truss. Provide new slab-on-grade construction and finished floor construction to match existing. Provide newly configured partition walls in this vicinity as shown on the construction drawings, providing new electrical switches and outlets to match existing, and associated wiring. BIG RED BARN STRUCTURAL SUMMARY OF WORK 01 11 00-1 IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 B. The Scope of the Work 1. The scope of the WORK in all SECTIONS of this Specification shall consist of the furnishing of all labor, materials, equipment and appliances and the performance of the Work required by the Contract Documents and/or by the conditions at the site, joining all parts of this Work with itself and the Work of others to form a complete, functioning entity. 2. Items not specifically mentioned in the Specifications or shown on the drawings, but which are inherently necessary to make a complete working installation, shall be included. C. Intent of Contract Documents 1 .The use of the word (or words): a. "provide" means furnish, install and connect ready for use; b. "furnish" means supply and deliver to job or where directed; c. "as approved" or "approved" means Architect's or Owner's approval; d. "as directed" means Owner's direction or instruction; e. "to do", "provide", "furnish", "install", etc., in these Specifications or on Drawings are directions given to the Contractor; f. "concealed" means Work installed in pipe shafts, chases or recesses, behind furred walls, above ceilings, either permanent or removable; g. "exposed" means all Work not identified as concealed. 2. Notes or instructions shown on any one Drawing, apply where applicable, to all other Drawings. 3. Reference to a technical society, institution, association or governmental authority is in accordance with following abbreviations: a. ACI American Concrete Institution b. AGA American Gas Association c. AGCA Associated General Contractors of America, Inc. d. AIA American Institute of Architects e. AISC American Institute of Steel Construction f. AMCA Air Moving and Conditioning Associates, Inc. g. ANSI American National Standards Institute h. ART Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute i. ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers, Inc. j. ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers k. ASTM American Society for Testing Materials 1. AWSC American Welding Society Code n. AWWA American Water Works Association n. IBR Institute of Boiler & Radiation Manufacturers o. IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers p. NYBFU New York Board of Fire Underwriters BAG RED BARN SUMMARY OF WORK 0111 00-2 STRUCTURAL IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 q. NEC National Electric Code r. NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers' Association s. NFPA National Fire Protection Association t. SBI Steel Boiler Institute u. SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association v. UFPO Underground Facilities Protective Organization w. UL Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. 4. All references to codes, specifications and standards referred to in the Specification Sections and on the Drawings shall mean, and are intended to be, the latest edition, amendment and/or revision of such reference standard in effect as of the date of these Contract Documents. 5. Install All Work in Compliance with: a. Building Code of New York State b. National Electric Code c. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA). d. Life Safety Code NFPA 101. e. All local ordinances f. Plans and Specifications in excess of code requirements and not contrary to same. D. Use of the Site 1 .The Contractor shall carry on the Work in the manner which will cause the least interruption to pedestrian and vehicular traffic and permit access of emergency vehicles at all times. 2. The Work shall be scheduled and performed in such a manner that at least one lane of traffic will be maintained on all public streets. Two flag persons, equipped with radio communication devices, must be provided for any activity blocking a traffic lane. One lane of traffic must be maintained at all times. Where traffic must cross open trenches, the Contractor shall provide suitable bridges and railings; including pedestrian bridges. 3. The Contractor shall post flag persons and suitable signs indicating that construction operations are under way and other warning signs as may be required. 4. The Contractor shall safeguard the use by the public and Owner of all adjacent highways, roadways and footpaths, and shall conform to all laws and regulations concerning the use thereof, especially limitations on traffic and the movement of heavy equipment. Access to the site for delivery of construction materials and/or equipment shall be made only at the locations shown in the Contract Documents or approved by the Owner's Representative. 5. The Contractor shall immediately remove dirt and debris which may collect on permanent roadways due to the Work. BIG RED BARN SUMMARY OF WORK 01 11 00-3 STRUCTURAL IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 6. The Contractor shall limit the extent of its activities to that area of the site defined on the Contract Drawings as being within the Contract Limit Lines. 7. For that portion of the Work required under this Contract which must be performed in other than the defined areas, including operations involving delivery and removal of materials, the Contractor shall schedule and coordinate its activities through the Owner's Representative, to meet the approval of the Owner and minimize disruption of the normal scheduled activities of the occupants of adjacent spaces. 8. All portions of the site, including the staging area and those areas affected by the work, shall be returned to their original condition after completion of Work. Such repair work shall include reseeding, if required, and shall be included in the Contractor's Guaranty of Work. 9. Routes to and from the location of the Work shall be as indicated in the Contract or as directed by the Owner's Representative. Temporary roadways shall be closed only with prior approval of the Owner's Representative. E. Parking 1. The Owner will designate an area for Contractor parking. The Contractor shall make all arrangements, and bear the cost, for transportation from the designated parking area to the construction site as necessary. 2. It should be noted that there is a fee for all parking on the Cornell University campus. The Contractor is responsible for the payment for all parking costs imposed by the Owner. The Contractor should contact the Project Manager (Brian C. Watson, bcw32Lcomell.edu) for additional information. 3. Contractor shall cooperate with Cornell Police and/or other police authorities having jurisdiction, as follows: a. Ensure parking by all employees of the Contractor, subcontractors, material suppliers, and others connected with this project only within construction fence or the designated parking area. b. Prohibit employees from parking in any other areas, roads, streets, grounds, etc. c. Discharge any employee refusing to comply with these requirements. d. Ensure proper transportation of personnel between the designated parking area and the construction site. 4. The Contractor shall remove from the parking area all temporary trailers, rubbish, unused materials, and other materials belonging to the Contractor or used under the Contractor's direction during construction or impairing the use or appearance of the property and shall restore such areas affected by the work to their original condition, and, in the event of its failure to do so, the same shall be removed by the Owner at the expense of the Contractor, and the Contractor shall be liable therefore. BIG RED BARN SUMMARY OF WORK 01 1100-4 STRUCTURAL IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 F. Changeovers and Continuity of Services 1. Make all changeovers, tie-ins and removals, etc., of any part of the Work that would affect the continuity of operation of the adjacent areas services at approved times that will not interfere with the Owner's operations. Secure approval of Owner before proceeding. 2. Make all necessary temporary connections required to permit operation of the building services and/or equipment. Remove the connections after need has ceased. 3. The Contractor may be permitted to make changeovers during normal working hours at the Owner's discretion. Should the Contractor perfon this Work outside of normal working hours, no extra payment will be made for resulting overtime expenses. 4. When connecting new facilities do not shut off any existing Mechanical/Electrical facilities or services without prior written approval of Owner's Representative. 5. The Contractor shall not, except in an emergency condition, shutdown any utility without the express permission of the Owner's Representative. Major shutdowns of utilities will be performed by Cornell University to enable Contractor to perfonn required work. Major shutdowns shall be defined as those affecting life safety or which are outside the project site limits. 6. Maintain domestic water and firewater in service at all times. No service may be out for more than twenty-four (24) hours without a written plan approved by the Cornell University Fire Marshall. Please see specific information regarding life safety system shutdowns in Section 015000 Item 2.3 Temporary Fire Protection. Otherwise, maintain firewater flow capability (hose, if necessary) to all buildings and coordinate with Cornell Utilities, Cornell Environmental Health and Safety (EH&S), and City of Ithaca Fire Department. All shutdowns to be scheduled a minimum of seven (7) calendar days in advance and requests shall be submitted in writing to the Owner's Representative. 7. IN THE EVENT OF AN EMERGENCY WHERE THE OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE IS NOT AVAILABLE, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL DIAL 911 IMMEDIATELY. G. Obstacles, Interference and Coordination 1. General a. Plans show general design arrangement. Install work substantially as indicated and verify exact location and elevations; DO NOT SCALE PLANS. BIG RED BARN SUMMARY OF WORK 01 11 00-5 STRUCTURAL IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 b. Due to small scale of Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fitting, changes in elevations, interferences, etc. Make necessary changes in the Work, equipment locations, etc., after notification to the Owner's Representative and Architect. Obtain approval from same, as part of Contract, to accommodate work to obstacles and interferences encountered. c. Obtain written approval for all major changes before installing. If requested, submit at least five (5) copies of drawings, detailing all such deviations or changes. d. Exposed to view mechanical units, ductwork, conduit, pipes or other building equipment are essential parts of the artistic effect of the building design and shall be installed in locations as shown on the drawings. Conformance to given dimensions and alignments with the structural system, walls, openings, indicated centerlines are a requirement of the Contract and the Contractor shall familiarize himself with the critical nature of proper placement of these items. The Contractor shall notify the Architect of conflicts which would cause such equipment to be installed in locations other than as indicated on the Drawings. The Contractor shall not proceed with the installation of exposed to view mechanical units, ductwork, conduit, pipes, etc. until all conflicts have been identified by the Contractor and resolutions to conflicts approved by the Architect. 2. Interference a. Install work so that all items are operable and serviceable and avoid interfering with removal of rails, filters, belt guards and/or operation of doors, etc. Provide easy and safe access to valves, controllers, motor starters and other equipment requiring frequent attention. H. Equipment Arrangements 1 .Since all equipment of equal capacity is not necessarily of same arrangement, size of construction, these Plans are prepared on basis of one manufacturer as "design equipment", even though other manufacturers' names are mentioned. 2. If Contractor elects to use specified equipment other than "design equipment" which differs in arrangement, size, etc., the Contractor does so subject to following conditions: a. Submit detailed drawings indicating proposed installations of equipment and showing maintenance and service space required. b. If revised arrangement meets approval, make all required changes in the work of all trades, including but not limited to louvers, panels, structural supports, pads, etc. at no increase in Contract. Provide larger motors and any additional control devices, valves, fittings and other miscellaneous equipment required for proper operation of revised layout, and assume responsibility for proper location of roughing in and connections by other trades. BIG RED BARN SUMMARY OF WORK 01 11 00-6 STRUCTURAL IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 c. If revised arrangement does not meet approval because of increase in pressure loss, possibility of increase in noise, lack of space or headroom, insufficient clearance for removal of parts, or for any other reason, provide equipment which conforms to Contract Drawings and Specifications. I. Supports 1. The Contractor shall include cost of all materials and labor necessary to provide all required supports, beams, angles, hangers, rods, bases, braces, etc. to properly support the Contract Work. All supports, etc. shall meet the approval of the Architect. J. Existing Equipment, Materials, Fixtures, Etc. 1. Where existing equipment, piping, fittings, etc. are to be removed, Contractor shall submit complete list to Owner. Carefully remove and salvage all items that Owner wishes to retain shall be delivered to building storage where directed by Owner. Items that Owner does not wish to retain shall be removed from site and legally disposed of. K. Examination of Premises, Drawings, Etc. 1. Before Submitting Proposal a. Examine all Drawings and Specifications relating to Work of all trades to determine scope and relation to other work. b. Examine all existing conditions affecting compliance with Plans and Specifications, by visiting site and/or building. c. Ascertain access to site, available storage and delivery facilities. 2. Before Commencing Work on Any Phase or in any Area a. Verify all governing dimensions at site and/or building. b. Inspect all adjacent work. 3. Tender of Proposal Confirms Agreement a. All items and conditions referred to herein and/or indicated on accompanying Drawings. b. No consideration, additional monies or time extensions will be granted for alleged misunderstanding. PART 2 -PRODUCTS -NOT USED PART 3 -EXECUTION -NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 11 00*** BIG RED BARN SUMMARY OF WORK 01 11 00-7 STRUCTURAL IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 CORNELL SECTION 01 22 00 Ithaca, New York UNIT PRICING 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. This Section describes Unit Pricing requested by the Owner. B. The Specification Section containing the pertinent requirements of materials and methods to achieve the Work described herein. 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF REQUIREMENTS A. Definition: Unit price is an amount proposed by bidders, stated on the Bid Form, as a price per unit of measurement for materials or services added to or deducted from the Contract Sum by appropriate modification, if estimated quantities of Work required by the Contract Documents are increased or decreased. B. Procedures: All unit prices include the installation or omission, complete for each item, together with all work in connection therewith and shall include all shoring, bracing, dewatering and other incidental work. Unit prices shall be the total compensation for the item and includes all overhead, profit and any other charges of the Contractor and/or subcontractor in connection therewith. 1.2 SCHEDULE OF UNIT PRICES A. Unit Price I Remove existing uncovered rotted structural (dimensional) wood framing and replace in kind with new dimensional framing materials as directed in the field. Unit price is based PER BOARD FOOT of replacement lumber. B. Unit Price 2 Additional inicropile installation to account for a variance between the installed micropile length and the bid length specified on the contract drawings. Unit price is based PER FOOT of installed micropile. PART 2 -PRODUCTS -NOT USED PART 3 -EXECUTION -NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 22 00*** BIG RED BARN STRUCTURAL UNIT PRICING 01 22 00-1 IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 CORNELL SECTION 01 23 00 Ithaca, New York ALTERNATES 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. This Section describes the changes to be made under each Alternative. B. The Specification Section containing the pertinent requirements of materials and methods to achieve the Work described herein. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF REQUIREMENTS A. Definition: An alternate is an amount proposed by Bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain items that may be added to or deducted from the Base Bid amount if the Owner decides to accept a corresponding change in either the amount of construction to be completed, or in the product, materials, equipment, systems or installation methods described in the Contract Documents. B. Coordination: Coordinate related Work and modify or adjust adjacent Work as necessary to ensure that Work affected by each accepted alternate is complete and fully integrated into the Project. C. Notification: Immediately following Contract award, prepare and distribute to each party involved, notification of the status of each alternate. Indicate whether alternates have been accepted, rejected or deferred for consideration at a later date. Include a complete description of negotiated modifications to alternates. D. Schedule: A "Schedule of Alternates" is included at the end of this Section. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects or similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not mentioned as part of the alternate. 1.3 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES A. ALTERNATE NO. 1 Install a new snow retention system as shown on drawing SlA and detail F/S12. B. ALTERNATE NO. 2 Provide additional window restoration work as noted on drawing SIA -the second paragraph under WINDOW AND DOOR SCOPE. PART 2 -PRODUCTS -NOT USED PART 3 -EXECUTION -NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 23 00*** BIG RED BARN STRUCTURAL ALTERNATES 01 23 00-1 IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 CORNELL SECTION 01 25 00 Ithaca, New York SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS 1.1 GENERAL A. The Contractor shall furnish and install the products specified, under the options and conditions for substitutions stated in this Section. 1.2 PRODUCTS LIST A. Within fifteen (15) days after the award of Contract, submit to the Architect a complete list of products which are proposed for installation. B. Tabulate the products by listing under each specification section title and number. C. For products specified only by reference standards, list for each such product: 1. Name and address of the manufacturer. 2. Trade name. 3. Model or catalog designation. 4. Manufacturer's data: a. Reference standards. b. Performance test data. 1.3 CONTRACTOR'S OPTIONS A. For products specified only by reference standard, select any product meeting that standard, by any manufacturer. B. For products specified by naming several products or manufacturers, select any one of products and manufacturers named. C. For products specified by naming one or more products or manufacturers and stating "or equal", the Contractor shall submit a request as for substitutions, for any product or manufacturer not specifically named. Such substitution shall have been listed on Bid Form as required in Instructions to Bidders. If not so listed, no substitution will be allowed. D. For products specified by naming only one product and manufacturer, no option and no substitution will be considered unless listed on the Bid Form as provided in the Instructions to Bidders. 1.4 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Submit a separate request for each substitution. Support each request with: 1. Completed "Data for Evaluation of Materials, Products, and Systems" in an approved format. BIG RED BARN SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS 01 2500-1 STRUCTURAL IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 2. Complete data substantiating compliance of the proposed substitution with requirements stated in Contract Documents: a. Product identification, including manufacturer's name and address. b. Manufacturer's literature; identify: 1) Product description. 2) Reference standards. 3) Performance and test data. c. Samples, as applicable. d. Name and address of similar projects on which product has been used, and the date of each installation. 3. An itemized comparison of the proposed substitution with the product specified listing any variations. 4. Data relating to any changes in the construction schedule. 5. The effect of the substitution on each separate contract of the Project. 6. List any changes required in other work or projects. 7. Designate any required license fees or royalties. 8. Designate availability of maintenance services, and source of replacement materials. B. Substitutions shall not result in additions to the Contract Sum. C. Substitutions will not be considered as having been accepted when: 1. They are indicated or implied on shop drawings or product data submittals without a fonnal request from the Contractor. 2. They are requested by a subcontractor or supplier. 3. The acceptance will require substantial revision of Contract Documents. D. Substitute products shall not be ordered or installed without written acceptance of the Owner. E. The Owner and the Aichitect shall be the sole judges of the acceptability of a proposed substitution. BIG RED BARN SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS 01 25 00-2 STRUCTURAL January 17, 2014 IMPROVEMENTS 1.5 CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATION A. In making a formal request for a substitution the Contractor represents that: 1. The Contractor has personally investigated the proposed product and has determined that it is equal to or superior in all respects to that specified. 2. The Contractor will provide the same warranties or bonds for the substitution as for the product specified. 3. The Contractor will coordinate the installation of an accepted substitution into the Work, and will make such changes as may be required for the Work to be complete in all respects. 4. The Contractor waives all claims for additional costs related to the substitution which may subsequently become apparent. 1.6 ARCHITECT'S DUTIES A. Review Contractor's requests for substitutions with reasonable promptness. B. Transmit evaluations and recommendations to the Owner, so that the Owner can notify the Contractor of the decision for acceptance or rejection of the request for substitution. PART 2 -PRODUCTS -NOT USED PART 3 -EXECUTION -NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 25 00?** BIG RED BARN SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS 01 25 00-3 STRUCTURAL January 17, 2014 IMPROVEMENTS CORNELL SECTION 01 31 19 Ithaca, New York PROJECT MEETINGS 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The Owner will schedule and administer pre-construction meeting, weekly progress meetings, and specially called meetings throughout the progress of the work. 1. Prepare agenda for meetings. 2. Distribute written notice of each meeting four days in advance of meeting date. 3. Make physical arrangements for meetings. 4. Preside at meetings. 5. Record the minutes; include all significant proceedings and decisions. 6. Duplicate and distribute copies of minutes after each meeting. a. To all participants in the meeting. b. To all parties affected by decisions made at the meeting. c. To the Architect. B. Representatives of Contractor, subcontractors and suppliers attending the meetings shall be qualified and authorized to act on behalf of the entity each represents. 1.2 PRE-CONSTRUCTION MEETING A. Schedule at least fifteen (15) days after date of Notice to Proceed. B. Location: A central site, convenient for all parties. C. Attendance: 1. Owner's Representatives 2. Architect and its professional consultants 3. Major Subcontractors 4. Major suppliers 5. Safety Representatives for the Owner and Contractor BIG RED BARN PROJECT MEETINGS 01 31 19-1 STRUCTURAL IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 D. Minimum Agendum: 1. Distribution and discussion of: a. List of major subcontractors and suppliers b. Projected Construction Schedules 2. Critical work sequencing 3. Major equipment deliveries and priorities 4. Project Coordination a. Designation of responsible personnel 5. Procedures and processing of: a. Field decisions b. Proposal requests c. Submittals d. Change Orders e. Applications for Payment f. Requests for Information g. Daily Reports 6. Adequacy of distribution of Contract Documents 7. Procedures for maintaining Record Documents 8. Use of premises: a. Office, work and storage areas b. Owner's requirements c. Job site personnel conduct d. Building access and security 9. Temporary facilities, controls and construction aids 10. Temporary utilities BIG RED BARN STRUCTURAL PROJECT MEETINGS 01 31 19-2 IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 11. Safety and first-aid procedures a. Site specific safety plan 12. Security procedures 13. Housekeeping procedures 14. Affirmative Action Plan and Reporting requirements 1.3 PROGRESS MEETINGS A. Schedule regular periodic meetings on the site, not less than once every two weeks throughout the Construction period. B. Attendance: 1. Architect 2. Architect's professional consultants when, in the opinion of the Owner, needed 3. General Contractor, including Site Superintendent 4. Owner's Representatives 5. Subcontractors as appropriate to the agenda 6. Suppliers as appropriate to the agenda 7. Safety Representative C. Minimum Agendum: 1. Review, approval of minutes of previous meeting 2. Review percentage of work to be in place by next meeting by individual trades. 3. Review of work progress since previous meeting. 4. Field observations, problems, and conflicts. 5. Problems which impede Construction Schedule. 6. Review of off-site fabrication, delivery schedules. 7. Corrective measures and procedures to regain projected schedule. 8. Revisions to Construction Schedule. 9. Planned progress and schedule, during succeeding work period. BIG RED BARN STRUCTURAL PROJECT MEETINGS 01 31 19-3 IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 10. Coordination of schedules 11. Review submittal schedules; expedite as required. 12. Maintenance of quality standards 13. Review status of all issued proposal requests and change orders. 14. Review proposed changes for: a. Effect on Construction Schedule and on completion date. b. Effect on other contracts of the Project. 15. Other business D. All decisions, instructions, and interpretations given by the Architect/Engineer or its representative at these meetings shall be binding and conclusive on the Contractor. PART 2 -PRODUCTS -NOT USED PART 3 -EXECUTION -NOT USED ****END OF SECTION 01 31 19*** BIG RED BARN STRUCTURAL PROJECT MEETINGS 01 31 19-4 IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 CORNELL SECTION 01 32 16 Ithaca, New York CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES 1.1 GENERAL A. The Contractor shall, within fifteen (15) days after award of the Contract, prepare and submit to the Owner estimated construction progress schedules for the entire Work, with sub-schedules of related activities which are essential to the progress of the Work. B. Conferences will be held with the Architect, Owner and Contractor at the start of the project to agree mutually on a progress schedule which must be diligently followed. C. Submit revised progress schedules periodically and when requested to do so by Owner. D. Submit to Owner and Architect a cash flow projection in accordance with Schedule of Values. E. Submit electronic versions of all schedules, including updates, as well as all back-up to the submitted schedules. 1.2 FORM OF SCHEDULES A. Prepare Network Analysis system, or prepare schedules in the form of a horizontal bar chart. 1. Provide separate horizontal bar for each trade or operation. 2. Horizontal time scale: Identify the first work day of each week. 3. Scale and spacing: To allow space for notations and future revisions. B. Format of listings: The chronological order of the start of each item of work. C. Identification of listings: By specification section numbers. 1.3 CONTENT OF SCHEDULES A. Construction Progress Schedule: 1. Show the complete sequence of construction by activity. 2. Show the dates for the beginning, and completion of, each major element of construction. Specifically list: a. Site mobilization b. Shoring/Sill Replacement by section -each section identified with a duration c. Structural demolition and re-framing -walls -by section d. Structural demolition and re-framing -mezzanine e. Structural demolition and re-framing -roof BIG RED BARN CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES 01 32 16-1 STRUCTURAL IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 f. Roofing operations g. Micro-piling installation h. Interior trims/patching/refinishing i. Exterior trims/patching/refinishing j. Shutdowns/tie-ins/reinstallation of systems/testing k. Punchlist and closeouts 3. Show projected percentages of completion for each item, as of the first day of each month. 4. Show estimated dates for the beginning and completion of work which must be completed by or coordinated with the Owner such as hazardous materials abatement, moving, training and other such items as they are identified. B. Submittals Schedule for Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples: Confer with the Architect and agree on all elements of the Submittals Schedule. The schedule will be based on the understanding that minimum turn-around time in the Architect's office is ten (10) working days. Some submittals or groups of submittals may take longer to review. Submittals which do not conform to the agreed schedule may be subject to delays in processing. Show: 1. The dates for Contractor's submittals. 2. The dates reviewed submittals will be required from the Architect. 3. Confirmed lead time for manufacturing, production, fabrication and shipment to the project site of all materials which have an impact on the critical path of the Project's construction schedule. 1.4 PROGRESS REVISIONS A. Indicate progress of each activity to date of submission. B. Show changes occurring since previous submission of schedule: 1. Major changes in scope 2. Activities modified since previous submission 3. Revised projections of progress and completion 4. Other identifiable changes C. Provide a narrative report as needed to define: 1. Problem areas, anticipated delays, and the impact on the schedule. BIG RED BARN CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES 01 32 16-2 STRUCTURAL IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 2. Corrective action recommended, and its effect. 3. The effect of changes on schedules of other prime contractors. 1.5 SUBMISSIONS A. Submit initial Construction Progress Schedules within fifteen (15) calendar days after award of Contract. 1. Owner will review schedules and return review copy within ten (10) days after receipt. 2. If required, resubmit within seven (7) days after return of review copy. B. Submit progress revision schedules to accompany each application for payment. C. Submit Submittals Schedule within thirty (30) calendar days after date of commencement of work. D. Submit one reproducible transparency and one opaque reproduction. 1.6 DISTRIBUTION A. Distribute copies of the reviewed schedules to: I. Job site file 2. Subcontractors 3. Other concerned parties B. Instruct recipients to report to the Contractor, in writing, any problems anticipated by the projections of the schedule. 1.7 STAND-DOWN AND RESTRICTED WORK DATES Not Applicable to this project. Please refer to Section 01 32 16 Construction Schedules for more information regarding scheduling. Note: Normal work hours are 7:00 AM-dusk Monday-Saturday except during above noted restrictions. This means that Contractor shall not permit any noise generating activities that could disturb residents to take place outside of these hours. Should any conditions necessitate work to extend beyond these hours -Contractor may submit a detailed written request with reasonable advance notice to Cornell. Cornell (at its sole discretion) may issue a written relaxation of the above but Contractor is advised never to assume that it will be granted. PART 2 -PRODUCTS -NOT USED PART 3 -EXECUTION -NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 32 16*** BIG RED BARN CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES 01 32 16-3 STRUCTURAL IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 CORNELL SECTION 01 32 33 Ithaca, New York PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The Contractor shall provide existing condition photographs taken before commencement of Work. These existing condition photos will be used to verify that all work required to restore existing conditions has been completed. B. Progress photographs shall be taken periodically (weekly at a minimum) during progress of the Work, and final photographs upon completion and full occupancy of the building. C. Additional photographs shall be taken as needed to document all unforeseen conditions that should arise and be uncovered to document conditions found. These photographs will be used as backup for Unit Pricing changes and other change proposals. PART 2 PRODUCTS -NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PROGRESS PHOTOGRAPHS A. During the progress of the Work and until completion of construction, Contractor shall provide weekly, digital photographs in electronic format, for each of eight to ten different vantage points, both exterior and interior, as directed by Owner. The Contractor shall submit all photographs in electronic format to the Owner, no hard copies are required. B. Each digital photograph shall be dated, numbered and identified by project title, names of Contractor, Engineer, Owner, and Photographer, with a description of location and subject of photograph. C. The Contractor shall compile all photographs sent to the Owner throughout the Work in CD format and submit to the Owner prior to final payment. ***END OF SECTION 01 32 33*** BIG RED BARN PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 013233-1 STRUCTURAL IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 CORNELL SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 1.1 GENERAL A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submittals, including the following: 1. Shop Drawings 2. Product Data 3. Samples 4. Quality Assurance and Quality Control Submittals B. Designate in the construction schedule, or in a separate Submittals Schedule, the dates for submission and the dates reviewed Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples will be needed. 1.2 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Drawings shall be newly prepared information drawn accurately to scale by skilled draftsmen and presented in a clear and thorough manner. 1. Highlight, encircle, or otherwise indicate deviations from Contract Documents. 2. Do not reproduce Contract Documents or copy standard information as basis of Shop Drawings. 3. Standard information prepared without specific reference to Project is not Shop Drawing. B. Shop Drawings include fabrication and installation Drawings, setting diagrams, schedules, patterns, templates and similar Drawings. Include the following information: 1. Dimensions. 2. Identification of products and materials included by sheet and detail number. 3. Compliance with specified standards. 4. Notation of coordination requirements. 5. Notation of dimensions established by field measurements. 6. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns and similar full-size Drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8 2 by 11 inches but no larger than 36 by 48 inches. BIG RED BARN STRUCTURAL SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-1 IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 7. Submittal: All submittals for this project are encouraged to be sent in electronic format (PDF or other format allowing the architect to make comments). Should hard copies be used, submit four (4) blue or black line print for Architect's review. Architect will return two (2) marked up prints back to the contractor. Contractor shall save one (1) final approved set as a "Record Document". 1.3 PRODUCT DATA A. Product Data includes brochures, diagrams, standard schedules, performance charts, and instructions that illustrate physical size, appearance and other characteristics of materials and equipment. B. Collect Product Data into a single submittal for each element of construction or system. 1. Clearly mark each copy to show applicable choices and options. 2. Show performance characteristics and capacities. 3. Show dimensions and clearances required. 4. Show wiring or piping diagrams and controls. 5. Where printed Product Data includes infomnation on products that are not required, eliminate or mark through information that does not apply. 6. Supplement standard information to provide information specifically applicable to the Work. 7. Preliminary Submittal: Submit single copy of Product Data where selection of options by Architect is required. 8. Submittals: Submit four (4) sets of Product Data for Architect's review. Architect will return two (2) copies. Maintain one (1) copy as a "Record Document". 1.4 SAMPLES A. Samples include partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components, cuts or containers of materials, color range sets, and swatches showing color, texture, and pattern. B. Office samples shall be of sufficient size and quantity to clearly illustrate: 1. Functional characteristics of the product, with integrally related parts and attaclnent devices. 2. Full range of color, texture and pattern. C. Field samples and mock-ups: 1. Contractor shall erect, at the Project site, at a location acceptable to the Architect. 2. Size or area: that specified in the respective specification section. BIG RED BARN STRUCTURAL SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 3300-2 IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 3. Fabricate each sample and mock-up complete and finished. 4. Remove mock-ups when directed by the Architect. 5. Perform necessary work to bring any area disturbed by mock-ups to the areas original condition. D. Submit fully fabricated Samples cured and finished as specified and physically identical with material or product proposed. 1. Mount or display Samples in manner to facilitate review of qualities indicated. 2. Identify Samples with generic description, product name, and name of manufacturer. 3. Submit Samples for review and verification of size, kind, color, pattern, and texture. 4. Where variation in color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics is inherent in material or product represented, submit at least three (3) multiple units that show approximate limits of variations. 5. Preliminary Submittals: Submit one (1) full set of choices where Samples are submitted for Architect's selection of color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics from a range of standard choices. 6. Submittals: Submit two (2) sets for Architect's review. Architect will return at least one (1) set marked with action taken. Maintain sets of Samples, as returned, at Project Site, for quality comparisons throughout course of construction. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND QUALITY CONTROL SUBMITTALS A. Quality assurance and quality control submittals include design data, test reports, certifications, manufacturer's instructions, and manufacturer's field reports. B. Professional design services or certifications: Where Contract Documents require professional design services or certifications by a design professional, Contractor shall cause such services or certifications to be provided by a qualified design professional, whose registration seal shall appear on drawings, calculations, specifications, certifications, Shop Drawings, and other submittals prepared by such professional. Architect shall be entitled to rely upon adequacy, accuracy, and completeness of services, certifications, or approvals performed by such design professionals. C. Inspection and Test Reports: Requirements for submittal of inspection and test reports from independent testing agencies as specified in the Contract Documents. D. Manufacturer's instruction: Preprinted instructions concerning proper application or installation of system or product. E. Manufacturer's field reports: Reports documenting testing and verification by manufacturer's field representative to verify compliance with manufacturer's standards or instructions. BIG RED BARN STRUCTURAL SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 3300-3 IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 F. Submittals: Submit not less than two (2) copies to Architect. Maintain one (1) additional copy as "Record Document". 1.6 COORDINATION DRAWINGS A. Prepare and submit coordinated layouts of the mechanical and electrical systems and equipment for all areas; drawn at a scale not less than 1/4" per foot showing on both plan and elevation including but not limited to all equipment, ducts, pipe sleeves, piping including plumbing and, sprinkler system, lighting, special supports and other items contained within the space. Show mechanical and electrical services as well as architectural and structural features drawn to scale. Provide mylar record of each coordination drawing submitted. Provide coordination drawings for all corridors, laboratories, offices, mechanical rooms, boiler room, shafts, tunnels, and all congested areas. Copies of coordination drawings shall be distributed to all trades to assure a complete, coordinated installation of work within the space available. B. Submittal and review of coordination drawings will be required before work can start in any given area of the building. 1.7 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES A. Review submittals for compliance with Contract Documents and approve submittals prior to transmitting to the Architect. B. Specifically record deviations from Contract Document requirements, including minor variations and limitation. Comply with requirements of Section 01 25 00 Substitutions and Product Options. C. Contractor's approval of submittals shall indicate that the Contractor has determined and verified materials, field measurements and field construction criteria, and has checked and coordinated information within each submittal with requirement of the Work and Contact Documents. D. Contractor shall be responsible for: 1. Compliance with the Contract Documents 2. Confirming and correlating quantities and dimensions 3. Selecting fabrication processes and techniques of construction. 4. Coordination of the work represented by each submittal with other trades. 5. Performing the work in a safe and satisfactory mainer. 6. Compliance with the Contractor's Construction Schedule. 7. All other provisions of the agreements. BIG RED BARN STRUCTURAL SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 3300-4 IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 E. It is understood that the Architect's notation on the submittals is not to be construed as an authorization for additional work or additional cost. F. If any notations represent a change to the Contract Sum, submit a cost proposal for the change in accordance with procedures specified before proceeding with the work. G. It is understood that the Architect's notation on the submittal is not to be construed as approval of colors. Make all color-related submittals at one time. H. Notify the Architect by letter of any notations made by the Architect which the Contractor finds unacceptable. Resolve such issues prior to proceeding with the Work. I. Begin no fabrication of work until all specified submittal procedures have been fulfilled. J. Do not submit shop drawings, product data or samples representing work for which such submittals are not specified. The Architect shall not be responsible for consequences of inadvertent review of unspecified submittals. K. The review of shop drawings shall not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for proper construction and the furnishing of materials and labor required even though the same may not be indicated on the review shop drawings. 1.8 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Coordination 1. Coordinate submittals with perfonnance of construction activities. 2. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals and related activities that require sequential activity. 3. Prepare and transmit each submittal in accordance with the Submittals Schedule, agreed to by all entities involved. 4. Prepare, review, approve and transmit each submittal sufficiently in advance of performance of related construction activities to avoid delay. 5. Architect's Review: Allow ten (10) working days for Architect's initial processing of each submittal requiring the Architect's review and response, except for longer periods required as noted below, and where processing must be delayed for coordination with subsequent submittals. The Architect will advise the Contractor promptly when it is determined that a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. Allowing ten (10) working days for Architect's reprocessing of each submittal. Advise the Architect when processing time for a submittal is critical to the progress of the work, and the work would be expedited if its processing time could be foreshortened. An additional 5 working days will be required for items specified in Divisions 2, 3, 5, and for Millwork, Hollow Metal Work and Hardware Schedules. 6. Allow time for delivery in addition to review. BIG RED BARN STRUCTURAL SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 3300-5 IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 7. Allow time for reprocessing each submittal. 8. No extension of Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to prepare submittals sufficiently in advance of Work to permit processing. 9. Submittals made which do not conforn to the schedule are subject to delays in processing by the Architect. 10. Refer to Section 01 32 16 Construction Schedules for requirements of the Submittals Schedule. 11. Failure of the Contractor to obtain approval of Shop Drawings shall render all work thereafter performed to be at Contractor's sole risk, cost and expense. B. Submittal Preparation 1. Place a cover sheet for each submittal for identification. 2. Indicate name of entity that prepared each submittal on cover sheet. 3. Provide space on cover sheet or beside title block on Shop Drawings to record Contractor's stamp, initialed or signed, certifying to review of submittal, action taken, verification of products, field measurements and field construction criteria, and coordination of the information within the submittal with requirements of the Work and of Contract Documents. 4. Include following infornation on cover sheet for processing and recording action taken. a. Project name and number. b. Date of submission and the dates of any previous submissions. c. Contract identification. d. Name of Architect. e. Name and address of Contractor. f. Name of subcontractor. g. Name of manufacturer. h. Name of supplier. i. Drawing, detail or specification references, including section number, as appropriate to clearly identify intended use of product. j. Field dimensions, clearly identified as such. BIG RED BARN STRUCTURAL SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-6 IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 k. Relation to adjacent or critical features of the work or materials. 1. Applicable standards, such as ASTM or Federal Specification numbers. m. A blank space for the Architect's stamps. 5. Identification of revisions on re-submittals, other than those noted by the Architect on previous submittals. 6. Shop drawings with the comment "by others" are not acceptable. All such work must specifically identify the related responsible subcontractor. C. Submittal Transmittal 1. Package each submittal appropriately for transmittal and handling. 2. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. 3. On transmittal, record relevant information including deviations from Contract Document requirements, including minor variations and limitations. 4. Transmit submittals to Architect unless otherwise noted or directed. 5. Where noted or directed, transmit submittals to Architect's consultant and forward copy of transmittal form to Architect. 1.9 RESUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS A. Make any corrections or changes noted on previous submittals. B. Shop Drawings and Product Data: 1. Revise initial drawings or data, and resubmit as specified for the initial submittal. 2. Indicate any changes which have been made other than those noted by the Architect. C. Samples: Submit new samples as required for initial submittal. 1.10 ARCHITECT'S DUTIES A. Review submittals with reasonable promptness as identified in 1.8, paragraph 5 of this Section. B. Notations on the Submittal Review Stamp mean the following: 1. "No Exception" indicates that no deviations from the design concept have been found and Work may proceed. 2. "Make Corrections Noted" indicates that deviations from the design concept which have been found are noted, and the Contractor may proceed accordingly. BIG RED BARN STRUCTURAL SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 3300-7 IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 3. "Revise and Resubmit" or "Rejected" indicates that Work covered by submittal, including purchasing, fabrication, delivery, or other activity may not proceed. Revise or prepare new submittal according to Architect's notations; resubmit without delay. Repeat if necessary to obtain different action mark. C. Informational Submittals: Submittals for infonnation or record purposes, including Quality Assurance and Quality Control Submittals, and Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS), will not require responsive action by the Architect. 1. Architect will forward informational submittals without action. 2. Architect will reject and return infonnational submittals not in compliance with Contract Documents. D. Incomplete Submittals: Architect will return incomplete submittals without action. E. Unsolicited Submittals: Architect will return unsolicited submittals to sender without action. F. Return submittals to Contractor for distribution, or for resubmission. 1.11 DISTRIBUTION A. Distribute reproductions of reviewed Shop Drawings and copies of Product Data to: 1. Job site file 2. Record Documents file 3. Subcontractors 4. Installers 5. Suppliers 6. Manufacturers 7. Fabricators 8. Architect 9. Owner B. Do not permit use of unarked copies or rejected copies of submittals in connection with construction at Project Site or elsewhere where Work is in progress. PART 2 -PRODUCTS -NOT USED PART 3 -EXECUTION -NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 33 00*** BIG RED BARN STRUCTURAL SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 3300-8 IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 CORNELL SECTION 01 35 29 Ithaca, New York GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY 1.1 GENERAL A. This Section provides requirements for general health and safety during the project. The requirements of this Section shall apply to both Contractor and all tiers of sub-contractors involved in the project. B. In addition to the requirements of this Section, all laws and regulations by applicable local, state, and federal agencies shall apply to the work of this contract. In some cases the requirements of these Specifications may by intention exceed such legal requirements, but in no case shall this Specification be interpreted or understood to reduce or eliminate such requirements. 1.2 CONTRACTOR'S SAFETY PLAN A. The Contractor will submit a site Safety Plan for review by Cornell University before commencement of work on the site. The safety plan should address site specific safety concerns related directly to the Work being done. The following safety plan review checklist is provided to assist contractors in tailoring their safety plan to the Work. Safety plans that inadequately address safe operations and equipment will be returned for resubmission. Failure to submit an appropriate site safety plan may result in denial of the payment. 1.3 ASBESTOS AND LEAD A. Attached for the Contractor's information are lead based paint and asbestos reports which represent samples taken within the building. B. Based on the reports referenced above, asbestos removal is not anticipated at this time. Should removal become required, removal and disposal of material containing asbestos shall be performed by the Owner under separate contract. C. Building may contain lead based paint. The Contractor shall protect workers in accordance with OSHA regulations. The Contractor selects the means and/or methods to address the presence of lead based paint, and must concurrently protect its workers based on the Contractor's means and/or methods. Lead was a common ingredient in paint until 1978. Big Red Barn was constructed in 1874. The Contractor is required to submit a lead plan that is site specific, indicating that the protective measures the Contractor proposes meet the OSHA standard 1926.62 "Lead in Construction Standards". This site specific plan should address the particular methods the Contractor intends to protect its workers, the building occupants and the building structure based on its selection of addressing the presence of lead based paint. 1.4 SITE VISITS A. The undertaking of periodic Site Visits by Architects and/or Engineers or Owner shall not be construed as supervision of actual construction, or make them responsible for the safety of all persons; or make them responsible for means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction selected by the Contractor or its Subcontractors; or make them responsible for safety programs and precautions incident to the Work, or for the safe access, visit, use, Work, travel or occupancy of any person. PART 2 -PRODUCTS -NOT USED PART 3 -EXECUTION -NOT USED BIG RED BARN GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY 01 3529-1 STRUCTURAL IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 Job Specific Safety Manual Checklist Jobsite Name: Date: Job No: General Contractor: Jobsite Location: Subcontractor: Scope of Work: Prime Contractor: Completed by: Shops: Applies Designated to this Competent Contractor? Person Standard Y/N (employee name) Subpart C -General Provisions 1926.20 -.35 Subpart D -Occupational Health & Environmental. Controls 1926.50 -.66 Gases, Vapors, Fumes, Dusts, Mists 1926.55 Lead 1926.62 Subpart E -Personal Protective Equipment 1926.95 -.107 Subpart F -Fire Protection & Prevention 1926.150 -.159 Subpart G -Signs, Signals and Barricades 1926.200 -.203 Subpart H -Materials Handling, Storage, Use & Disposal 1926.250 -.252 Subpart I -Tools -Hand & Power 1926.300 -.307 Subpart J -Welding & Cutting 1926.350 -.354 Applies Designated BIG RED BARN GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY 01 3529-2 STRUCTURAL IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 to this Competent Contractor? Person Standard Y/N (employee name) Subpart K -Electrical 1926.400- .449 Subpart L -Scaffolds 1926.450- .454 Subpart M -Fall Protection 1926.500 -.503 Subpart N -Cranes, Derricks, Hoists, Elevators, & Conveyors 1926.550 -.556 Subpart P -Excavations 1926.650- .652 Subpart Q -Concrete & Masony Construction 1926.700- .706 Subpart R -Steel Erection 1926.750- .761 Subpart S -Tunnels, Shafts, Caissons, Cofferdams, & Compressed Air 1926.800- .804 Subpart T -Demolition 1926.850- .860 Subpart U -Blasting & Use of Explosives 1926.900- .914 Subpart V -Power Transmission & Distribution 1926.950- .960 Subpart X -Stairways & Ladders 1926.1050- .1060 Subpart Y -Commercial Diving Operations 1926.1071 -1090 Recordkeeping - 1926.1091 -.1092 Subpart Z -Toxic and Hazardous Substances 1926.1100- .1152 ***END OF SECTION 01 35 29*** BIG RED BARN GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY 01 3529-3 STRUCTURAL IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 Cornell University Pre-Renovation Asbestos Survey Report Performed at Big Red Barn Building 2040 For the Roofing/Windows Renovation Project Ithaca, New York Campus Prepared for: Mr. Dale Houseknecht, Asbestos Project Coordinator Cornell University Maintenance Management 116 Humphreys Service Building, Ithaca, NY 14853 Prepared by: 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607-231-6600 Fax: 607-231-6640 www.deltaengineers.com Delta Project No. 2013.044.349 Cornell Work Order No. 6617357 Field work performed by: Thomas Ferro, December 18th, 2013 Report prepared by: Thomas Ferro Report reviewed by: Stephen Prislupsky 2 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax: 607.231.6650 Website: www.deltaengineers.com TABLE OF CONTENTS 1.0 INTRODUCTION .......................................................................................... 3 2.0 ASBESTOS SURVEY AND SAMPLING PROCEDURES AND METHODS ................. 5 3.0 SURVEY FINDINGS AND CONCLUSIONS......................................................... 12 4.0 INACCESSIBLE AREAS ................................................................................ 12 Appendix A, ASBESTOS BULK SAMPLE REPORT FORM .......................................... 13 Appendix B, LABORATORY ANALYTICAL RESULTS ................................................. 14 Appendix C, DELTA ENGINEERS, COMPANY AND PERSONNEL CERTIFICATIONS ....... 15 Appendix D, LABORATORY CERTIFICATIONS ......................................................... 16 Appendix E, BULK SAMPLE LOCATION DRAWING .................................................. 17 Appendix F, PREVIOUS DELTA SAMPLE INFORMATION ........................................... 18 3 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax: 607.231.6650 Website: www.deltaengineers.com 1.0 INTRODUCTION: Delta Engineers, Architects, & Land Surveyors (Delta) was contracted by Cornell University, to provide a Pre-Renovation Asbestos Survey at the Big Red Barn (Building 2040), located on the Cornell Ithaca, New York Campus. The survey was performed in support of the upcoming Roofing/Window Renovation Project and addressed suspect materials with the potential to be impacted by the upcoming Renovation Work. The initial stage of the Survey included a review of past Delta Survey information for the Building. Bulk sample results from Delta sampling services are incorporated into this Survey and associated Survey Report where applicable. On December 18th, 2013 Delta Certified Inspector Thomas Ferro was on site to perform sampling of suspect materials. Based on a review of existing sample information and a visual inspection of the renovation areas, a total of ten (10) bulk samples were collected representing five (5) separate suspect homogenous building materials. All ten (10) of the samples collected were non-friable organically bound (NOB) representing the five (5) homogenous materials. The homogenous materials identified and sampled included: Homogenous Area (HA) Building Material 01 Gray Window Glazing, Exterior, East Wing 02 White Window Glazing, Exterior, Main Building 03 Dark Green Three Tabbed Shingle, Top Layer 04 Black Three Tabbed Shingle, Bottom Layer 05 Black Caulk 2013.044.210-01* Paper Backing from yellow fiberglass wall insulation 2013.044.210-02* Brown Fiberboard from Wall Cavity 2013.044.210-03* Black Vapor Barrier under Siding 2013.044.233-01* Green Paper Sheetrock 2013.044.233-02* Joint Compound 2013.044.233-03* Dark Gray Hardwood Flooring Mastic 2013.044.233-04* White Coating on Metal Decking * - Material Previously Sampled by Delta It should be noted that the entire roof was covered with snow at the time of the sampling. As such, the visual inspection and associated suspect roofing material identification/ sampling was limited to only those specific locations where the snow was cleared by the Shops Personnel for sampling purposes. Any roofing repair tars, sealants, “patch” materials or other suspect roofing materials present on the roof but not identified/sampled due to the snow load should be assumed asbestos containing until tested. Specific information required by 12 NYCRR Part 56-5.1, (f) – “Building/Structure Asbestos Survey Information” to be included in this pre-renovation report is as follows: 1) Building Name/Address: Big Red Barn Building 2040 East Avenue Ithaca, NY 4 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax: 607.231.6650 Website: www.deltaengineers.com 2) Owner’s Name/Address: Cornell University Humphreys Service Building Ithaca, NY 14853 3) Owner’s Agent: Mr. Dale Houseknecht 4) Survey Performed By: Delta Engineers, Architects, & Land Surveyors 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 5) Certified Inspectors: Thomas Ferro Certificate No. 99-11328 6) Date of Survey: December 18th, 2013 7) Laboratory: America Science Team New York, Inc. 117 East 30th Street, New York, NY 10016 5 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax: 607.231.6650 Website: www.deltaengineers.com 2.0 ASBESTOS SURVEY AND SAMPLING PROCEDURES AND METHODS: 2.1 Survey requirements Requirements to perform Pre-Demolition/Pre-Renovation Asbestos Surveys are based on the following State and Federal Regulations. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA): OSHA survey requirements and sampling protocols are included in 29 CFR Part 1910.1001(j)(2) & (j)(8) and 29 CFR Part 1926.1101(k),(5): 29 CFR Part 1910.1001(j)(2), Installed Asbestos Containing Material: Employers and building owners are required to treat installed TSI and sprayed on and troweled-on surfacing materials as ACM in buildings constructed no later than 1980 for purposes of this standard. These materials are designated "presumed ACM or PACM", and are defined in paragraph (b) of this section. Asphalt and vinyl flooring material installed no later than 1980 also must be treated as asbestos-containing. The employer or building owner may demonstrate that PACM and flooring material do not contain asbestos by complying with paragraph (j)(8)(iii) of this section. 29 CFR Part 1910.1001(j)(8), Criteria to rebut the designation of installed material as PACM: 1910.1001(j)(8)(i) - At any time, an employer and/or building owner may demonstrate, for purposes of this standard, that PACM does not contain asbestos. Building owners and/or employers are not required to communicate information about the presence of building material for which such a demonstration pursuant to the requirements of paragraph (j)(8)(ii) of this section has been made. However, in all such cases, the information, data and analysis supporting the determination that PACM does not contain asbestos, shall be retained pursuant to paragraph (m) of this section. 1910.1001(j)(8)(ii) - An employer or owner may demonstrate that PACM does not contain asbestos by the following: 1910.1001(j)(8)(ii)(A) - Having a completed inspection conducted pursuant to the requirements of AHERA (40 CFR 763, Subpart E) which demonstrates that no ACM is present in the material; or 1910.1001(j)(8)(ii)(B) - Performing tests of the material containing PACM which demonstrate that no ACM is present in the material. Such tests shall include analysis of bulk samples collected in the manner described in 40 CFR 763.86. The tests, evaluation and sample collection shall be conducted by an accredited inspector or by a CIH. Analysis of samples shall be performed by persons or laboratories with proficiency demonstrated by current successful participation in a nationally recognized testing program such as the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP) or the National Institute for Standards and Technology (NIST) or the Round Robin for bulk samples administered by the American Industrial Hygiene Association (AIHA) or an equivalent nationally-recognized round robin testing program. 1910.1001(j)(8)(iii) -The employer and/or building owner may demonstrate that flooring material including associated mastic and backing does not contain asbestos, by a determination of an industrial hygienist based upon recognized analytical techniques showing that the material is not ACM. 29 CFR Part 1926.1101(k)(5), Criteria to rebut the designation of installed material as PACM: 1926.1101(k)(5)(i) - At any time, an employer and/or building owner may demonstrate, for purposes of this standard, that PACM does not contain asbestos. Building owners and/or employers are not required to communicate information about the presence of building material for which such a demonstration pursuant to the requirements of paragraph (k)(5)(ii) of this section has been made. However, in all such cases, the information, data and analysis supporting the determination that PACM does not contain asbestos, shall be retained pursuant to paragraph (n) of this section. 1926.1101(k)(5)(ii) – An employer or owner may demonstrate that PACM does not contain more than 1 percent asbestos by the following: 1926.1101(k)(5)(ii)(A) - Having a completed inspection conducted pursuant to the requirements of AHERA (40 CFR Part 763, Subpart E) which demonstrates that the material is not ACM; or 6 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax: 607.231.6650 Website: www.deltaengineers.com 1926.1101(k)(5)(ii)(B) - Performing tests of the material containing PACM which demonstrate that no ACM is present in the material. Such tests shall include analysis of bulk samples collected in the manner described in 40 CFR 763.86. The tests, evaluation and sample collection shall be conducted by an accredited inspector or by a CIH. Analysis of samples shall be performed by persons or laboratories with proficiency demonstrated by current successful participation in a nationally recognized testing program such as the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP) or the National Institute for Standards and Technology (NIST) or the Round Robin for bulk samples administered by the American Industrial Hygiene Association (AIHA) or an equivalent nationally-recognized round robin testing program. 1926.1101(k)(5)(iii) - The employer and/or building owner may demonstrate that flooring material including associated mastic and backing does not contain asbestos, by a determination of an industrial hygienist based upon recognized analytical techniques showing that the material is not ACM. EPA National Emissions Standard for Hazardous Air Pollutants (NESHAPs): (NESHAPs) regulates asbestos under “40 CFR Part 61, Subpart M - National Emission Standard for Asbestos”. Subpart M regulates demolition and/or renovation of “facilities” that may contain asbestos-containing materials (ACMs). “Facilities,” as defined by NESHAPs, includes any institutional, commercial, public, industrial, or residential structure or building, except residential buildings having four or fewer units. ACMs are defined in NESHAPs as materials containing more than 1 percent asbestos. Section 61.145 states: 61.145 Standard for demolition and renovation. (a) Applicability. To determine which requirements of paragraphs (a), (b), and (c) of this section apply to the owner or operator of a demolition or renovation activity and prior to the commencement of the demolition or renovation, thoroughly inspect the affected facility or part of the facility where the demolition or renovation operation will occur for the presence of asbestos, including Category I and Category II nonfriable ACM. It should be noted that 40 CFR Part 1 Subpart M, NESHAPS has no cut-off date exempting survey requirements. New York State Department of Labor (NYS DOL): Guidelines followed for the inspection are those established by the NYS DOL’s Industrial Code Rule 56 (Cited as 12 NYCRR Part 56 , as amended, adopted January 11, 2006; effective September 5, 2006). The specific survey, sampling and reporting requirements included in 12 NYCRR Part 56-5.1(e) – “Building/Structure Asbestos Survey Requirements” include: 56-5.1 Asbestos Survey Requirements for Building/Structure Demolition, Renovation, Remodeling and Repair (a) Asbestos Survey Required. An owner or an owner’s agent, except the owner of one and two- family dwellings who contracts for, but does not direct or control the work, shall cause to be conducted, an asbestos survey completed by a licensed asbestos contractor using inspectors certified in compliance with Section 56-3.2(d), to determine whether or not the building or structure, or portion(s) thereof to be demolished, renovated, remodeled, or have repair work, contains ACM, PACM or asbestos material. This asbestos survey shall be completed and submitted as indicated in Subdivision (g) of this Section, prior to commencing work. All such asbestos surveys shall be conducted in conformance with the requirements of Subdivision (e) of this Section. 7 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax: 607.231.6650 Website: www.deltaengineers.com (b) Exemptions To Asbestos Survey Requirements: The asbestos survey required by this Subdivision (a) of this Section shall not be required for the following classes of buildings or structures: (1) an agricultural building; (2) buildings or structures for which original construction commenced on or after January 1, 1974; (3) A structure certified in writing to be structurally unsound by a licensed Professional Engineer, Registered Architect, Building Inspector, Fire Inspector or other official of competent jurisdiction. (See Section 56-11.5) (c) Building/Structure Demolition. If a building/structure asbestos survey is not required or performed per Subdivision (b) of this Section, and the building/structure is certified to be unsound or slated for contracted demolition, the building/structure shall be assumed to contain asbestos, and shall be demolished per this Part, unless the building/structure is adequately certified to be free of asbestos containing material. Acceptable documentation for certification shall be a previous thorough building/structure asbestos survey, abatement records or other documentation acceptable to the Commissioner or his or her representative. (d) Responsibility To Comply. No exemption to the requirement to conduct an asbestos survey shall exempt any person, asbestos contractor, property owner or business entity from the inspection or asbestos survey requirements of EPA, OSHA, and any other applicable section of this Part. (e) Building/Structure Asbestos Survey Requirements. The asbestos survey shall include a thorough inspection for and identification of all PACM, suspect miscellaneous ACM, or asb estos material throughout the building/structure or portion thereof to be demolished, renovated, remodeled, or to have repair work. The required inspection shall be performed by a certified asbestos inspector, and, at a minimum, shall include identification of PACM, suspect miscellaneous ACM or asbestos material by all of the following methods: (1) The review of building/structure plans and records, if available, for references to asbestos, ACM, PACM, suspect miscellaneous ACM or asbestos material used in construction, renovation or repair; and (2) A visual inspection for PACM and suspect miscellaneous ACM throughout the building/structure or portion thereof to be demolished, renovated, remodeled, or repaired. For the purpose of this Part, all PACM and suspect miscellaneous ACM visually assessed shall be treated and handled as ACM and shall be assumed to be ACM, unless bulk sampling is conducted as per this Section, standard EPA and OSHA accepted methods, including multi-layered systems sampling protocols; the subsequent analyses are performed by a laboratory that meets the requirements of Section 56-4.2 of this Part; and the analyses satisfies both ELAP and federal requirements, including multi-layered sample analyses, to document non-asbestos containing material. (f) Building/Structure Asbestos Survey Information. (1) The asbestos survey shall, at a minimum, identify and assess with due diligence, the locations, quantities, friability and conditions of all types of installations at the affected portion of th e building/structure relative to the ACM, suspect miscellaneous ACM, PACM or asbestos material contained therein. The following list is not inclusive of all types of ACMs, it only summarizes typical 8 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax: 607.231.6650 Website: www.deltaengineers.com ACMs. The certified asbestos inspector is responsible for identification and assessment of all types ACM, PACM, suspect miscellaneous ACM and asbestos material within the affected portion of the building/structure: PACM (i) Surfacing Treatments: (a) Fireproofing; (b) Acoustical Plaster; (c) Finish Plasters; and (d) Skim Coats of Joint Compound. (ii) Thermal System Insulation: (a) Equipment Insulation; (b) Boiler, Breeching, Boiler Rope, Duct, or Tank Insulation, Cement or Mortar Used for Boilers and Refractory Brick; (c) Piping and Fitting Insulations including but not limited to, Wrapped Paper, Aircell, Millboard, Rope, Cork, Preformed Plaster, Job Molded Plaster and coverings over fibrous glass insulation. SUSPECT MISCELLANEOUS ACM (i) Roofing and Siding Miscellaneous Materials: (a) Insulation Board; (b) Vapor Barriers; (c) Coatings; (d) Non-Metallic or Non-Wood Roof Decking (e) Felts; (f) Cementitious Board (Transite); (g) Flashing; (h) Shingles; and (i) Galbestos. (ii) Other Miscellaneous Materials: (a) Dust and Debris; (b) Floor Tile; (c) Cove Base; (d) Floor Leveler Compound; (e) Ceiling Tile; (f) Vermiculite Insulation (g) Gaskets, Seals, Sealants (including for condensate control); (h) Vibration Isolators; (i) Laboratory Tables and Hoods; (j) Chalkboards; (k) Pipe Penetration Packing or Other Firestopping Materials (l) Cementitious Board; (m) Electrical Wire Insulation; (n) Fire Curtains; (o) Fire Blankets; (p) Fire Doors; (q) Brakes and Clutches; (r) Mastics, Adhesives and Glues; 9 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax: 607.231.6650 Website: www.deltaengineers.com (s) Caulks; (t) Sheet Flooring (Linoleum); (u) Wallpaper; (v) Drywall; (w) Plasterboard (x) Spackling/Joint Compound; (y) Textured Paint; (z) Grout; (aa) Glazing Compound; and (ab) Terrazzo. (2) All ACM, PACM, suspect miscellaneous ACM, or asbestos material reported under Paragraph (1) of this Subdivision shall include the location of the materials, an estimate of the quantities, types, friability and condition of the identified materials to be treated and handled as ACM. For the purpose of this Part, all PACM and suspect miscellaneous ACM visually assessed shall be treated and handled as ACM and shall be assumed to be ACM, unless bulk sampling is conducted as per this Section, standard EPA and OSHA accepted methods, including multilayered systems sampling protocols; the subsequent analyses are performed by a laboratory that meets th e requirements of Section 56-4.2 of this Part; and the analyses satisfies both ELAP and federal requirements, including multi-layered sample analyses, to document non-asbestos containing material. (3) The building/structure asbestos survey shall also include the building/structure name, address, the building/structure owner’s name and address, the name and address of the owner's agent, the name of the firm performing the asbestos survey and a copy of the firm’s current asbestos handling license, the names of the certified inspector(s) performing the survey and a copy of the current asbestos handling certificate for each inspector utilized, the dates of the asbestos survey, a listing of homogeneous areas identifying which ones are ACM, all laboratory analyses reports for bulk samples collected, and copies of the appropriate certifications for the laboratory used for analysis of samples taken during the asbestos survey. (g) Transmittal of Building/Structure Asbestos Survey Information. One (1) copy of the results of the building/structure asbestos survey shall be immediately transmitted by the building/structure owner as follows: (1) One (1) copy of the completed asbestos survey shall be sent by the owner or their agent to the local government entity charged with issuing a permit for such demolition, renovation, remodeling or repair work under applicable State or local laws. (2) The completed asbestos survey for controlled demolition (as per Subpart 56-11.5) or pre-demolition asbestos projects shall also be submitted to the appropriate Asbestos Control Bureau district office. (3) The completed asbestos survey shall be kept on the construction site with the asbestos notification and variance, if required, throughout the duration of the asbestos project and any associated demolition, renovation, remodeling or repair project. (h) Removal Required. If the building/structure asbestos survey finds that the portion of the building/structure to be demolished, renovated, remodeled, or have repair work contains ACM, 10 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax: 607.231.6650 Website: www.deltaengineers.com PACM, suspect miscellaneous ACM assumed to be ACM, or asbestos material, which is impacted by the work, the owner or the owner’s agent shall conduct, or cause to have conducted, asbestos removal performed by a licensed asbestos abatement contractor in conformance with all standards set forth in this Part. All ACM, PACM, suspect miscellaneous ACM assumed to be ACM, or asbestos material impacted by the demolition, renovation, remodeling or repair project shall be removed as per this Part, prior to access or disturbance by other uncertified trades or personnel. No demolition, renovation, remodeling or repair work shall be commenced by any owner or the owner’s agent prior to the completion of the asbestos abatement in accordance with the notification requirements of this Part. For multi-phased work, the access restriction for uncertified trades or personnel applies to each intermediate portion of the entire project. Upon completion of the intermediate portion of the asbestos project, other trades or personnel may access that portion of the work site. For demolition projects that are exempt from asbestos survey requirements due to being structurally unsound, the demolition is considered an asbestos project and shall proceed as per Section 56-11.5. (1) All building/structure owners and asbestos abatement contractors on a demolition, renovation, remodeling, or repair project, which includes work covered by this Part, shall inform all trades on the work site about PACM, ACM, asbestos material and suspect miscellaneous AC M assumed to be ACM at the work site. (i) Bidding. Bids may be advertised and contracts awarded for demolition, remodeling, renovation, or repair work, but no work on the current intermediate portion of the project shall commence on the demolition, renovation, remodeling or repair work by any owner or agent prior to completion of all necessary asbestos abatement work for the current intermediate portion of the entire project, in conformance with all standards set forth in this Part. (j) Unidentified and Unassessed Asbestos. When any construction activity, such as demolition, remodeling, renovation or repair work, reveals PACM or suspect miscellaneous ACM that has not been identified by the asbestos survey per this Part, or has not been identified by other inspections as per current OSHA or EPA requirements, all activities shall cease in the area where the PACM or suspect miscellaneous ACM is found and the Asbestos Control Bureau shall be notified by telephone by the building/structure owner or their representative, followed with a written notice in accordance with the notification requirements of this Part. Unassessed PACM or suspect miscellaneous ACM shall be treated and handled as ACM and assumed to be ACM, unless proven otherwise by standard EPA and OSHA accepted methods, including multi-layered systems sampling protocols; subsequent analyses performed by a laboratory that meets the requirements of Section 56-4.2 of this Part; and the analyses satisfies both NYS ELAP and federal requirements, including multi-layered sample analyses, to document non-asbestos containing material. 2.2 Sample Analysis Bulk sample analysis was performed by American Science Team New York Inc., an independent laboratory approved/accredited by the NYS Department of Health (ELAP), the American Industrial Hygiene Association (AIHA), and the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP). 11 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax: 607.231.6650 Website: www.deltaengineers.com Samples collected during the course of this survey fell into one of two categories. The first category includes non-friable organically bound (NOB) materials. These materials are those which have an organic binder in their matrix and include items such as floor tiles, sheet flooring, mastics, glazings, caulks and roofing materials. The second category includes non-NOB “friable” materials including parging, sheetrock, joint compound, wall insulations, and wallboard. Analysis of all “NOB” materials was initially performed by Polarized Light Microscopy (PLM) following the New York State Department of Health ELAP 198.6 Gravimetric Reduction Methodology. If a given sample was reported as non-asbestos following this analysis, it was then analyzed by Transmission Electron Microscopy (TEM) following the NYS DOH ELAP 198.4 Methodology. 2.3 Materials not sampled There were several materials present at the site which were not considered “suspect” by the inspector and were not sampled. These included various fiberglass, foam, vinyl, silicone, wood/cellulose products and concrete/cinder block/brick components. 12 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax: 607.231.6650 Website: www.deltaengineers.com 3.0 SURVEY FINDINGS AND CONCLUSIONS 3.1) Big Red Barn Building 2040 Roofing/Windows Renovation Project, Non-Asbestos Materials - Based previous Delta results and results reported for samples collected during this Survey of suspect materials present at the Big Red Barn with the potential to be impacted by the Project, the following materials were identified as non-asbestos: Homogenous Area (HA) Non-Asbestos Material 01 Gray Window Glazing, Exterior, East Wing 02 White Window Glazing, Exterior, Main Building 03 Dark Green Three Tabbed Shingle, Top Layer 04 Black Three Tabbed Shingle, Bottom Layer 05 Black Caulk 2013.044.210-01* Paper Backing from yellow fiberglass wall insulation 2013.044.210-02* Brown Fiberboard from Wall Cavity 2013.044.210-03* Black Vapor Barrier under Siding 2013.044.233-01* Green Paper Sheetrock 2013.044.233-02* Joint Compound 2013.044.233-03* Dark Gray Hardwood Flooring Mastic 2013.044.233-04* White Coating on Metal Decking * - Material Previously Sampled by Delta 3.2) Big Red Barn Building 2040 Roofing/Windows Renovation Project, Asbestos Containing Materials - Based previous Delta results and results reported for samples collected during this Survey of suspect materials present at the Big Red Barn with the potential to be impacted by the Project, NONE were identified as being Asbestos Containing. It should be noted that the entire roof was covered with snow at the time of the sampling. As such, the visual inspection and associated suspect roofing material identification/ sampling was limited to only those specific locations where the snow was cleared by the Shops Personnel for sampling purposes. Any roofing repair tars, sealants, “patch” materials or other suspect roofing materials present on the roof but not identified/sampled due to the snow load should be assumed asbestos containing until tested. 4.0 INACCESSIBLE AREAS All accessible suspect materials were sampled as a part of this survey. Any materials present on the roof that have not been sampled (i.e. inaccessible at the time of this survey) shall be assumed ACM until tested. 13 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax: 607.231.6650 Website: www.deltaengineers.com APPENDIX A Asbestos Bulk Sample Report Form Material Asbestos PLM Result TEM Result Bulk Sample Description / Details Type Type % Asbestos % Asbestos 2013.044.349-- 01A 01 Grnd Gray Window Glazing, Exterior, East Wing, North Misc. Non-Asbestos Trace < 1.0% 2013.044.349- 01B 01 Grnd Gray Window Glazing, Exterior, East Wing, South Misc. Non-Asbestos Trace < 1.0% 2013.044.349- 02A 02 Grnd White Window Glazing, Exterior, Main Building, West Misc. Non-Asbestos ND Trace 2013.044.349- 02B 02 Grnd White Window Glazing, Exterior, Main Building, South Misc. Non-Asbestos ND Trace 2013.044.349- 03A 03 Roof Dark Green Three Tabbed Shingle, Top Layer, Shed Dormer, West Misc.ND ND ND 2013.044.349- 03B 03 Roof Dark Green Three Tabbed Shingle, Top Layer, Main Field, West Misc.ND ND ND 2013.044.349- 04A 04 Roof Black Three Tabbed Shingle, Bottom Layer, Shed Dormer, West Misc. Non-Asbestos ND Trace 2013.044.349- 04B 04 Roof Black Three Tabbed Shingle, Bottom Layer, Main Field, West Misc. Non-Asbestos ND Trace 2013.044.349- 05A 05 Roof Black Caulk, Awning, West Misc.ND ND ND 2013.044.349- 05B 05 Roof Black Caulk, Awning, West Misc.ND ND ND 860 Hooper Road, Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax 607.231.6640 Client: Cornell University Delta Proj. No.: 2013.044.349 Asbestos Inspector: Thomas Ferro Asbestos Bulk Sample Report Form Sample HA*Floor www.deltaengineers.com Project: Big Red Barn Roofing Project Pre-Renovation Asbestos Survey Building Code: 2040 HA - Homogenous Area ND - No Asbestos Detected NA - Not Analyzed by Methodology NA/PS - Not Analyzed, Positive Stop TSI - Thermal System Insulation Misc - Miscellaneous Material Trace / < 1% - Non-asbestos by definition Work Order No.: 6617357 Date Sampling Performed: 12/18/2013 Date of Report: 12/23/13 Laboratory: AmeriSci Labs Number of Samples Collected: 10 Number Number of Samples Analyzed: PLM - 10 / TEM - 10 Cornell University Big Red Barn Roofing Project Pre-Renovation Asbestos Survey Page 1 of 1 14 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax: 607.231.6650 Website: www.deltaengineers.com APPENDIX B Laboratory Analytical Results AuraLScr Delta Engineers Attn: Stephen Prislupsky 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 AmeriSci New York 117 EAST 3OTH ST. NEWYORK, NY 10016 TEL: (212) 679-8600 . FttX: (212) 679-3114 PLM Bulk Asbestos Report Date Received L2l10lt3 AmerisciJob # 2L3LZ3339 Date Examined 12120113 P.O. # ELAP #11480 Page of3 Barn 12040RE:2013.044.349; Cornell University; Big Red Asbestos Roof And Window Survey Glient No. / HGA Lab No.Asbestos Present Total % Asbestos 2013.044.349-01A 213123398-01 yes 01 Location: Ground Floor - Gray Window Glazing, Exterior, East Wing, North Anallpt Description: Grey, Homogeneous, Non-Fibrous, Bulk Material Asbestos Types: Chrysotile <0.25 o/o pc, Anthophyllite <0.25 o/o pc Other Material: Fibrous Talc 1 o/o, Non-fibrous 1S % Trace (<0.25 o/o pc)1 (EPA 400 PC) by Ella Babayeva on 12120113 2013.044.349-018 213123338-02 yes 01 Location: Ground Floor - Gray Window Glazing, Exterior, East Wing, South Analyst Description: Grey, Homogeneous, Non-Fibrous, Bulk Material Asbestos Types: Chrysotile <0.25 o/o pc, Anthophyllite <0.25 % pc Other Material: Fibrous Talc2o/o, Non-fibrous 10.9 % Trace (<0.25 o/o pc) 1 (EPA 400 PC) by Ella Babayeva on 12120113 2013.044.349-02A 213123338-03 IUo 02 Location: Ground Floor - White Window Glazing, Exterior, Main Building, West Analyst Description: White, Homogeneous, Non-Fibrous, Bulk Material Asbestos Types: Other Materlal: Fibrous Talc Trace, Non-fibrous 24.7 % NAD (by NYS ELAP 198.6) by Ella Babayeva on 12120113 2013.044.349-028 213123338-04 02 Location: Ground Floor - White Window Glazing, Exterior, Analyst Description: White, Homogeneous, Non-Fibrous, Bulk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: Fibrous Talc 1 o/o, Non-fibrous 20.3 yo IVo Main Building, South NAD (by NYS ELAP 198.6) by Ella Babayeva on 12120113 2013.044.349-03A 213123338-05 A/o 03 Location: Roof - Dark Green Three Tabbed Shingle, Top Layer, Shed Dormer, West NAD (by NYS ELAP 198.6) by Ella Babayeva on 12120113 Analyst Descrlptlon: Asbestos Types: Other Material: Dark Green, Homogeneous, Non-Fibrous, Bulk Material Non-fibrous 46.2% See Reporting notes on last page AmeriSci Job #: 213123338 Client Name: Delta Engineers Page 2 of 3 PLM Bulk Asbestos Report 2013.044.349; Cornell University; Big Red Barn l2O4O Asbestos Roof And Window Survey Client No. / HGA Lab No.Asbestos Present Total % Asbestos 2013.044.349-038 213123338-06 Ato 03 Location: Roof - Dark Green Three Tabbed Shingle, Top Layer, Main Field, West Analyst Description: Dark Green, Homogeneous, Non-Fibrous, Bulk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: Non-fibrous 18.4 % NAD (by NYS ELAP 198.6) by Ella Babayeva on 12120113 2013.044.349-04A 213123338-07 No 04 Location: Roof - Black Three Tabbed Shingle, Boftom Layer, Shed Dormer, West Analyst Descriptlon: Black, Homogeneous, Non-Fibrous, Bulk Material Asbestos Types: Other Materia!: Non-fibrous 16.7 o/o NAD (by NYS ELAP 198.6) by Ella Babayeva on 12120113 2013.044.349-048 213123338-08 Aro 04 Location: Roof - Black Three Tabbed Shingle, Bottom Layer, Main Field, West NAD (by NYS ELAP 198.6) by Ella Babayeva on 12120113 Analyst Description: Asbestos Types: Other Material: Black, Homogeneous, Non-Fibrous, Bulk Material Non-fibrous 15.3 o 2013.044.349-054 213123338-09 05 Location: Roof - Black Caulk, Awning, West Analyst Description: Black, Homogeneous, Non-Fibrous, Bulk Material Asbestos Types: Other Materia!: Non-fibrous 26 % IVo NAD (by NYS ELAP 198.6) by Ella Babayeva on'12120113 2013.044.349-058 213123338_10 05 Location: Roof - Black Caulk, Awning, West Analyst Descrlption: Black, Homogeneous, Non-Fibrous, Bulk Material Asbestos Tyces: Other Material: Non-fibrous 17.3 o/o A/o NAD (by NYS ELAP 198.6) by Ella Babayeva on 12120113 See Reporting notes on last page AmeriSci Job #: 21312993A Client Name: Delta Engineers Page 3 of 3 PLM Bulk Asbestos Report 2013.044.349; Cornell University; Big Red Barn t2O4O Asbestos Roof And Window Survey Reporting Notes: (1) Samplepreparedfor r98.6 Analped by: Ella Babayeva 'NAD/NSD =no asbestos analyzed/positive stop; PLM Bulk Asbestos Analysis by EpA 600/M4-82-020 per 40;; il5: ;ilffi;:, ;:"-,ffiffi # tri ;#ffi;;;vami^r rlil6 ^r {Oa A f^- f,lno ^^--r^-#1ffiffi;"i*,illliiffiil,"delectino ,shect^c in flanr m.,ad^^- ^^, ^r-ir^-::::"j#f:t:.:,:::,:p:iy:l:s-':f-:ill?r.non_friabre o,saniliy bo,il;;t;,irr..'rle;;;;.',J[,'"",il'orli.i,i];Hffi:i,,::'ffi;;l ;;rffi ,ffi ; ililJ'il",W "d;iJi" 1o,""FPA Ar{viennr fnr fl^^. +il^ Eo Ea . r^ .6A,^ 6,2::,1i:H:?":",:i::::'::::::j11,?:1,'.1r.'.;?Il1r-I*;J;;tiil6;rs-r'";;;##;;d;fi#';ffiH;?Jffi.'#[H'il:1ffijff:.H*ll1::j:r:*:Titr#j: rglylpry.^i1qtlfrortne rao.rnisir-M 6;,fiil; ijljiv'. ffi:;#: ilA:Xi,ixl"J;'fiH,::iiCeTSML-094, CT CerHpH-01 86, Mass CerHAAO0b0s4. Reviewed END OF REPORT coo(t,;o'5o)trt8.il-EgB bEAB, s.tE;o EEET$ EgIaH t5 aEE €eE:t ._z $z- ororL Eo>r,dEEl] EEE? Z. .o[ *ifi Eil pBP :b'E g+t EE:t! EHfiEt E!s d1 s0ol(/, oo6(,)(l, tris*T E9EEF EePE€ sZ!EE E:3As E;E gg: E.E3 fiE A frEu - o - gB:EE a 6 E;tg.P 88,F 6 g v QHHEgq =EFEsFE HCFREES oEEI+EE gE*3;38 €€ESasF .=!.(liEEE EE\\t l$[iE s E\lggii EE\laEiEE PE=lf : i'r qfi EE E! .E€ptHgd EEEEtrEE Fs*i.ElEse ei;EeEE; 6EgE=q?E-EEPE$E3 EEqqg8oo(o(!55Y.Y.FFEEggodrLL==i=3 Q e s t s'=:-E-cz266zzx=o-o-oaEEgele.oo.os8=6!!OF-oU'ozozozozozlo torr, C.,l 6 NqoqciovovVovoo= o=E->E->,o-E o-COcL(,,o->o >oocoeozozoq\qqcYaqqqc?rr,N\f(o60(oro(oF-eolol.tF(\-ga?@$tsaoqi(9lo'oN@N(,qrtoAAF-$ l.- (O (OEa q_q-\3qEcE.c o $ootoE<oi.r5or=di;@ -"-E-g-r=E-;o;."g' (oO(l)c-ooo)o,z@.c.E9irEEs'PE E E E 3 EipisEeEeEE;fr#eEe E,i d,! cj =- ci =- d -9 d _q d g, o E o cifL_bbg988-s-s'E'SegFFEEorot99ri,iqur=-;F,=g.SBgBH=#e#s!r5* Ig e g : H # EE i iEE€€fl8r.;.,'O'EsisEsEsEsssEsts=sEq$q$f$+$E$E$e$E$E$EEBEBEBEByBYBTS;3;3;=F=F5F5H8FEH#H#F#H#ccccrrrtrt.E-E-E-AEEEEEEoooo.nEd.d.Ed.EtrCEECCCEEE€€€€€€€€€!sEsEsEe!e!sEeEeEeEals6i\lr)e!oooo)sl(?)+rtq(t,o6too)(,)GTLe")q;=#dITEEEIgz-s9olr Il'=()! o<op,(/,EEoS-.2 oa6=.=*H5.nootf@=op.E=oEJ!U,PO';lt;oP'Ega2€ioR- O-eEs*tsl- OE'<&I .q,=(Do.-,rbo'0a9c'Etr=-:EO!CU'Eosta?sf$q(f)5N9E=3EEFE BU'>DYoEEi'6+o9EEocE(!<nta!oo€.cc) (,)(v) c&ur;^=-oNO+r ai-oEoo-z?b90E ..5\U(f)oNo)c\loo+. *,o.Eooc\loo)o)(5ILEii!tr.sEtr'6=(,=o6toooz*jl(r}lal0)lolEI(5Ialclol.>lol(5lLIelol.>l=lalolol-lalFILI(l)llEI(5lalalx(ElEI(EIdel,l>IolololEIol-clelolEItr.9o(,ogELEIEoE.9CL(,6oo-cEozo,coouJtioLox[rJq)c.N([o=oEc=E(,-cfoao,E=ootuiio.Eoxtuo,c.Noo=oEc5oLC'oo=OJ.EEfdl.co=rioLo)xIJJc,,E.No(,=oEE=o=s=tfoU)o._csJd].co=fo.Eox[uo,c.No(,=oEc=o-c=ooErio)ELooootaiio(5Jo-oFEo).E-caEc)-o-ooFoG)LEFcooLoLoooo)=i.qLLc'oric)(5Jo.oF-qo)._c-cCDEo-o-o(UFo)oL-cFcooLo-vLoooc)=foELoopo-cU)riooJEoIodI-qo).c-cU)o0)-o-ooFc)o)g-cF.Yolomo.9lrEcL(,ocL(,EcLooEL(,ootoottsooE_E.Ec'L- 5o=iEE=6ooo(,Eoo(,1f,oo(,ooooLoo(LLooo_ooTLoo.Eo(E=o.oo.9(-).ut=o.o=o.9o.9.o.9o.ClE3zoo.ElEood]oNod]c!o(oodI(f)osoIIo,sf(ossoc"joNIo)rt(f,$soc.joC\IIo)s(osso(fioNIo,$(9$$oc.joNIo)$(f)+\todoNIo)$(f)+sloc"jo6lIo)s(ossodoN=lolII$lNIatEi=!,tr=o(!trFoEA^_oce.do>H€F=(Dop€3eoclH8l'l/,lrLt(aolc\t (l)lF: .cloo!(oclilEltr 6looloilE=IJ=l(f)qI,*o(o:o)Fo(ot-Pzj6=Ect!EoPOtooE+aDxo!;oE.ErU-oo&E6'D 'n6aJ6adNfl€f,r-lG\r<3F{3\\3)-lootrlENElr{;<H NoNo)o)([(Ltro(E(,oeCLE(Uotr.9eooooloo=o.o)LLc'oiic)oJtr6otml-l(1)I6,cl-clalEIol-ol-ol(EIFId)lEI-clFI-Ylol(EId]Ialol=lo)lEICIBl<lYIfl8l-Ylol(EIcolaDlol=l_toi.clcl=l<t-,ilfl(Ulol-Ylol(ElMIo.9lI.tsootootoot.s .9o=OE!so-oLoo(Looo(,EooC'oCLF.E'tro(U=o.9.=o.q=o.oollEzgCLEIEomsoroo(I]rooIo)s(f)s$o(fioNIo)t(o+$oc"joNIo)s(as$oc.joNoooootat,TEflooGo:(olrlolNIo)lsl-lol(Elalflol-l$lNIa;Ei=toGtro)l$l(f)illfl\flcl(olFIolNIG'zoo00-o=otC'zC)6,'Elo-lEIolololLILI,PIalolEIol-clFI>lmlEIololololol=aL0))0)!c)1D)dEE=@op€3*tBgo-<u)oclsXlEEI.alrLt(.)olc\r (1)lFi .clool(o clxEltr 6lo trloilE=I-=l(9^lt-o@:oFo(ot-(f)zJo=EE[rJEootLo)o-oo-o(o@mc6G?Gr'?cr?G{t-iici"62<fF{E\\=l-{ iElINEF{;<H 15 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax: 607.231.6650 Website: www.deltaengineers.com APPENDIX C Delta Engineers, Architects, & Land Surveyors Company and Personnel Certifications New York State '-Department of Labor Division ofSafety and Health License 4nd CertjicateUhlt State Campusudilding 12 Albany NY 12240 AI0SBESTOS HANDLING LICENSE Delta Engineers & Architects & Land Surveyors, PCI FILE NUMBER: 05-085 1860 eLICENSE NUMBER 29322 860 Hooper Roa LICENSE CLASS: RESTRICTED DATE OF ISSUE 08/08/2013 EndweIll NY 13760 EXPIRATIO4 DATE: 09/30/2014 Duly Authonzed>Representative- Anthony R Panjccla PE This licepsebhs been issued in accordiance with picaberosio oof the Labor Law of New YorkState and of> the New Yo tate Codes, Rules an Regufati NYCRPart $6 Itissubject to suspension or revocation for a (1) seijous violatioq ot state, federal o o laws w codut of n bestos pro or (2) demoimtrated l'ck of responsibility in the conduct of anyWjob involving bestos or asbestos mateuS1 I -q---'Ck''W Q Thheens is v only for the contractor na e and Copy mustbe mine displayd at the asbes project worsite. This ljcense verifies that all persons eployd by the licensee on an asbestos projetinNew York State have been'issued an Abests Certificate, appropriate forlth typeof work they perform, by the New York Sate Departmenbt ofL4bor. NZ ko, Acting Director SH 432 (8/12) For the Commissioner of Labor STATE OF NEW YORK -DEPARTMENT OF LABOR ASBESTOS CERTIFICATE TH O EC(12/13) P(12fi3) DMV# 404844888 MUST BE CARRIED ON ASBESTOS PROJECTS li lll1 IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIliIII ll IF FOUND RETURN TO: EYES HAZ NYSDOL -L&C UNIT HAIR BRO ROOM 161A BUILDING 12 HGT 5' 08" STATE OFFICE CAMPUS ALBANY NY 12240 16 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax: 607.231.6650 Website: www.deltaengineers.com APPENDIX D Laboratory Certifications NEWY RK STTEA QEPARIMNT OF HEALT WS R C ER E pre t 2AM I 4tssue~ pl01, 2Q0 EIC'OF APPROVAL FO'R LABORATORYSER VICEveordenew whdpursuetto'solon 502 PubliaHealth Law d Niw~tt*81tae MR. R;~t.A I ....AM. .NY Lb No; 1148 N W tJINV 160176 f atby APROV e as an Envirgnmental Laborator thu categoryENVIROWNTAL ANALYSES SOL ANW AZARbOQU WASTE All approved categoles and/or analytes are listedxbesoi Misoallansous Apbe~s in aPibe9Materlar EPA 0Q01M4/8 2p Asheosin Non-FT [a1 rjtPL ItmaOBg 4gM ~ Asbestee l I fidfl-i Wjet e 1T li Item i§ ~ t~ -M 'o .Jr * B -A 9 - Seaa No 48 Sra o. New oyn8e tc va d ry tade Page f1;To -Pagl -1Of I June 1 1, 2013 Mr. Paul Mucha Amerioa Science TEAM New York, Inc. DBA: AmeriSci New York 117 E. 30th Street New York, NY 10016 Dear Mr. Mucha: UI{ITED sTATE8 DEPARTMEI{T OF COMMERGE Natlonal Inrtltuto of Stendardr and Tochnoloty Gaithersburg, lVlaryland 20899 NWAP Lab Code:200546-0 ,'s[\o"w; I am pleased to inform you that continuing accreditation for specific test methods in Bulk Asbestos Fiber Analysis (PLM) is granted to your organization under the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (|IWAP). This accreditation is effective until June 30,2014, provided that your organization continues to comply with accreditation requirements contained in the NVLAp Procedures. Your Certificate ofAccreditation is enclosed along with a statement ofyour Scope ofAccreditation. You may reproduce these documents in their entirety and announce your organization's accreditation status using the NVLAP symbol and/or term in business publications, the trade press, and other business-oriented literature. Accreditation does not relieve your organization from observing and complying with any applicable existing laws and/or regulations. We are pleased to have you participate in NVLAP and look forward to your oontinued association with this program. If you have any questions conceming your NVLAP accreditation, please direct them to Hazel M, Riohmond, Program Manager, Laboratory Accreditation Program, National lnstitute of Standards and Technology, 100BureauDr. Stop 2140, Gaithersburg, MD 20899-2140; (301) 97s-40r6. Sincerely, {41* il.,tft.l$ Wanen R. Merkel, Chief Laboratory Acoreditation Program Enclosure(s) NIST/NVLAP.'100 Bureau Drlve, Stop 2140. Gaithersburg, MD 20899-2140 hltp://www,nlst. gov/nvlapNv[Ap Nrsr Nv[aa BULK ASBESTOS FIBER ANALYSIS (PLM) National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program SCOPE OF ACCREDITATION TO ISO/IEC 1702522005 AmeriSci New York DBA: AmeriSci New York 117 E. 30th Sheet New York, NY 10016 Mr. Paul Mucha Phone:.212-679-8600 Fax: 212-679-27 1l E-Mail : pmucha@amerisci.com U RL: http://www.amerisci.com .*"on"w""'%u"ffi'-; NVI-zIP CoIIe l8/A0l 18/A03 2013 -07 -01 through 20 1 4-06-30 {4l; fl {,t't"l$ For the National lnstitute of Standards and Technology NVLAP LAB CODE 200546-0 Designation / Des cription EPA 600/M4-82-020: lnterim Method for tle Determination of Asbestos in Bulk Insulation Samples EPA 600/R-93/1 16: Method for the Determination of Asbestos in Bulk Buildins Materials Page 1 of 1 Effective dates NVLAP-0'IS (REV. 2005-05-19) Iultr(!zOJe,q)(go!(!qe(!*!),P.l#l1FSNbVi R€o x6.a Fi* osa'u s*8€ AoNp {slu >..i *g - CsrpI g €F&: a E6,iF > =r'b -.1 ;:Eo Sx <.EEgg # iIzFsFE 5 ES<EFFR )r5. EEfrit,QH Ei $$Es5t6 zE F€ rr Rrq:'54 E$3it+T *E !.HE:H8;62 *e3:BEt e SEdp;x2 - ;EF VEI:* Ft .sEEt = E8g.e ;sE:o:- c\ ^\=o^ xxiE i.r8$ *FEd EE-.EF-lfr)oofl!oNoNFoIJJIoIotF,ei-.9+,(E.tsEoLoortsoo{r,(uoIEtl-El-oo@/ \lt=lp___Jl I\-_J Izlct,o:too,stroEfl-QotF(5oo=Eo(EtrE'FSa-u,Q) rroo^*d--1".AFffi!t*T:-*'0)(E'cI'PTUoootss.Eooo-E(ECCf.9(Ez+Nboc\c'l 17 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax: 607.231.6650 Website: www.deltaengineers.com APPENDIX E Bulk Sample Location Drawing BIG RED BARN BBQ 2040A 2040A_002 2040A_001 2040_005 2040_006 2040_004 2040_007 2040_0 S 2 40_010 204 _015 2040 0 1 2040 012 2040_008 2 40_014 2040_003 2040_001 2040 018 or 2040_020 2040_01 BIG RED BARN edL x2040 01 A 20 2 002 2 04 0 204 2 0d 204 023 -204 0013 2040_D19 2040 002 18 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax: 607.231.6650 Website: www.deltaengineers.com APPENDIX F Previous Delta Sample Information Material Asbestos PLM Result TEM Result Bulk Sample Description / Details Type Type % Asbestos % Asbestos 2013.044.210 - 01A 01 2 Paper Backing from yellow Fiberglass Insulation Miscellaneous ND ND ND 2013.044.210 - 01B 01 2 Paper Backing from yellow Fiberglass Insulation Miscellaneous ND ND ND 2013.044.210 - 02A 02 2 Brown Fiber Board from Wall Cavity Miscellaneous ND ND NA 2013.044.210 - 02B 02 2 Brown Fiber Board from Wall Cavity Miscellaneous ND ND NA 2013.044.210 - 03A 03 2 Black Vapor Barrier from Siding Miscellaneous ND ND ND 2013.044.210 - 03B 03 2 Black Vapor Barrier from Siding Miscellaneous ND ND ND Building Code: 2040 Number of Samples Analyzed: PLM - 6 / TEM - 4 860 Hooper Road, Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax 607.231.6640 Client: Cornell University Delta Proj. No.: 2013.044.210 Asbestos Inspector: Jason Green Asbestos Bulk Sample Report Form Sample HA*Floor www.deltaengineers.com HA - Homogenous Area ND - No Asbestos Detected NA - Not Analyzed by Methodology NA/PS - Not Analyzed, Positive Stop TSI - Thermal System Insulation Misc - Miscellaneous Material Trace / < 1% - Non-asbestos by definition Work Order No.: 6304999 Date Sampling Performed: 8/19/13 Date of Report: 8/21/13 Laboratory: AmeriSci Labs Number of Samples Collected: 6 Number Project: Big Red Barn Renovation Work Asbestos Bulk Sampling Cornell University Big Red Barn Renovation Work Asbestos Bulk Sampling Page 1 of 1 AmeriSci New York 117 EAST 30TH ST. AMERI Sci NEW YORK, NY 10016 TEL: (212) 679-8600 * FAX: (212) 679-3114 -PLM Bulk Asbestos Report Delta Engineers Date Received 08/20/13 AmeriSci Job # 213084152 Attn: Stephen Prislupsky Date Examined 08/21/13 P.O. # 860 Hooper Road ELAP # 11480 Page 1 of 2 RE: 2013.044.210; C.U.; Red Barn -Limited Pre-Reno. Survey Endwell, NY 13760 Client No. I HGA Lab No. Asbestos Present Total % Asbestos 2013.044.210-01A 213084152-01 No NAD 01 Location: Floor 2 -Paper Backing From Yellow Glass InsI (by NYS ELAP 198.6) by David W. Roderick on 08/21/13 Analyst Description: Black/Brown, Homogeneous, Non-Fibrous, Bulk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: Non-fibrous 1.9 % 2013.044.210-01 B 213084152-02 No NAD 01 Location: Floor 2 -Paper Backing From Yellow Glass InsI (by NYS ELAP 198.6) by David W. Roderick on 08/21/13 Analyst Description: Black/Brown, Homogeneous, Non-Fibrous, Bulk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: Non-fibrous 1.4 % 2013.044.210-02A 213084152-03 No NAD 02 Location: Floor 2 -Brown Fiber Board From Wall Cavity (by NYS ELAP 198.1) by David W. Roderick on 08/21/13 Analyst Description: Brown, Homogeneous, Fibrous, Bulk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: Cellulose 100 %, Non-fibrous Trace 2013.044.210-02B 213084152-04 No NAD 02 Location: Floor 2 -Brown Fiber Board From Wall Cavity (by NYS ELAP 198.1) by David W. Roderick on 08/21/13 Analyst Description: Brown, Homogeneous, Fibrous, Bulk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: Cellulose 100 %, Non-fibrous Trace 2013.044.210-03A 213084152-05 No NAD 03 Location: Floor 2 -Black Vapor Barrier From Siding (by NYS ELAP 198.6) by David W. Roderick on 08/21/13 Analyst Description: Black, Homogeneous, Non-Fibrous, Bulk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: Non-fibrous 1 % See Reporting notes on last page AmeriSci Job #: 213084152 Page 2 of 2 Client Name: Delta Engineers PLM Bulk Asbestos Report 2013.044.210; C.U.; Red Barn -Limited Pre-Reno. Survey Client No. I HGA Lab No. Asbestos Present Total % Asbestos 2013.044.210-03B 213084152-06 No NAD 03 Location: Floor 2 -Black Vapor Barrier From Siding (by NYS ELAP 198.6) by David W. Roderick on 08/21/13 Analyst Description: Black, Homogeneous, Non-Fibrous, Bulk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: Non-fibrous 2.1 % Reporting Notes: Analyzed by: David W. Roderick *NAD/NSD =no asbestos detecterNA =not analyzed; NA/PS=not analyzed/positive stop; PLM Bulk Asbestos Analysis by EPA 600/M4-82-020 per 40 CFR 763 (NVLAP Lab Code 200546-0), ELAP PLM Method 198.1 for NY friable samples, which includes the identification and quantitation of vermiculite or 198.6 for NOB samples (NY ELAP Lab ID1 1480); Note:PLM is not consistently reliable in detecting asbestos in floor coverings and similar non-friable organically bound materials. NAD or Trace results by PLM are inconclusive, TEM is currently the only method that can be used to determine if this material can be considered or treated as non asbestos-containing in NY State (also see EPA Advisory for floor tile, FR 59,146,38970,8/1/94) National Institute of Standards and Technology Accreditation requirements mandate that this report must not be reproduced except in full without the approval of the lab.This PLM report relates ONL to the items tes ed. AlHA Lab # 102843, RI Cert#AAL-094, CT Cert#PH-0186, Mass Cert#AA000054. Reviewed By: _ _ _END OF REPORT_ AmeriSci Job #: 213084152 Page 1 of 1 Client Name: Delta Engineers Table I Summary of Bulk Asbestos Analysis Results 2013.044.210; C.U.; Red Barn -Limited Pre-Reno. Survey Sample Heat Acid Insoluble AneriSci HG Weight Sensitive Soluble Non-Asbestos Asbestos % by Asbestos % by Sample # Client Sample# Area (gram) Organic % Inorganic % Inorganic % PLMIDS TEM 01 2013.044.210-01A 01 0.105 97.1 1.0 1.9 NAD NAD Location: Floor 2 -Paper Backing From Yellow Glass InsI 02 2013.044.210-01B 01 0.071 95.8 2.8 1.4 NAD NAD Location: Floor 2 -Paper Backing From Yellow Glass Insl 03 2013.044.210-02A 02 -- -- --- NAD NA Location: Floor 2 -Brown Fiber Board From Wall Cavity 04 2013.044.210-02B 02 -- ---- ---- NAD NA Location: Floor 2 -Brown Fiber Board From Wall Cavity 05 2013.044.210-03A 03 0.209 95.7 3.3 1.0 NAD NAD Location: Floor 2 -Black Vapor Barrier From Siding 06 2013.044.210-03B 03 0.236 92.8 5.1 2.1 NAD NAD Location: Floor 2 -Black Vapor Barrier From Siding Analyzed by: John P. KDaltis / e Analyzed 8/21/2013 "Quantitative Analysis (Semi/Full) ulk AsbestosAnalysis -byPA 600/M4-82-020 per 40 CFR or ELAP 198.1 for New York friable samples or ELAP 198.6 for New York NOB samples; TEM (Semi/Full) by EPA 600/R-93/116 (not covered by NVLAP Bulk accreditation) or ELAP 198.4; for New York samples; NAD = no asbestos detected during a quantitative analysis; NA = not analyzed; Trace = <1%; Quantitation for beginning weights of <0.1 grams should be considered as qualitative only; Qualitative Analysis: Asbestos analysis results of "Present" or "NVA = No Visible Asbestos" represents results for Qualitative PLM or TEM Analysis only (no accreditation coverage available from any regulatory agency for qualitative analyses): AIHA Lab # 102843, NVLAP Lab Code 200546-0, NYSDOH ELAP Lab ID#11480. Warning Note: PLM limitation, only TEM will resolve fibers <0.25 micrometers in diameter. TEM bulk analysis is representative of the fine grained matrix material and may not be representative of non-uniformly dispersed debris for which PL valuation is reco ended (i.e. soils and other heterogenous materials). Reviewed By: ENGIN ITrET ANDS 2 130 8 4 1 5 2 860 Hooper Road, Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax 607.231.6640ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, & LAND SURVEYORS 2 30 41 2wwdlanier~o www.deltaenqineers.com Bulk Sample Data Sheet/COC Client: C. (U. Delta Project No.: 0 VV 2q-/ Date: F / / F -yProject: ;2ece Client Project No.: Turnaround Time: Mhours I- LVOV f Collected By: -g3- o )4 L Sample Number Material Type Materia Floor Description Sample Loation________________ __ ____ ___ Condition Instructions: Analyze all non-NOB samples by NYS ELAP 198.1 PLM methodology. Analyze all NOB samples initially by NYS ELAP 198.6PLM methodology. If all samples from a given sample set are reported as non-asbestos by 198.6, analyze by NYS ELAP 198.4 TEMmethodology. Stop analysis after 1st Positive for a given sample set. Email Results to wohnsonDWdeltaennineers.com, sprisluDskybdeltaenineers.com. rcherevkofdeltaenaineers.com Notes: Submitted By: T A o T{'/~ ; Date: __ /___'_ Received B :(igature) Date: (Si ture) Page I of AP Material Asbestos PLM Result TEM Result Bulk Sample Description / Details Type Type % Asbestos % Asbestos 2013.044.233 - 01A 01 1 Green Papered Sheetrock/Men's Room - North Wall Misc.ND ND NA 2013.044.233 - 01B 01 1 Green Papered Sheetrock/Utility Closet - Ceiling Misc.ND ND NA 2013.044.233 - 02A 02 1 White Joint Compound/Men's Room - Under Sink Misc.ND ND NA 2013.044.233 - 02B 02 1 White Joint Compound/Utility Closet - South East Corner Misc.ND ND NA 2013.044.233 - 03A 03 1 Dark Gray Hardwood Flooring Mastic - Central Misc.ND ND ND 2013.044.233 - 03B 03 1 Dark Gray Hardwood Flooring Mastic - Central North Misc.ND ND ND 2013.044.233 - 04A 04 B White Metal Decking Coating - Basement Ceiling Misc.ND ND NA 2013.044.233 - 04B 04 B White Metal Decking Coating - Basement Ceiling Misc.ND ND NA HA - Homogenous Area ND - No Asbestos Detected NA - Not Analyzed by Methodology NA/PS - Not Analyzed, Positive Stop TSI - Thermal System Insulation Misc - Miscellaneous Material Trace / < 1% - Non-asbestos by definition Building Code: 2040 Laboratory: AmeriSci Labs Number of Samples Analyzed: PLM - 2 / TEM - 8 Asbestos Bulk Sample Report Form Sample HA*Floor Number 860 Hooper Road, Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax 607.231.6640 www.deltaengineers.com Client: Cornell University Work Order No.: 6364539 Delta Proj. No.: 2013.044.233 Project: Big Red Barn Electrical Wire Up-Grade Project Asbestos Bulk Sampling Services Date Sampling Performed: 9/20/13 & 9/25/13 Asbestos Inspector: T. Ferro/R. Mosher Date of Report: 10/01/13 Number of Samples Collected: 8 Cornell University Big Red Barn Electrical Renovation Project Asbestos Bulk Sampling Page 1 of 1 AmeriSci New York 117 EAST 30TH ST. AMERI Sc NEW YORK, NY 10016 TEL: (212) 679-8600 * FAX: (212) 679-3114 PLM Bulk Asbestos Report Delta Engineers Date Received 09/21/13 AmeriSci Job # 213093539 Attn: Stephen Prislupsky Date Examined 09/21/13 P.O. # 860 Hooper Road ELAP # 11480 Page 1 of 2 RE: 2013.044.233; Cornell University; Big Red Barn, New Endwell, NY 13760 Electrical Wire Upgrade Client No. I HGA Lab No. Asbestos Present Total % Asbestos 2013.044.233-01 A 213093539-01 No NAD 01 Location: 1st Floor -Green Papered Sheetrock / Men's Room -North Wall (by NYS ELAP 198.1) by Ella Babayeva on 09/21/13 Analyst Description: Grey/Green/Tan, Homogeneous, Fibrous, Bulk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: Cellulose 25 %, Fibrous glass Trace, Non-fibrous 75 % 2013.044.233-01 B 213093539-02 No NAD 01 Location: 1st Floor -Green Papered Sheetrock / Utility Closet -Ceiling (by NYS ELAP 198.1) by Ella Babayeva on 09/21/13 Analyst Description: Grey/GreenlTan, Homogeneous, Fibrous, Bulk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: Cellulose 20 %, Fibrous glass Trace, Non-fibrous 80 % 2013.044.233-02A 213093539-03 No NAD 02 Location: 1st Floor -White Joint Compound / Men's Room -Under Sink (by NYS ELAP 198.1) by Ella Babayeva on 09/21/13 Analyst Description: White, Homogeneous, Non-Fibrous, Bulk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: Non-fibrous 100 % 2013.044.233-02B 213093539-04 No NAD 02 Location: 1st Floor -White Joint Compound / Utility Closet -Southeast Corner (by NYS ELAP 198.1) by Ella Babayeva on 09/21/13 Analyst Description: White, Homogeneous, Non-Fibrous, Bulk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: Non-fibrous 100 % See Reporting notes on last page AmeriSci Job #: 213093539 Page 2 of 2 Client Name: Delta Engineers PLM Bulk Asbestos Report 2013.044.233; Cornell University; Big Red Barn, New Electrical Wire Upgrade Reporting Notes: Analyzed by: Ella Babayeva *NAD/NSD =no asbestos detec d; NA =nolanalyzed; NA/PS=not analyzed/positive stop; PLM Bulk Asbestos Analysis by EPA 600/M4-82-020 per 40 CFR 763 (NVLAP Lab Code 200546-0), ELAP PLM Method 198.1 for NY friable samples, which includes the identification and quantitation of vermiculite or 198.6 for NOB samples (NY ELAP Lab ID1 1480); Note:PLM is not consistently reliable in detecting asbestos in floor coverings and similai non-friable organically bound materials. NAD or Trace results by PLM are inconclusive, TEM is currently the only method that can be used to determine if this material can be considered or treated as non asbestos-containing in NY State (also see EPA Advisory for floor tile, FR 59,146,38970,8/1/94) National Institute of Standards and Technology Accreditation requirements mandate that this report must not be reproduced except in full without the approval of the lab.This PLM report relates ONLY to the items tested. AIHA Lab # 102843, RI Cert#AAL-094, CT Cert#PH-0186, Mass Cert#AA000054. Reviewed By: _END OF REPORT Aur:nrScr Delta Engineers Attn: Stephen Prislupsky 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 AmeriSci New York 117 EAST3OTH ST. NEWYORK, NY 10016 TEL: (212) 679-8600 . Fl'X: (212) 679-3114 PLM Bulk Asbestos Report Date Received 091261t3 AmeriSci Job # 2L3094L34 Date Examined 09126113 P.O. # ELAP #11480 Page 1of2 Big Red Barn, NewRE: 201 3.044.220; Cornell University; Electrical Wire Up-Grade Client No. / HGA Lab No.Asbestos Present Total % Asbestos 2013.044.233-03A 213094134-01 IVo 03 Location: Floor 1 - Dark Gray Hardwood Flooring Mastic - Central Analyst Description: Dark Grey, Homogeneous, Non-Fibrous, Air Asbestos Types: Other Material: Non-fibrous 25.1 o/o NAD (by NYS ELAP 198.6) by MadellE. Collins on 09126113 2013.044.233-038 213094134-02 IVo 03 Location: Floor 1 - Dark Gray Hardwood Flooring Mastic - Central North NAD (by NYS ELAP 198.6) by Madell E. Collins on 09126113 Analyst Description: Asbestos Types: Other Material: Dark Grey, Homogeneous, Non-Fibrous, Air Non-fibrous 1.9 % 2013.044.233-044 213094134-03 IVo 04 Location: Floor B - White Metal Decking Coating - Basement Ceiling Analyst Description: White, Homogeneous, Non-Fibrous, Air Asbestos Types: Other Material: Non-fibrous 100 % NAD (by NYS ELAP 1e8.1) by Madell E. Collins on 09126113 2013.044.233-048 213094134-04 No 04 Location: Floor B - White Metal Decking Coating - Basement Ceiling Analyst Description: White, Homogeneous, Non-Fibrous, Air Asbestos Types: Other Material: Non-fibrous 100 % NAD (by NYS ELAP 1s8.1) by Madell E. Collins on 09126113 See Reporting notes on last page AmeriSci Job #: 213094134 Client Name: Delta Engineers Page 2 of 2 PLM Bulk Asbestos Report 2013.044.220; Cornell University; Big Red Barn, New Electrical Wire Up-Grade Reporting Notes: Analyzed by: Madell E. Collins-NAD/NSD =no asbestos detected; NA =not analyzed; NfuPS=not analyzedlpositive stop; PLM Bulk Asbestos Analysis by EPA 6O0lM4-82-020 per 40 CFR 763 (NVLAP Lab Code 200546-0), ELAP PLM Method 198.1 for NY friable samples, which includes the identification and quantitation of vermiculite or 198.6 for NOB samples (NY ELAP Lab lD'l 1480); Note:PLM is not consistently reliable in detecting asbestos in floor coverings and similar non-friable organically bound materials. NAD or Trace results by PLM are inepnclusive, TEM is currenUy the only method that can be used to determine if this material can be considered or treated as non asbestos-containing in NY State (also see EPA Advisory for floor tile, FR 59,146,38970,811194) National lnstitute of Standards and Technology Accreditation requirements mandate that this report must not be reproduced except in full without the approval of the lab.This PLM report relates ONLY to the items tested. AIHA Lab # 102843, Rl Cert#AAL-094, CT Cert#PH-0186, Mass Cert#AA000054. Reviewed By:.END OF REPORT oo)gEo)oEo.oo-clocc,EEcoE'co)oEx6EooEo)ocooo(EcO -j.thaEEo.'Eoo@g'-E'3q>6(UCcq)(E(,):29=o56r.rt bF€ioo-ocE(u6(,E'5COoQ)L.j(l)vEIEfiOEts0).EEREds)V;?.'=8.bol>Eo>oa95=(L<-c1O1! '=FE5e_ox-'EoOO'=EEO=oso-o-=oito>OEZEor€LE'Frtrl_6L3PrO-i1*Ul: o--E*iEHi9ut\ O.>i9zi'. q'ts'(I)|r)-oo,60, { C.,li3g..o (J')ooQZJ,,(L+rzzbs!O=N6oU,rE+rO- -oroo-oSa4.9;--q o)aO;>(U(!CC(EooOo>Eg8E<dHS.>>6()CC(oEB'=>EEE.gfJao):.Eiaf(E9e=OgE=oYOi-qa'6E>,oDO9EiOJ>i8.cao..Et(UIElorC).ol(Uio,cD-Eo..2oEcr<lrJ,Fb=J(Loo=qc;6Sb:btt9AEs"'E€':-O;gg,E 9iF;!69i;gi+xi.q E;#srEOrvz9rrESEZ5iroElo)o:cu,'E q):EF.8b'Ec;6d.o 9;8;l6al(l) 4 j-o(utacl(u(E(o(,)(c o-lAEi5eiis g jEi;F$EE9IeEi3Esoi==o8E5;.- c atOG;E€t qEil6(o589]t: oiooES EIEfiiES. Y'E;o.g,dE.aa)IqH:EPi o,;:F=td b,L .qo t,ee.94'g>E'H!o'ts=OJ-o(L€gb.EEEr'Eaacvr3rifEiIo)oE=l_lJJEt_ft(')->(D6:oF3Pc0ll2*:.-FAi6O'Cz.rL (l)o>q .g:coEo c;eGl_f3r,IJ P'o!oD!3.4 rtro!N dri3EiiEi=o!2 A!:.o (>ol-(u(i I jaI tl.oI:rxi;.c.!ou, Eoii3n'* 9isEiaE'zolg..€->'a o@oO, .>;E<6J=uJobEFr:^oE9xctro90js=Oo3o-.c<U'JA>trzd=lJJFuioEEooc0oztoio,zo(odo)(L5UJo6'o.EEo@''Pr-OrGrt(LJo(>(=!orzl€:1Z@:,9_!tEi!-!oStlIL,o2OL!rcf.iREoForoflisodO+(oc<€ft€> (,)-ob--.,E I(L!,povo-$;Hgu?e=8DO.- c=@i:>\=(r)-- cnDta8.qao?<.:lL l(lllre.B-ji^tatL ), E.I Oo'9iIYlrl(D_-lLLEo)a.atooco.F(!,Fcof,ozozozlts8=6uJOFtttni';",r=#dIozIcDR-IIqn!rcDii(") st(?)oNt\Eo,EoN6co(uoEco@J-9oEoNEcitEE2ppEE6E_ iotoSiErEoo)rEe.Y (' o.)s++9' o) o)i3E3EYO(U.!loor.t (J oE PPxtrp<om(I)8393ttrl.g<'rSI?c., o (o ing$E$;to'=o.=SPip;rOtOl-NoNcos€r[lItLEEE866SeEsEPo:(obrooIoo(,=o).E <.1bootrEoo3E(nfB-(oORo+{38P,OFGtooI,L(f,fis$3odlEo=oot.9(t,U- Qruo-oooo)(grLo.9SEg:E{$!cootrz's9ot It=9J.U<oE,u, 6)oS-.1 o(! ='=g9E-gE.9CLE.l,oo)pEIo-fo9E=o6OoE,'Eol/,a)g7lJ.JE6FZ,<E8Eo6E.Ct !D 0a(Erl^r{E'.YS-.==otrgo5FEEOEc)(,,Xq!tsq(r)roN=^!c3EB9o3r<rtt-9 1o.lEI(Elol-tEIsl'ts rto.9,'tr cLOEtraE< ttaoo!..cc) cr)sfioo96NO#ai-oEOo-z'O P-?b90E Page 1 of 1 f;>EUEE]:I-{?\\EHH>t!=tn9)3="GIg!J!,U,ooor}@oO=o!ortoaPIl:o€-gZO{oO-lIO)O:'.1lvOc)O-rl$xo:'jN]G)b)o)(not\9l+-r.€i9oqottrIFL33rf5a=I=q.foo{,c3!.}hh'\lvtbu$t\trttrlT.d\C.$h\(.tx\{{,\\\\ooNNN,a\.qoobo(DoapaIN\..\\. l\s\t-r(^tr-Noorocntroo\w!)Eol-o{)q,oE(Duob-oaooE\E-.Joo-nooo.lrtr,\N{'(6'=o)rar}q,ILxl)INtsl-iI *--o^tC Cornell University Limited Interior Lead-Based Paint Survey Report Performed at Big Red Barn Building 2040 For the Roofing/Windows Renovation Project Ithaca, New York Campus Prepared for: Mr. Dale Houseknecht, Asbestos Project Coordinator Cornell University Maintenance Management 116 Humphreys Service Building, Ithaca, NY 14853 Prepared by: 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607-231-6600 Fax: 607-231-6640 www.deltaengineers.com Delta Project No. 2013.044.349 Cornell Work Order No. 6617357 Field work performed by: Robert Mosher: January 3 rd, 2014 Report prepared by: Robert Mosher Report reviewed by: Stephen Prislupsky 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax: 607.231.6650 Website: www.deltaengineers.com EXECUTIVE SUMMARY Delta Engineers, Architects, & Land Surveyors (Delta) was contracted by Cornell University, to provide a "limited" interior lead paint survey at the Big Red Barn (Building 2040) located on the Cornell Ithaca, New York Campus in support of the Roofing/Window Renovation Project. Delta Representative Robert Mosher conducted the limited XRF Lead Based Paint Survey on January 3rd. 2014 and addressed ONLY suspect interior painted surfaces in accessible rooms. Representative XRF sampling following HUD Protocol was performed on interior surfaces and components. Delta took four hundred and sixty-four (64) assays (plus 3 "pre" and 3 "post" calibration assays) of observed painted surfaces and components utilizing the XRF analyzer to determine the presence of lead-based paint at the building. APPLICABLE STANDARDS/GUIDELINES: The standards used to identify lead-based paint for this survey were taken from the OSHA 1926.62 (Lead) Standard, modification of the guidelines established by the U.S. Department of Housing and Urban Development (HUD) as well as New York State regulations. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) On May 4, 1993, OSHA promulgated the Lead Exposure in Construction Rule and codified the regulation in Title 29, CFR, Part 1926.62. This particular regulation applies to all construction activities involving potential lead exposures. This regulation defines construction work as "work for construction, alteration, and/or repair including painting and decorating". It further states "the standard for the construction industry applies to all occupational exposure to lead in all construction work in which lead, in any amount, is present in an occupationally related context where the source of the lead is employment related, all exposure to lead is covered by the standard." U.S. Department of Housing and Urban Development (HUD) The U.S. Department of Housing and Urban Development (HUD) defines the action level for lead-based paint as a lead content equal to or greater than 1.0 milligrams of lead per square centimeter of painted surface (> 1.0 mg Pb/cm 2 ) when measured with an XRF analyzer, or 0.5 percent by weight when chemically tested. This definition is described in the HUD "Lead- Based Paint: Interim Guidelines for Hazard Identification and Abatement in Public and Indian Housing, September 1990." New York State The State of New York's definition of the action level for lead-based paint is consistent with the level established by HUD. The State is in the process of adopting LBP regulations which are based on the HUD guidelines and currently enforces only licensing/certification requirements. 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 I I Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax: 607.231.6650ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, & LAND SURVEYORS wbieWebsite: www.deltaengineers.com SAMPLING METHODS/PROCEDURES: Delta performed sampling utilizing a RMD LPA-1 XRF Lead Paint Analyzer. The Lead Paint Analyzer is a state-of-the-art XRF spectrum analyzing system for the quantitative measurement of lead in paint on any surface. The LPA- 1 Analyzer uses a Co-57 radioactive source and an advanced, solid-state, room temperature, radiation detector to generate and detect the x-ray fluorescence spectrum of a painted surface. The x-ray fluorescence properties are determined through calibration process and are used for automatic substrate correction and calculation of the lead content of a painted surface. The RMD XRF Lead Paint Analyzer is operated with guidance from the Performance Characteristic Sheet' developed by Quan Tech, Inc. under a contract from the U.S. Department of Housing and Urban Development (HUD). The instrument has an action level of 1.0 mg/cm 2 with results at or above this value classified as Lead-Based Paint as per the applicable HUD and NYS regulations referenced above. Results reported as greater than 0.0 mg/cm 2 are considered Lead-Containing Paint as per the OSHA standards. RESULTS Delta took 64 individual assays of interior painted wall and ceiling surfaces present in the Big Red Barn Building 2040 of which NONE were positive for the presence of lead as per the NYS and HUD >/= 1.0 mg/cm 2 Criteria referenced above for Lead Based Paint. Six (6) were reported as being lead-containing paint as per the OSHA "> 0.0 mg/cm 2 and < 1.0 mg/cm 2 s criteria. The remaining fifty-eight (58) assays were reported as being less than or equal to 0.0 mg/cm 2 .As defined by Industry guidelines, for purposes of identifying/locating the various surfaces and components included in this survey, the wall in which one enters a room is referenced as "Wall A", with Wall B immediately to the left of "A" and Walls C and D continuing clockwise around the room. Wall paper Wndow \~ - ~oor Appendix A includes the Overall XRF Lead Paint Report Form listing all individual assay results, sampling locations and details. Appendix B includes the XRF Lead Paint Report Form listing all individual assay results reported as falling within the OSHA Lead-Containing Paint Criteria. Appendix C includes Company and Personnel license and certification paperwork. 1-HUD has determined that the PCS information is acceptable when used in conjunction with Chapter 7, Lead Based Paint Inspection of HUD's Guidelines for the Evaluation and Control ofLead-Based Paint Hazards in Housing. 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 1Gi! C/R TE 8, 8L EE 3Fax: 607.231.6650 Website: www.deltaengineers.com APPENDIX A Big Red Barn Building 2040 Survey Report Overall XRF Lead Paint Report Form 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, & LAND SURVEYORS Fax: 607.231.6650 Website: www.deltaengineers.com Client: Cornell University Work Order No.: 6617357 Delta Proj. No.: 2013.044.349 Project: Big Red Barn (Bldg, 2040) Pre- Date Sampling Performed: 1/3/14 Inspector(s): Robert Mosher Renovation XRF Lead Paint Survey Date of Report: 1/10/14 Number of XRF Readings: 70 Overall XRF Lead-Based Paint Sample Report Form Sample ID Building Room Floor Wall Test Location Color Substrate XRF Reading No. 1 Calibration 1.0 2 Calibration 1.0 3 Calibration 1.1 4 Big Red Barn -2040 Main Dining 1 B Pipe Jacket Black Metal </= 0.0 5 Big Red Barn -2040 Main Dining 1 B Fire Place Covering Black Metal </= 0.0 6 Big Red Barn -2040 Main Dining 1 B Wood Stove Black Metal </= 0.0 7 Big Red Barn -2040 Main Dining 1 C Electric Conduit Black Metal </= 0.0 8 Big Red Barn -2040 Main Dining 1 C Electric Conduit Black Metal </= 0.0 9 Big Red Barn -2040 Main Dining 1 C Chair Rail Black Metal </= 0.0 10 Big Red Barn -2040 Main Dining 1 C Chair Rail Support Black Metal </= 0.0 11 Big Red Barn -2040 Main Dining 1 C Window Frame Black Metal </= 0.0 12 Big Red Barn -2040 Main Dining 1 C Window Sash Red Wood 0.4 13 Big Red Barn -2040 Main Dining 1 D Window Sash Red Wood 0.4 14 Big Red Barn -2040 Main Dining 1 D Window Frame Black Metal </= 0.0 15 Big Red Barn -2040 Main Dining 1 D Electric Conduit Black Metal </= 0.0 16 Big Red Barn -2040 Main Dining 1 B Chair Rail Black Metal </= 0.0 17 Big Red Barn -2040 Main Dining 1 D Chair Rail Support Black Metal </= 0.0 Cornell University Standards Big Red Barn Bldg 2040 OSHA 1926.62 -> 0.0 mg/cm 2 XRF Serial No.: 2746 XRF Interior Lead Paint Survey NYS/HUD ->/= 1.0 mg/cm 2 Page 1 of 5 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, & LAND SURVEYORS Fax: 607.231.6650 Website: www.deltaengineers.com Client: Cornell University Work Order No.: 6617357 Delta Proj. No.: 2013.044.349 Project: Big Red Barn (Bldq, 2040) Pre- Date Sampling Performed: 1/3/14 Inspector(s): Robert Mosher Renovation XRF Lead Paint Survey Date of Report: 1/10/14 Number of XRF Readings: 70 Overall XRF Lead-Based Paint Sample Report Form Sample ID Building Room Floor Wall Test Location Color Substrate XRF Reading No. 18 Big Red Barn -2040 Main Dining 1 D Electrical Box Black Metal </= 0.0 19 Big Red Barn -2040 Main Dining 1 B Door Red Wood </= 0.0 20 Big Red Barn -2040 Main Dining 1 B Door Frame Red Wood </= 0.0 21 Big Red Barn -2040 Main Dining 1 B Door Red Wood </= 0.0 22 Big Red Barn -2040 Main Dining 1 B Door Frame Red Wood </= 0.0 23 Big Red Barn -2040 Main Dining 1 Sprinkler Line Black Metal </= 0.0 24 Big Red Barn -2040 Main Dining 1 Sprinkler Line Support Black Metal </= 0.0 25 Big Red Barn -2040 Main Dining 1 Sprinkler Line Support Black Metal </= 0.0 26 Big Red Barn -2040 Main Dining 1 B Stair Stringer Black Metal 0.2 27 Big Red Barn -2040 Main Dining 1 B Hand Rail Black Metal 0.8 28 Big Red Barn -2040 Main Dining 1 B Stair Stringer Black Metal 0.3 29 Big Red Barn -2040 Main Dining 1 B Stringer Support Black Metal </= 0.0 30 Big Red Barn -2040 Main Dining 1 B Tread Support Black Metal </= 0.0 31 Big Red Barn -2040 Main Dining 1 B Tread Support Black Metal </= 0.0 32 Big Red Barn -2040 Main Dining 1 B Stair Support Red Metal </= 0.0 33 Big Red Barn -2040 Main Dining 1 C Stair Support Red Metal </= 0.0 34 Big Red Barn -2040 Men's Room 1 A Wall Beige Sheetrock </= 0.0 Cornell University Standards Big Red Barn Bldg 2040 OSHA 1926.62 -> 0.0 mg/cm XRF Serial No.: 2746 XRF Interior Lead Paint Survey NYS/HUD ->/= 1.0 mg/cm 2 Page 2 of 5 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 NGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, & LAND SURVEYORS Fax: 607.231.6650 Website: www.deltaengineers.com Client: Cornell University Work Order No.: 6617357 Delta Proj. No.: 2013.044.349 Project: Bic Red Barn (Bldq, 2040) Pre- Date Sampling Performed: 1/3/14 Inspector(s): Robert Mosher Renovation XRF Lead Paint Survey Date of Report: 1/10/14 Number of XRF Readings:70 Overall XRF Lead-Based Paint Sample Report Form Sample ID Building Room Floor Wall Test Location Color Substrate XRF Reading No. 35 Big Red Barn -2040 Men's Room 1 B Wall Beige Sheetrock </= 0.0 36 Big Red Barn -2040 Men's Room 1 B Light Black Metal </= 0.0 37 Big Red Barn -2040 Men's Room 1 D Radiator Black Metal </= 0.0 38 Big Red Barn -2040 Men's Room 1 Ceiling Pink Sheetrock </= 0.0 39 Big Red Barn -2040 Men's Room 1 Sprinkler Line Black Metal </= 0.0 40 Big Red Barn -2040 Men's Room 1 Light Black Metal </= 0.0 41 Big Red Barn -2040 Men's Room 1 A Towel Dispenser Black Metal </= 0.0 42 Big Red Barn -2040 Serving Area 1 B Wall White Sheetrock </= 0.0 43 Big Red Barn -2040 Serving Area 1 B Serving Line Orange Wood </= 0.0 44 Big Red Barn -2040 Serving Area 1 C Serving Line Orange Wood </= 0.0 45 Big Red Barn -2040 Serving Area 1 C Wall White Sheetrock </= 0.0 46 Big Red Barn -2040 Serving Area 1 C Wall Orange Sheetrock </= 0.0 47 Big Red Barn -2040 Serving Area 1 C Wall Red Wood </= 0.0 48 Big Red Barn -2040 Serving Area 1 C Wall Red Wood </= 0.0 49 Big Red Barn -2040 Serving Area 1 Ceiling Orange Sheetrock </= 0.0 50 Big Red Barn -2040 Serving Area 1 Ceiling White Sheetrock </= 0.0 51 Big Red Barn -2040 Serving Area 1 Floor Door Red Metal </= 0.0 Cornell University Standards Big Red Barn Bldg 2040 OSHA 1926.62 -> 0.0 mg/cm XRF Serial No.: 2746 XRF Interior Lead Paint Survey NYS/HUD ->/= 1.0 mg/cm 2 Page 3 of 5 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, & LAND SURVEYORS Fax: 607.231.6650 Website: www.deltaengineers.com Client: Cornell University Work Order No.: 6617357 Delta Proj. No.: 2013.044.349 Project: Big Red Barn (Bldg, 2040) Pre- Date Sampling Performed: 1/3/14 Inspector(s): Robert Mosher Renovation XRF Lead Paint Survey Date of Report: 1/10/14 Number of XRF Readings: 70 Overall XRF Lead-Based Paint Sample Report Form Sample ID Building Room Floor Wall Test Location Color Substrate XRF Reading No. 52 Big Red Barn -2040 Dining Area 2 1 B Electric Conduit Black Metal </= 0.0 53 Big Red Barn -2040 Dining Area 2 1 B Chair Rail Black Metal </= 0.0 54 Big Red Barn -2040 Dining Area 2 1 B Chair Rail Support Black Metal </= 0.0 55 Big Red Barn -2040 Dining Area 2 1 C Door Red Wood </= 0.0 56 Big Red Barn -2040 Dining Area 2 1 C Door Frame Red Wood </= 0.0 57 Big Red Barn -2040 Dining Area 2 1 A Sprinkler Line Black Metal </= 0.0 58 Big Red Barn -2040 Balcony 1 B Sprinkler Line Black Metal </= 0.0 59 Big Red Barn -2040 Balcony 1 B Chair Rail Black Metal </= 0.0 60 Big Red Barn -2040 Balcony 1 B Chair Rail Support Black Metal </= 0.0 61 Big Red Barn -2040 Balcony 1 B Electric Conduit Black Metal </= 0.0 62 Big Red Barn -2040 Balcony 1 Ceiling Support Black Metal </= 0.0 63 Big Red Barn -2040 Balcony 1 C Window Frame Black Metal 0.2 64 Big Red Barn -2040 Balcony 1 C Window Red Wood </= 0.0 65 Big Red Barn -2040 Balcony 1 A Pipe Jacket Black Metal </= 0.0 66 Big Red Barn -2040 Balcony 1 B Door Red Metal </= 0.0 67 Big Red Barn -2040 Balcony 1 B Door Frame Red Metal </= 0.0 68 Calibration 0.9 Cornell University Standards Big Red Barn Bldg 2040 OSHA 1926.62 -> 0.0 mg/cm XRF Serial No.: 2746 XRF Interior Lead Paint Survey NYS/HUD ->/= 1.0 mg/cm 2 Page 4 of 5 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 ENGINEERS, A'CHITECTS, & LAND SURVEYORS Fax: 607.231.6650 Website: www.deltaengineers.com Client: Cornell University Work Order No.: 6617357 Delta Proj. No.: 2013.044.349 Project: Biq Red Barn (Bldq, 2040) Pre- Date Sampling Performed: 1/3/14 Inspector(s): Robert Mosher Renovation XRF Lead Paint Survey Date of Report: 1/10/14 Number of XRF Readings: 70 Overall XRF Lead-Based Paint Sample Report Form Sample ID Building Room Floor Wall Test Location Color Substrate XRF Reading No. 69 Calibration 1 1.0 70 Calibration 1.0 Cornell University Standards Big Red Barn Bldg 2040 OSHA 1926.62 -> 0.0 mg/cm XRF Serial No.: 2746 XRF Interior Lead Paint Survey NYS/HUD ->/= 1.0 mg/cm Page 5 of 5 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax: 607.231.6650ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, LAND SURVEYORS WbieL SU'Website: www.deltaengineers.com APPENDIX B Big Red Barn Building 2040 Survey Report Lead-Containing Paint Report Form as per OSHA > 0.0 / < 1.0 mg/cm 2 Criteria Of the total 64 individual assays collected from interior painted surfaces and components sampled in the Big Red Barn (Building 2040), 6 were positive for the presence of lead as per OSHA (> 0.0 / < 1.0 mg/cm 2 ) criteria. 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, & LAND SURVEYORS Fax: 607.231.6650 Website: www.deltaengineers.com Client: Cornell University Work Order No.: 6617357 Delta Proj. No.: 2013.044.349 Project: Big Red Barn (Bldg, 2040) Pre- Date Sampling Performed: 1/3/14 Inspector(s): Robert Mosher Renovation XRF Lead Paint Survey Date of Report: 1/10/14 No. of > 0.0 / < 1.0 XRF Readings: 6 Surfaces and Components coated with Lead-Containing Paint as per OSHA > 0.0 /< 1.0 mg/cm 2 Criteria Sample ID Building Room Floor Wall Test Location Color Substrate XRF Reading No. 12 Big Red Barn -2040 Main Dining 1 C Window Sash Red Wood 0.4 13 Big Red Barn -2040 Main Dining 1 D Window Sash Red Wood 0.4 26 Big Red Barn -2040 Main Dining 1 B Stair Stringer Black Metal 0.2 27 Big Red Barn -2040 Main Dining 1 B Hand Rail Black Metal 0.8 28 Big Red Barn -2040 Main Dining 1 B Stair Stringer Black Metal 0.3 63 Big Red Barn -2040 Balcony 1 C Window Frame Black Metal 0.2 Cornell University Big Red Barn Bldg 2040 Standards XRF Serial No.: 2746 XRF Interior Lead Paint Survey OSHA 1926.62 -> 0.0 mg/cm Page 1 of 1 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 "'MOCS, , 1-11,111 Fax: 607.231.6650ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, & L.AND SURVEYORS Wbie Website: www.deltaengineers.com APPENDIX C Big Red Barn Building 2040 Survey Report License and Certification Paperwork Delta E eers d eors. P.C. has fulfilled the requirements of the Toxic Si nces C i k4'd has received certification to conduct lead-based paint activ urs e O Pa 226 New York This certification is valid from the date of issuance and expires August 10, 2016 NY-68796-2 (dJL Certification # Michelle Price, Chief June 06, 2013 Lead, Heavy Metals, and Inorganics Branch Issued On This is to certi that on the 9th day of February, 2009 successfully completed the factory training for R D's LPA- 1 Lea aint Inspection System if luding, but not limited to the topics of Radiation Safety, DOT Regulations and the Proper Use of the Instrument. Si Afshari Product Manager RMD 44 Hunt St., Watertown, Massachusetts CORNELL SECTION 01 35 43 Ithaca, New York GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL A. This Section and the listed Related Sections provides minimum requirements for the protection of the environment during the project. The requirements of this Section shall apply to both Contractor and all tiers of sub-contractors involved in the project. B. In addition to the requirements of this Section and the listed Related Sections, all laws and regulations by applicable local, state, and federal agencies shall apply to the work of this contract. In some cases the requirements of these Specifications may by intention exceed such legal requirements, but in no case shall this Specification be interpreted or understood to reduce or eliminate such requirements. C. Prior to bidding, review the entire Bidding Documents and report in writing to the Owner's Representative any error, inconsistency, or omission that may have environmental impacts. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01 35 44 -Spill Control B. Section 01 57 13 -Soil Erosion and Sediment Control 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 -Submittals: 1. Material Certifications for all imported soil and granular materials ("borrow"). 2. Waste Disposal Plan. 1.4 JOB SITE ADMINISTRATION A. In accordance with Article 2 of the General Conditions, provide a competent supervisory representative with full authority to act for the Contractor at the site during all working hours. B. If at any time operations under the representative's supervision do not comply with this Section, or the representative is otherwise unsatisfactory to the Owner, replace, if requested by the Owner, said representative with another representative satisfactory to the Owner. There shall be no change in superintendent without the Owner's approval. C. Remove from the Work any employee of the Contractor or any Subcontractor when so directed by the Owner. The Owner may request the removal of any employee who does not comply with these specifications. BIG RED BARN GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS 01 3543-1 STRUCTURAL IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 1.5 CLEARING, SITE PREPARATION AND SITE USE A. The Contractor shall make every effort to avoid the destruction of plants, trees, shrubs and lawns outside the area of construction so as not to unduly disturb the ecological or environmental quality of the area. 1.6 NOISE AND VIBRATION A. Noise and vibration 1. Limit and control the nature and extent of activities at all times to minimize the effects of noise and vibrations. Take adequate measures for keeping noise levels, as produced by construction related equipment, to safe and tolerable limits as set forth by the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA), the New York State Industrial Code Guidelines and Ordinances and all City, Town and Local ordinances. Equip all construction equipment presenting a potential noise nuisance with noise-muffling devices adequate to meet these requirements. 1.7 DUST CONTROL A. Take adequate measures for controlling dust produced by drilling, excavation, backfilling, loading, or other means. The use of calcium chloride or petroleum-based materials for dust control is prohibited. Dust control measures are required throughout the duration of construction. B. If, in the opinion of the Owner's Representative, the Contractor is not adequately controlling dust, the Owner will first notify the Contractor. If the Contractor does not take adequate actions necessary, the Owner may, at the Contractor's expense, employ alternative means to control dust. C. Erect, maintain, and remove when appropriate barriers or other devices, including mechanical ventilation systems, as required by the conditions of the work for the protection of users of the project area, the protection of the work being done, or the containment of dust and debris. All such barriers or devices shall be provided in conformance with all applicable codes, laws, and regulations including OSHA. 1.8 PROTECTION OF THE ENVIRONMENT A. Construction procedures observed by the Contractor, its subcontractors and other employees shall include protection of the environment, in accordance with all pertinent Cornell standards, policies, local laws, executive orders, ordinances, and federal and state regulations. Construction procedures that are prohibited in the undertaking of work associated with this Contract include, but are not limited to: 1. Dumping of spoil material or any liquid or solid pollutant into any storm or sanitary sewer, drainage way, stream sewer, any wetlands (as defined by federal and state regulations), any surface waters, or at unspecified locations. BIG RED BARN GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS 01 3543-2 STRUCTURAL January 17, 2014 IMPROVEMENTS 2. Indiscriminate, arbitrary, or capricious operation of equipment in any stream corridors, any wetlands, or any surface waters. 3. Pumping of any silt-laden water from trenches or other excavations into any storm sewers, sanitary sewers, drainage ways, wetlands, or surface waters. 4. Damaging vegetation beyond the extent necessary for construction of the facilities. 5. Disposal of trees, brush, and other debris in any location on University property, unless such areas are specifically identified on the drawing or in the specifications or specifically approved by the Owner's site representative. 6. Permanent or unspecified alteration of the flow line of a stream. 7. Burning trash, project debris, or waste materials. B. Take all necessary precautions to prevent silt or waste of any kind from entering any drainage or waterways or downstream properties as a result of the Work. C. Runoff of potable water used for concrete curing or concrete truck or chute cleaning operations shall not be allowed to reach the storm water system or open water due to the levels of residual chlorine (New York State water quality standards, 6 NYCRR Part 703.5) and other potential contaminants. If necessary, obtain pennission from the local sewer authority and collect and pump the runoff to the sanitary sewer. D. Limit the nature and extent of any activities that could result in the release or discharge of pollutants. Report any such release or discharge immediately to the Owner's Representative and clean up spills immediately, as detailed in Section 01 35 44 -Spill Control Procedures. 1.9 TEMPORARY RE-ROUTING OF PIPING AND DUCTWORK A. Obtain approval from the Owner's Representative prior to any temporary re-routing of piping and exhaust ductwork necessary for the completion of the Work. Submit re- routing plans to the Owner's Representative in writing. The following shall require approval of the Owner: 1. Temporary storm, sanitary or water line connections. 2. Temporary exhaust ductwork connections where such connections may impact air emissions. B. Instruct all personnel to observe extreme caution when working in the vicinity of mechanical equipment and piping. Personnel shall not operate or tamper with any existing valves, switches, or other devices or equipment without prior approval by the Owner's Representative. BIG RED BARN GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS 01 3543-3 STRUCTURAL January 17, 2014 IMPROVEMENTS 1.10 HAZARDOUS OR TOXIC MATERIALS A. Inform officers, employees, agents, contractors, subcontractors at every tier, and any other party which may come into contact with any hazardous or toxic materials as a result of its performance hereunder of the nature of such materials, and any health and safety or environmental risks associated therewith. B. Do not use hazardous or toxic materials in a manner that will violate Cornell University Policies or any state, federal, or municipal environmental health and safety regulations. In situations where the risks are unclear consult with Environmental Health and Safety (EH&S) for guidance. C. Provide complete care and treatment for any injury sustained by any parties coining into contact with any hazardous or toxic materials as a result of Contractor's performance or failure to perform hereunder. D. At the completion of project Contractor shall remove all unused chemical products and hazardous materials fiom campus. Transportation of these materials shall be in accordance with all federal, state, and local regulations. Request and receive written approval from EH&S prior to disposal of any on-site disposal. 1.11 DISPOSAL OF WASTE MATERIAL AND TITLE A. Prior to start of work and first payment, Contractor shall prepare and submit "Contractor Waste Material Disposal Plan" to the Owner's Representative. The plan shall identify the waste transportation and treatment, storage or disposal (TSD) companies which will manage all waste material and any site(s) for disposal of the waste material. B. The "Contractor Waste Material Disposal Plan" form, together with definitions associated with the form waste descriptions, is attached to this Section. Contractor must use this form to document waste disposal methods and locations. C. Contractor shall be responsible for the proper cleanup, containment, storage and disposal of any hazardous material/chemical spill occurring during its work. For Cornell University owned hazardous waste EH&S will oversee, approve or effect the proper disposal. Title, risk of loss, and all other incidents of ownership to the Waste Material, shall vest in Contractor at the time Contractor or any transporter acting on its behalf takes physical possession of Waste Material. Complete and maintain full records of the chain of custody and control, including certificates of disposal or destruction, of all Waste Materials loaded, transported and/or disposed of. Deliver all such records to the Owner in accordance with applicable laws and regulations and any instructions from the Owner in a timely manner and in any event prior to final payment(s) under this Contract. PART 2 -PRODUCTS -NOT USED PART 3 -EXECUTION -NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 35 43*** BIG RED BARN GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS 01 3543-4 STRUCTURAL January 17, 2014 IMPROVEMENTS Contractor Waste Material Disposal Plan 1. Contractor Name: Contact Name/Number/Email: Project Name/Description: Contract No.: Project Start Date: Project End Date: _ CU Project Manager: 2. Check all hazardous materials that will be generated as waste: Source Waste .2 Management S CU- Mgt Destination or Disposal Category Description 0 Transporter Location C -U -C; ;. 0 C) V) () .0 Solvents PCBs Asbestos Lead Mercury Chromium Other Toxic Metals (describe in section 4) Mold Light Bulbs Thermostats Batteries Used Oil Contaminated PPE & Materials Other (describe in section 4) No hazardous waste Revision date: May 2010 Page I of 2 Contractor Waste Material Disposal Plan 3. Check all non-hazardous wastes that will be generated during the project: Category Disposal Facility Name Facility Address Facility Transporter Estimated Phone Quantity C&D Clean soil Non C&D solid waste Other (describe in section IV) No non-hazardous waste will be generated 4. Further description of waste materials expected to be generated during the project: 5. Contractor Certification I, , do hereby certify that I have identified above all waste materials expected to be generated by the Project named in Section 1 and that I will dispose of all such waste materials in a legally permissible manner and location(s), in accordance with all applicable federal, state, and local laws and regulations. I further certify that I will amend this form as appropriate if I, my representatives, employees or subcontractors become aware of any additional wastes that will be generated by the Project. I further agree to notify the CU Project Manager if I become aware of any legal non-compliance associated with disposal of Project wastes by anyone. Contractor Signature Print Name Date 6. Submit completed forms to CU Project Manager. CU Project Manager must submit this completed form to CU Environmental Health and Safety Office before start of work and before the first payment will be made. The completed fonn will be incorporated as an enforceable part of the contract. Forms can be submitted electronically to EHS at mailto:ehsdir-mailbox@cornell.edu or via campus mail to EHS attn: Waste Plans, East Hill Office Building. Revision date: May 2010 Page 2 of 2 Definitions for Use with Contractor Waste Material Disposal Plan: The following is not solid waste: Discarded materials that are being beneficially used pursuant to 6NYCRR Section 360-1.15 A material is disposed of if it is discharged, deposited, injected, dumped, spilled, leaked or placed into or on any land or water so that such material or any constituent thereof may enter the environment or be emitted into the air or discharged into groundwater or surface water. Asbestos: Any waste material containing the asbestiforn varieties of: Chrysotile (serpentine); crocidolite (riebeckite); amosite (cum- mingtonitegrunerite); anthophyllite; tremolite; and actinolite. Batteries: All spent batteries being disposed that are regulated by New York State Department of Environental Conservation (NYDEC) in 6 New York Code of Rules and Regulations (NYCRR) Part 374-3, or Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) in 40 Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) 273.2 as Universal Waste Batteries. Borrow Material: Fill material required for on-site construction that is obtained from other locations. Chromium: Any waste containing chromium or contaminated with chromium that exceeds the Toxicity Characteristic Leaching Procedure (TCLP) limit for chromium as defined in 6 NYCRR Part 371.3 or 40 CFR 261.24. Clean Soil: Soil that is uncontaminated with any solid or hazardous waste, C&DDebris, trees, stumps, yard waste or wood chips per definitions of those terms below. Construction and Demolition (C&D) Debris: Uncontaminated solid waste resulting from the construction, remodeling, repair and demolition of utilities, structures and roads; and uncontaminated solid waste resulting from land clearing. Such waste includes, but is not limited to bricks, concrete and other masonry materials, soil, rock, wood (including painted, treated and coated wood and wood products), land clearing debris, wall coverings, plaster, drywall, plumbing fixtures, non-asbestos insulation, roofing shingles and other roof coverings, asphaltic pavement, glass, plastics that are not sealed in a manner that conceals other wastes, empty buckets ten gallons or less in size and having no more than one inch of residue remaining on the bottom, electrical wiring and components containing no hazardous liquids, and pipe and metals that are incidental to any of the above. Solid waste that is not C&D debris (even if resulting from the construction, remodeling, repair and demolition of utilities, structures and roads and land clearing) includes, but is not limited to asbestos waste, garbage, corrugated container board, electrical fixtures containing hazardous liquids such as fluorescent light ballasts or transformers, fluorescent lights, carpeting, furniture, appliances, tires, drums, containers greater than ten gallons in size, any containers having more than one inch of residue remaining on the bottom and fuel tanks. Specifically excluded from the definition of construction and demolition debris is solid waste (including what otherwise would be construction and demolition debris) resulting from any processing technique, other than that employed at a department-approved C&D debris processing facility, that renders individual waste components unrecognizable, such as pulverizing or shredding. Also, waste contained in an illegal disposal site may be considered C&D debris if the department determines that such waste is similar in nature and content to C&D debris. Construction and Demolition Debris Processing Facility means a processing facility that receives and processes construction and demolition debris by any means. Contaminated PPE & Materials: Any personal protective equipment such as gloves, coveralls, boot covers, respirator cartridges etc.; or rags, tools, articles or other material that has become adulterated by a hazardous material, and which meets the definition of hazardous waste or is considered unsuitable for disposal as regular trash. Exempt C&D and Stump Facilities: The following facilities are exempt from Solid waste management facility pernitting requirements provided the facilities operate only between the hours of sunrise and sunset, and (if the allowable waste comes from an off-site source) no fee or other form of consideration is required for the privilege of using the facility for disposal purposes: (i) A site at which only the following C&D debris is placed: recognizable uncontaminated concrete and concrete products (including steel or fiberglass reinforcing rods that are embedded in the concrete), asphalt pavement, brick, glass, soil and rock. (Recognizable means solid waste that can be readily identified as C&D debris by visual observation.) (ii) A landfill for the disposal of trees, stumps, yard waste and wood chips generated from these materials is exempt when origin and disposal of such waste occur on properties under the same ownership or control. Hazardous Waste: Any waste material that meets the definition of "hazardous waste" in 6 NYCRR 371.1 and 40 CFR 261.3 and that is not excluded by regulation. Land Clearing Debris means vegetative matter, soil and rock resulting from activities such as land clearing and grubbing, utility line maintenance or seasonal or stonn-related cleanup such as trees, stumps, brush and leaves and including wood chips generated from these materials. Land clearing debris does not include yard waste which has been collected at the curbside. Lead: Any metallic lead or waste material containing lead, e.g. waste paint chips, that exceed the Toxicity Characteristic Leaching Procedure (TCLP) limit for lead as defined in 6 NYCRR Part 371.3 or 40 CFR 261.24. Light Bulbs: All spent lamps or light bulbs being disposed that are regulated in 6 NYCRR Part 374- 3 or 40 CFR 273.5. Mercury: Liquid mercury or any waste containing mercury at levels exceeding the Toxicity Characteristic Leaching Procedure (TCLP) limit for mercury as defined in 6 NYCRR Part 371.3 or 40 CFR 261.24. Mold: Construction material or debris contaminated with mold fungus that is unsuitable for reuse. Other Toxic Metals: Any waste containing a metal or contaminated by a metal identified in, and exceeding the Toxicity Characteristic Leaching Procedure (TCLP) limit of 6 NYCRR Part 371.3 or 40 CFR 261.24.PCBs: All electrical articles and equipment or the used oil removed from them, containing polychlorinated biphenyls at levels regulated by 6 NYCRR 371.4(e) Scrap Metal: Bits and pieces of metal parts (e.g., bars, turnings, rods, sheets, wire) or metal pieces that may be combined together with bolts or soldering (e.g., radiators, scrap automobiles, railroad box cars), which when worn or superfluous can be recycled. Solid Waste (Non C&D): Any garbage, refuse, sludge from a wastewater treatment plant, water supply treatment plant, or air pollution control facility and other discarded materials including solid, liquid, semisolid, or contained gaseous material, resulting from industrial, conmercial, mining and agricultural operations, and from community activities, but does not include solid or dissolved materials in domestic sewage, or solid or dissolved materials in irrigation return flows or industrial discharges that are point sources subject to pennit under 33 USC 1342, or source, special nuclear or by-product material as defined by the Atomic Energy Act of 1954, except as may be provided by existing agreements between the State of New York and the government of the United States. Solvents: Substances (usually liquid) suitable for, or employed in, solution, or in dissolving something; as, water is the appropriate solvent for most salts, alcohol for resins, ether for fats, and mercury or acids for metals, etc. Typically these are chemicals are used as paint thinners or cleaning solutions. Spoil: Refuse material removed from an excavation. Used Oil: Any oil refined from crude oil, or any synthetic oil, that has been used, and as a result of such use is contaminated by physical or chemical impurities. "See 6 NYCRR 374-2 or 40 CFR 279" Thermostats: Any mercury-containing thernostat as defined in 6 NYCRR 374-3.1(d), or 40 CFR 273.4 Uncontaminated C&D Debris: C&D Debris that is not mixed or commingled with other solid waste at the point of generation, processing or disposal, and that is not contaminated with spills of a petroleum product, hazardous waste or industrial waste. Contamination from spills of a petroleum product does not include asphalt or concrete pavement that has come into contact with petroleum products through normal vehicle use of the roadway. CORNELL SECTION 01 35 44 Ithaca, New York SPILL CONTROL PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SPILL PREVENTION A. In order to minimize the potential for discharge to the environment of oil, petroleum, or hazardous substances on site, the following requirements shall apply to all projects: 1. All oil, petroleum, or hazardous materials stored or relocated temporarily on site during the construction process shall be stored in such a manner as to provide protection from vehicular damage and to provide contaimnent of leaks or spills. Horizontal diked oil storage tanks, temporary benns or barriers, or similar methods shall be employed as appropriate at each site. 2. Any on-site filling or dispensing activities shall occur within an area in which a temporary berm, boom, or similar containment barrier has been placed to prevent the inadvertent discharge to the environment of hannful quantities of any products. 3. All oil, petroleum, or hazardous materials stored on site shall be located in such a manner as to minimize the potential of damage from construction operations or vehicles, away from drainage ways and environmentally sensitive areas, and in accordance with all fire and safety codes. B. Remove immediately from the site any storage, dispensing, or operating equipment that is leaking oil or hazardous substances or is in anyway unsuitable for the safe storage of such materials. 1.2 SPILL CONTROL PROCEDURES All Contractor personnel working at the project site shall be knowledgeable of the potential health and safety concerns associated with petroleum and other hazardous substances that could potentially be released at the project site. Following are a list of activities that should be conducted by the Contractor in the event of an oil/petroleum spill or the release of any other hazardous substance. In the event of a large quantity spill that would require cleanup procedures that are beyond the means of the Contractor, an emergency spill cleanup contractor shall be hired by the Contractor. In the event the Contractor has the personnel necessary to cleanup the spill, the following procedures shall be followed: A. Personnel discovering/responding to a spill shall: 1. Identify and locate the source of the spill. If unsafe conditions exist, then leave the area, inform nearby personnel, notify the site supervisor, and initiate spill reporting (Section 1. 3). 2. Limit the discharge of product, if safely possible, by: (1) diverting discharge to a containment area; (2) creating temporary dikes with soils or other available materials; and (3) utilizing sorbent materials. If secondary containment is present, verify that valves and drains are closed prior to diverting the product to this area. BIG RED BARN STRUCTURAL SPILL CONTROL 01 35 44-1 IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 3. The individual discovering a spill shall initiate containment procedures to prevent material from reaching a potential migratory route, through implementation of the following actions, or any other methods necessary. Methods employed shall not compromise worker safety. a. Stop the spill at once (if possible). b. Extinguish sources of ignition (e.g., flames, sparks, hot surfaces, cigarettes, etc.). c. Clear personnel from the spill location and rope off the area. d. Utilize available spill control equipment in an effort to ensure that fires, explosions, and releases do not occur, recur, or spread. e. Use sorbent materials to control the spill at the source. f. Construct a temporary containment dike of sorbent materials, cinder blocks, bricks, or other suitable materials to help contain the spill. g. Attempt to identify the character, exact source, amount, and area of the released materials. Identification of the spilled material should be made as soon as possible so that the appropriate cleanup procedure can be identified. h. Assess possible hazards to human health or the environment as a result of the release, fire, or explosion. i. If spill response measures involve the temporary cessation of any operations, the Contractor shall monitor the affected equipment for: (1) leaks; (2) pressure buildup; (3) gas generation; or (4) ruptures in valves, pipes, or other equipment. B. Spill Cleanup: 1 .Following containment of the spill, the following spill cleanup procedures shall be initiated. a. Use proper waste containers. b. Remove bulk liquid by using vacuum, pump, sorbents, or shovel and place material in properly labeled waste container. Be sure not to collect incompatible or reactive substances in the same container. c. Cleanup materials not reclaimed on-site shall be disposed of in accordance with all applicable state and federal regulations. BIG RED BARN STRUCTURAL SPILL CONTROL 01 3544-2 IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 d. Apply sorbent materials to pick up remaining liquid after bulk liquid has been removed. The Contractor shall not walk over spilled material. Absorbed material shall be picked up with a shovel and placed in a separate waste container, and shall not be mixed with bulk liquid. e. Clean spill control equipment and containers. Replace equipment in its proper location. Restock or reorder any sorbents used to cleanup the spill. f. Carefully wash spilled product from skin and clothing using soap. Change clothes, if necessary, to avoid further contact with product. g. Disposal of all spilled product shall be made off-site, and shall be arranged through the Contractor. h. A Spill Report shall be completed, including a description of the event. A sample Spill Documentation Form is provided in Appendix B. C. Fire or Explosion: 1 .In the event of a fire or explosion at the site, the Contractor shall: a. Verify that the local fire department and the appropriate response personnel (e.g., ambulance, police) have been notified. b. Report to the scene, if safe to do so, and evaluate the situation (e.g., spill character, source, etc.). Coordinate, as necessary, with other appropriate site and emergency personnel. c. Ensure that people are cleared from the area. d. Ensure that fires are safely extinguished (if possible), valves closed, and other immediate actions necessary to mitigate the emergency, if safe to do so. e. Initiate responsible measures necessary to prevent subsequent fires, explosions, or releases from occurring or spreading to other areas of the site. These measures include stopping processes or operations, collecting and containing released oil, or removing and isolating containers. f. Take appropriate action to monitor for: (1) leaks; (2) pressure build-ups; (3) gas generation; or (4) ruptures in pipes, valves, or other equipment. 1.3 SPILL REPORTING AND DOCUMENTATION In the event of a spill CALL CORNELL POLICE AT 255-1111 who will notify the appropriate departments within the university and coordinate with the contractor for external reporting, if required. BIG RED BARN STRUCTURAL SPILL CONTROL 01 3544-3 IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 The contractor shall be responsible for the initiation of spill reporting and documentation procedures. All petroleum spills must be reported to NYSDEC Spill Hotline at 1-800- 457- 7362, less than two hours following discovery. Notification must be made to Cornell Environmental Health and Safety (EH&S), 607.255.8200, within 24 hours of reporting the release. The Contractor will be expected to provide EH&S with the DEC issued spill number. Any petroleum spill must be reported to NYSDEC unless ALL of the following criteria apply: TABLE 1 CRITERIA TO EXEMPT SPILL REPORTING CRITERIA DESCRIPTION Quantity The spill must be known to be less than 5 gallons. Containment The spill must be contained on an impervious surface or within an impervious structure, such that it cannot enter the environment. Control The spill must be under control and not reach a drain or leave the impervious surface. Cleanup The spill must be cleaned-up within two hours of occurrence. Environment The spill must not have already entered into the soil or groundwater or onto surface water. A release of a "reportable quantity"' or unknown amount of a hazardous substance must also be immediately reported to NYSDEC Spill Hotline. Spills of reportable quantities of chemicals or "harmful quantities"2 of oil to navigable waters must be reported to the federal National Response Center, 1-800-424-8802. Spill Reporting Information. When making a telephone report, the caller should be prepared to provide the following information, if possible: 1. The date and time of the spill or release. 2. The identity or chemical name of the material released or spilled, including an indication of whether the material is defined as an extremely hazardous substance. 3. An estimate of the quantity of material released or spilled into the environment and the approximate duration of the event. 4. The exact location of the spill, including the name(s) of the waters involved or threatened, and/or other medium or media affected by the release or spill. 5. The source of the release or spill. 6. The name, address, and telephone number of the party in charge of, or responsible for, the facility or activity associated with the release or spill. 7. The extent of the actual and potential water pollution. BIG RED BARN STRUCTURAL SPILL CONTROL 01 3544-4 IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 8. The name and telephone number of the person in charge of operations at the spill site. 9. The steps being taken or proposed to contain and cleanup the released or spilled material and any precautions taken to minimize impacts, including evacuation. 10. The extent of injuries, if any. 11. Any known or anticipated acute or chronic health risks associated with the emergency, and information regarding necessary medical attention for exposed individuals. 12. Assistance required, if any. If the release of a hazardous substance or oil occurs in an amount which exceeds a reportable quantity (RQ) as defined in 40 CFR Part 110, 40 CFR Part 117, 40 CFR Part 302, or 6 NYCRR Part 597, then the Contractor shall do the following: 1. Call to the National Response Center shall be made by the person in charge of the site. The applicable phone numbers are 1-800-424-8802 or 1-202-426-2675. 2. Within 14 days of the release, submit a written description of the release. The description should include: (1) a description of the release, (2) the type of material released, (3) estimated amount of the spill; (4) the date of the release, (5) an explanation of why the release occurred; and (6) a description of the measures to be implemented to prevent and control future releases. 'Reportable Quantity: A Reportable Quantity is the quantity of a hazardous substance or oil that triggers reporting requirements under the Comprehensive Emergency Response, Compensation, and Liability Act (CERCLA) (USEPA, September 1992). While the Contractor is legally responsible for knowing the risks of materials that are part of construction, members of the owner's spill response team have access to information that may help identify these quantities with you. 2 Harmful Ouantity: A Harnfil Quantity of oil includes discharges that violate applicable water quality standards; cause a film, sheen, or discoloration on a water surface or adjoining shoreline; or cause a sludge or emulsion to be deposited beneath the water surface or shoreline (40 CFR 110.3). PART 2 -PRODUCTS -NOT USED PART 3 -EXECUTION -NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 35 44*** BIG RED BARN STRUCTURAL SPILL CONTROL 0135 44-5 IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 CORNELL SECTION 01 41 00 Ithaca, New York REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 1.1 PERMITS AND LICENSES A. The Contractor shall obtain, maintain and pay for all permits and licenses necessary for the execution of the Work and for the use of such Work when completed. Such permits shall include but are not limited to building, plumbing, backflow prevention, dig safe and building demolition. B. For any projects which include demolition of a structure or load-bearing elements of a structure, the Contractor is required to complete a "Notification of Demolition and Renovation" and provide this notification to the United State Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) in advance of the work as specified in 40 CFR 61.145. The Contractor shall also provide a copy of this notification to the Owner's Representative prior to any demolition. 1.2 INSPECTIONS A. Apply for and obtain all required inspections, pay all fees and charges for same, include all service charges, pavement cuts and repairs. 1.3 COMPLIANCE A. The Contractor shall give all notices, pay all fees and comply with all laws, rules and regulations applicable to the Work. 1.4 OWNER'S REQUIREMENTS A. The Contractor, Subcontractors, and employees of the Contractor and Subcontractors shall comply with all regulations governing conduct, access to the premises, operation of equipment and systems, and conduct while in or near the premises and shall perform the Work in such a manner as not to unreasonably interrupt or interfere with the conduct of business of the Owner. B. Upon completion of the project, the Contractor agrees to provide the Owner with a sumnmaiy of municipal permit fees paid. This shall include the name of the pennits secured, the permit fees paid by the Contractor and a copy of the permit. PART 2 -PRODUCTS -NOT USED PART 3 -EXECUTION -NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 41 00*** BIG RED BARN REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 01 41 00-1 STRUCTURAL IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 CORNELL SECTION 01 45 00 Ithaca, New York QUALITY CONTROL PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The Contractor shall provide and maintain an effective Contractor Quality Control (CQC) program and perform sufficient inspections and tests of all items of work, including those of Subcontractors, to ensure compliance with Contract Documents. Include surveillance and tests specified in the technical sections of the Specifications. Furnish appropriate facilities, instruments, and testing devices required for performance of the quality control function. Controls must be adequate to cover construction operations and be keyed to the construction sequence. Construction shall not begin until the Owner has approved the CQC program. B. New York State Special Inspections are applicable to this project. The Contractor shall cooperate with the third party inspector and schedule all operations subject to special inspections well in advance of needs. See General Notes Section 11.0, and Tables 1 through 5 on Drawing S4 for a schedule of applicable testing, inspection and further directions. 1.2 CONTROL OF ON-SITE CONSTRUCTION A. Include a control system for the following phases of inspection: 1. Pre-Installation Conference. For all sections where pre-installations are defined, the Contractor shall arrange for a pre-installation meeting. The Contractor shall make available, during this meeting, all approved submittals and products. The following minimum personnel shall be at the meeting: a. Project Manager. b. Project Field Supervisor c. Subcontractor d. Architect's Representative e. Owner's Representative f. Commissioning Agent, when applicable g. Testing Agency, when applicable 2. Preparatory Inspection. Perform this inspection prior to beginning work on any definable feature of work. Include a review of contract requirements with the supervisors directly responsible for the performance of the work; check to assure that materials, products, and equipment have been tested, submitted, and approved; check to assure that provisions have been made for required control testing; examine the work area to ascertain that preliminary work has been completed; physically examine materials and equipment to assure that they conform to shop drawings and data and that the materials and equipment are on hand. 3. Initial Inspection. Perform this inspection as soon as work commences on a representative portion of a particular feature of workmanship review control testing for compliance with contract requirements. 4. Follow-up Inspections. Perform these inspections on a regular basis to assure continuing compliance with contract requirements until completion of that particular work. BIG RED BARN STRUCTURAL QUALITY CONTROL 01 4500-1 IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 1.3 CONTROL OF OFF-SITE OPERATIONS A. Perform factory quality control inspections for items fabricated or assembled off-site as opposed to "off-the-shelf" items. The CQC Representative at the fabricating plant shall be responsible for release of the fabricated items for shipment to the job site. The CQC Representative at the job site shall receive the item and note any damage incurred during shipment. The Contractor shall be responsible for protecting and maintaining the item in good condition throughout the period of on-site and during erection or installation. Although any item found to be faulty may be rejected before its use, final acceptance of an item by the Owner is based on its satisfactory incorporation into the work and acceptance of the completed project. 1.4 TESTING A. The Owner may engage the services of an independent testing laboratory to confirm that an installed item or element of work conforms to the Specification and workmanship requirements. B. The Owner will engage the services of a Third Party Special Inspections agent to coordinate the NYS Special Inspections tests and subsequent reporting services. 1.5 OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE A. The Owner shall designate a Representative to monitor the progress and execution of the work. The Representative shall have the authority to call for test samples, to approve or to reject work performed and to stop work in progress, if, in its opinion, the work is not in conformance with the Contract Documents. The Representative shall not be authorized to make changes or interpretations of the Contract Documents. PART 2 -PRODUCTS -NOT USED PART 3 -EXECUTION -NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 45 00*** BIG RED BARN STRUCTURAL QUALITY CONTROL 01 4500-2 IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 CORNELL SECTION 01 45 29 Ithaca, New York TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 1.1 GENERAL A. The Owner will employ and pay for the services of an Independent Testing and Inspection Laboratory to perform specified services. 1. Contractor shall cooperate with the laboratory to facilitate the execution of its required services. 2. Employment of the laboratory shall in no way relieve Contractor's obligations to perform the Work of the Contract. B. Testing Laboratory services are specified in connection with work including but not limited to the following: 1. New York State Building Code, Section 17, Special Inspections 2. Micropiles: Table 1 on Drawing S4 and Spec Section 316225 3. Cast-in-place Concrete: Table 2 on Drawing S4 and Spec Section 03300. 4. Structural Steel Framing: Table 3 on Drawing S4 and Spec Section 051200. 5. Structural Wood: Table 4 on Drawing S4 and Spec Sections 061000 and 061600. 1.2 QUALIFICATIONS OF LABORATORY A. Meet "Recommended Requirements for Independent Laboratory Qualification", 1971 edition, published by American Council of Independent Laboratories. B. Meet basic requirements of ASTM E329-05b, "Standard Specifications for Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or Inspection of Materials Used in Construction". C. Authorized to operate in the State of New York. D. Testing and inspections shall be performed under the direction of Licensed Professional Engineer registered in the State of New York who shall be responsible for administering all testing and inspections and shall certify any local agency requirements. E. Submit copy of report of inspection of facilities made by Materials Reference Laboratory of National Bureau of Standards during the most recent tour of inspection, with memorandum of remedies of any deficiencies reported by the inspection. BIG RED BARN TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 01 4529-1 STRUCTURAL IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 F. Testing Equipment: 1. Calibrated at maximum 12 month intervals by devices of accuracy traceable to either: a. National Bureau of Standards b. Accepted values of natural physical constants. 2. Submit copy of certificate of calibration made by accredited calibration agency. 1.3 LABORATORY DUTIES A. Cooperate with Owner, Architect and Contractor; provide qualified personnel promptly on notice. B. Perform specified inspections, sampling and testing of materials and methods of construction. 1. Comply with specified standards. 2. Ascertain compliance of materials with requirements of Contract Documents. C. Promptly notify Owner, Architect and Contractor of observed irregularities or deficiencies of work or products. D. Should Laboratory tests of material performed at specified intervals of time indicate that strengths do not meet Specification requirements, the Inspection Agency and Geotechnical Engineer shall IMMEDIATELY notify the Owner, Contractor and Architect. The Architect shall determine whether remedial action is necessary. E. Promptly submit written report of each test and inspection; one copy each to Architect, Owner, Contractor, and one copy to Record Documents File. Each report shall include: 1. Date issued. 2. Project title and number. 3. Testing laboratory name, address and telephone number. 4. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 5. Date and time of sampling or inspection. 6. Record of temperature and weather conditions. 7. Date of test. 8. Identification of product and specification section. 9. Location of sample or test in the Project. BIG RED BARN TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 01 4529-2 STRUCTURAL IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 10. Type of inspection or test. 11. Observations on compliance with Contract Documents. F. Prepare a summary report for each category of inspection certifying that the work has been inspected and meets the Contract Documents. Specifically list all discrepancies found which have not yet been repaired or resolved. G. Perfonn additional tests as required by Architect or the Owner. 1.4 LIMITATIONS OF AUTHORITY OF TESTING LABORATORY A. Laboratory is not authorized to: 1. Release, revoke, alter or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents. 2. Approve or accept any portion of the Work. 3. Perform any duties of the Contractor. 1.5 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Cooperate with laboratory personnel, provide access to Work, and Manufacturer's operations. B. Secure and deliver to the laboratory adequate quantities of representative samples of materials proposed to be used and for which testing is specified. C. Provide to the laboratory the approved design mixes proposed to be used for concrete, and other material mixes which require control by the testing laboratory. D. Furnish copies of Products test reports as required. E. Furnish incidental labor and facilities: 1. To provide access to Work to be tested. 2. To obtain and handle samples at the Project site or at the source of the product to be tested. 3. To facilitate inspections and tests. 4. For Laboratory's exclusive use for storage and curing of test samples. BIG RED BARN TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 0145 29-3 STRUCTURAL IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 F. Notify laboratory a minimum of 24 hours in advance of operations to allow for laboratory assignment of personnel and scheduling of tests. 1. When tests or inspections cannot be performed after such notice, reimburse laboratory for personnel and travel expenses incurred due to Contractor's responsibility. G. Make arrangements with laboratory and pay for additional samples and tests required for Contractor's convenience. H. Employ and pay for the services of a separate, equally qualified independent testing laboratory to perform additional inspections, sampling and testing required when initial tests indicate Work does not comply with Contract Documents. PART 2 -PRODUCTS -NOT USED PART 3 -EXECUTION -NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 45 29*** BIG RED BARN TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 01 4529-4 STRUCTURAL IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 CORNELL SECTION 01 50 00 Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART I GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The Contractor shall furnish, install and maintain temporary facilities and controls required by all trades for construction, and remove on completion of Work. 1.2 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. Comply with Federal, State and local codes and safety regulations. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Choice of materials, as suitable for the accomplishment of the intended purpose, is the Contractor's option. B. Materials may be new or used, but must not violate requirements of applicable codes, standards and specifications. 2.2 TEMPORARY FIRST AID FACILITIES A. Provide first aid equipment and supplies, with qualified personnel continuously available to render first aid at the site. 2.3 TEMPORARY FIRE PROTECTION A. Provide a fire protection and prevention program for employees and personnel at the site. B. Equipment: I. Provide and maintain fire extinguishing equipment ready for instant use at all areas of the Project and at specific areas of critical fire hazard. 2. Hand extinguishers of the types and sizes recommended by the National Board of Fire Underwriters to control fires from particular hazards. 3. Construction period use of permanent fire protection system. C. Enforce fire-safety discipline: 1. Store volatile materials in an isolated, protected location. 2. Avoid accumulations of flammable debris and waste in or about the Project. 3. Prohibit smoking in the vicinity of hazardous conditions. Smoking is prohibited in all Cornell University buildings. BIG RED BARN TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 5000-1 STRUCTURAL IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 4. Closely supervise welding and torch-cutting operations in the vicinity of combustible materials and volatile conditions. 5. Supervise locations and operations of portable heating units and fuel. D. Maintain fire extinguishing equipment in working condition, with current inspection certificate attached to each extinguisher. E. Welding or burning operations will be conducted under a Hot Work Permit. Where such work is permitted, the Contractor shall provide an approved fire extinguisher in good operating condition within easy reach of the operating personnel. In each instance, obtain prior approval of Cornell University Environmental Health & Safety. F. This building will be turned over to the Contractor for the duration of construction and the Contractor is responsible for monitoring life safety. Existing Life Safety Systems may be disconnected and deactivated during construction to aid construction efforts only if the following conditions are met by the contractor. 1. The only access to the building will be restricted to Contractor personnel and University project representatives. 2. Signs shall be posted on all Entrances stating "Construction Area Authorized Personnel Only". 3. The Locks be changed to a Construction Master. 4. The Contractor will maintain access lanes for access by the Fire Department to all nearby fire department connections. 5. The Contractor shall submit to Owner for approval, in advance, a Fire Safety Plan that meets and/or exceeds the requirements of Chapter 14 of the Fire Code of NYS titled "Fire Safety During Construction". 6. When the Work has reached such a point of completion that the building, equipment and apparatus can be occupied and used for the purpose intended: a. All Fire Alarm Devices shall be cleaned and serviced. b. The Sprinkler System shall be hydro tested at 200psi for 2-hours. c. Both the Fire Alarm System and Sprinkler System shall be fully re- accepted in accordance with NFPA Standards. G. Advise Cornell's University Fire Marshal of any additional items affecting Life Safety, e.g., road blockages, exit closing, etc. BIG RED BARN TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 5000-2 STRUCTURAL IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 2.4 CONSTRUCTION AIDS A. Provide construction aids and equipment required to assure safety for personnel and to facilitate the execution of the Work; Scaffolds, staging, ladders, stairs, ramps, runways, platforms, railings, hoists, cranes, chutes and other such equipment. B. When pennanent stair framing is in place, provide temporary treads, platforms and railings, for use by construction personnel. C. Maintain all equipment in a safe condition. 2.5 TEMPORARY ENCLOSURES A. Provide temporary weather-tight enclosure of exterior walls as work progresses, as necessary to provide acceptable working conditions, provide weather protection for interior materials, allow for effective temporary heating, and to prevent entry of unauthorized persons. 1. Provide temporary exterior doors with self-closing hardware and padlocks or locksets. 2. Other enclosures shall be removable as necessary for work and for handling of materials. 2.6 TREE, PLANT AND LAWN PROTECTION A. Preserve and protect existing trees, plants and lawns at the site which are designated to remain, and those adjacent to the site. B. Provide temporary fences to a height of six feet, around each, or around each group of trees and plants. Provide temporary lawn protection to prevent soil compaction. Reference Cornell University Design Standards and Details: http://cds.fs.cornell.edu/ C. Protect root zones of trees, plants and lawn areas: 1. Do not allow vehicular traffic or parking. 2. Do not store materials or products. 3. Prevent dumping of refuse or chemically injurious materials or liquids. 3. Prevent puddling or continuous running water. E. Replace, or suitably repair, trees, plants and lawn areas designated to remain which are damaged or destroyed due to construction operations. F. Roots 2 inches or larger that are damaged or cut during construction are to be sawed off close to the tree side of the excavation. BIG RED BARN TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 5000-3 STRUCTURAL IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 G. During the leafing-out period in the spring, extra care should be exercised to reduce root damage such as keeping exposed roots wet, saturating soil when backfilling around roots, and backfilling as soon as possible. H. Trees damaged during construction should be fertilized according to standard tree maintenance practices. 1. If roots are cut back as a result of construction, proper pruning standards should be applied to compensate for root loss, while maintaining the natural character of the tree. 2.7 GUARDRAILS AND BARRICADES A. Provide guardrails, barricades, fences, footways and other devices necessary to protect personnel and employees at the site, and the public, against hazards on or adjacent to the construction site. 1. Provide signs, warning lights, signals, flags and illumination as necessary to alert persons to hazards and to provide safe, adequate visibility in areas of hazards. 2.8 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION AND SIGNS A. No signs to be displayed at the project site, unless authorized by the Owner. 2.9 SECURITY A. The Contractor shall provide security services as required to protect the interests of the Owner. 2.10 FIELD OFFICES A. The Owner shall designate a space within the facility to serve as a field office for the use of the Contractor and Owner. B. Provide a designated break area within the project site limits to minimize interaction between construction personnel and the Campus community. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Consult with Owner, review site conditions and factors which affect construction procedures and temporary facilities, including adjacent properties and public facilities which may be affected by execution of the work. 1. Designate the locations and extent of temporary construction, storage, and other temporary facilities and controls required for the expeditious accomplishment of the Work. 2. Allow space for use of the site by Owner and by other contractors, as required by Contract Documents. BIG RED BARN TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 5000-4 STRUCTURAL IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 3.2 GENERAL A. Comply with applicable requirements specified in sections of Division 2 through 28. B. Make work structurally, mechanically and electrically sound throughout. C. Install work in a neat and orderly manner. D. Maintain, clean, service and repair facilities to provide continuous usage, and to the quality specified for the original installation. E. Relocate facilities as required by progress of construction, by storage or work requirements, and to accommodate requirements of Owner and other contractors employed at the site. F. Keep the site, at all times during the progress of the Work, free from accumulation of waste matter or rubbish and shall confine its apparatus, materials and operations of its workers to the limits prescribed except as the latter may be extended with the approval of the Owner's Representative. Cleaning of the structure or structures must be performed daily and removal of waste matter or rubbish must be performed at least once a week. Contractor shall at all times keep access road and public roads clean of mud and construction debris and maintain dust control in compliance with the Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan and to the satisfaction of the Owner. 3.3 REMOVAL A. Completely remove temporary structures, materials, equipment and services: 1. When construction needs can be met by use of permanent construction. 2. At completion of the Project. B. Repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary facilities. Clean after removal. C. Restore existing or permanent facilities used for temporary purposes to specified, or to original condition. 1. Remove foundations and underground installations for temporary construction and utilities. 2. Grade the areas of the site affected by temporary installations to required elevations and slopes, and clean the area. ***END OF SECTION 01 50 00*** BIG RED BARN TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 5000-5 STRUCTURAL IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 CORNELL SECTION 01 51 00 Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY UTILITIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The Contractor shall furnish, install and maintain temporary utilities required by all trades for construction. Remove on completion of Work. B. The Contractor shall provide all labor and materials for temporary connections and distribution. 1.2 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. Comply with National Electric Code, 2008 edition. B. Comply with Federal, State and local codes and safety regulations and with utility company requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Materials may be new or used, but must be adequate in capacity for the required usage, must not create unsafe conditions, and must not violate requirements of applicable codes and standards. 2.2 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY, LIGHTING AND WATER A. The Contractor shall have access to the Owner's water and electric power for constructing the Work. Temporary utility connections shall be made by the Contractor as close to its operations as possible as long as such connections do not over-load the capacity of the Owner's utilities or interfere with its customary utilization thereof. Utility access points shall be determined in cooperation with and acceptable to the Owner. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for the economic use of the Owner's Water and Power. The Owner will pay for the water and power consumed in the construction of the Work as long as economical usage of these utilities is maintained. The Owner reserves the right to meter and charge for the power and water consumed if in the opinion of the Owner the usage of these utilities is not economically conducted by the Contractor. In such an event, the Owner shall give three (3) days written notice to the Contractor of its intentions to meter and charge for temporary utilities used by the Contractor. C. All temporary power systems including wiring shall be removed by the Contractor when no longer required. BIG RED BARN STRUCTURAL TEMPORARY UTILITIES 01 51 00-1 IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 D. The minimum temporary lighting to be provided is at the rate of fifty foot candles, is to be maintained in each room and changed as required when interior walls are being erected. The required temporary lighting must be maintained for twenty-four (24) hours a day and seven (7) days a week at all stair levels and in all corridors below ground; in any and all egress; in all other spaces temporary lighting is to be maintained only during working hours. All temporary wiring and equipment shall be in conformity with the National Electric Code. F. Three-phase temporary power circuits shall be installed as required to operate construction equipment of the various trades. G. Except as otherwise provided in the Contract, the Contractor shall submit to the Owner or the Owner's Representative for approval a proposed schedule of all utility shutdowns and cutovers of all types which may be required in connection with the Work. Such schedule shall provide a minimum of two (2) weeks advance notice to the Owner prior to the time of the proposed shutdown and cutover. The Contractor shall be responsible for all charges relating to shutdowns. H. Discontinuance, Changes and Removal The Contractor shall: I. Discontinue all temporary services required by the Contract when so directed by the Owner or the Owner's Representative. The discontinuance of any such temporary service prior to the completion of the Work shall not render the Owner liable for any additional cost entailed thereby. 2. Remove and relocate such temporary facilities as directed by the Owner or the Owner's Representative, and shall restore the Site and the Work to a condition satisfactory to the Owner. 2.3 TEMPORARY HEAT AND VENTILATION A. When using the permanent building systems for space conditioning, provide a written maintenance plan for acceptance by the Owner's Representative, prior to utilizing the equipment. Return all equipment to its newly installed condition prior to acceptance testing. B. Any temporary system shall be removed when no longer required. C. The Contractor shall provide for ventilation of all structures until Physical Completion of the Work and shall control such ventilation to avoid excessive moisture levels and rates of drying of construction materials, including but not limited to concrete and to plaster, and to prevent condensation on sensitive surfaces. The Contractor shall be responsible for any moisture intrusion that is detrimental to the Project. 2.4 CONTRACTOR TELEPHONE SERVICE A. Site Superintendent or their Representative shall carry a cellular telephone at all times. BIG RED BARN STRUCTURAL TEMPORARY UTILITIES 01 51 00-2 IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 2.5 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES A. Provide adequate toilet and washing facilities for the use of personnel and employees; locate convenient to work stations. B. Existing plumbing facilities shall not be used by construction personnel. C. Facilities may be portable chemical-type toilets or temporary flush toilets connected to sanitary sewer, screened for privacy. D. Service, clean and maintain facilities and enclosures in a neat, clean and sanitary condition. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 REMOVAL A. Completely remove temporary materials and equipment when their use is no longer required. B. Clean and repair damage caused by temporary installations or use of temporary facilities. C. Restore existing and pernanent facilities used for temporary services to specified, or to original, condition. ***END OF SECTION 01 51 00*** BIG RED BARN STRUCTURAL TEMPORARY UTILITIES 01 51 00-3 IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 CORNELL SECTION 01 57 13 Ithaca, New York SOIL EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL A. The Contractor shall be responsible for preparing and implementing an Erosion and Sediment Control Plan. B. This Section describes minimum standards for the prevention and control of erosion during the construction process and may not be sufficient for all sites. The Contractor shall remain responsible for the means and methods of preventing erosion and may be required to employ additional means and methods as required to prevent violations of local, state, or federal standards. C. On certain sites, a Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan may also be required which may include additional or more specific requirements. The requirement for a Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan will be indicated by inclusion of Section 01 57 23 Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan, or alternative equivalent Section, in the Contract Documents. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit an Erosion and Sediment Control Plan, as specified herein. B. Refer to Section 01 33 00 for general submittal requirements. 1.3 PLAN AND IMPLEMENTATION GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Plan shall comply with design specifications in the New York Guidelines for Urban Erosion and Sediment Control, NYS Stormwater Management Design Manual, NYSDEC Technical and Operational Guidance Series, good engineering practices, and this Section. B. Erosion and Sediment Control Plan shall be reviewed and approved by the Environmental Health and Safety Office, and implemented prior to any site work. C. Maintain Erosion and Sediment Control measures throughout the course of site construction activities until vegetative growth is established to the Owner's satisfaction. D. At conclusion of the Project, remove all remaining temporary erosion control structures and properly dispose of accumulated sediment on-site in areas approved by the Owner. 1.4 PERFORMANCE STANDARDS A. At no time shall construction operations or any related disturbance of the site result in the impairment of local waterways. "Impairment" is defined by regulations as including, but not limited to, the following: 1. The release of water into receiving waters that causes a substantial visible contrast to natural conditions; or BIG RED BARN SOIL EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL 01 57 13-1 STRUCTURAL IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 2. The deposition of significant sediment into such waters. B. Such deficiencies shall be corrected immediately by the Contractor to prevent further impairment. C. In addition, and without notice to the Contractor, the Owner shall also have the right, based on the Owner's independent assessment, to stop work or engage other contractor(s) to construct or correct such work as may be necessary to prevent the impairment of waterways, and to charge all costs related to such corrective or additional actions against the Contract. D. Acceptance of an Erosion and Sediment Control plan shall not in any way imply that the plan will be adequate in preventing impainnent of waters, or that maintenance and modification will not be necessary. Rather, acceptance of the plan authorizes the Contractor to begin installation of the control measures under the assumption the appropriate maintenance and modification will be required throughout the life of the project to meet the project requirements. E. The Contractor's responsibilities under this Section shall end upon final completion and payment of the Work of the entire Contract. 1.5 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL PLAN COMPONENTS A. The Erosion and Sediment Control Plan submitted shall specifically address project measures, features, and areas critical to proper site erosion and sediment control. The Plan shall specifically include, but are not limited to, the following: * Site Map, to scale; * Measures to prevent stormwater from running onto the disturbed areas of the site; * Inlet protection for storm sewers and catch basins; * Measures to be used for dewatering; and * Measures to be used for soil stabilization, runoff control, and sediment control, including specific measures for the following: * Site entrance stabilization * Staging areas * Material and soil stock piles * Concrete curing operations * Disturbed areas of the site In addition to the requirements included in these specifications, specific erosion control measures shown on the Contract Drawings, if any, shall also be required. B. All features shall be designed and installed in accordance with the references including in paragraph 1.3.A of this Section. C. Keep access roads and public roads clear of mud and construction debris at all times. Maintain dust control measures throughout construction. BIG RED BARN SOIL EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL 01 57 13-2 STRUCTURAL IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 1.6 INSPECTIONS A. At the sole discretion of the Owner, inspections may be performed by a third party or on-staff representative of the Owner. 1. The Owner may inspect the site at any time, without prior notification, for compliance with the Erosion and Sediment Control Plan and applicable local, state and federal regulations. Any instances of non-compliances or failure to meet the performance standards found must be resolved within 24 hours, with more immediate responses as required to mitigate active erosion during stonn events or similar instances. 2. Modify the Erosion and Sediment Control Plan as necessary, to provide full compliance with the performance standards. PART 2 -PRODUCTS -NOT USED PART 3 -EXECUTION -NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 57 13* BIG RED BARN SOIL EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL 01 57 13-3 STRUCTURAL IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 CORNELL SECTION 01 66 00 Ithaca, New York STORAGE AND PROTECTION 1.1 GENERAL A. The Contractor shall receive, pile, store and handle all materials, equipment and other items incorporated or to be incorporated in the Work, including items furnished by the Owner in a careful and prudent manner and shall protect them against loss or damage from every source. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for obscuring from public view, in a manner acceptable to the Owner, staging and storage areas. 1.2 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING A. Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions; using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft. B. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction space. C. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses. D. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installation. E. Promptly inspect shipments to assure that products comply with requirements, quantities are correct and products are undamaged. F. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement or damage. 1.3 STORAGE A. Materials stored on the Site shall be neatly piled and protected, and shall be stored in a neat and orderly manner in locations that shall not interfere with the progress of the Work or with the daily functioning of the Institution. B. Materials subject to weather damage shall be protected against the weather by floored weatherproof temporary storage sheds. C. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage. D. Storage piles and sheds shall be located within the area designated as the Staging Area. The Contractor shall work to insure that the condition of the staging area has no negative impact on the Campus, visually or otherwise; and that outside of that area, the Contractor has no impact at all on the Campus. BIG RED BARN STRUCTURAL STORAGE AND PROTECTION 01 6600-1 IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 E. Materials stored within the building shall be distributed in such a manner as to avoid overloading of the structural frame, and never shall be concentrated in such a manner as to exceed the equivalent of 50 pounds per square foot uniformly distributed loading. Stored materials shall be moved if they interfere with the progress of the work. F. Should it become necessary during the course of the Work to move stored materials or equipment, the Contractor, at the direction of the Owner or the Owner's Representative, shall move such materials or equipment. 1.4 PROTECTION A. The Contractor shall provide security personnel and adopt other security measures as may be necessary to adequately protect materials and equipment stored at the site. The Contractor shall be obligated to replace or pay for all materials and equipment including items furnished by the Owner which have been damaged or stolen prior to completion of the Work. B. Protection of Utilities 1. If during the course of the Project, it is necessary to work adjacent to existing utilities, pipelines, structures and equipment, the Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to protect existing facilities from damage. 2. Locations of utilities as shown on the Contract Documents are approximate only. The Contractor shall excavate or otherwise locate to verify existing utilities in advance of its operation. C. Protective Covering 1. All finished surfaces shall be protected by the Contractor as follows: a. Door and window sills and the jambs and soffits of openings used as passageways or through which material is handled, shall be cased and protected adequately against possible damage resulting from the conduct of the work of all trades. b. All surfaces shall be clean and not marred upon delivery of the building to the Owner. The Contractor shall, without extra compensation, replace all blocks, gypsum board, plaster, paint, tile, and all other surfaces, whether or not protected, which are damaged, and shall refinish (including painting as specified) to satisfaction of Owner. c. Tight wood sheathing shall be laid under any materials that are stored on finished concrete surfaces and planking must be laid before moving any materials over these finished areas. Wheelbarrows used over such areas shall have rubber tires on wheels. d. Contractor has the responsibility for protection of carpeting and all finish flooring during all phases of the work including after installation. BIG RED BARN STRUCTURAL STORAGE AND PROTECTION 01 6600-2 IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 e. All floors exposed to view as a floor finish shall be protected by overlaying with plywood in all areas subject to construction traffic within and without the building, special care shall be taken to protect all stair finish surfaces including but not limited to flooring, wood in-fill stairs, cabinetry, counters, equipment, etc. 1.5 PROTECTION AFTER INSTALLATION A. Protect installed products, including Owner-provided products, and control traffic in immediate area to prevent damage from subsequent operations. B. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, corners, and jambs, sills, and soffits of openings in and adjacent to traffic areas. C. Cover walls and floors of elevator cabins, and jambs of cab doors, when elevators are used by construction personnel. D. Protect finish floors and stairs from dirt, wear, and damage: I. Secure heavy sheet goods or similar protective materials in place, in areas subject to foot traffic. 2. Lay planking or similar rigid materials in place, in areas subject to movement of heavy objects. 3. Lay planking or similar rigid materials in place, in areas where storage of products will occur. E. Protect waterproofed and roofed surfaces: 1. Restrict use of surfaces for traffic of any kind, and for storage of products. 2. When an activity is mandatory, obtain recommendations for protection of surfaces from manufacturer. Install protection and remove on completion of activity. Restrict use of adjacent unprotected areas. F. Restrict traffic of any kind across planted lawn and landscape areas. PART 2 -PRODUCTS -NOT USED PART 3 -EXECUTION -NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 66 00*** BIG RED BARN STRUCTURAL STORAGE AND PROTECTION 01 6600-3 IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 CORNELL SECTION 01 73 29 Ithaca, New York CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The Contractor shall be responsible for all cutting, fitting and patching, including excavation and backfill, required to complete the Work or to: 1. Make its several parts fit together properly. 2. Uncover portions of the Work to provide for installation of ill-timed work. 3. Remove and replace defective work. 4. Remove and replace work not conforming to requirements of Contract Documents. 5. Remove samples of installed work as specified for testing. B. Upon written instructions of the Owner's Representative: 1. Uncover designated portions of Work for Architect's observation of covered work. 2. Remove samples of installed materials for testing beyond that specified. 3. Remove work to provide for the alteration of previously incorrectly installed work. 4. Patch work uncovered or removed. C. Do not damage or endanger any work by cutting or altering the Work or any part thereof. D. Do not cut or otherwise alter the work of the Owner except with the written consent of the Owner's Representative. E. This project involves cutting and patching for adding reinforcement to structural elements. Contractor shall adhere to details provided showing integration of reinforcement with the original structure. Any deviation from the plans needs prior approval by the Architect. F. Openings and Chases 1. The Contractor shall build openings, including but not limited to channels, chases and flues as required to complete the Work as set forth in the Contract. 2. After installation and completion of any work for which openings, including but not limited to channels, chases and flues, have been provided the Contractor shall build in, over, around and finish all such openings as required to complete the Work. 3. The Contractor shall furnish and install all sleeves, inserts, hangers and supports required for the execution of the Work. BIG RED BARN CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING 017329-1 STRUCTURAL IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Should conditions of the work of the schedule indicate a change of products from the original installation, submit a request for substitution as specified in Section 01 25 00 - Substitutions and Product Options. B. Contractor shall submit a written notice to the Architect and the Owner designating the date and the time the work will be uncovered. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Requirements for Structural Work: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that deviates from the methodology and details presented by the Architect. Any deviation from the plans needs prior approval by the Architect. B. Operational Limitations: Do not cut and patch operating elements or related components in a manner that would result in reducing their capacity to perfonn as intended. Do not cut and patch operating elements or related components in a manner that would result in increased maintenance or decreased operation life or safety. 1. Obtain written approval of the cutting and patching proposal before cutting and patching the following operating elements or safety related systems: a. Primary operational systems and equipment b. Air or smoke barriers c. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers d. Membranes and flashings e. Fire protection systems f. Control systems g. Communication systems h. Electrical wiring systems i. Operating systems of special construction in MEP work C. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in the Owner's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that would result in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Remove and replace construction which was cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner at no expense to the Owner. D. Waterproofing and Water Tightness: Do not cut or piece waterproofed walls or floors or any structural members without written permission of the Owner. 1. Waterproofing and Roofing Membranes a. Employ qualified contractors to accomplish all required cutting, patching, or repairing of existing waterproofing and roofing membranes. b. Before beginning cutting, patching or repairing of existing waterproofing and roofing membranes, obtain approval of all materials, methods and contractor to be used from the Owner and agency, or agencies, holding bond or guarantee/warranty in force for membrane. BIG RED BARN CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING 01 73 29-2 STRUCTURAL IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 2. Water Tightness a. The Contractor shall be responsible for water tightness of product, materials, and workmanship, including work specified to be watertight and inferred by general practice to be watertight. i. All floors (slabs), walls, roof, glazing, windows, doors, sleeves through foundation walls, flashings, and similar items shall be watertight. b. If details or materials shown or specified are felt not satisfactory to produce water tightness, the Contractor shall inform the Owner's Representative before installation and submit proposed substitution or alternative method for review and approval. The Contractor shall execute approved change and make watertight at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.4 WARRANTIES A. Replace, patch, and repair material and surfaces cut or damaged by methods and with materials in such a manner as not to void any warranties required or existing. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Comply with the Contract Documents for each product involved. B. Use materials identical to existing materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials whose installed performance will equal or surpass that of existing materials. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Inspect existing conditions of the Project, including elements subject to damage or to movement during: 1. Cutting and patching. 2. Excavation and backfilling. B. After uncovering work, inspect the conditions affecting the installation of products, or performance of the work. C. Report unsatisfactory or dubious conditions to the Architect in writing; do not proceed with the work until the Architect has provided further instructions. BIG RED BARN CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING 01 73 29-3 STRUCTURAL IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 3.2 PREPARATION A. Provide shoring, bracing and other support as necessary to assure the structural safety of that portion of the Work. Contractor shall adhere to the shoring plan outlined on the drawings using methodology presented. B. Provide devices and methods to protect other portions of the Project from damage. C. Provide for vertical and lateral support required to protect adjacent buildings and properties. D. Provide protection from the elements for that portion of the Project which may be exposed by cutting and patching work, including but not limited to pumping to maintain excavations free from water. E. Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas. F. Avoid cutting existing pipe, conduit, or ductwork serving the building but scheduled to be removed or relocated until provisions have been made to bypass them. 3.3 PERFORMANCE A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time and complete without delay. 1. Cut existing construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction activities and the subsequent fitting and patching required to restore surfaces to their original condition. B. Cutting: Cut existing construction using methods which will assure safety, will be least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction, and will provide proper surfaces to receive new work. 1. In general, where cutting, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. 2. To avoid marring existing finished surfaces, cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 3. Cut through concrete and masonry using a cutting machine, such as a carbon saw or a diamond-core drill. 4. Comply with the requirements of applicable MEP work where cutting and patching of services is required. C. Patching: Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with specified tolerances. BIG RED BARN CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING 0173 29-4 STRUCTURAL IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 1. Where feasible, inspect and test patched areas to demonstrate integrity of the installation. 2. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a mamer that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing. a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, apply primer and intennediate paint coats over patch and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces. 3. Refinish entire surfaces as necessary to provide an even finish to match adjacent finishes: a. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection. b. For an assembly, refinish the entire unit. 4. When patching existing plaster finished walls and partitions, the Contractor shall utilize plaster trim, lath and other metal components to match the integrity of the existing system. All plaster finishes shall match existing finishes so as to provide a uniform visual appearance. 5. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are demolished extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish color, texture, and appearance. a. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections of these Specifications. 6. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or re-hang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an even- plane surface of unifonn appearance. D. Repairs: Where repairs to existing surfaces are required, patch to produce surfaces suitable for new materials. I Completely fill holes and depressions in existing masonry walls that are to remain with an approved masonry patching material applied according to manufacturer's written recommendations. E. Execute excavating and backfilling by methods which will assure safety, will prevent settlement or damage to other work. F. Execute fitting and adjustment of products to provide a finished installation to comply with specified products, functions, tolerances and finishes. G. Restore work which has been cut or removed; install new products to provide completed work in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. BIG RED BARN CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING 01 7329-5 STRUCTURAL IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 H. The Contractor shall replace, repair and patch all surfaces of the ground and of any structure disturbed by its operations and its Work which surfaces and structures are intended to remain even if such operations and work are outside the property lines. Such replacement, repair and patching shall be with like material and shall restore surfaces as they existed. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean area and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar items. Thoroughly clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition. ***END OF SECTION 01 73 29*** BIG RED BARN CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING 01 7329-6 STRUCTURAL IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 CORNELL SECTION 01 77 00 Ithaca, New York PROJECT CLOSEOUT 1.1 INSPECTIONS A. When the Work has reached such a point of completion that the building or buildings, equipment and apparatus can be occupied and used for the purpose intended, the Owner's Representative shall make a detailed inspection of the Work to insure that all requirements of the Contract have been met and that the Work is complete and is acceptable. B. A copy of the report of the inspection shall be furnished to the Contractor as the inspection progresses so that the Contractor may proceed without delay with any part of the Work found to be incomplete or defective. C. When the items appearing on the report of inspection have been completed or corrected, the Contractor shall so advise the Owner's Representative. After receipt of this notification, the Owner's Representative shall inform the Contractor of the date and time of final inspection. A copy of the report of the final inspection containing all remaining contract exceptions, omissions and incomplete work shall be furnished to the Contractor. D. After receipt of notification of completion and all remaining contract exceptions, omissions and incomplete work from the Contractor, the Owner's Representative shall make an inspection to verify completion of the exception items appearing on the report of final inspection. 1.2 FINAL CLEAN UP A. Upon completion of the work covered by the Contract the Contractor shall leave the completed Project ready for use and occupancy without the need of further cleaning of any kind and with all Work in new condition and in perfect order. In addition, upon completion of all Work the Contractor shall remove from the vicinity of the Work all plant, buildings, rubbish, unused materials, concrete forms and other materials belonging to him or used under its direction during construction or impairing the use or appearance of the property and shall restore such areas affected by the work to their original condition, and, in the event of its failure to do so, the same shall be removed by the Owner at the expense of the Contractor, and the Contractor and/or its surety shall be liable therefore. Final clean-up shall include but not be limited to the following: 1. All finished surfaces shall be swept, dusted, washed and polished. This includes cleaning of the Work of all finishing trades where needed, whether or not cleaning by such trades is included in their respective sections of the specifications. 2. Roofs, utility tunnels, manholes and pipe trenches and spaces between the new and existing Work shall be left thoroughly cleaned. 3. All equipment shall be in an undamaged, bright, clean, polished and new appearing condition. 4. All new glass shall be washed and polished, both sides. The Contractor shall be responsible for all breakage of glass in the area of the Work from the commencement of its activities until the building is turned over to Owner. The Contractor shall replace all broken glass and deliver the entire building with all glazing intact and clean. BIG RED BARN STRUCTURAL PROJECT CLOSEOUT 01 7700-1 IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 5. Provide new filters for all fan convectors after final cleaning. 6. Refer to exterior clean up. Remove paint and glazing compound from surfaces. 7. All Fire Alarm Devices shall be cleaned and serviced. 1.3 MAINTENANCE STOCK A. Turn over to Owner's Representative the maintenance stock specified. Contractor shall obtain signed receipt from Owner's Representative for all maintenance stock. PART 2 -PRODUCTS -NOT USED PART 3 -EXECUTION -NOT USED **END OF SECTION 01 77 00*** BIG RED BARN STRUCTURAL PROJECT CLOSEOUT 01 7700-2 IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 CORNELL SECTION 01 78 22 Ithaca, New York INVENTORIES 1.1 FIXED EQUIPMENT INVENTORY A. The Owner shall provide the Contractor with a list of Equipment Types to be inventoried and an Excel template. B. The Contractor shall populate the template (see Example Equipment List to be inventoried in Section 1.2). Once populated, the Contractor shall electronically return to the list to the Owner's Representative. The initial data to be captured on each piece of equipment shall include: 1. Name of Product 2. Equipment Classification 3. Manufacturer 4. Model Number 5. Serial Number 6. Cost 7. Location (including Building and Room Number) 8. Acquisition Date (Date of Installation) C. The Owner shall from the Contractor provided data create a follow-up equipment Excel template that contains the MAXIMO ID for the equipment with all the name plate and specification fields for each type of equipment. This template shall then be returned to the Contractor. D. The Contractor shall be responsible for the initial labeling of the equipment and its disconnects with the MAXIMO ID using a electronic label maker. ID labels shall be in close proximity to Equipment Identification information, visually locatable from the access point to the equipment and on the face of disconnects. E. The Contractor shall then populate the MAXIMO Equipment Specification Template with the equipment nameplate, specification information, and warranty information. The Contractor shall electronically submit the equipment data and any related documentation (i.e. -O&M manuals) to the Owner's Representative. BIG RED BARN STRUCTURAL INVENTORIES 01 7822-1 IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 F. EXAMPLE EQUIPMENT LIST * Building Equipment * AC Drive/VSD * Air Dryer * Backflow Preventor * Air Compressor * Building * Sprinkler * Control * Vacuum * Pump o Condensate * Glycol * CWC * HWC o Potable * Sanitary Sewer * Storm Sewer o Sump * Quality Water * Fuel * Fan * Exhaust * Supply * Return * Fume Hood * Furnace * Generator o Hot Water Heater * Heat Exchangers * Boiler * Tank * Unit Heater * Fan Coil * VAV Box * Transfer Switch * Motor * Pump * Fan o Lift/Levelers * Water Softener * Reverse Osmosis BIG RED BARN STRUCTURAL INVENTORIES 01 7822-2 IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 1.2 ROOF SYSTEM INVENTORY A. The Owner shall provide the Contractor with a list of Roof System Attributes to be inventoried in an Excel template. (See Example in section 1.2) B. The Contractor shall provide a dimensioned roof plan of the facility drawn to scale, Auto CAD or Microstation fornat. Each roof panel of the roof system is to be labeled with a unique ROOF ID number that will reference the Excel template to properly inventory Roof System Attributes of each panel. Once populated, the Contractor shall electronically return to the drawings to the Owner's Representative for review and approval. 1. Entire Roof Replacement Projects for a Facility: The contractor is to assign a ROOF ID to each panel of the newly installed roofing system. The ROOF ID will be comprised of the unique Cornell Facility Code number followed by an underscore and a three digit number. (ie. Day Hall (Facility Code: 2026) -ROOF ID: 2006 001). 2. Partial Roof Replacement Projects for a Facility: The Owner will provide a graphically representation of the facility's roof plan with the ROOF ID numbers already assigned to each panel of the roof .The contractor is responsible to transfer the assigned ROOF ID numbers to their new drawings to be returned to the Owner's representatives. (See Example Roof Plan in section 1.3) C. The Contractor shall populate the template (see Example List to be inventoried in Section 1.2). Once populated, the Contractor shall electronically return the list to the Owner's Representative. The initial data to be captured on each panel of the newly installed roof system shall include: 1. Roof Classification 2. Manufacturer (If applicable) 3. Description of System 4. Roof Material 5. Installation Type 6. Slope of Roof (Low or Steep) 7. Roof ID (See Section 1.1 .B) for additional information 8. Area of Roof Panel (SF) 9. Contractor (Installer of Roof System) 10. Warranty Number (If applicable) 11. Warranty Expiration Date (If applicable) 12. Material Warranty Number (If applicable) BIG RED BARN STRUCTURAL INVENTORIES 01 78 22-3IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 13. Material Warranty Expiration Date (If applicable) 14. Asbestos Present (If any material remained in place during the reroofing project) 15. Insulation (Yes or No), Fastening type, Thickness 16. Flashing Material 17. Gutter Type (If applicable) 18. Downspout Type (If applicable) 19. Roof Drain Type (If Applicable) 20. Roofing Substrate 21. Facility (State or Endowed) 22. Vapor Barrier Type 23. Installation Date 24. Cost per Square Foot 25. Remaining Useful Life (RUL) 26. Type of Heat Trace Element (If applicable) 27. Type Snow Guard Systems (If applicable) 28. Additional Comments as Applicable D. The Contractor shall electronically submit the Roof System data as specified above and any related documentation (i.e. -O&M manuals and Warranty data) to the Owner's Representative. PART 2 -PRODUCTS -NOT USED PART 3 -EXECUTION -NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 78 22*** BIG RED BARN STRUCTURAL INVENTORIES 01 7822-4IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 CORNELL SECTION 01 78 23 Ithaca, New York OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA 1.1 GENERAL A. The Contractor shall compile product data and related information appropriate for Owner's maintenance and operation of products furnished under the Contract. 1. Prepare operating and maintenance data as specified in this Section, as referenced in other pertinent sections of Specifications and as necessary to operate the completed work. 2. Operations and maintenance data shall be available to the Owner at time of substantial completion. B. Instruct Owner's personnel in the maintenance of products and in the operation of equipment and systems. 1.2 FORM OF SUBMITTALS A. Prepare data in the form of an instructional manual and CD for use by Owner's personnel. B. Format: 1. Size: 8-1/2" x 1 1" and a CD with electronic files. 2. Text: Manufacturer's printed data, scanned .pdf and/or neatly typewritten Word file. 3. Drawings: a. Drawings are required in both hard copy and electronic format. b. Provide reinforced punched binder tab, bind in with text. c. Fold larger drawings to the size of the text pages. 4. Provide fly-leaf for each separate product, and major component parts of equipment. a. Provide type description of product, and major component parts of equipment. b. Provide indexed thumb tab. 5. Cover: Identify each volume with typed or printed title "OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS". List: a. Title of Project b. Identity of separate structure as applicable. c. Identity of general subject matter covered in the manual. BIG RED BARN OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA 0178 23-1 STRUCTURAL IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 C. Binders: I. Commercial quality three-ring binders with durable and cleanable plastic covers. 2. When multiple binders are used, correlate the data into related consistent groupings. 1.3 CONTENT OF MANUAL A. Neatly typewritten table of contents for each volume, arranged in a systematic order. I. Contractor, name of responsible principal, address and telephone number. 2. A list of each product required to be included, indexed to the content of the volume. 3. List, with each product, the name, address and telephone number of: a. Subcontract or installer. b. Maintenance contractor, as appropriate. c. Identify the area of responsibility of each. d. Local source of supply for parts and replacement. 4. Identify each product by product name and other identifying symbols as set forth in Contract Documents. B. Product Data: I. Include only those sheets which are pertinent to the specific product. 2. Annotate each sheet to: a. Clearly identify the specific product or part installed. b. Clearly identify the data applicable to the installation. c. Delete reference to inapplicable information. C. Drawings: I. Supplement product data with drawings as necessary to clearly illustrate: a. Relations of component parts of equipment and systems. b. Control and flow diagrams. 2. Coordinate drawings with information on Record Documents to assure correct illustration of completed installation. BIG RED BARN OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 7823-2 STRUCTURAL IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 3. Do not use Record Documents as maintenance drawings. D. Written text, as required to supplement product data for the particular installation: 1. Organize in a consistent fornat under separate headings for different procedures. 2. Provide a logical sequence of instructions for each procedure. E. Original copy of each warranty, bond and service contract issued. 1. Provide information sheet for Owner's personnel, give: a. Proper procedures in the event of failure. b. Instances which might affect the validity of warranties or bonds. 1.4 MANUAL FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES A. Submit a CD with electronic files and six (6) copies of complete manual in final form. B. Content, for architectural products, applied materials and finishes: 1. Manufacturer's data, giving full infornation on products: a. Catalog number, size, and composition. b. Color and texture designations. c. Information required for reordering special-manufactured products. 2. Instructions for care and maintenance: a. Manufacturer's recommendation for types of cleaning agents and methods. b. Cautions against cleaning agents and methods which are detrimental to the product. c. Recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance. C. Content, for moisture-protection and weather-exposed products: 1. Manufacturer's data, giving full information on products. a. Applicable standards b. Chemical composition c. Details of installation 2. Instructions for inspection, maintenance, and repair. BIG RED BARN OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23-3 STRUCTURAL IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 D. Additional requirements for maintenance data: The respective sections of Specifications. 1.5 MANUAL FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS A. Submit a CD with electronic files and six (6) copies of complete manual in final form. B. Content, for each unit of equipment and system, as appropriate: 1. Description of unit and component parts. a. Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. b. Perfonnance curves, engineering data and tests. c. Complete nomenclature and commercial number of all replaceable parts. 2. Operating procedures: a. Start-up, break-in, routine and normal operating instructions. b. Regulation, control, stopping, shut-down and emergency instructions. c. Summer and winter operating instructions. d. Special operating instructions. 3. Maintenance Procedures: a. Routine operations. b. Guide to "trouble-shooting". c. Disassembly, repair and reassembly. d. Alignment, adjusting and checking. 4. Servicing and lubrication required: a. List of lubricants required. 5. Manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions. 6. Description of sequence of operation by control manufacturer. 7. Original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings and diagrams required for maintenance. a. Predicted life of parts subject to wear. b. Items recommended to be stocked as spare parts. BIG RED BARN OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823-4 STRUCTURAL IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 8. As-installed control diagrams by controls manufacturer. 9. Each contractor's coordination drawings. a. As-installed color coded piping diagrams. 10. Charts of valve tag numbers, with the location and function of each valve. 11. List of original manufacturer's spare parts, manufacturer's current prices, and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage. 12. Other data as required under pertinent sections of Specifications. C. Content, for each electric and electronic system, as appropriate: 1. Description of system and component parts: a. Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. b. Performance curves, engineering data and tests. c. Complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts. 2. Circuit directories of panelboards: a. Electrical service. b. Controls. c. Communications. 3. As-installed color coded wiring diagrams. 4. Operating procedures: a. Routine and normal operating instructions. b. Sequences required. c. Special operating instructions. 5. Maintenance procedures: a. Routine operations. b. Guide to "trouble-shooting". c. Disassembly, repair and reassembly. d. Adjustment and checking. BIG RED BARN OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 7823-5 STRUCTURAL IMPROVEMENTS Januay 17, 2014 6. Manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions. 7. List of original manufacturer's spare parts, manufacturer's current prices, and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage. 8. Other data as required under pertinent sections of Specifications. D. Additional requirements for operations and maintenance data: See the respective sections of Specifications and General Conditions. 1.6 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE A. Submit two (2) copies of preliminary draft of proposed formats and outlines of contents sixty (60) calendar days prior to acceptance. 1. Architect will review draft and return one copy (1) with comments. B. Submit one copy (1) of completed data in final form twenty (20) calendar days prior to final acceptance. I. Copy will be returned with comments. C. Submit specified number of copies of approved data in final form prior to final acceptance. 1.7 INSTRUCTIONS OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL A. Prior to final inspections or acceptance, fully instruct Owner's designated operating and maintenance personnel in the operation, adjustment and maintenance of all products, equipment and systems: 1. Instruction time shall be sufficient to fully instruct all shifts of the Owner's operating and maintenance personnel. B. Operations and maintenance shall constitute the basis of instruction: 1. Review contents of manual with personnel in full detail to explain all aspects of operations and maintenance. C. Submit typewritten statement, signed by each of Owner's Representatives who have been instructed, describing: 1. Method of hIstruction. 2. Equipment and Systems Operated. 3. Length of Instruction Period. D. Contractor is fully responsible until final acceptance, even though operated by Owner's personnel, unless otherwise agreed in writing. BIG RED BARN OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23-6 STRUCTURAL IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 1.8 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A. List under clear plastic (1/8" thick) all operating, maintenance and starting precautions and procedures to be followed by Owner for operating all systems and equipment. PART 2 -PRODUCTS -NOT USED PART 3 -EXECUTION -NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 78 23*** BIG RED BARN OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23-7 STRUCTURAL IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 CORNELL SECTION 01 78 36 Ithaca, New York WARRANTIES AND BONDS 1.1 GENERAL The Contractor shall: A. Compile specified warranties and bonds. B. Compile specified service and maintenance contracts. C. Co-execute submittals when so specified. D. Review submittals to verify compliance with Contract Documents. E. Submit to Architect for transmittal to Owner. 1.2 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Assemble warranties, bonds and service and maintenance contracts, executed by each of the respective manufacturers, suppliers and subcontractors. B. Number of original copies required: Two (2) each. C. Table of Contents: Neatly typed, in orderly sequence. Provide complete information for each item. 1. Product or work item. 2. Firm, with name of principal, address and telephone number. 3. Scope. 4. Date of beginning of warranty, bond or service and maintenance contract. 5. Duration. 6. Provide information for Owner's personnel: a. Proper procedure in case of failure. b. Instances which might affect the validity of warranty or bond. 7. Contractor, name of responsible principal, address and telephone number. 1.3 FORM OF SUBMITTALS A. Prepare in duplicate packets. B. Format: BIG RED BARN WARRANTIES AND BONDS 01 7836-1 STRUCTURAL IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 1. Size 8-1/2 in. x 11 in., punch sheets for 3-ring binder. a. Fold larger sheets to fit binders. 2. Cover: Identify each packet with typed or printed title "WARRANTIES AND BONDS". List: a. Title of Project b. Name of Contractor C. Binders: Commercial quality, three-ring, with durable and cleanable plastic covers. 1.4 TIME OF SUBMITTALS A. Make final submittals within ten (10) days after Date of Substantial Completion, prior to final request for payment. B. For items of work when acceptance is delayed materially beyond the Date of Substantial Completion, provide updated submittal within ten days after acceptance, listing the date of acceptance as the start of the warranty period. 1.5 SUBMITTALS REQUIRED A. Submit warranties, bonds, and service and maintenance contracts as specified in the respective sections of Specifications. PART 2 -PRODUCTS -NOT USED PART 3 -EXECUTION -NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 78 36*** BIG RED BARN WARRANTIES AND BONDS 017836-2 STRUCTURAL IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 CORNELL SECTION 01 78 39 Ithaca, New York RECORD DOCUMENTS 1.1 GENERAL A. The Contractor shall maintain at the site, during construction, one record copy of: 1. Drawings 2. Specifications 3. Addenda 4. Change Orders and other Modifications to the Contract 5. Architect's Field Orders or written instructions. 6. Final Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples 7. Field Test records 8. Construction photographs 1.2 MAINTENANCE OF DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES A. Store documents and samples in Contractor's field office apart from documents used for construction. 1. Provide files and racks for storage of documents. 2. Provide cabinet or storage space for storage of samples. B. File documents and samples in accordance with Data Filing Format of the Uniform Construction Index. C. Maintain documents in a clean, dry, legible condition and in good order. Do not use record documents for construction purposes. D. Make documents and samples available at all times for review by the Owner's Representative and the Architect. 1.3 RECORDING A. Label each document "PROJECT RECORD" in neat large printed letters. B. Record information concurrently with construction progress. 1. Do not conceal any work until required information is recorded. BIG RED BARN STRUCTURAL RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 7839-1 IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 C. Drawings Record drawings shall consist of making any changes neatly and clearly on the Contract Drawings using colored ink or pencil, and the construction record drawings shall be kept current on a day-to-day basis in concert with the progress of the work. Where applicable, the change marked on a drawing is to cary the notation "per Change Order No. X", or similar reference which cites the reason for the change. The day-to-day construction record drawings shall be made available to the Architect or Owner's Representative for review upon request. The "Record" drawings shall show the following information: 1. all significant changes in plan, sections, elevations and details, such as shifts in location of walls, doors, windows, stairs and the like made during construction; 2. all significant changes in foundations, columns, beams, openings, concrete reinforcing, lintels, concealed anchorages and "knock-out" panels made during construction; 3. final location of electric signal system panels, final arrangement of all circuits and any significant changes made in electrical signal system design as a result of Change Order or job conditions; 4. final location and arrangement of all mechanical equipment and concealed gas, sprinkler, domestic, sanitary and drainage systems piping and other plumbing, including, but not limited to, supply and circulating mains, principal valves, meters, clean-outs, drains, pumps and controls, vent stacks, sanitary and storm water drainage; and 5. final location and arrangement of all underground utilities, connections to building and/or rerouting of existing utilities, including, but not limited to, sanitary, storm, heating, electric, signal, gas, water and telephone.. 6. Final topographic contours of finished earth surfaces, finished grades, streets, etc. 7. Additions to project, elimination of project components, relocation of components. D. Specifications and Addenda Legibly mark each section to record: 1. Manufacturer, trade name, catalog number, and Supplier of each product and item of equipment actually installed. 2. Changes made by Field Order or by Change Order. BIG RED BARN STRUCTURAL RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 7839-2 IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 1.4 SUBMITTAL A. At Contract close-out, deliver all record documents to the Owner's Representative. B. Accompany submittal with transmittal letter in duplicate, containing: 1. Date 2. Project title and number 3. Contractor's name and address 4. Title and number of each record document 5. Certification that each document is complete and accurate 6. Signature of Contractor or its authorized representative. PART 2 -PRODUCTS -NOT USED PART 3 -EXECUTION -NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 78 39*** BIG RED BARN STRUCTURAL RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 7839-3 IMPROVEMENTS January 17, 2014 BIG RED BARN STRUCTURAL IMPROVEMENTS TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 1 Instructions to Bidders Bid Form General Conditions and Exhibits Exhibit A Change Order Exhibit A-I Change Order Documentation Instructions Construction Contract Change Order Request Construction Contract Change Order Summary Exhibit B Schedule of Values for Contractor Payments Exhibit C Final Release Exhibit D Application and Certificate for Payment Exhibit E Guarantee Exhibit F -Form I Contractor's Affirmative Action Plan Use of MBE/WBE Vendors Exhibit F -Form II Contractor's Affirmative Action Plan Summary of Bid Activity with MBE and WBE Subcontractors and Vendors Exhibit F -Forn III Affirmative Action Workforce Report Exhibit F -Form IV Minority -Women Utilization Report Exhibit G Labor Rate Breakdown Exhibit H Stored Materials Invoicing Documentation Exhibit I Contractor Performance Evaluation DIVISION 1 -GENERAL REOUIREMENTS Section 01 11 00 Summary of the Work Section 01 22 00 Unit Pricing Section 01 23 00 Alternates Section 01 25 00 Substitutions and Product Options Section 01 31 19 Project Meetings Section 01 32 16 Construction Schedules Section 01 32 33 Photographic Documentation Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures Section 01 35 29 General Health & Safety Requirements Section 01 35 43 General Environmental Requirements Section 01 35 44 Spill Control Section 01 41 00 Regulatory Requirements Section 01 45 00 Quality Control Section 01 45 29 Testing Laboratory Services Section 01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls Section 01 51 00 Temporary Utilities Section 01 57 13 Soil Erosion and Sediment Control Section 01 66 00 Storage and Protection Section 01 73 29 Cutting, Patching and Repairing Section 01 77 00 Project Close Out Section 01 78 22 Inventories Section 01 78 23 Operating and Maintenance Data Section 01 78 36 Warranties and Bonds Section 01 78 39 Record Documents January 17, 2014 BIG RED BARN STRUCTURAL IMPROVEMENTS TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 2 DIVISION 2 -EXISTING CONDITIONS Section 02 41 19 Selective Demolition DIVISION 3 -CONCRETE Section 03 30 00 Cast-in-Place Concrete DIVISION 4 -MASONRY Section 04 21 13 Maintenance of Exterior Masonry DIVISION 5 -METALS Section 05 12 00 Structural Steel Framing DIVISION 6 -WOOD AND PLASTIC Section 06 10 00 Rough Carpentry Section 06 10 15 Roof Carpentry Section 06 16 00 Sheathing Section 06 46 00 Wood Trim DIVISION 7 -THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION Section 07 01 50 Preparation for Reroofing Section 07 21 00 Thermal Insulation Section 07 31 13 Asphalt Shingle Roof Section 07 60 00 Flashing and Sheet Metal DIVISION 8 -DOORS AND WINDOWS Section 08 03 52 Historic Treatment of Wood Windows DIVISION 9 -FINISHES Section 09 22 16 Non-Structural Metal Framing Section 09 90 00 Paintings and Coatings DIVISION 31 -EARTHWORK Section 31 20 20 Earth Moving Section 31 62 25 Micropiles January 17, 2014